PTC Global Services

I
I
n
n
t
t
r
r
o
o
d
d
u
u
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
t
t
o
o
P
P
r
r
o
o
/
/
E
E
N
N
G
G
I
I
N
N
E
E
E
E
R
R
Release 2001
T779-320-03
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Copyright
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
Copyright © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
This Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Training Guide may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced
to any form, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means,
electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance.
User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of
such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this
documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license
agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and
any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or
reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the
prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should
not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND
CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary: Advanced Surface Design, CADDS,
CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN,
Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER,
Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, Windchill, and the InPart logo.
Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, BOMBOT, CDRS, CounterPart, CV, CVact, CVaec,
CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DVS,
DVSAFEWORK, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, e-Series, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker,
Flexible Engineering, ICEM, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, i-Series, ISSM, MEDEA, ModelCHECK,
NC Builder, Nitidus, PARTBOT, PartSpeak, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING,
Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST,
Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY,
Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN,Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK,
Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM,
Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER,
Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT,
Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL,
Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator,
PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Virtual Design Environment,
Windchill e-Catalog, Windchill e-Series, Windchill ProjectLink, CV-Computervision logo, DIVISION logo, and
ICEM logo.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Copyright
Third-Party Trademarks
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Metaphase is a registered trademark of Metaphase Technology Inc.
Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. Unigraphics is a registered trademark of EDS Corp. I-DEAS is a
registered trademark of SDRC. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of Solidworks Corp. Matrix One is a trademark of
Matrix One Software. SHERPA is a registered trademark of Inso Corp. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk,
Inc. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systems. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. IRIX
is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3
are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc.
Rational Rose 2000E, is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software
of Excalibur Technologies Corporation. VisualCafé is copyrighted software of WebGain, Inc. VisTools library is
copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI.
HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All other
brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to
FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limited
commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the
Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at
FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, Massachusetts 02494 USA
© 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. Unpublished – all rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United
States.
PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
T779-320-01 05/18/01 Initial Printing of Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
for Release 2001
T779-320-02 08/15/01 Revisions to Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for Release 2001
T779-320-03 11/08/01 Revisions to Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for Release 2001
Order Number DT-779-320-EN
Printed in U.S.A
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Prec|s|on Learn|ng
ThE PRE6|8|0N LEARN|NC HETh000L0CY
PTC Global Services is dedicated to continually providing the student with an eIIective,
comprehensive learning experience. Toward this goal, PTC developed Precision Learning,
which matches the right training to the right people at the right time using the right
method.
Precision Learning is based on a three stage Learn-Assess-Improve methodology.
Stage 1: LEARN
The student attends a PTC training course, including any:
• Instructor-led training course at a PTC training center.
• On-site training course.
• Customized training course.
• Web-based training (WBT) course.
Stage 2: ASSESS
The impact oI a training course is assessed using the Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator. The
Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator is a web-based skills assessment and development-planning
tool. It is designed to deliver inIormation that will help improve the skills and productivity
oI the student.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Prec|s|on Learn|ng
Stage 3: IMPROVE
The Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator Iindings enable customers to identiIy areas Ior
improvement. The training wizard will direct customers to the appropriate class based on
their job responsibilities.
Customers have access to a range oI resources that include:
• Internal and external user groups
• PTC technical support resources
• Web-based courses and lessons
60NT|NU0U8 |HPR0VEHENT
The Precision Learning methodology provides a continuous cycle oI knowledge expansion
and improvement.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Prec|s|on Learn|ng
PRE6|8|0N LEARN|NC |N ThE 6LA88R00H
The Learn-Assess-Improve Precision Learning methodology is also implemented in
selected PTC instructor-led courses. Throughout the class, students will take
Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator assessments to evaluate their own comprehension. The group
results are also used to identiIy areas Ior the instructor to review with the class as a whole.
At the end oI the class, each student will complete an Education Circuit Iorm. This
Education Circuit is the student's action plan, identiIying topics Ior improvement, as well
as the steps to take in order to enhance the skills in those areas.
The following pages proviae a sample Eaucation Circuit action plan, ana a blank action
plan. Instructions for using the Eaucation Circuit action plan will be aiscussea in the
course.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Prec|s|on Learn|ng
E0U6AT|0N 6|R6U|T EXAHPLE
The following is an example of a stuaent´s Eaucation Circuit at the ena of the Introduction
to Pro/EACIAEER training class.
Pro|F|6|EN6Y Eva|uator Exam Resu|ts
AIter reviewing the results oI the Evaluator exams Ior this course, the Iollowing lists the
questions I answered incorrectly and need to research Iurther:
Question Improve Action
Weak and strong dimensions Practice creating simple Ieatures with the desired
dimensioning scheme.
Web Lesson Dimensioning Scheme
DraIt Eeatures See colleague at work Ior advice and product
examples.
ConIiguration Iile options Consult company user group Ior guidelines.
6|ass Eva|uat|on Form Top|cs
AIter reviewing the questions on the class Evaluation Iorm, the Iollowing lists the topics I
need to research Iurther:
Objective Improve Action
Setting up the deIault view oI a part Practice on simple parts using diIIerent
sketching planes and reIerence planes.
Creating sweeps Web Lesson Swept Forms
Resolve Mode Create some simple models and make them Iail.
Resolve Mode Web lesson Resolve Moae
Future 6ourses
AIter reviewing the Role Based Training guidelines, the Iollowing lists the courses
recommended to improve my skills and enhance my job perIormance:
Next Courses Next Courses
Eundamentals oI Design
Designing with SurIaces
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Prec|s|on Learn|ng
Pro|F|6|EN6Y Eva|uator Exam Resu|ts
AIter reviewing the results oI the Evaluator exams Ior this course, the Iollowing lists the
questions I answered incorrectly and need to research Iurther:
Question Improve Action
6|ass Eva|uat|on Form Top|cs
AIter reviewing the questions on the class Evaluation Iorm, the Iollowing lists the topics I
need to research Iurther:
Objective Improve Action
Future 6ourses
AIter reviewing the Role Based Training guidelines, the Iollowing lists the courses
recommended to improve my skills and enhance my job perIormance:
Next Courses Next Courses
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Training Agenda
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
Day 1 Day 4
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Principles of Top-Down Design
The Pro/ENGINEER Interface Additional Datum Features and Skeletons
Pick-and-Place Features Layers and Suppression
Sketcher Basics Creating Surfaces with Freeform
Sketched Features
Day 2 Day 5
Default Datum Templates The Resolve Environment
Parent/Child Relationships Information Tools
Sweeps and Blends Configuring Pro/ENGINEER
Relations and Parameters Modeling Philosophy
Day 3
Appendix A: Review Questions
Behavioral Modeling Appendix B: Project Laboratory
Drawings and Drawing Templates Appendix C: Precision Learning
Duplication Features: Patterns and Copy Appendix D: PTC Help
Creating Assemblies Appendix E: Technical Support
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
The following is a list of telephone and fax numbers you may find useful:
Education Services Registration in North America
Tel: (888)-782-3773
Fax: (781) 370-5553
Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5650
License Management
Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5795
Contracts
Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)
In addition, you can find the PTC home page on the World Wide Web can be found
at: http://www.ptc.com. The Web site contains the latest training schedules,
registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions, as
well as information on PTC, the Pro/ENGINEER product line, Consulting Services,
Customer Support, and Pro/PARTNERS.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Table of Contents
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
INTRODUCTION TO PRO/ENGINEER 1-1
PRO/ENGINEER CORE CONCEPTS........................................................................ 1-2
Solid Modeling Benefits .................................................................................................................1-2
Designing Feature-based Models ..................................................................................................1-3
Designing with Parametric Features .............................................................................................1-4
Taking Advantage of Associativity...............................................................................................1-5
THE PRO/ENGINEER INTERFACE 2-1
ELEMENTS OF THE INTERFACE........................................................................... 2-2
The Base Window............................................................................................................................2-2
Accessing Commands with Pull-Down Menus ..........................................................................2-2
Accessing Frequently-used Commands with the Toolbar.........................................................2-3
Manipulating Your Designs in the Display Area........................................................................2-3
Viewing Information in the Message Area..................................................................................2-4
WORKING WITH MODELS..................................................................................... 2-4
Working with Dialog Boxes...........................................................................................................2-5
Retrieving Models ............................................................................................................................2-6
Using the Model Tree......................................................................................................................2-7
Using the Menu Manager...............................................................................................................2-8
Obtaining Additional Information with Help ..............................................................................2-8
Retrieving Multiple Models ...........................................................................................................2-8
Working with Multiple Sub-Windows .........................................................................................2-8
Saving Changes ................................................................................................................................2-9
Closing Windows...........................................................................................................................2-10
Deleting Files ..................................................................................................................................2-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL................................................................................. 2-11
EXERCISE 1: Using the Pro/ENGINEER Environment ........................................................2-12
EXERCISE 2: Manipulating Model Size and Orientation......................................................2-15
EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Model Tree.............................................................................2-18
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise..............................................................................................2-21
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 2-25
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES 3-1
DEFINING PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES ............................................................ 3-2
Generic Method of Creation........................................................................................................... 3-2
Shell Features ................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Creating Edge Chamfers................................................................................................................. 3-3
Creating Simple Rounds................................................................................................................. 3-3
Specifying Radius Values for Simple Rounds ........................................................................... 3-5
Hole Features.................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Creating the Straight Hole Feature................................................................................................ 3-6
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................3-10
EXERCISE 1: Shell and Automatic Round Features.............................................................. 3-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating Chamfers and Rounds ....................................................................... 3-14
EXERCISE 3: Exploring the Straight Hole Feature ................................................................ 3-21
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise............................................................................................. 3-29
MODULE SUMMARY............................................................................................3-31
SKETCHER BASICS 4-1
THE SKETCHER INTERFACE ................................................................................ 4-2
The Intent Manager......................................................................................................................... 4-3
Accessing Commands with Pop-Up Menus................................................................................ 4-3
THE SKETCHER MODE.......................................................................................... 4-4
Accessing Commands with Sketcher Menus.............................................................................. 4-4
Specifying References .................................................................................................................... 4-5
Creating Geometry........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Dimensioning Sketches .................................................................................................................. 4-7
Adding Constraints.......................................................................................................................... 4-9
Other Sketcher Tools ....................................................................................................................... 4-9
Setting Sketcher Preferences ....................................................................................................... 4-13
TAKING ADVANTAGE OF SKETCHER MODE....................................................4-14
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................4-17
Goal.................................................................................................................................................. 4-17
Method............................................................................................................................................. 4-17
Tools ................................................................................................................................................ 4-17
EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics ................................................................................................. 4-18
EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps .............................................................................................. 4-24
EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon.......................................................................................... 4-31
MODULE SUMMARY............................................................................................4-34
SKETCHED FEATURES 5-1
DEFINING SKETCHED FEATURES........................................................................ 5-2
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sketching Cuts and Protrusions.....................................................................................................5-2
USING THE SKETCHER TOOLS............................................................................. 5-5
Dimensioning Sections ...................................................................................................................5-5
LABORATORY PRACTICAL................................................................................. 5-10
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cut ......................................................................................................5-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Protrusion..........................................................................................5-20
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 5-24
DEFAULT DATUM TEMPLATES 6-1
USING DATUM PLANES AS BASE FEATURES..................................................... 6-2
Base Features ....................................................................................................................................6-2
Defining a Datum Plane..................................................................................................................6-2
Using a Default Datum as the Base Feature ................................................................................6-2
Creating Datum Planes....................................................................................................................6-3
Creating Internal Datum Planes.....................................................................................................6-3
LABORATORY PRACTICAL................................................................................... 6-4
EXERCISE 1: Creating a New Part ..............................................................................................6-5
EXERCISE 2: Creating an Internal Datum Plane ....................................................................6-11
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 6-15
PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS 7-1
PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS IN PRO/ENGINEER......................................... 7-2
Pick-and-Place Feature Parent/Child Relationships ..................................................................7-2
Sketched Feature Parent/Child Relationships.............................................................................7-2
LABORATORY PRACTICAL................................................................................... 7-8
EXERCISE 1: Using Feature Reroute..........................................................................................7-9
EXERCISE 2: Using Feature Redefine......................................................................................7-14
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 7-20
SWEEPS AND BLENDS 8-1
SWEEP AND TRAJECTORIES................................................................................. 8-2
Creating Sweeps and Trajectories .................................................................................................8-2
Creating Parallel Blends .................................................................................................................8-3
LABORATORY PRACTICAL................................................................................... 8-7
EXERCISE 1: Creating Parallel Blend Features ........................................................................8-8
EXERCISE 2: Create a Simple Sweep Protrusion...................................................................8-14
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 8-17
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS 9-1
RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS.......................................................................... 9-2
Parametric Relations ....................................................................................................................... 9-2
Representing Relations: Types and Symbols .............................................................................. 9-4
Incorporating Your Design Intent Using Relations ................................................................... 9-4
Order of Relations ........................................................................................................................... 9-6
Design Changes ............................................................................................................................... 9-8
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................. 9-9
EXERCISE 1: Creating Relations .............................................................................................. 9-10
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parameters for Feature-Control........................................................ 9-15
MODULE SUMMARY............................................................................................9-18
BEHAVIORAL MODELING 10-1
BEHAVIORAL MODELING...................................................................................10-2
Behavioral Modeling Features..................................................................................................... 10-2
USING BEHAVIORAL MODELER.........................................................................10-4
Defining the Behavioral Modeler Components ........................................................................ 10-8
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ............................................................................... 10-13
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Datum Analysis Feature to Measure Mass Properties ............10-14
EXERCISE 2: Analyze Fluid Volume in a Cup.....................................................................10-20
EXERCISE 3: Crankshaft Optimization..................................................................................10-26
MODULE SUMMARY.......................................................................................... 10-36
DRAWINGS AND DRAWING TEMPLATES 11-1
DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS...............................................................................11-2
Creating a Drawing........................................................................................................................ 11-2
Adding Drawing Views ................................................................................................................ 11-2
Types of Views............................................................................................................................... 11-2
Using the View Type Menu......................................................................................................... 11-3
Adding a Cross-section................................................................................................................. 11-4
Manipulating Views ...................................................................................................................... 11-5
DEFINING DRAWING TEMPLATES .....................................................................11-6
DETAILING THE DRAWING.................................................................................11-7
Creating Feature Dimensions ...................................................................................................... 11-8
Creating Driven Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 11-8
Manipulating Dimensions............................................................................................................ 11-8
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ............................................................................... 11-10
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing...........................................................................................11-11
EXERCISE 2: Modifying Created Views and Testing for Associativity ..........................11-17
EXERCISE 3: Detailing the Gear Part Drawing....................................................................11-20
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 11-24
DUPLICATING FEATURES: PATTERNS AND COPY 12-1
CREATING PATTERNS......................................................................................... 12-2
Patterning Benefits.........................................................................................................................12-2
Pattern Types ..................................................................................................................................12-2
Pattern Options...............................................................................................................................12-3
COPYING FEATURES........................................................................................... 12-7
Specifying Copy-To Locations....................................................................................................12-8
Copying Methods...........................................................................................................................12-8
Specifying Copied Feature Dependencies .................................................................................12-9
Choosing Features to Copy ........................................................................................................12-10
Specifying Dependency Options ...............................................................................................12-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL............................................................................... 12-12
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Dimension Pattern..............................................12-13
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Reference Pattern ...........................................................................12-15
EXERCISE 3: Creating Rotational Patterns of Sketched Features .....................................12-18
EXERCISE 4: Copying Features ..............................................................................................12-22
EXERCISE 5: Building the Steering Column .........................................................................12-24
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 12-28
CREATING ASSEMBLIES 13-1
OVERVIEW........................................................................................................... 13-2
The Surface Normal Vector..........................................................................................................13-2
Constraining Component Parts ....................................................................................................13-3
Placing Components......................................................................................................................13-6
Packaging Under-Constrained Components .............................................................................13-7
MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES................................................................................... 13-7
Modifying Your Design Intent ....................................................................................................13-8
OTHER ASSEMBLY OPTIONS.............................................................................. 13-8
Generating Bills of Material.........................................................................................................13-8
Creating Exploded Views .............................................................................................................13-9
LABORATORY PRACTICAL............................................................................... 13-10
EXERCISE 1: Create a Subassembly of Three Parts ............................................................13-11
Exercise 2: Create the Machine Assembly ..............................................................................13-18
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 13-22
PRINCIPLES OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN 14-1
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................... 14-2
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Definition......................................................................................................................................... 14-2
Stages of Top-Down Design........................................................................................................ 14-2
The Approach................................................................................................................................. 14-2
Comparing Top-Down Design to Traditional Approaches .................................................... 14-3
Benefits of Top-Down Design Methodology ........................................................................... 14-4
THE SIX STEPS OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN..............................................................14-4
Step 1 - Defining Design Intent................................................................................................... 14-5
Step 2 - Defining Preliminary Product Structure ..................................................................... 14-5
Step 3 - Skeleton Models ............................................................................................................. 14-5
Step 4 - Communicating Design Intent...................................................................................... 14-6
Step 5 - Continued Population of the Assembly....................................................................... 14-6
Step 6 - Managing Part Interdependencies................................................................................ 14-6
PRO/ENGINEER TOP-DOWN DESIGN TOOLS .....................................................14-7
Layouts ............................................................................................................................................ 14-7
Skeletons......................................................................................................................................... 14-8
Data Sharing Features .................................................................................................................14-10
Managing References / Interdependencies..............................................................................14-12
MODULE SUMMARY.......................................................................................... 14-15
ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES AND SKELETONS 15-1
ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES.......................................................................15-2
Datum Axes .................................................................................................................................... 15-2
Datum Curves................................................................................................................................. 15-2
Datum Points .................................................................................................................................. 15-3
Datum Coordinate Systems .......................................................................................................... 15-4
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................15-5
EXERCISE 1: Creating Additional Datum Features............................................................... 15-6
EXERCISE 2: Creating a simple skeleton ................................................................................ 15-9
EXERCISE 3: The Link Skeleton in an assembly .................................................................15-14
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: The Vice Grip .............................................................................15-16
MODULE SUMMARY.......................................................................................... 15-19
LAYERS AND SUPPRESSION 16-1
DEFINING LAYERS...............................................................................................16-2
Functionality................................................................................................................................... 16-2
Working With Layers.................................................................................................................... 16-2
CREATING LAYERS..............................................................................................16-3
Selecting the Object....................................................................................................................... 16-3
Creating Layers .............................................................................................................................. 16-4
Associating Items to a Layer........................................................................................................ 16-4
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Setting the Display Status of a Layer..........................................................................................16-5
Manipulating Layer Display Status ............................................................................................16-7
SUPPRESSION FUNCTIONALITY........................................................................ 16-8
Using Suppression .........................................................................................................................16-8
Suppressing Parent/Child Relationships....................................................................................16-9
Saving and Resuming Suppressed Features ..............................................................................16-9
LABORATORY PRACTICAL............................................................................... 16-10
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers in Part Mode..............................................................................16-11
EXERCISE 2: Using Layers in Assembly Mode ...................................................................16-14
EXERCISE 3: Suppressing in Part Mode................................................................................16-20
EXERCISE 4: Suppressing Components in Assembly Mode..............................................16-22
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 16-26
CREATING SURFACES WITH FREEFORM 17-1
DESIGNING WITH INTERACTIVE SURFACES.................................................... 17-2
THE STYLE FEATURE.......................................................................................... 17-2
HYBRID MODELING............................................................................................ 17-3
CREATING SURFACES WITH ISDX..................................................................... 17-4
Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves ......................................................................................................17-4
Using COS.......................................................................................................................................17-6
Creating Styling Models ...............................................................................................................17-6
Creating Freeform Surfaces with Parametric Controls ............................................................17-7
Creating Blends and Transitions .................................................................................................17-8
Applying Style Surfaces to Engineering Models ......................................................................17-8
Reverse Styling...............................................................................................................................17-9
CREATING STYLE SURFACES............................................................................. 17-9
LABORATORY PRACTICAL............................................................................... 17-10
EXERCISE 1: Interrogating the STYLE Interface.................................................................17-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Handle on the Flashlight...............................................................17-16
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 17-23
THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT 18-1
REGENERATION FAILURES................................................................................ 18-2
Starting the Resolve Environment...............................................................................................18-2
Resolving Regeneration Failures.................................................................................................18-2
LABORATORY PRACTICAL................................................................................. 18-6
EXERCISE 1: Resolving a Regeneration Failure.....................................................................18-6
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 18-10
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
INFORMATION TOOLS 19-1
MODEL INFORMATION........................................................................................19-2
Obtaining Information about a Specific Feature....................................................................... 19-2
Obtaining Regeneration Information.......................................................................................... 19-2
Accessing Information about Part Features .............................................................................. 19-2
Obtaining Information about Assemblies .................................................................................. 19-3
MEASUREMENT, INTERFERENCE, AND MASS PROPERTIES ...........................19-3
Calculating Mass Properties ........................................................................................................ 19-3
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................19-5
EXERCISE 1: Using Information Tools .................................................................................... 19-5
MODULE SUMMARY............................................................................................19-9
CONFIGURING PRO/ENGINEER 20-1
CUSTOMIZING PRO/ENGINEER...........................................................................20-2
Defining Configuration Files ....................................................................................................... 20-2
Creating Mapkeys.......................................................................................................................... 20-4
CUSTOMIZING YOUR TOOLBAR.........................................................................20-5
Adding Icons to Existing Toolbars ............................................................................................. 20-5
Creating Pull-down Menus .......................................................................................................... 20-6
THE MODEL TREE................................................................................................20-7
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ............................................................................... 20-10
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up a Configuration File......................................................................20-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Mapkey............................................................................................20-16
MODULE SUMMARY.......................................................................................... 20-19
MODELING PHILOSOPHY 21-1
DESIGN INTENT....................................................................................................21-2
Recording Your Design Criteria.................................................................................................. 21-3
Using Pro/ENGINEER as a Parametric Tool............................................................................ 21-3
Creating Parent/Child Relationships.......................................................................................... 21-3
Advantages of Pro/ENGINEER Associativity ......................................................................... 21-4
Changing Design Intent ................................................................................................................ 21-5
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................21-6
Part I: Part Level Design Intent ................................................................................................... 21-6
Part II: Assembly level Design Intent ......................................................................................21-10
Decision Process Questionnaire ................................................................................................21-10
MODULE SUMMARY.......................................................................................... 21-13
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
REVIEW QUESTIONS A-1
DAY 1: REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................ A-2
DAY 2: REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................ A-6
DAY 3: REVIEW QUESTIONS.............................................................................. A-10
DAY 4: REVIEW QUESTIONS.............................................................................. A-14
DAY 5: REVIEW QUESTIONS.............................................................................. A-17
PROJECT LABORATORY B-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... B-2
PART CREATION................................................................................................... B-3
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Part ......................................................................................... B-3
SECTION 2: Creating the Lower Housing Part ......................................................................... B-5
SECTION 3: Creating the Snap Ring Part .................................................................................. B-9
SECTION 4: Creating the Upper Housing Part .......................................................................B-11
CREATING ASSEMBLIES.................................................................................... B-18
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Assembly.............................................................................B-18
SECTION 2: Concurrent Design of the Motor Housing........................................................B-22
SECTION 3: Creating the Blower Assembly...........................................................................B-23
SECTION 4: Creating the Motor Part Drawing.......................................................................B-26
INTERROGATING YOUR MODELS..................................................................... B-29
SECTION 1: Designing the Cover Part.....................................................................................B-30
SECTION 2: Completing the Motor Part ..................................................................................B-34
SECTION 3: Completing the Blower Assembly .....................................................................B-36
SECTION 4: Completing the Motor Assembly .......................................................................B-40
COMPLETING THE PROJECT.............................................................................. B-43
SECTION 1: Developing the Motor Part ..................................................................................B-43
SECTION 2: Finishing the Lower Housing.............................................................................B-45
SECTION 3: Completing the Drawing .....................................................................................B-47
USING THE PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR C-1
TECHNOLOGY-BASED LEARNING @ PTC.......................................................... C-2
TBLS: Necessity and Advantages ................................................................................................ C-2
TBLS Components ......................................................................................................................... C-2
THE PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR....................................................................... C-3
Measurable Training Outcomes.................................................................................................... C-3
A Powerful Planning Tool ............................................................................................................. C-3
COMPLYING WITH EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYMENT
REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................... C-4
EXERCISE 1: Completing Evaluator Assessments .................................................................. C-5
MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................................................ C-8
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
USING PTC HELP D-1
PTC HELP OVERVIEW.......................................................................................... D-2
PTC Help Features.......................................................................................................................... D-2
USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP................................................................................. D-2
Launching Help: Four Methods................................................................................................... D-2
PTC HELP MODULES............................................................................................ D-7
PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT E-1
FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE............................................... E-2
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS............................................................. E-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail ..............................................................................E-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone.......................................................................E-3
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web...........................................................................E-3
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support ...........................................................................E-3
Routing Your Technical Support Calls ........................................................................................E-4
Technical Support Call Priorities ..................................................................................................E-5
Software Performance Report Priorities ......................................................................................E-5
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT ............................................................... E-5
ONLINE SERVICES................................................................................................. E-6
FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE ............................................... E-6
Terminology used by Technical Support .....................................................................................E-7
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION............................................................... E-8
CONTACT INFORMATION.................................................................................... E-9
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services..........................................................E-9
Telephone........................................................................................................................................E-10
ELECTRONIC SERVICES ..................................................................................... E-14
INDEX I-1
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1-1
Module
1
1
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
In this module you learn about the core Pro/ENGINEER features
and concepts.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe how to use Pro/ENGINEER as a solid modeling design
tool.
• Describe the three main Pro/ENGINEER design concepts.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
PRO/ENGINEER CORE CONCEPTS
You use Pro/ENGINEER to create solid models of your designs. The
three-dimensional work environment enables you to take advantage of:
• Feature-based modeling
• Associativity
• Parametric relationships
Solid Modeling Benefits
Solid modeling enjoys benefits not obtained in two-dimensional design:
• Solid models have volumes and surface areas.
• You can calculate mass properties directly from the geometry you
create.
• When you manipulate a solid model, the model itself remains a solid.
1. Wireframe 2. Hidden Lines
3. No Hidden Line 4. Solid Shade
Figure 1: Solid Model Display
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 1- 3
NOTES
Designing Feature-based Models
The models you create in Pro/ENGINEER are feature-based. This means
that the geometry of your part model is composed of one or more features.
A feature is the smallest building block in a part model.
Pro/ENGINEER enables you to build a model incrementally by adding
individual features one at a time. As you construct your model, you choose
your building blocks, as well as the order in which to create them.
Creating models in Pro/ENGINEER involves incorporating your “design
intent” into the model. Design intent is the reason for adding every feature.
For example, you add hole features to a model because the resulting part
must be assembled to another part, and the holes are needed for the
screws.
The following figure shows how a typical part can be designed by adding
one feature after another to a base model.


Base Feature Protrusion Added Blind Cut Added Chamfers Added
Thru-All Cuts and Holes Added Chamfer Added Rounds Added
Figure 2: Building Models Feature by Feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Designing with Parametric Features
The designs you create in Pro/ENGINEER can be parametric. This means
that their dimensions are controlled by parameters, which are related
dimensions.
Parametric modeling has many advantages:
• Modifying dimensions can change model geometry.
• Designated features can be related to each other.
• Modifications to certain features propagate changes to other features.
• Parent/child relationships can be developed between features.
5 10
Figure 3: Protrusion and Hole Follow Side of Block
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 1- 5
NOTES
Taking Advantage of Associativity
Pro/ENGINEER models usually consist of several parts, assemblies, and
drawings. All of these objects are fully associative.
This means that changes made at one level will propagate to all the levels.
For example, if you change dimensions on a drawing, the change will be
reflected in the associated part. The following figure shows associativity
between a part and an assembly.
Original shaft before
length modification
Shaft associated to assembly
Modification of shaft length
Assembly automatically updates
5
10
Figure 4: Associativity
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2-1
Module
2
2
The Pro/ENGINEER Interface
In this module you learn how to use the Pro/ENGINEER interface
to enhance your design sessions.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe how to use the Pro/ENGINEER interface.
• Describe the different Pro/ENGINEER file types.
• Retrieve, save, erase, and delete files in Pro/ENGINEER.
• Describe how to use the Model Tree and the Menu Manager.
• Describe the parametric, associative, and feature-based
characteristics of Pro/ENGINEER models.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
ELEMENTS OF THE INTERFACE
Figure 1 Sample Model Display in Main Window
The Base Window
When you start Pro/ENGINEER, the base window opens on your desktop.
You create your designs in this window. This window has four main parts:
• Pull-down menu
• Toolbar
• Display area
• Message area
Accessing Commands with Pull-Down Menus
The following Pro/ENGINEER pull-down menu options are available in
all the different modes of the software:
• File – File manipulation commands
• Edi t – Object manipulation and action commands
• View – Model display commands
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 3
NOTES
• Insert – Creates features like protrusions, cuts, holes, and rounds
• Analysis – Model, surface, curve, motion, and sensitivity and
optimization commands
• Info – Query and report commands
• Applications – Launch commands for other Pro/ENGINEER modules
• Utilities – Working environment customization commands
• Window – Window manipulation commands
• Hel p – Help commands
Accessing Frequently-used Commands with the
Toolbar
The Pro/ENGINEER toolbar contains icons for frequently used
commands. Toolbar buttons are provided as an alternative to menu
commands. You can customize you toolbar.
Figure 2: Pro/ENGINEER Toolbar
Manipulating Your Designs in the Display Area
Pro/ENGINEER displays parts, assemblies, drawings, and models on the
screen in the display area. An object’s display depends on the current
environment settings. When you select the model on the screen, the
system distinguishes between an edge and a surface of the model by
highlighting them in two different colors.

Not e:
Surfaces of models are valid in Pro/ENGINEER regardless of
the model display.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Viewing Information in the Message Area
The message area:
• Displays status information for every operation performed.
• Displays queries and hints to simplify the task you are working on.
• Prompts you for additional information (the text message is
accompanied by an optional audible signal).
• Displays icons that represent different kinds of information, such as
warnings or status prompts.
To view old messages, you can use the scrollbar located on the right.

Not e:
When Pro/ENGINEER requires data input, it temporarily
disables all other functions until you enter the required data.
WORKING WITH MODELS
Fi l e Types
Every type of Pro/ENGINEER object has a different file extension.
Typical file extensions are described next..
• PRT – Part files allow you to create 3-D models consisting of many
features.
• ASM – Assembly files contain information on how 3-D parts and
assemblies are assembled together.
• DRW – Drawing files contain 2-D fully dimensioned drawings of parts
or assemblies.
• SEC – Sketch files contain 2-D non-associative sketches that can be
imported while in sketcher mode.
In addition, there is also a SKETCHER mode that allows you to create two-
dimensional sketches that are parametric.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 5
NOTES

Not e:
When you create new files and save them you do not have to
add the file extensions. The system automatically associates
the correct file extension to the file that you are saving.
Working with Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes in Pro/ENGINEER are used for model manipulation, feature
creation, and saving. There are two kinds of dialog boxes: general and
model.
The General Dialog Box
A general dialog box performs general software environment functions
such as setting display options for the model. The following figure
represents some of the common elements in a regular dialog box.
Title
Tabs
Check boxes
Drop-down arrow
Text box
Command buttons
Figure 3: Example of a Dialog Box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
The Model Dialog Box
A model dialog box creates and modifies model geometry by prompting
you for required and optional elements from the user.
Required elements are modifiable properties of a Pro/ENGINEER feature
that must be specified to completely define a feature. Optional elements
are additional operations that you may perform; but they are not necessary
for completing the feature.
The following figure illustrates a model dialog box that defines a ROUND
feature.
Figure 4: A Model Dialog Box
The option buttons in a model dialog box are:
• Define – Defines and/or changes selected elements in the dialog box.
• Refs – Displays the external references of the current selected
element.
• Info – Generates a listing of the properties of the feature that you are
creating.
• OK – Completes the definition of the elements, creating the feature or
model entity.
• Cancel – Cancels the current feature or model entity.
• Preview – Checks geometry before completing the feature definition.
Retrieving Models
When you retrieve files into a working session by clicking File > Open,
Pro/ENGINEER also opens up a model tree window and a menu manager
that allow you to create, manipulate, and modify model geometry.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 7
NOTES
Using the Model Tree
The MODEL TREE presents the model structure feature by feature. You
can select features from the MODEL TREE for modification and deletion.
MODEL TREE icons indicate the corresponding item type and its current
status.
Figure 5: Model Tree with Added Parameters
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Using the Menu Manager
The MENU MANAGER displays a list of menus that you can use to create,
modify, and duplicate model geometry.
Using the MENU MANAGER, you drive along a certain path to complete a
task by making choices from menus. Each time you choose an option from
a submenu, Pro/ENGINEER opens another submenu until you have
finished making selections.
Obtaining Additional Information with Help
When you hold your mouse over any menu option, an on-line help
message displays on the bottom of the current active window. If you need
additional help, you can right-click [ ] the menu option and select Get
Hel p from the pop-up menu.

Not e:
The system administrator must install and setup the online
documentation for you to be able to access this functionality.
Retrieving Multiple Models
You can have multiple models in session at one time—each window
containing a model—making it possible to refer to one model while
working on another. However, Pro/ENGINEER only allows you to work
on one active window at a time.

Not e:
To activate a window, you must click Window > Activate.
Working with Multiple Sub-Windows
If the main window currently contains a model, Pro/ENGINEER
automatically opens a new main window each time you open another
model. The new main window contains the same toolbars and message
area as the first main window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 9
NOTES
Figure 6: A New Window over the Main Window
Saving Changes
As you work on your design, is a good practice to save your file often. The
File > Save option creates a new version of the file with an incremental
version number.
To retrieve an old version, you must specify the version number in the
retrieval name. The All Versions option in the FILE OPEN dialog box
displays the version numbers of a file.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 7: Opening a Version of a Model
Closing Windows
To close a window, you use the Window > Close or the Fi l e > Close
Window options. However, this does not remove the model from the
current session of Pro/ENGINEER. The model still occupies RAM space
on the computer. If the model is no longer required, you erase it from
memory with the Fi l e > Erase > Current option. You can erase all
models that are in session but not displayed in the active windows with the
Erase > Not Displayed option.
Deleting Files
The File > Delete option removes old versions of a model. The Delete >
All Versions option deletes all versions of the model from the system
memory, as well as from the hard drive.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 11
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you will get first-hand experience to see how
Pro/ENGINEER is a parametric, associative, and feature-based solid
modeler.
Method
In Exercise 1, you learn the Pro/ENGINEER environment.
In Exercise 2: you learn how to manipulate the size and orientation of the
model.
In Exercise 3, you learn how to interrogate the MODEL TREE.
In Exercise 4, you how to investigate the associativity between an
assembly component and an incomplete drawing.
Tools
Table 1: Pro/ENGINEER Toolbar Icons
Icons Description
Datum planes on/off
Shading
Wireframe display
Hidden line display
Zoom in
Zoom out
Refit
Orient view
Saved view list
File save
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using the Pro/ENGINEER
Environment
Task 1. Open the master assembly.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 02_interface.
3. Click [File open].
4. In the FILE OPEN dialog box, select Assembl y for the TYPE drop-
down list. Only the assembly files become visible.
5. Select MASTER.ASM and click Preview >>>. This will show a
preview of the model before opening it.
6. Click [No hidden line] icon to see the graphical preview of the
assembly.
7. Click Open to open MASTER.ASM.
Figure 8: The Master Assembly
Task 2. Manipulate the display of the assembly.
1. Click Utilities > Environment.
2. In the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, clear the Datum Pl anes and
Datum Axes check boxes.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 13
NOTES
3. Click Appl y. Do not close the dialog box.
4. Select Hi dden Line from the DISPLAY STYLE drop-down list.
5. Click Appl y.
Task 3. Change the orientation of the assembly.
1. Select I sometri c from the DEFAULT ORIENT drop-down list.
2. Click Appl y.
3. Change the orientation back to Tri metri c.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Figure 9: Hidden Line Display of Assembly
Task 4. Use the toolbar to manipulate the model.
1. Toggle the display of datum planes. Click the Datum Plane icon in
the toolbar on top of the screen. The datum planes reappear.
Datum planes on/off Datum coordinate
system on/off
Datum points on/off
Datum axes on/off
Figure 10: Datum Display Section of Toolbar
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
2. Click [On/Off ] to turn off the datum planes.
3. Shade the model. Click [Shading] on the toolbar.
Wireframe
display
Hidden Line
display
Shading display
No Hidden Line
display
Figure 11: Changing the Model Display
4. Click [Wireframe display] to revert back to the hidden line
display mode.
5. Click View > Shade to cosmetically shade the model.

Not e:
Wireframe remains selected on the toolbar because the model
is only cosmetically shaded and is not switched to a shaded
display mode.
6. Click View > Repaint.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 15
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Manipulating Model Size and
Orientation
Task 1. Change the size and orientation of the model using the toolbar.
1. Click [Zoom in].
Refit
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Orient the model
Saved Views
Repaint
Figure 12: Model Orientation Options
2. Select a location in the model. Then select a second location to
create a zoom box. The model zooms in.
3. Click [Zoom out].
4. Click [Refit] to resize the model.
Task 2. Orient the model so that the bracket faces front.
1. Click [Orient view].
2. The ORIENTATION dialog box opens with the Orient by
Reference already selected as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 13: Orientation Dialog Box
3. In OPTIONS, Reference 1 refers to what is parallel to the screen,
and Reference 2 refers to what orients that parallel reference.
4. Leave the default Front in the REFERENCE 1 drop-down list and
select the front surface of the bracket part as shown in the
following figure.
Select this
surface to face
front for
Reference 1.
Select this
surface as the top
for Reference 2.
Figure 14: Surface Selection for Orientation
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 17
NOTES
5. Select the other surface of the bracket part as Reference 2. The
model changes its orientation as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15: Model after Orientation
6. Select the SAVED VIEWS bar towards the bottom of the dialog
box. Type [SIDE] in the NAME text box.
7. Click Save to save the new orientation.
8. Click OK in the ORIENTATION dialog box.
Task 3. Change the model back to the default orientation.
1. Click . [Saved views list]. Toggle between the DEFAULT and
the saved SIDE views from the saved view list to observe the
model in two different orientations.

Ti ps & Techni ques:
You can also manipulate the model orientation by using the
mouse buttons and <CTRL> key. The left mouse button zooms
the model, the middle spins it, and the right pans it.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Model Tree
Task 1. Modify dimensions of model using the MODEL TREE.
1. If the MODEL TREE is not active, click Vi ew > Model Tree to
view the model tree on the left.
2. Modify the offset value of the master shaft part. In the model tree,
right-click on the MASTER_SHAFT.PRT, and select Modify
from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the 76 dimension that appears.
4. In the message area, type [90] and press <ENTER>.
5. Click Done in the MODIFY menu of the MENU MANAGER.
6. Click Done/Return in the ASSEM MOD menu.
Task 2. Regenerate the assembly.
1. In the ASSEMBLY menu, click Regenerate .
2. In the PRT TO REGEN menu, click Automatic.
3. The shaft moves to its new location. The gear and crank parts
follow the shaft. This proves the parametric nature of the
assembly.
Task 3. Test the associativity by modifying length of the shaft part.
1. Click File > Open. Open MASTER_SHAFT.PRT.
2. Click > Default to see model in default view.
3. Click Modify in MENU MANAGER.
4. Select the shaft as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 19
NOTES
Select this dimension
to modify.
Select the shaft.
Figure 16: Modifying the Shaft
5. Select the 152 dimension.
6. Type [250] and press <ENTER>.
7. Click Regenerate in the PART menu.
8. Save the shaft model. Click [Save].
9. Accept the default name of MASTER_SHAFT.PRT.
Task 4. Check for associativity between the shaft and the assembly.
1. Close the SHAFT window. Click Window > Close .
2. Make the ASSEMBLY window active. Click Window > Activate .
3. Regenerate the assembly. From the MENU MANAGER, click
Regenerate > Automatic.
4. The regenerated assembly appears with modified shaft dimensions,
as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 17: Assembly after Modification and Regeneration
5. A modification made to a part automatically modifies the whole
assembly. This proves the associativity of Pro/ENGINEER.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 21
NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise
Task 1. Investigate the associativity between an assembly component
and an incomplete drawing.
1. Open the drawing DRAW_CRANK2. DRW.
2. Turn on the datum planes if they are not on, then repaint the
screen.
3. Click Edit > Value .
4. Select the 60.50 dimension.
5. Type [90.5] as the new dimension.
Modify this
dimension
Figure 18: Crank2 Drawing
6. Click Regenerate from the DRAWING menu.
7. Click Model from the REGENERATE menu.
8. Save the drawing model. Click File > Save and press <ENTER>.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
9. Click File > Close Window.
10. Click Windows > Activate . This activates the assembly window.
Notice that the crank is updated in the assembly. This shows the
associativity between the part drawing and the assembly.
Task 2. Check for interference between the solid models of the
assembly.
1. Click Analysis > Model Analysis. The MODEL ANALYSIS dialog
box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19: Analyzing Global Interference
2. The default type is set to Assembl y Mass Properties. Select
Gl obal Interference from the TYPE drop-down list.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 23
NOTES
3. Accept defaults and click Compute.
4. In the RESULTS window, the system indicates that two parts are
interfering. Use the arrow to toggle between the interfering part
models. This also highlights the volume of interference on the
screen.
5. Close the dialog box.
6. Click to save the ASSEMBLY model. Accept the default
name.
Task 3. Determine the results of closing the master assembly window.
1. Click Window > Close . Notice the BASE Pro/ENGINEER
window cannot be removed as indicated in the message area.
2. Open CRANK2.PRT, which is still in the memory. In the FILE
OPEN dialog box, click [In Session].
Figure 20: Using the IN SESSION Option
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Select CRANK2. PRT. Click Open. The system retrieves this model
from the system memory, not from the computer hard drive.
Task 4. Remove the master assembly models that are not displayed in a
window from the session memory.
1. Erase the models that are not displayed. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed.
2. A dialog box appears with all the selected models that are in
session highlighted. Click OK to complete the operation.
Task 5. Retrieve “in-session” models again to determine which ones
remain in session.
1. Click . Click . Note that only CRANK2.PRT is listed.
2. Click Cancel .
Task 6. Erase the crank model from system memory to conserve RAM.
1. Erase the current file. Click Fi l e > Erase > Current. Confirm the
operation.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Pr o/ ENGI NEER I nt e r f a c e Page 2- 25
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you have learned that:
• Pull-down menus, toolbars, the display area, and the message area are
the four important elements of the Pro/ENGINEER user interface.
• Models can be oriented and displayed on the screen in various ways.
• Pro/ENGINEER models such as parts, assemblies, and drawings
exhibit feature-based, parametric, and associative characteristics.
• Pro/ENGINEER automatically opens a new main window each time
you open an additional model, so that you can work with multiple
windows.
• Erasing models that are not in use will free up the system memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3-1
Module
3
3
Pick-and-Place Features
Certain Pro/ENGINEER features need not be built with great effort.
They are freely provided and can simply be utilized whenever
needed. These features are called Pick-and-Place features.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Identify and define the different types of Pick-and-Place features.
• Create, delete, and modify the three Pick-and-Place features.
• Navigate among the various options of the HOLE dialog box to
capture the intent of the hole element in the lab practical.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DEFINING PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES
The Pick-and-Place features discussed in this module are:
• Shell
• Edge chamfer
• Edge round
• Hole
Generic Method of Creation
To create any of these Pick-and-Place features, you specify the appropriate
placement references on your model and provide the required dimensions.
Pro/ENGINEER places the feature on that location.

Not e:
Pick-and-Place features behave parametrically with respect to
their placement references. That is, if the placement reference
moves, the feature also moves.
Choosing Hidden References Using Query Select
When you click Query Select and then select on a surface, a dialog box
appears with various reference options.
Shell Features
The Shell option removes a surface or surfaces from a solid and hollows
out the inside of the solid, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness.

Figure 1: The Shell Feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 3
NOTES
When Pro/ENGINEER makes a shell, all the features that were added to
the solid before you chose the Shell option are hollowed out. Therefore,
the order of feature creation is very important when considering the shell
feature.
Creating Edge Chamfers
An edge chamfer feature removes a flat section of material from a selected
edge or edges to create a beveled surface between the two original
surfaces common to the edges. The Pro/ENGINEER dimensioning
schemes for edge chamfers are shown in the following figure.
Figure 2: Edge Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

Not e:
When selecting circular edges for chamfers, Pro/ENGINEER
only highlights one half of the edge. Since the system places
the chamfer on the entire circular edge, you do not have to
select the other half of the edge.
Creating Simple Rounds
Round features create a rounded smooth transition between two adjacent
surfaces. An edge round smoothes the hard edges between adjacent
surfaces.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Pro/ENGINEER offers two types of rounds: simple and advanced. Simple
rounds employ the default round shape and transitions. Advanced rounds
employ user-defined round shapes and transitions.
Radius Options for Simple Edge Chain Rounds
• Constant – Assigns the same radius value to every selected edge.
• Variable – Specifies radii at every selected edge at the endpoints and,
optionally, at intermediate vertices along the edge being rounded.

Figure 3: Constant and Variable Radius Rounds
• Full Round – Creates a round that completely removes a model
surface.
Full Round
Figure 4: Full Round

Not e:
Do not dimension other features to the edges or tangent edges
of round features. Round features make unstable parents.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 5
NOTES

Ti p:
You should create round features on your model as late in the
design process as possible.
Figure 5: Cut Feature Dimensioned to the Edge Round
Specifying Radius Values for Simple Rounds
• Enter – (default) Specifies a new radius value that does not appear in
the menu. Use the <ESC> key to select other radius type options.
• Select On Surf – Specifies a point on the adjacent surface that
determines the radius value.
• Thru Pnt/Vtx – Specifies a datum point, vertex, curve, or edge end
through which the radius of the round should pass.
• Default Values – Specifies a radius value as the system default value
or a previously entered radius value in the SEL VALUE menu.

Original model
Select on this
surface.
Round created
tangent
Figure 6: Using the Select On Surf Option
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Select this vertex.
Original Model
Figure 7: Using the Thru Pnt/Vtx Option
Hole Features
There are three types of Holes:
• Straight Holes
• Standard Holes
• Sketched Holes
This module primarily deals with the Straight Hole feature and its many
options.
Creating the Straight Hole Feature
Pro/ENGINEER creates all straight holes with a constant diameter. The
hole feature always removes material from your model.
Placement Options
To place a hole on your model, you can choose from the following options
in the PLACEMENT menu.
• Li near – Places the hole on a plane. Dimensions the center of the hole
from two surfaces or edges using linear dimensions.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 7
NOTES
Figure 8: Linear Hole
• Radial – Places the hole with respect to an axis using polar dimensions
on a plane, cylinder, or cone. Radial holes placed on a plane have a
diameter, radius, or linear dimensioning scheme.
Figure 9: Radial Holes on a Plane
• Coaxial – Places the hole co-axially using an existing axis. Does not
create placement dimensions, but creates only a diameter dimension
for the hole itself.

Figure 10: Coaxial Hole
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• On Point – Places the center of the hole directly on an on surface
datum point. The axis of the hole is normal to the placement surface.
Figure 11: On Point Hole
Depth Options
You can also create the hole from either side of the placement plane or
from both sides using the Depth One and Depth Two options in the HOLE
dialog box.
Figure 12: Side Options
The system determines how deep to create the hole based on your depth
specification. The following figure illustrates the various depth options
listed in the HOLE dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 9
NOTES
Thru Next
Thru Until
Thru All
Variable
To Reference
Figure 13: Hole Depth Options
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory, you will learn how to create and implement the
important Pick-and-Place features.
Method
In Exercise 1, you add a shell feature and a simple tangent chain round
feature to a base model by using the automatic round creation
functionality.
In Exercise 2, you add chamfers and rounds to a model.
In Exercise 3, you explore the straight hole feature and its many options.
In Exercise 4, you create a straight radial hole placed on a planar surface.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Pick-and-Place Features
Icons Description
Shading
Hidden line display
Repeat feature
Select geometric entities
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 11
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Shell and Automatic Round Features
Figure 14: The Start Model
Task 1. Create a shell feature.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 03_pick_place.
3. Retrieve the AUTOMATIC.PRT from the working directory.
4. Click Insert > Shell .
5. Select the front surface of the part as shown in the following
figure.
Select the
front surface
Figure 15: Selecting the Shell Reference
6. After the surface has been selected, click Done Sel > Done Refs.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
7. Enter [0.25] as the shell thickness and press <ENTER>.
8. Click OK from the SHELL dialog box to complete the shell
feature.
Figure 16: Completed Shell
Task 2. Add an automatic round feature using the right mouse button.
1. Click [Select geometry] and select the outer arc-shaped edge as
pointed out in the following figure.
2. Click > Round Edges from the pop-up menu.
Select the outer
arc-shaped edge
Figure 17: Selecting the Round Edges
3. Click on the green icons on the round feature and drag it
dynamically to modify the size of the round. Click the left mouse
button anywhere on the screen to complete the round creation.
4. Notice that the system automatically selected the edges that were
tangent to the arc-shaped edge to create the simple round feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 13
NOTES
Tangent edges
were selected
automatically as
round references.
Figure 18: Completed Round
5. Click File > Save . Accept the default name and press <ENTER> to
save the model.
6. Click File > Close Window to close the current working window.
7. Erase all objects from memory. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Chamfers and Rounds
Figure 19: The Start Model
Task 1. Adding the 45 x d edge chamfer to a cylinder.
1. Retrieve the CHAMFERS.PRT from the working directory.
2. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer.
3. Click 45 x d from the SCHEME menu.
4. Type [1.0] as the value for the chamfer dimension.
5. Select the two circular edges on either end of the cylindrical
protrusion as shown in the following figure. Selecting the edges
highlights them in blue.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 15
NOTES
Select these
two circular
edges
Figure 20: Selecting the Circular Edges
6. Click Done Sel > Done Refs.
7. Click OK to complete the chamfer.
Figure 21: The Edge Chamfer Dialog Box
8. The completed chamfer is shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 22: Completed Chamfer
Task 2. Add the d1 X d2 chamfer to the four edges at the bottom of the
model.
1. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer.
2. Select d1 x d2 from the SCHEME menu. Type [1] as the value for
d1 and [2] as the value for the d2 dimension.
3. Switch to a Hi dden Line view by clicking [Hidden line] in the
Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
4. Click Query Sel , then select the hidden bottom surface as the
reference surface for the d1 dimension.
Select the hidden
bottom surface.
Figure 23: Selecting the Bottom Surface
5. Select the front edge and right side edge as edge references.
6. Click Query Sel , then select the two hidden bottom edges.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 17
NOTES

Not e:
Make sure to click Accept from the query bin after picking
each edge when using Query Sel.
Select these two
hidden bottom
edges.
Select front
and right
side edges
Figure 24: Selecting the Hidden Edges
7. Click Done Sel > Done Refs.
8. Click OK to complete the chamfer.
9. Click [Shading] to see the shaded model.
Figure 25: Completed Chamfer
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 3. Create a simple round with a variable radius value.
Figure 26: Simple Edge Round with Variable Radius
1. Click Insert >Round > Simple > Done .
2. Click Variable > Edge Chain > Done .
3. Switch to the hidden line display by clicking [Hidden line]
4. Click One By One in the CHAIN menu to define the single edge
references one by one.
5. Select the three visible vertical edges of the base and the invisible
edge as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 19
NOTES
Select the fourth
(hidden) edge here.
Select these
three edges
Figure 27: Selecting the Variable Round References
6. To select the hidden vertical edge, click Query Sel and click
Accept in the Query bin.
7. The system highlights eight vertices.
8. Click Done in the CHAIN menu.
9. The system now highlights eight vertices. Click Done once again.
Task 4. Define radius values for the variable edge round, keeping track
of the vertices that Pro/ENGINEER highlights.
1. As the system highlights each end of every edge in green, type [0]
as a value for the top of the edge; type [2] as a value for the bottom
of the edge. Repeat for all four edges.
2. Click OK to complete the round feature.
3. Click [Shading].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 28: Completed Round
4. Click File > Close Window.
5. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 21
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Exploring the Straight Hole Feature
Base feature
270-degree
flange
Fluid pipe
Four cooling fins
Figure 29: The Start Model
Task 1. Create a linear placed hole with a variable depth of 30 on the
top of the base feature of the model shown in the preceding figure.
1. Open STRAIGHT_HOLES.PRT. Change display to Hidden Line
from the toolbar.
2. Click Insert > Hole. The HOLE dialog box appears, shown in the
following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 30: Hole Dialog Box
3. Leave the default hole type as Straight.
4. Type [7.5] as the diameter value. Press <ENTER>.
5. Leave the depth one default as Variable and depth two as None.
6. Type [30] as the depth value. Press <ENTER>.
7. The Primary Reference defines hole location. Click the top
surface of the base feature as the placement plane as shown in the
following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 23
NOTES
Second dimension
reference
First dimension
reference (hidden
side surface)
Placement plane for
Primary Reference
Figure 31: Creating a Linear Placed Hole
8. For the first linear reference, click Query Sel to select the hidden
side of the base feature. Type [10] as the distance for this reference.
Press <ENTER>.
9. For the second linear reference again click Query Sel once again and
select the visible front surface. Type [15] for the distance from this
reference. Press <ENTER>.
10. Click .
Figure 32: The First Completed Hole
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 2. Add a linear hole that runs through the cooling fins.
1. Click Insert> Hole.
2. In the HOLE dialog box, leave the default hole type as Strai ght.
3. Type [12.5] for the hole diameter. Press <ENTER>.
4. Click Thru All as the DEPTH ONE option and None as DEPTH
TWO.
5. Select the top surface of the first cooling fin near the right back
corner as the placement plane, as shown in the following figure.
First dimension
reference (hidden
back surface)
Second dimension
reference (visible
thin surface of fin)
Placement plane
Figure 33: Creating the Second Straight Hole Feature
6. For the first linear reference, click Query Sel and then select the
hidden back surface of the base feature.
7. Type [10] as the distance for this reference. Then press <ENTER>.
8. For the second reference, click Query Sel and select the side
surface (not the edge) of the top cooling fin. If selecting the side
surface of the fin is difficult zoom in the model.
9. Type [10] for the distance for the second reference. Then press
<ENTER>.
10. You may preview the hole feature but do not close the HOLE
dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 25
NOTES

Not e:
You will be creating another hole feature. You may use the
repeat button in the HOLE dialog box.
Figure 34: The Second Hole Placed
Task 3. Use the TO REFERENCE depth option to create another linear
hole through the top three fins.
1. In the HOLE dialog box, leave the default Straight hole type. Type
[12.5] as the diameter. Press <ENTER>.
2. Click To Reference in the Depth One option dropdown menu.
3. Click Query Sel , then select the bottom surface of the third fin. By
this, you are specifying that the hole has to end at the bottom
surface of the third fin.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 26 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Select the hidden
underside
surface
Figure 35: The To Reference Hole
4. For the Primary Reference, select the top surface of the first fin as
shown in the following figure.
Select this
surface as the
placement plane
Second
dimensional
reference
First
dimensional
reference
Figure 36: Creating the Third Hole
5. For the first Linear Reference, select the front part of the base
feature and type [10] for the distance. Press <ENTER>.
6. For the second Linear Reference, select the visible side surface of
the cooling fin. Type [10] for the distance.
7. Complete hole feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 27
NOTES
Task 4. Create a coaxial hole to the cylindrical feature.
1. Click Insert > Hole
2. In the HOLE dialog box, leave the default hole type as Strai ght.
3. Type [5] as a value for the hole diameter.
Axis line (A_3)
Depth surface
to extrude up to
Select here
for the
placement
pl ne
Figure 37: Creating a Coaxial Straight Hole
4. Make Depth One to be a To Reference . Click Query Sel and
select the visible front surface of the base feature as shown in the
preceding figure.
5. Select the front surface of the cylindrical protrusion as the primary
reference.
6. Select Coaxi al from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list.
7. Select the A_3 axis of the cylindrical protrusion as the axial
reference. If you cannot see the axis, turn it on by clicking
[Datum axes on/off].
8. Click to complete the coaxial hole feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 3- 28 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 38: The Completed Co-Axial Hole Feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pi c k - a nd- Pl a c e Fe a t ur e s Page 3- 29
NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise
Task 1. Create a straight radial hole placed on a planar surface.
Figure 39: The Completed Model
1. Set the hole specifications.
Diameter = 15mm
Depth One = To Reference
Depth Two = None
Depth Reference = Invisible surface of the circular flange as
shown in the next figure.
2. Set the hole placement.
Primary Reference = Visible front surface of the circular flange
Placement Type = Radial
Axial Reference = A_3 of the fluid pipe
Distance = 25 mm
Angular Reference = Front face of the flange near the angled
cut.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4-1
Module
4
4
Sketcher Basics
In this module you learn how to sketch and define complex parts.
You also learn how to use Pro/ENGINEER in Sketcher mode, and
how to take advantage of the Intent Manager to improve your
designs.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Start a design in Sketcher.
• Create various types of geometry.
• Constrain sketched entities.
• Modify section sketches.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
THE SKETCHER INTERFACE
The Sketcher interface consists of:
• A menu bar with pull-down menus that include Sketcher-specific
menus EDIT and SKETCH.
• A standard Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
• An additional Sketcher toolbar with Sketcher-specific options.
• A message area below the toolbars.
• An INTENT MANAGER with fly-out icons on the right to perform
frequently used actions.
• An additional Sketcher-specific message area at the bottom left of the
window describing INTENT MANAGER’s fly-out icons.
Figure 1: Sketcher Interface
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 3
NOTES
Selecting Sketched Entities
Using the mouse, you can select individual or multiple-specific sketched
entities, or all entities that fall within a swept box. Selected entities
highlight in red.
The Intent Manager
The INTENT MANAGER appears automatically on the right side of the
screen when you enter the Sketcher mode. It includes fly-out icons which
are logically grouped together based on capability. These icons provide
access to the most frequently used sketching tools.
Default cursor to
pick entities
To create dimensions
To trim Entities
To modify dimensions
To impose constraints
Icons to create
different kinds of
geometry
Figure 2: INTENT MANAGER Flyout Icons
Accessing Commands with Pop-Up Menus
You access Pop-up menus by right-clicking in the SKETCHER display
area. These menus offer short-cuts for sketching, modifying,
dimensioning, deleting, and undoing steps.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 3: A Typical Sketcher Pop-Up Menu
THE SKETCHER MODE
Accessing Commands with Sketcher Menus
EDIT and SKETCH are top-level menus specific to the SKETCHER mode.
They contain all the commands needed in the sketching environment.
Figure 4: Edit Menu
The INTENT MANAGER commands and the Text option are also available
in the SKETCH menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 5
NOTES

Figure 5: Sketch Menu
Specifying References
In the SKETCHER mode you specify the references of the section when
you:
• Create a new feature.
• Redefine a feature with missing or insufficient references.
• Provide references to place a section.
It is good practice to reference before sketching. This provides the
sketched entities a location to automatically align to and dimension from.

Not e:
The references that you select for a section create Parent/Child
relationships.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Creating Geometry
SKETCHER mode enables the creation of geometrical shapes and entities.
The basic ones—lines, arcs, and circles—are discussed below.
• Li nes – Using the Line fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER, you
create two types of sketched lines:
Straight lines from point to point.
Centerlines for referencing or constraining entities.
Figure 6: Lines Fly-Out Icons
• Arcs – Using the Arcs fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER, you
create four types of arcs:
An arc by 3 points or tangent to an entity at its endpoint.
A concentric arc.
An arc by selecting its center and endpoints.
A conic arc.
Figure 7: Arcs Fly-Out Icons
• Ci rcl es – Using the Ci rcl e fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER,
you can create three types of circles:
A circle by selecting the center and a point on the circle.
A concentric circle.
A full ellipse.
Figure 8: Circle Fly-Out Icons
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 7
NOTES
Sketched circle
Concentric to this
edge
Figure 9: Sketching a Concentric Circle to an Edge
Dimensioning Sketches
Once a sketch is complete, you dimension it. An orderly arrangement of
dimensions helps visual clarity, particularly when the sketch gets complex.
To place dimensions in SKETCHER, you left-click to select the entity and
middle-click to place the dimension. You can place a dimension at any
point during or after sketching.
The following figure illustrates the simple dimensioning of a rectangle.
Figure 10: Creating Dimensions for a Rectangle
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 11: Grabbing and Moving Dimensions
Modifying Dimensions
You can modify the dimensions values of a sketch in the MODIFY
DIMENSIONS dialog box. You also have the options to Regenerate and
Lock Scale the sketch.
You can also double-click on a specific dimension in a sketch to
dynamically change the value of the dimension. The SENSITIVITY
scrollbar allows you to adjust the sensitivity of the control wheels when
changing dimensions dynamically.
Figure 12: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 9
NOTES
Adding Constraints
Sketcher applies system default constraints to a sketch to establish the
initial design intent. You can override the default constraints from the
CONSTRAINTS dialog box.
Figure 13: Sketcher Constraints Dialog Box
You can use the constraint options to:
1. Make a line or two vertices vertical.
2. Make two entities tangent.
3. Make two points or vertices symmetrical about a centerline.
4. Make a line or two vertices horizontal.
5. Place a point on the middle of the line.
6. Create equal lengths, equal radii, or same curvature constraint.
7. Make two entities perpendicular.
8. Creates same points or points on entities.
9. Make two lines parallel.
Other Sketcher Tools
Edge
The Edge tool has two instances represented by its two fly-out icons in the
Intent Manager, as shown below:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 14 Edge Fly-Out Icons
• Use Edge – Uses an existing model edge to create sketched entities.
Automatically selects the edge as a specified reference.
Figure 15: Using Existing Model Edge to Create Sketched Entities
• Offset Edge – Uses existing model edge to create sketched entities at
an offset distance.
Figure 16: Creating Sketched Entities at an Offset Distance

Not e:
The Use Edge and Offset Edge options create parent/child
relationships with the referenced feature.
Copy
The Edit > Copy option copies 2-D drafts and imports entities from a
drawing. You can move and scale a section, making legacy data easier to
manipulate.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 11
NOTES
Mirror
You can mirror sketched entities from one side of a centerline to the other
using the Edit > Mirror option.
Move
The MOVE ENTITY menu displays the following options:
• Drag Item – Moves an entity or its vertex to a new location.
• Drag Many – Translates selected entities within a sketch.
• Rotate90 – Rotates sketched entities about a specified point by
multiples of 90 degrees.
• Dimension – Repositions a dimension within a sketch.
Trim
The Edit > Trim option shortens or extends an entity in three different
ways corresponding to the three fly-out icons shown below:
Figure 17: Trim Fly-Out Icons
• The first dynamically trims section entities
• The second cuts or extends entities to other entities or geometry.
• The third divides an entity at the point of selection, replacing the
original with two new entities.
Replace
Replaces a sketched entity from the original section with a newly sketched
entity.
Section Analysis
The Analysis > Section Analysis option provides you with information
about:
• Intersection and tangency points.
• Angles and distances.
• Dimensioning references.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• Entity curvature display.
Sketcher Points
Sketcher points force coincidence among sketched entities and allow
slanted dimensions between sketched entity end-points.
Figure 18: Midpoint Definition Using Sketcher Point
Figure 19 Defining Theoretical Sharps Using Sketcher Points
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 13
NOTES
Setting Sketcher Preferences
The SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box in the UTILITIES menu
modifies the Sketcher environment.
Figure 20 Sketcher Preferences Dialog Box
Use the SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box to:
• Modify the display options of various sketcher entities.
• Set constraints preferences by enabling or disabling constraints
assumed by Sketcher.
• Set grid, grid spacing, and accuracy parameters.
• Click the Defaul t button to reset the preferences.
Sketching in 3-Dimensions (3-D)
When you select the Use2D Sketcher option from the ENVIRONMENT
dialog box, Sketcher starts in a 2-D orientation (that is, with the sketching
plane parallel to the computer screen).
When you do not select this option, the Sketcher starts in a 3-D
orientation. You can change the view orientation at any time and sketch in
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3-D. Using View > Sketch View, you can re-orient a Sketcher section into
the 2-D view while in Sketcher mode.
Figure 21: The Environment Dialog Box
TAKING ADVANTAGE OF SKETCHER MODE
Your work sessions will be more productive if you apply the following
rules when working with Sketcher:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 15
NOTES
1. Keep sketches simple.
This makes the final model flexible and helps regeneration.
2. Use the Undo option
The Undo option restores a sketched section to its prior state.
This is extremely useful when sketching features
incrementally.
3. Do not sketch to scale.
Concentrate on getting your geometry straight by sketching
large.
Resolve the sketch by modifying dimensions.
This rule is particularly helpful when the sketched entities are
small.
4. Use the grid.
Create lines equal, parallel, or perpendicular.
Align sketched entities.
Align centers horizontally and vertically.
5. Do not extend the sketch outside of the part.
There is no need to sketch sections that extend outside the part,
as is required with some solid modeling packages.
6. Make effective use of Sketcher's accuracy.
The range for the accuracy is 1.0 e-9 through 1.0 (default).
To prevent Sketcher from making constraints, you can increase
Sketcher accuracy by changing it from 1.0 to a lower number.
7. Use open and closed sections appropriately.
When sketching an open section, you cannot have more than
one open section per feature.
If you use an open section, you must explicitly align its open
ends to the part.
When in doubt over whether you should use an open or closed
section, you should use a closed one since it is easier to
regenerate, and is less prone to failure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Protrusion A
Protrusion B
Cut
Figure 22: Open and Closed Sections
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 17
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you practice the basic sketching procedures such as
entering sketcher mode, creating straight lines, creating arcs, applying
constraints, dimensioning, and generating solid models.
Method
In Exercise 1, you practice basic sketching procedures.
In Exercise 2, you create a snap ring by sketching in steps.
In Exercise 3, you create a hex section using construction entities.
Tools
Table 1: Sketcher Basic Tools
Icons Description
Impose sketcher constraints
Perpendicular constraint
Tangent arc
Create circle
Create rectangle
Create dimension
Dynamic trim
Modify dimension
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics
Figure 23 Completed Sketch after Exercise 1
Task 1. Create a new sketch named ROUND_RECTANGLE.
1. Click [File new] in the toolbar.
2. In the NEW dialog box, select Sketch.
3. Type [ROUND_RECTANGLE] for the name and click OK.
4. Sketcher mode activates.
Task 2. Sketch four lines with a horizontal bottom line, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Click [Sketch line] and place by clicking .
2. Click to end line creation.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 19
NOTES
Figure 24: Sketching a Quadrilateral
Task 3. Apply the constraint to make the lines perpendicular.
1. Click [Impose sketcher constraints], then click
[Perpendicular constraint], then select two lines to make them
perpendicular, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 25: Perpendicular Constraint on One Side
2. Select the other two lines to make them perpendicular.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 26: Perpendicular Constraint on the Other Side
3. Close the CONSTRAINTS dialog box.
Task 4. Delete the two vertical lines.
1. Click the Poi nt er icon, and select the left vertical line.
2. Press and hold <SHIFT> and select the right vertical line.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
Task 5. Sketch a tangent end arc on the left side of the section.
1. Click [Tangent arc].
2. Select and drag the top left vertex out of the left quadrant of the
circle to get a tangent end arc.
3. Select the end point to be the bottom left end point, as shown in the
following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 21
NOTES
Figure 27 Sketching a Tangent End Arc
Task 6. Repeat the process on the right side of the section.
Figure 28 Sketching Tangent End Arcs on Both Sides
Task 7. Add the proper dimensions.
1. Click [Create dimension].
2. Select each arc, then middle-click to place the dimension.
3. Select Tangent > Accept and Horizontal > Accept for type and
orientation.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 29 Dimensioning the Arcs
Task 8. Create a diameter dimension on the left arc.
1. Select twice the left arc, and then to place it.
Figure 30 Dimensioning the Left Arc
Task 9. Modify both dimensions.
1. Click and select the horizontal and the diameter dimensions.
Press and hold <SHIFT> and click [Modify dimension].
2. Modify the diameter to [2] and the linear dim to [4].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 23
NOTES
Figure 31: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box
3. Click to complete the feature.
4. Save and close the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box.
Figure 32: Sketch with Modified Dimensions
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps
Figure 33 Completed Snap Ring after Exercise 2
Task 1. Create a new sketch called SNAP_RING.
1. Click .
2. Select Sketch.
3. Type [SNAP_RING] as the name of the sketch.
Task 2. Create two offset circles aligned horizontally.
1. Click [Create circle] and draw two circles, as shown in the
following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 25
NOTES
Figure 34 Two Offset Circles Aligned Horizontally
Task 3. Create a rectangle that snaps to the inside circle on both upper
vertices.
1. Click [Create rectangle]. Click in the Sketcher to start the
sketch, and then click again to end the sketch.
2. Then use the dynamic trim to create intersections. Click
[Dynamic trim]. Drag from below the bottom horizontal line and to
above the top horizontal line, as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 26 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Start dynamic trim here
Stop cursor here
Delete
Figure 35 Sketching a Rectangle Inside Circles
3. Highlight each item. If all the crossed items are not highlighted,
continue to drag over the lines until they do highlight.
4. The result is shown in the following figure.
Figure 36 Using Dynamic Trim
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 27
NOTES
5. The results of trimming are shown in the following figure.
Figure 37: Section after Trimming
Task 4. Sketch another rectangle.
1. Snap to the outside circle and the bottom of the two vertical lines,
as shown in the following figure. Do not snap through any of the
arc's vertices.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 28 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 38: Sketching a Second Rectangle
Task 5. Use the dynamic trim to remove the final lines and arc.
1. Click to trim the unwanted entities.
2. The result is shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 29
NOTES
Figure 39: Capturing Intent with Dynamic Trim
Task 6. Dimension the entities.
1. Click to create the dimensions.
2. Select each entity, and then middle-click to place the dimensions.
Refer to the preceding figure to determine the dimensioning
scheme (the format of the dimensions and not the actual value)
required for capturing design intent.
3. Click to modify the six dimension values.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 30 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 40: Modifying Dimensions
4. Save and close.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 31
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon
Task 1. Create a new sketch called HEX.
1. Click . Select Sketch and type [HEX] as the name.
Task 2. Create a sketcher point
1. Click the point button .
2. Place a point in the center of the screen.
Task 3. Add vertical centerlines passing through the sketcher point.
1. Click the centerline button .
2. Create a vertical centerline that passes through the point.
3. Create two additional centerlines that pass through the point at an
angle.
Task 4. Modify the angles to 60°.
1. Modify the angle between centerlines to 60°, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 41: Modifying Angles between Centerlines
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 32 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 5. Create a circle centered on the Sketcher point.
1. Click to draw a circle.
2. and select Toggle Construction to convert it to a
construction circle.
Figure 42: Creating a Construction Circle
Task 6. Create a hexagon by sketching 6 lines from the intersection
points of the circle and the centerlines.
Figure 43: Creating a Hexagonal Sketch
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he r Ba s i c s Page 4- 33
NOTES
1. Add a diameter dimension to the construction circle and modify it's
value to [1.0]
2. Click File > Close Window.
3. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 4- 34 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• The Sketcher interface consists of the main sketcher area, pull-down
menus, toolbars, message areas, the INTENT MANAGER with fly-out
icons and pop-up menus.
• Sketched geometry must be dimensioned and constrained.
• You can create lines, arcs, circles, rectangles, splines, and many other
geometrical entities using the Intent Manager.
• The EDIT and SKETCH menus contain most of the tools that are
unique to Sketcher mode such as Copy, Mirror, Move, and Trim.
• Default dimensions can be modified at any stage of model generation.
• The system notifies you when a model has conflicting constraints.
• Sketcher preferences can be set using the SKETCHER PREFERENCES
dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5-1
Module
5
5
Sketched Features
In this module you learn how to create sketched features by defining
their size, shape, and location in a model.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Sketch cuts and protrusions.
• Created extruded and revolved forms.
• Set up sketching planes.
• Dimension sketched features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DEFINING SKETCHED FEATURES
Sketching Cuts and Protrusions
• Protrusion – adds material to a model in any desired shape.
• Cut – removes material from an open or closed cross-section in a
model.
Figure 1: Protrusion versus Cut
Created Extruded and Revolved Forms
• Extrude – adds or removes material linearly from the sketching plane.
• Revolve –creates a feature by revolving the sketched section around a
sketched centerline.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 3
NOTES

Sketched
centerline
Figure 2: Extruded versus Revolved Features
Selecting a Sketching Plane
To create a new feature on a model, begin the sketch on the surface where
you intend to place the feature. The surface you choose defines the
sketching plane.
Selecting a Reference Plane
Once you create and dimension the sketch, then you orient the new feature
to a reference plane. The reference plane must be perpendicular to the
sketching plane.
Changing the Default Reference Plane
You can change the default orientation and manually select a new
reference plane.
The defaul t orientation of the sketching plane orients it parallel to the
screen and chooses one of the default datums as a reference plane. For
example, you may want to manually select the top surface of the model for
a perpendicular reference orientation.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Sketching
plane
Top orientation
plane
Direction of
feature creation

Sketcher Orientation -- Protrusion
Resulting Protrusion
Sketcher Orientation -- Cut
Resulting Cut
Figure 3: Two Features Defined by the Same Cross-section
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 5
NOTES
USING THE SKETCHER TOOLS
Whenever you create a sketch, Pro/ENGINEER automatically assumes a
dimensioning scheme. Since all sketches are parametric, you can create
them in a convenient scale and later modify their dimensions.
In SKETCHER main window toolbar, the Sketch option pull-down menu
contains all the necessary sketching tools.
Another additional toolbar containing the sketching options and
constraints appears on the right side of the SKETCHER window.
Dimensioning Sections
To override weak dimensions with strong ones, you select the entity, then
middle-click [ ] to place the dimension at the desired location.
Opens pop-up
menu
Completes or
aborts geometry
creation
Creates section
entities by
selecting points
Figure 4: Sketcher Mouse Button Functions
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Linear Dimensions
Linear dimensions indicate the length of a line segment or the distance
between two entities. The different types of linear dimensions are
illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5: Linear Dimensions in Sketcher Mode

Not e:
You cannot dimension the length of a centerline.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 7
NOTES
Diameter Dimensions
Diameter dimensions measure the diameters of sketched circles and arcs.
To create a diameter dimension, select the arc or circle twice and to
place the dimension.

Select twice on the
circle
Place the dimension
Figure 6: Diameter Dimension on Circle
To create a diameter dimension for a revolved section, Select the entity to
dimension and the centerline to use as the axis of revolution. Then select
the entity again and place the dimension.

Second,
select the
sketched
centerline
Finally, place the diameter
dimension.
Third, select the
sketched entity
once again.
First, select the
sketched entity
Figure 7: Diameter Dimension for Revolved Section in Sketcher Mode
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Not e:
The diameter dimension for a revolved feature extends beyond
the centerline, indicating that it is a diameter dimension rather
than a radius dimension.
Radial Dimensions
Radial dimensions measure the radii of circles or arcs. To create a radial
dimension, select the circle or arc and place the dimension.
Select on the ARC (left)
Place dimension (middle)
Figure 8: Radial Dimension in Sketcher Mode
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 9
NOTES
Angular Dimensions
Create an angular dimension between lines by selecting two lines. to
place the dimension. Where you place the dimension determines how the
system measures the angle.

Place dimensions in indicated
positions.
Select the two lines
in any order.
Figure 9: Angular Dimensions in Sketcher Mode
To create an arc angle dimension, select one endpoint, then the other
endpoint, and finally the arc. to place the dimension.

Select 1 - endpoint
Select 2 -endpoint
Select 3 - on arc
Place dimension
Figure 10: Arc Angle Dimension in Sketcher Mode
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you add and remove material to a solid part using
protrusion and cut features.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a cut feature.
In Exercise 2, you create a protrusion.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Sketched Features
Icons Description
Sketch centerline
Toggle grid on/off
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 11
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cut
Figure 11: Start and Finished Models
Task 1. Sketch a cut feature within a closed section.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 05_sketch_feat.
3. Open SKETCHED_FEATURES.PRT.
4. Change to Hidden Line display.
5. Click Insert > Cut > Extrude .
6. Click One Side > Done .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Sketching
plane
Select the top
planar surface
Figure 12: Selecting Sketching Plane
Task 2. Define the front surface as the sketching plane.
1. Leave defaults and Query Sel to select the planar front surface of
the block as the plane to sketch the shape of the cut.
2. The feature should extrude into the part. Click Okay from the
DIRECTION menu.
Task 3. Orient the model by selecting the orientation references.
1. Click Top from the SKET VIEW menu.
2. Select the top planar surface to begin the SKETCHER.

Not e
Instead of manually orienting the model, you can usually click
Default in the SKET VIEW menu to enter the default
sketcher mode.
Task 4. Define the references. The design intent of the cut is to be at a
specified distance from the right side and the bottom of the model.
1. Note that Pro/ENGINEER automatically assumes two references.
To delete these two references from the REFERENCES dialog box,
highlight and click Delete .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 13
NOTES
2. Select the bottom surface and the right side surface as references.
Note that the REFERENCE dialog box entries are both
SURF:F4(Protrusion). Click Close .
Select this
bottom
surface as the
first reference
(selecting it
on edge)
Select this side
surface as the
second reference
Figure 13: Specifying References
Task 5. Define the section for the cut.
1. Click . Select in the Sketcher to start the line and drag it from
left to right. Left-click [ ] to end the line. Right-click [ ] to
finish the line.
2. Click . Click the right end point of the line as the start point for
the arc and drag a 180-degree arc. Click to end the arc creation.

Not e:
If you did not sketch what you wanted, you can undo the
operation by selecting Undo.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 14: Creating a 3 Point/ Tangent End Arc
3. From the endpoint of the arc sketch another horizontal line
segment.
4. Finally complete the section by sketching another tangent end arc
that connects the open end of the second line to open end of the
first line.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 15
NOTES
Figure 15: Completing Section Sketch
Task 6. Make the two horizontal lines equal in length.
1. Impose the Equal Length Sketcher constraint. Click and .
2. Select the two horizontal lines you want to make equal.
3. If the sketch is over-constrained, the RESOLVE SKETCH dialog
box appears.
Figure 16 Resolve Sketch Dialog Box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
4. Retain the Equal Lengths constraint and delete any other
constraint.
Task 7. Override existing weak dimensions and constraints with your
own strong dimensions and constraints.
1. Click . Select a point approximately half way between the two
arc centers. When the centerline snaps to vertical, click again.
2. Check for the symmetric constraint symbols—two arrows
indicating a symmetric constraint located about the centerline. If
INTENT MANAGER added a dimension, click Undo and re-create
the centerline. Or, force it using the CONSTRAINT menu.
3. Click . Create the dimensions of the cut section.
4. To create the radius dimension, select the perimeter of the left arc
and to place the dimension.
5. To create the arc center-to-center dimension, select the each of the
arc centers and to place the dimension.
6. To create the location dimension from the right surface to the
centerline, select the centerline and then select the right surface
and to place the dimension.
7. To create the location dimension from the bottom surface to the
left arc center, select the arc center and the bottom surface and
to place the dimension.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 17
NOTES
Figure 17: Specifying Constraints and Dimensions.
8. Complete dimensioning the size and location of the cut section.
Task 8. Modify the dimensions of the cut.
1. Change the dimension values. Click . Select a dimension.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 18: MODIFY DIMENSION Dialog Box
2. Type in the correct number and press <ENTER>.
3. Repeat the above step to modify all the other dimensions of the
cut.
Figure 19: Modified Dimensions
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 19
NOTES
Task 9. Finish defining the cut.
1. Click .
2. Click Okay to accept the arrow pointing towards the inside of the
section to define the direction of the cut.
3. To define the depth, click Thru All > Done .
4. Click OK.

Not e:
Note that the system placed a circle with an X in the center of
the part to indicate the direction of feature creation. It
represents a 2-D arrow perpendicular to the screen in the
direction that is into the screen (away from you). A circle with
a dot in the center represents a 2-D arrow perpendicular to the
screen in the direction that is out of the screen (toward you).
5. View your new cut feature in different views.
Figure 20: Finished Cut
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Protrusion
Task 1. Create a cylindrical protrusion on the right side of the model.
Create this
protrusion
Sketching
plane
TOP orientation
reference
Figure 21: The Completed Protrusion
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude .
2. Click One Side > Done from the ATTRIBUTES menu.
3. Select the right side of the block as the sketching plane.
4. The arrow points outward from the block. Click Okay from the
DIRECTION menu.
5. Click Top and select surface shown in the preceding figure.
Task 2. Specify two references for Sketcher in the DEFAULT view.
1. Click View > Default Orientation.
2. Click [Toggle grid on/off], so that you can clearly see the
block.
3. Delete the two references in the REFERENCE dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 21
NOTES
4. Select the top surface of the model as reference. and select
Query Select from the pop-up menu to select the back hidden
surface.
5. Close the REFERENCES dialog box.
Select this top
surface as a
reference
Select the
back surface
as a reference
Figure 22: Selecting Section References
6. Click View > Sketch Orientation.
Task 3. Define the section for the protrusion.
1. Click .
2. Select in the Sketcher to begin a sketch of a small circle.
3. Select again to finish the circle.
Task 4. Strengthen dimensions.
1. Click
2. Select the circle twice and to place the dimension.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Select the center of the circle and the left reference surface. to
place the dimension.
4. Place the dimension between the center of the circle and the left
reference surface.
Task 5. Change the dimension values to reflect the design
Figure 23: Modified Dimensions
1. Click and select each of the three dimensions consecutively
while holding <SHIFT>.
2. Click Edit > Modify. The MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box
appears.
3. Change dimension values for each as shown in the preceding
figure.
4. Click to close the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sk e t c he d Fe a t ur e s Page 5- 23
NOTES
5. Click in the INTENT MANAGER to complete the section.
Task 6. Define a blind depth value for the protrusion.
1. Click Blind > Done from the SPEC TO menu.
2. Type [3] in the ENTER DEPTH window and press <ENTER>.
3. Click OK.
4. View your model in different displays.
5. Click File > Save and press <ENTER>.
6. Click File > Erase > Current; then click Yes from the dialog box.
Figure 24: The Completed Model
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 5- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• Cut and Protrusion are two important features that can be sketched
using the Sketcher Mode
• Both of these sketched features can be created in extruded and
revolved forms
• When sketching a new feature, you can always sketch it as convenient
and later alter the dimensions
• In a new sketch, lines, arcs, and circles can be constrained to different
properties such as equal lengths, concentricity, perpendicularity,
parallelism and symmetry.
• For a sketched feature, you not only have to dimension it properly but
also have to orient it in relation to reference planes (usually the side
surfaces of the base feature).
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6-1
Module
6
6
Default Datum Templates
In this module you learn how to use datum planes to create parts.
Objectives
After completing this module you will be able to:
• Describe the purpose of using datum planes as base features.
• Describe the difference between internal and external datum
planes.
• Start new designs with default or offset datum planes as base
features.
• Align sketched sections to parts.
• Orient additional datum planes within your model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
USING DATUM PLANES AS BASE FEATURES
Base Features
A base feature is the first feature that you create when starting a new part.
It is the foundation for the rest of the model. Features that are added to the
model later depend on the base feature for many or all of their references.
The following figure shows an example where a cylinder is used as the
base feature for a part.
Figure 1: Base Feature
Defining a Datum Plane
A datum plane is an imaginary plane on which you use as a reference for
orienting your parts and assemblies. Datum planes are infinite, two-
dimensional, and perfectly flat. They have no mass or volume. By default,
datum planes have two sides: yellow (the active side) and red (the passive
side). In the default mode, the system displays datum planes with a yellow
side and a text name such as FRONT, TOP, and RIGHT.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
De f a ul t Da t um Te mpl a t e s Page 6- 3
NOTES
Using a Default Datum as the Base Feature
When creating new models, Pro/ENGINEER automatically provides a
default datum plane as the first feature. This is done because datum planes
enable you to:
• Develop parent/child relationships between different features.
• Use planar (flat) surfaces as references, especially useful when
designing models that do not have any flat surfaces.
Creating Datum Planes
You can create a datum at any time. You can create additional datum
planes as reference features for a model where references do not already
exist.
When creating a datum, you can define it using several different methods.
Though methods of creation differ, the Datum Plane constraints are the
same:
• Parallel
• Through
• Offset
• Tangent
• Angle
• Normal
• Blend Section
Creating Internal Datum Planes
If you do not want datum planes to be a feature of your model, you can
create an internal datum, on the fly, when specifying sketching or
reference planes. Sometimes, it is beneficial to construct internal datums
because the system builds their dimensions into your sketched feature,
while displaying the datums only temporarily.
Consider the following rules for datum planes created on-the-fly:
• Datum planes created during feature creation are internal to and belong
to that feature.
• Datum planes on-the fly become invisible after you create the feature.
Any associated dimensions positioning the datum plane are included
with those of the feature. This gives you more choices for varying
dimensions when you create a feature pattern.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• When you use Copy/Mirror to copy features and use datum planes on-
the-fly as the mirror plane, this datum plane stays visible because it
can be referenced by more than one feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
De f a ul t Da t um Te mpl a t e s Page 6- 5
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you create new part models in Pro/ENGINEER using
the default templates.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create an extruded and a revolved feature using the
default datum planes built into the default template.
In Exercise 2, you create a datum plane during the creation of a solid
feature to establish good parent-child relationship.
Tools
Table 1: Interface Icons
Icons Description
Saved views
Draw circle
Done section
Zoom in
Modify dimension
Create dimension
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a New Part
Task 1. Create a new part model using the default template.
1. Click File > New. Name the part. Type [MOTOR_SHAFT]. Accept
the Use default template option and click OK.
2. A default coordinate system and three orthogonal default datum
planes, FRONT, RIGHT and TOP, appear with their yellow sides
facing you.
3. Click [Saved views]. Notice the list of pre-defined saved views
that have been created by using the default template.
4. From the MENU MANAGER click Setup > Units > millimeter
Newton Second (mmNs) > Set. Click OK from the WARNING
dialog box, then click Close .
5. Click Done to exit from the SETUP menu.
Figure 1: Default Datum Planes and Coordinate System
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
De f a ul t Da t um Te mpl a t e s Page 6- 7
NOTES
Task 2. Use the default datums as your sketching reference for the first
feature.
1. Select the datum tag FRONT to make it the sketching plane.
2. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude .
3. Notice that the system automatically selected the reference plane
and placed you in the Sketcher mode. If you want to change the
attributes of the protrusion you can always use the Redefine
option.
4. Notice that the INTENT MANAGER places references (RIGHT and
TOP) for the intended protrusion automatically. Click Close .
5. Click [Draw circle]. Select the intersection of the default
datum planes. Drag the diameter out of a circle and place it. The
INTENT MANAGER adds a weak diameter dimension. Middle-
click to complete the circle creation.
Figure 2: Sketched Circle at Center of Datums
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 3. Modify the diameter dimension and regenerate the section to
see the change.
1. Change the diameter. Double-click the diameter dimension. Type
[14.5].
2. Press <ENTER>.
3. Click . Notice that the system automatically assigns a depth
and completes the protrusion.
4. Change the view to the default view. Click and Defaul t.
Task 4. Modify the depth to 240mm.
1. Click > Dynamic Modify after selecting the protrusion id in
the model tree. Notice that you can use the yellow icon in the
middle of the protrusion to dynamically modify the depth by
dragging.
2. From the PART menu, click Modify > Value and select on the
protrusion that you just created. Select the depth value and type
[240]. Click Regenerate from the PART menu.
Task 5. Add a revolved cut feature to the protrusion you created. As
section references, use the default datums.
1. Click Insert > Cut > Revolve .
2. Click One Side > Done .
3. Query Sel the RIGHT datum plane as the sketching plane. Click
OKAY to confirm the direction of creation.
4. Select LEFT from the SKET VIEW menu and Query Sel the
FRONT datum plane as the reference plane.
5. Now the RIGHT datum plane is the sketching surface.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
De f a ul t Da t um Te mpl a t e s Page 6- 9
NOTES
Task 6. In a revolved section you need to use a centerline in the sketch
to define an axis of revolution. Create a centerline and proceed to define
the section.
1. Click [Zoom in] and on the left end of the shaft.
2. If the REFERENCES dialog box accidentally closes before you
define references. Click Sketch > References to access it
3. Delete the two references that the INTENT MANAGER
automatically provides.
4. Select the TOP datum plane as the first reference. Then select the
silhouette edge of the protrusion and the left end surface of the
protrusion as the second and third references as shown in the
following figure.
Select the TOP datum
plane as the first
reference.
Select the silhouette edge
as the second reference.
Select the
end surface
as the third
Figure 3: Selecting References for the Cut
5. Close the REFERENCES dialog box.
6. Sketch a centerline that coincides with the TOP datum plane.
7. Sketch three line segments.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 4: Sketch for Revolved Cut
(dimensions not shown for clarity)
Task 7. Create the diameter dimension.
1. Click .
2. In order to get the dimension scheme shown, select the horizontal
line you sketched. Select the centerline. Select the horizontal line
again. Middle-click to place the dimension.
Figure 5: Creating the Diameter Dimension
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
De f a ul t Da t um Te mpl a t e s Page 6- 11
NOTES
3. Modify the dimensions of the section. Click [Modify
dimension] and change the dimensions.
Figure 6: Modified Dimensions
Task 8. Finish defining the revolved cut on the model.
1. Click .
2. If necessary, flip the arrow to remove material from the inside of
the section. Otherwise, click Okay.
3. Select 360 and click Done in the REVOLVE TO menu.
4. Click OK to finish the feature.
5. Change to the default view. Click Vi ew > Default.
6. Save the model.
7. Click File > Erase > Current > Yes.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating an Internal Datum Plane
In this exercise, you add a protrusion to the model by creating an internal
datum plane feature on the fly.
Add this
protrusion.
Figure 7: The Start and Finished Models
Task 1. Add a datum plane to the part to use as the sketching reference
for the cylindrical protrusion you want to create.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 06_templates_datum_planes.
3. Open the part model INTERNAL_DTM.PRT.
4. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude .
5. Click One Side > Done in the ATTRIBUTES menu.
6. Click Make Datum > Offset in SETUP PLANE menu. Select the
planar front surface of the block as a reference for the new plane.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
De f a ul t Da t um Te mpl a t e s Page 6- 13
NOTES
Figure 8: Creating a Sketching Plane
7. In the OFFSET menu, click Enter Value .
8. Type [1] as the offset value. Click Done.
Task 2. Finish defining the protrusion by using the datum plane as a
sketching plane.
1. Flip the direction of the intended protrusion to point towards the
model. Click Okay to accept the direction of feature creation.
2. Click Top and select the top planar surface of the block as the
reference plane.
3. Delete the two default references. Make the A_2 axis of the first
cylinder as the first reference. Make the visible vertical surface of
the block from which the cylinder protrudes as the second
reference. Close the REFERENCES dialog box.
4. Click . Sketch a circle on the cylinder with its center coinciding
with the A_2 axis.
5. Modify the dimension of the circle’s diameter to 0.88.
6. Modify the distance from the left vertical surface of the base block
feature to 1.5.
Offset from this
front surface
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
.
Figure 9: Modified Dimensions
7. Click .
8. Click Thru Next > Done in the SPEC TO menu.
9. Complete the feature.
10. Shade and save the model.
Figure 10: Completed Model
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
De f a ul t Da t um Te mpl a t e s Page 6- 15
NOTES
11. Click File > Close Window.
12. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• Datum planes are infinite, two-dimensional, flat references that have
no mass or volume.
• Datum planes act as the ideal base feature to create new parts and
models.
• Additional datum planes can be created in Pro/ENGINEER while
creating a model.
• There are different kinds of datum planes; such as those that are
created as Through/Plane, Offset/Plane, Offset/Coord Sys, and Blend
Section.
• You can build internal datum planes when you do not want the datums
to be a feature of your model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7-1
Module
7
7
Parent/Child Relationships
In this module you learn how to work with parent/child relationships
in Pro/ENGINEER. The order that features are created and the
references that they provide creates hierarchical relationships. These
parent/child relationships determine feature interaction. You will
learn how to manage parent/child relationships to achieve the
desired behavior in your models.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe parent/child relationships in Pro/ENGINEER.
• Describe sketched feature parent/child relationships.
• Describe Pick-and-Place feature parent/child relationships.
• Change the parents of a feature in a model using the Reroute ,
Redefine and Reorder options to change the original design
intent.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS IN PRO/ENGINEER
Solid modeling is a cumulative process where the creation of certain
features must, by necessity, precede others. When creating a new feature,
Pro/ENGINEER references it to previously defined features for
information on size, shape, location, and orientation. This forms the basis
for a parent/child relationship. The feature used as the reference becomes
the parent to the new feature, the child.
Parent/child relationships determine how features react when other
features in the model change.
Pick-and-Place Feature Parent/Child Relationships
Pick-and-Place features also have parent references because they use
existing geometry for location and orientation. Any selection of a surface
or edge for this purpose generates a parent/child relationship.
The system supplies different options to select a reference, resulting in
different parents for the feature.
• Tangent Chain – specifies a reference only to the selected edge, but
developing the feature along all edges that are tangent to the selected
one.
• One by One – specifies a reference for each selected edge.
• Surf Chain – specifies a reference to the surface that is selected and a
single edge. It also can create references to selected edges if the option
From-To is used.
Sketched Feature Parent/Child Relationships
When sketching a feature, the sketching plane and the reference plane
become parents of the new feature. If the sketching plane moves, the
feature moves along with it. Similarly, if the reference plane that
determines orientation changes, the orientation of the feature changes as
well.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 3
NOTES
Figure 1: Example of Parent/Child Relationship
Modifying a Feature’s Parents
You can alter the parents of a feature by rerouting or redefining it.
Rerouting Parent Features
With the Reroute option in the FEAT menu, you can change the parents
of a feature including sketching planes, reference planes, and anything
specified as a reference in Sketcher.
When rerouting a feature, Pro/ENGINEER highlights its external
references one at a time and identifies each reference in the message area.
You have two choices. You can click Alternate and select a new
reference, or click Same Ref and retain the current reference.

Not e:
Pro/ENGINEER considers references that you use for
alignment to be dimensioning references.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 2: Bracket with Datums
Redefining Features
The Redefine option in the FEAT menu also changes the parents of a
feature. When you select a feature to redefine, the same feature dialog box
appears that is visible during initial feature creation.
Figure 3: Feature Dialog Box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 5
NOTES
Working with Sketched Features
When sketching a section, you can change the sketch plane or the sketch
itself. The features that you created after sketching a section temporarily
disappear.
When you select the Section element for a sketched feature, the menu
displays the following options:
Sketch Plane – Prompts you to specify a sketching plane and reference.
You can select and redefine all of the elements listed in the dialog box.
Therefore, in addition to being able to change the parents of a feature, you
can also change other elements such as direction and material-side-plane
before entering Sketcher mode. For each, you can select an alternate
reference or retain the same reference.
Sketch – Allows you to use Sketcher mode to change sketched entities,
add/remove constraints, and create and delete dimensions. The system
warns you if you try to delete an entity that is referenced by another
feature.
Resolving Regeneration Problems
Pro/ENGINEER bases the definition of a feature on the parent feature. If
parent features are missing, the system automatically brings you into the
RESOLVE environment.

Not e
To remove a feature from the regeneration process, you must
also decide what to do with the child features, if they exist.
Regenerating Parent/Child Features
When regenerating a model, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates features one at a
time, following the order in which they appear in the MODEL TREE. As
you create new features, it adds them to the bottom of the list in the
MODEL TREE.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
Using the Feature Reorder and Insert Modes
The Reorder or Insert Mode options in the FEAT menu modify the order
of the features. Or you can simply drag and drop the features in the model
tree to reorder their positions.

Not e
You must regenerate a parent feature before you regenerate its
children. Therefore, you cannot reorder a parent to be after its
children; nor can you reorder a child to be before its parents.
Using the Insert Mode option, you can create one or more features at a
selected position in the regeneration process. You can insert features at
any point, except before the first feature or after the last feature. After you
click Activate , you select the feature after which to insert features.
The system suppresses any features after it in the regeneration process. If
you click Cancel to stop inserting features, you must then specify if you
want to resume the features that were suppressed when you activated
insert mode. If you resume them, the system places them after the inserted
features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 7
NOTES
Base caps
hole
Cylindrical protrusion
with hole added
Finished model Rectangular Base Added
Figure 4: Reordering the Hole
Insert mode activated
before hole
Protrusion added
Figure 5: Inserting the Protrusion
Rectangular base
added
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you learn to alter the existing parent/child
relationships in a model and create new parent/child relationships to
capture the changed design intent.
Method
In Exercise 1, you move the cylindrical protrusion on the base protrusion
and place it on the cut feature by using the Reroute feature. This involves
creating new parent/child relationships for the cylindrical protrusion.
In Exercise 2, you delete the second protrusion and modify the shape of
the slot feature by using the Redefine feature.
Tools
Table 1: Interface and Sketcher Icons
Icons Description
No Hidden
Create constraint
Create dimension
Shading
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 9
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using Feature Reroute
Cylindrical
protrusion
Second
protrusion
Cut
Slot feature
Base
protrusion
Figure 6: Original Model
Figure 7: Finished Models after Exercises 1 and 2
Task 1. Reroute the half cylinder protrusion to the surface of the cut
feature.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 07_pc_relationships .
3. Retrieve the P_C_EXERCISE.PRT.
4. Click [No hidden].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
5. Click Feature > Reroute in the menu manager and leave the
default selections.
6. Do not roll back the part model. Click No from the message area.
7. Select the half-cylindrical protrusion.
8. Specify a new reference for the sketching plane. Leave the default
Alternate .
9. Click Query Sel to select the top surface of the cut.
Select this
surface as the
sketching plane
Select this
surface as the
second
dimension
Figure 8: Rerouting References for the Protrusion
10. Leave DTM3 as the horizontal reference. Click Same Ref.
11. Leave the back surface as the dimensional reference. Click Same
Ref.
12. Change the second dimensional reference. Leave the default
Alternate.
13. Click Query Sel to select the side of the model, as shown in the
preceding figure.
Task 2. The model enters the Resolve environment because the changes
that you have made created a problem. Investigate the problem and resolve
it.
1. Read the INFORMATION window that appears. It indicates that a
slot feature needed to regenerate the model is missing references.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 11
NOTES
2. Click Undo Changes > Confirm.
Task 3. Investigate the parent/child relationships of the slot feature.
1. Click Info > Parent/Child. Select the slot on the front side of the
block.
2. In the REFERENCE INFORMATION WINDOW dialog box, select
the Parent’s List to highlight it.
3. Cl i ck Tree > Expand > All .
Figure 9 References Information Window
4. Select SURFACE ID 16. The front surface of the block highlights
as the sketching plane.
5. Select SURFACE ID 64. The top of the cylinder highlights as the
horizontal reference plane. This is an unwanted relationship.
6. Select EDGE ID 73. The bottom edge of the cylinder highlights as
a dimensional reference. This reference caused the reroute to fail.
7. Select EDGE ID 47. The right edge of the second protrusion
highlights as a dimensional reference. This edge was used as an
alignment reference.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
8. Click Close .
Task 4. Break the parent/child relationship between the slot and the
cylindrical protrusion.
1. Click Edit > References.
2. Do not roll back the part model. Click No.
3. Click Same Ref. Read the message window.
4. Leave the default Alternate .
5. Click Query Sel to select the top surface of the large protrusion as
the new horizontal reference plane.
Second
protrusion
New horizontal reference
New dimensional reference
Figure 10: Rerouting the Slot
6. Leave the dimensional reference to the second protrusion. Click
Same Ref.
7. Change the edge of the cylinder's dimensional reference. Leave the
default Alternate .
8. Click Query Sel and select the top surface of the large protrusion
as shown in the preceding figure.
9. The message area displays the message: “Feature rerouted
successfully.”
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 13
NOTES
Task 5. Reroute the cylindrical protrusion as planned.
1. Select PROTRUSION ID 58 in the MODEL TREE and click Edit >
Preferences.
2. Do not roll back the model.
3. Query Sel and select the top surface of the cut as the new
sketching plane.
4. Do not change the horizontal reference. Click Same Ref.
5. Do not change the dimensional reference. Click Same Ref.
6. Query Sel and select the side of the model as the second
dimensional reference.
7. The successfully rerouted cylindrical feature appears as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 11: The Re-routed Cylindrical Feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Using Feature Redefine
Task 1. The new design intent of this model dictates you should remove
the second protrusion from the model by deleting it.
1. Right-click PROTRUSION ID 29 in the MODEL TREE, then select
Delete .
Figure 12: Warning Dialog Box
2. Click Cancel in the WARNING window.
3. The slot highlights because it is a child of the second protrusion.
Task 2. Break the parent/child relationship between the slot and the
protrusion. In addition, change the section of the slot.
1. the slot feature in the MODEL TREE and select Redefine .
2. Click Section > Define > Sketch from the FEATURE dialog box.

Ti ps & Techni ques:
You can also double-click on an element to change its
definition, instead of highlighting and clicking Define .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 15
NOTES
3. To change the section, select the left vertical sketched line, as
shown in the following figure. Click Edit > Delete .
4. Create a tangent end arc.
Sketch this arc.
Delete this
line segment.
Figure 13: New Section for Slot
Task 3. Change the dimensioning scheme of the slot.
1. Click > Explain.
2. Read the message area.
3. Select the vertical bar constraint, as shown in the following figure.
4. Read the message area.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
select this edge
select this
vertical bar
constraint
symbol
Figure 14: Interrogating a Constraint
5. Click Sketch > References in the MAIN MENU.
6. Select EDGE: F6. Click Delete > Close > Yes.

Ti ps & Techni ques:
You can easily determine external references to edges and
surfaces by looking for the brown dashed line.
7. Click View > Default.
8. Click . Add a dimension from the left side of the base
protrusion to the center of the left arc, as shown in the following
figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 17
NOTES
Figure 15: Dimensioning the Slot

Ti ps & Techni ques:
It is always good practice to dimension in the default view to
avoid unwanted parent/child relationships.
9. Click > OK.
Task 4. Remove the second protrusion from the design.
1. Highlight Protrusion id 29 in the MODEL TREE. Right-click and
select Delete .
2. Click OK to confirm the deletion of the second protrusion.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 16: Second Protrusion Deleted
Task 5. Change the design so that the slot passes completely through the
model.
1. Click Feature > Redefine in the menu manager.
2. Select the slot.
3. Click Depth > Define > Thru All > Done > OK.
Task 6. Analyze the model using shading.
1. Click [Shading]. Spin the model.
2. Click View > Saved Views >BACK > Set > Close .

Ti ps & Techni ques:
You can also select named views directly by clicking
[Saved view list].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa r e nt / Chi l d Re l a t i ons hi ps Page 7- 19
NOTES
Figure 17: Slot Redefined Using the Thru All Option
Task 7. Change the holes to have a collar.
1. Look in the MODEL TREE and confirm that the hole pattern (listed
as PATTERN) is the last feature in the model.
2. Select SHELL from the MODEL TREE and drag it below
PATTERN.
3. Note that the holes now all have a collar.
Figure 18: Reordered Shell Feature
4. Close the model without saving the changes.
5. Click File > Erase > Current > Yes.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 7- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr oENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• Parent/child relationships are hierarchical relationships within a model
whose features are cumulatively built beginning with a base feature.
• During regeneration of a model, Pro/ENGINEER strictly follows the
order in which the features were built while accounting for
parent/child relationships among them. A child feature can never be
regenerated before its parent feature.
• To capture changing design intent, parent-child relationships between
various features of a model have to be re-negotiated. For this,
Reroute , Redefine , and Reorder are used as needed.
• By using the Insert Mode option, new features can be inserted in
between features of an existing model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8-1
Module
8
8
Sweeps and Blends
In this module, you learn how to add and remove material using
sweeps and parallel blends.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Create swept features.
• Create parallel blend features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
SWEEP AND TRAJECTORIES
Creating Sweeps and Trajectories
Sweeps consist of two features—the trajectory and the cross-section. The
trajectory is the path along which you sweep the cross-section. The first
step in defining a sweep is to creating a trajectory. The second step is to
create the cross-section. You must locate the cross-section with respect to
the trajectory.
A sweep can add material when defined as a protrusion, or remove
material when defined as a cut.
A sweep trajectory can be sketched as either open or closed; that is the
section does not have to end at the point of origin. To illustrate this point,
the following figure provides three different combinations of trajectories
and sections.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 3
NOTES
Open trajectory, closed section
Closed trajectory, closed section (No Inn Fcs)
Closed Trajectory, Open Section (Add Inn Fcs)
Figure 1: Sweep Trajectories and Section
Creating Parallel Blends
A Blend feature combines at least two planar sections joined together at
their edges with transitional surfaces to form a continuous feature. You
can use blends as forms for either protrusions or cuts.
You create a parallel blend from a single section that contains multiple
contours, called subsections. In the following figure, each segment is
matched to the subsequent segment, creating the blended surfaces between
the corresponding segments. Therefore, each section or subsection must
always have the same number of segments/vertices.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Straight transition
Smooth transition
Figure 2: Parallel Blends
When blending the sections together, Pro/ENGINEER connects the start
point of each section and continues to connect the vertices of the sections
in a clockwise manner.
The Feature Tools option in the SKETCH pull down menu changes the
start point for any section to control the blend or twist of the blended
surfaces. Or you can use the pop-up menu to select a different start point.
Figure 3: Start Points and Twisted Blend
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 5
NOTES
Figure 4: Start Points and Blend Shape
When creating a parallel blend, you create all of the sections for the blend
in the same sketch. You toggle between sections to distinguish between
each sections. The feature attribute for parallel blends is smooth or
straight.
• The straight attribute blends the transitional surfaces from one section
straight to the next.
• The smooth attribute connects the section with spline surfaces.
Subsections can be located with respect to the other subsections via
dimensions or constraints. If you begin your part with three default datum
planes, all subsections can be dimensioned to them. As with any feature,
the dimensioning scheme is important, since it captures the design intent
of the model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 5: Dimensioning Parallel Blend Sections
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 7
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you will create parallel blends and simple sweeps.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a parallel blend by first retrieving a section to be
used for subsections. This is an effective technique to use for common
sections, especially if they are complex.
In Exercise 2, you create a swept protrusion.
Tools
Table 1: Interface Icons
Icons Description
Toggle grid
Refit
Toggle datum planes
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Parallel Blend Features
Task 1. Start a new part without using the default datum template.
1. Create a new part and name it PARALLEL_BLEND.PRT.
2. Uncheck the Use default template option, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6: Creating Part without using Default Template
3. Click Empty > OK in the NEW FILE OPTIONS dialog box.
4. Click Insert > Datum > Plane .
Task 2. Create a parallel blended protrusion.
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Blend
2. Accept all the defaults in the BLEND OPTS menu and click Done.
3. Leave the default Strai ght in the ATTRIBUTES menu and click
Done.
4. Select DTM3 as the sketching reference and click Okay for
direction.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 9
NOTES
5. Click Top and select DTM2 as the reference plane.
6. Toggle to show the gridlines.
7. Zoom in (about 4 X 4 grid squares) at the intersection of DTM1
and DTM2.
Task 3. Retrieve the first section from disk and place it.
1. DTM1 and DTM2 as section references are placed. Close the
REFERENCES dialog box.
2. Click Sketch > Data from File.
3. Select BLEND.SEC and click Open. A small blend section and the
SCALE ROTATE dialog box will appear.
4. For the Scale option, type [3. 0] and press <ENTER>. For Rotate,
leave the default [0. 0] value. Do not close the dialog box.
5. Select the center point of the section; move and place it so that
your vertical and horizontal centerlines snap to DTM1 and DTM2
respectively.
Place center
point of
section at
intersection of
datums
Figure 7: Placing the First Section
6. Click in the SCALE ROTATE dialog box.
7. Click [Refit].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 4. Add the second section to the sketch using the same sketch, but
a different scale value.
1. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section. Notice the first
subsection gets deactivated and turns gray.
2. To retrieve the BLEND.SEC section again, click Sketch > Data
from file.
3. For Scale, type [1.0] and press <ENTER>.
4. Leave the default [0.0] as the rotating angle. Do not close the
SCALE ROTATE dialog box.
5. Place the sections so that the centerlines are coincident with the
previous section centerlines.
6. Click in the SCALE ROTATE dialog box.
Task 5. Use the same sketch again for the third section of the blend
assigning it a scale factor of 2.
1. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section. Make sure both
the sections are gray before bringing in the final section.
2. Retrieve the same BLEND.SEC section again and assign a scale
factor of [2.0].
3. The three sections should look as shown in the following figure.
4. Change the view to default.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 11
NOTES
Figure 8: Creating the Third Section
Task 6. Define the feature.
1. Click to get out of the intent manager.
2. Type [30.0] as the depth for the second section and press
<ENTER>.
3. Type [20.0] as the depth for the third section and press <ENTER>.
4. Click OK.
5. The blend should look as shown in the figure below except the
dimensions will not be visible.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 9: Completed Blend

Not e:
Note that Pro/ENGINEER uses straight lines as transitions to
attach the vertices of the subsections.
Task 7. Change the shape of the transitional surfaces from a straight line
transition to a spline transition by using Redefine .
1. Right-click on the blend protrusion in the model tree and select
Redefine .
2. Click Attribute > Define > Smooth > Done .
3. Finish the definition. Click OK.
4. Save the file and close the window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 13
NOTES
Figure 10: Straight and Smooth Surfaces
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Create a Simple Sweep Protrusion
Task 1. Create a part, starting with default datum planes. Create the
base feature protrusion as a sweep.
1. Start a new part and name it SWEEP.PRT.
2. Clear the Use the default template option in the NEW dialog box
and check Empty in the NEW FILE OPTIONS dialog box followed
by OK.
3. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to create the default datum planes
or click [Insert datum]
4. Toggle to turn on the datum planes.
5. Click Insert > Protrusion > Sweep.

Not e:
A sweep is a two-part sketch: the trajectory is first and the
cross-section follows.
Task 2. Sketch the trajectory on DTM2 using DTM3 as the bottom
reference.
1. Click Sketch Traj from the SWEEP TRAJ menu.
2. Select DTM2 and click Okay for the direction.
3. Click Bottom and select DTM3 as the reference.
4. Check to see if DTM3 and DTM1 are the default references and
close the REFERENCES dialog box.
5. Sketch an open trajectory section consisting of a line, a tangent arc;
and then two lines as shown in the following figure. Place the
correct dimensions.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 15
NOTES
Sketched lines
Sketched arc fillet
Figure 11: Showing Sketch and Dimensions
6. When you have completed the trajectory, click from the
INTENT MANAGER.
7. The system has placed you in another Sketcher session.
Task 3. Note that the centerlines provided by the system at the start
point of the trajectory. The system defines the sketching plane as a plane
normal to the trajectory, located at the start point. Sketch the cross-section
of the sweep.
1. Sketch an inverted T cross-section, as shown in the following
figure. You may want to turn the Sketcher grid off.
Trajectory starts
here
Figure 12: Sketching an Inverted “T”
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 8- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
The default view appears as follows:
Trajectory
Cross-section
Start point
Figure 13: Default View
2. Click to complete the section.
3. Click OK to complete feature. The sweep is rounded where there
was an arc in the trajectory, and mitered where there was a corner
(nontangent segment) in the trajectory.
4. Save the file and erase it from memory.
Figure 14: The Completed Sweep
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Sweeps and Bl ends Page 8- 17
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that
• When defining a Swept Feature, you must define its trajectory and its
cross-section.
• Sweeps can either add or remove material depending on whether they
are defined as protrusions or cuts.
• A parallel blend is created from a single section that contains multiple
contours called subsections.
• The parallel blend feature can have either a straight attribute or a
smooth attribute.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9-1
Module
9
9
Relations and Parameters
In this module you learn to drive the design of a model by using
relations. Relations create explicit parent-child relationships.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe the purpose of relations.
• Describe the four types of relations pertaining to models.
• Create relations that allow your child features to drive their parent
features.
• Re-order relations.
• Delete and update invalid relations to accommodate changes to the
design intent.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS
Parametric Relations
Relations are user-defined equations written between symbolic dimensions
and parameters. They can be used to control the effects of modifications
on models, to define values for dimensions in parts and assemblies, and to
act as constraints for design conditions.
The following figure represents a simple relation between the two
dimensions of a rectangular feature, where d0 is always twice the size of
d1.
Figure 1: Part Relation - Relation: d0 = 2*d1
The four types of model relations are:
• Assembly relations – Relate different component parameters to one
another using a coding symbol to designate different components.
• Part relations – Relate different feature parameters to one another in
a single part.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 3
NOTES
• Feature relations – Relate parameters specific to one feature in the
model.
• Pattern relations – Relate specific pattern parameters within a
pattern.

Part relations
Hole centered in plate
Feature relations: Cam slot
shape driven by relation
/*hole centered in plate
d5=d2/2
d6=d3/2
Assembly relations
Bracket centered on
plate
Figure 2: Different Relation Types
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Representing Relations: Types and Symbols
The table below presents the various elements that you can include in
relations.
Table 1: Elements of Relations
Relation Types: Equality: d0=2* Comparison:
Constraint: d1>= 2.67 d1 d12 = 1.5
if (d4>.25) else
endif d12=1
Dimension Symbols d# – Part dimensions
d#:# – Dimensions in Assembly mode
rd# – Reference dimensions
sd# – Sketcher dimensions
Tolerance Symbols tm# – Minus tolerance
tp# – Plus tolerance
tpm# – Plus/minus tolerance
Instance Symbols Integer parameter for instances in each direction of a
pattern: p0, p1, p2, etc.
User Parameters Numeric parameter (i.e., 3.67)
Character string parameter (i.e., 32-A24-67B)
Yes or no parameter
Model note parameter
Incorporating Your Design Intent Using Relations
Relations enable you to capture sophisticated levels of design intent for
your models. They are an integral part of any advanced design of parts and
assemblies.
Relations allow one feature to drive another. You can take advantage of
this unique capability and use child features to drive the parent features. In
a traditional parent/child relationship, it is the parent feature which always
takes precedence (whether in dimensioning or regeneration). Parametric
relations allows you to craft your model in such as way as to reverse the
parent/child hierarchy.

Not e:
Do not create relations using reference dimensions.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 5
NOTES
In the following figure, you could write a relation that drives the
placement of the hole so that it is centered top to bottom:
/*center hole top to bottom
d5=d2/2
Figure 3: Plate Showing Parameters
You could then write another relationship to keep the hole centered from
left to right:
/*center hole left to right
d6=d3/2
Once you have added these relations, Pro/ENGINEER automatically
centers the hole in the plate and retains it at the center, even when you
modify the height or width of the plate later on.

Not e:
You can change the symbolic name of a dimension by using
Modify > DimCosmetics > Symbol .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 4: Relations that Drive Hole Location

Ti ps & Techni ques:
It is good practice to add a relation as soon as you realize that
you need it in your design. Do not wait until the end of the
design process. It is also good practice to comment your
relations using the /* to document the design intent of the
relations.
You should always test your relations to be sure that they
function correctly.
Order of Relations
Pro/ENGINEER evaluates relations in sequential order. Therefore, the
order that you enter them in is important. During regeneration of the
model, the system evaluates the relations and checks to see if all of them
are still valid. If not, it issues a warning.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 7
NOTES
The following figure illustrates the consequences of entering relations
improperly:
Relations added:
d5=d4
d4=d2/2
After first regeneration
Figure 5: Reordering Relations
The design intent is to center the hole on the plate. The two relations,
d5 = d4 and d4 = d2/2, are added in that order. After the first
regeneration of the model, the relations do not capture the desired intent.
Design intent is captured by reversing the order of relations. Relations can
be deleted or edited using the Edit Rel option. The final regenerated
model is shown in the following figure.
Figure 6: Model Regenerated with Relations Sorted
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Design Changes
As a design cycle progresses, the design intent of a model tends to change.
This may invalidate existing relations in the model. Whenever
Pro/ENGINEER encounters invalid relations during regeneration, it
automatically highlights the problem and prompts you to correct it. You
can either delete the relation or update it.
If you have to modify or delete a relation because of a design change or an
error, you can edit the relation in the model using a system text editor. The
editor that your system uses depends on the type of workstation that you
have.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 9
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you create relations and manipulate their defining
parameters.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create relations to capture the design intent of a part,
test the relations.
In Exercise 2, you create parameters to control features using relations.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Relations
Task 1. Center the straight hole on top of the rectangular base solid
feature.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 09_relations .
3. Open RELATIONS.PRT.
4. Change to wireframe display.
Figure 7: Symbolic Dimensions of RELATIONS.PRT
5. Click Relations from the PART menu.
6. Select the hole to display its dimensions.
7. The dimensions appear in their symbolic form (i.e., d5, d6, d7).
8. Select the block to display its symbolic dimensions.
Task 2. Start adding a relation.
1. Click Add from the RELATIONS menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 11
NOTES
2. Enter a comment to describe the function of the relation. Type [/*
center hole front to back]. Press <ENTER>.
3. Type [d6 = d4/2], then press<ENTER>.
4. For the second relation, type [/* Center hole left to
right], then press<ENTER>.
5. Type [d5 = d2/2], then press<ENTER>.
6. Press <ENTER> on a blank prompt line to finish adding relations.
Task 3. Toggle between the numeric and symbolic values.
1. Click Switch Dim from the RELATIONS menu.
2. Click Done from the MODEL REL menu.
3. Click Regenerate . The hole should move to the center of the
block.

Not e
If your relation contains an error, click Relations > Edit.
Task 4. Test the two relations by modifying the base feature width and
depth.
1. Click Modify from the PART menu.
2. Select the rectangular base.
3. Select the width of the block and change it to [70. 0] from 50.
4. Click Modify from the PART menu. Select the depth of the block
and change it to [90. 0] from 50.
5. Regenerate the model.
Task 5. Show the dimensions of the hole.
1. Click Modify from the PART menu.
2. Select the straight hole to display its dimensions.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Confirm that the two locating dimensions are 35 and 45.
4. Change the base back to the original dimension values. Select each
dimension, and type [50.0].
5. Regenerate the model.
Task 6. Add a relation that limits the diameter of the hole to be less than
or equal to 11.25.
1. Click Relations from the PART menu.
2. Select the hole feature. Identify the symbolic name given to the
hole diameter, (d7).
3. Click Add from the RELATIONS menu.
4. Type an appropriate comment.
5. Type [d7 <= 11.25].
6. Press <ENTER> on a blank line.
7. Click Done from the MODEL REL menu.
Task 7. Test the relation by modifying the diameter dimension.
1. Click Modify > Dimension from the PART menu.
2. Click the diameter dimension followed by Done Sel . The
DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box appears.
3. Type [15] as the nominal value and then click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 13
NOTES
Figure 8: Dimension Properties Dialog Box
4. Click Regenerate from the PART menu to update the model.
5. Note the warning in the information window; then close it.
6. Continue the regeneration regardless of the warning.
7. Type [Y] to continue the regeneration, and press <ENTER>.
Task 8. Review the relations via the information window.
1. Click Relations > Show Rel .
2. Close the window and click Done.
3. Modify back to a smaller diameter. Click Modify, select the hole
select the diameter dimension, then type [10.0].
4. Regenerate the model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 9. Resume a hole and counterbore that were previously
suppressed.
1. Click Feature > Resume.
2. Retrieve only the last set of features that were suppressed. Click
Last Set > Done from the RESUME menu followed by Done
from the FEAT menu.
Figure 9: The Resumed Hole
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 15
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parameters for Feature-
Control
Task 1. Add a parameter to the model then control the counterbore
depth using the parameter.
1. Click Relations from the PART menu.
2. Click Add Param.
3. Define a real number so the depth can vary infinitely. Click Real
Number.
4. Type [depth_ratio] in the message area followed by <ENTER>.
5. Type [.10] followed by <ENTER>.
Task 2. Start to add a relation.
1. Click Part Rel from the MODEL REL menu.
2. Select the surface of the counterbore hole.
3. Click Add.
4. Type [/*control the counterbore depth], then press
<ENTER>.
5. Enter a relation to have the conterbore as deep as the hole minus
the thread depth. Type [d23 = depth_ratio*d22], then press
<ENTER>.
6. Press <ENTER> on an empty line.
7. Click Done from the MODEL REL menu.
8. Regenerate the model.
Task 3. Test your relation .
1. Increase the total depth of the hole. Click Modify and select on the
counterbore hole.
2. Click the depth dimension and type [30].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Regenerate the model.
Task 4. Edit the ratio parameter to change the relationship between the
counterbore and hole.
1. Click Set Up from the PART menu, then click Parameters from
the PART SETUP menu.
2. Leave the default part and click Modify from the MODEL PARAM
menu.
3. Select DEPTH_RATIO and type [.5].
4. Click Done from the PART SETUP menu.
5. Click Regenerate .
Task 5. Change the symbolic name of the entire depth of the hole and
the counterbore depth to document the design.
1. Click Modify > Dim Cosmetics.
2. Select the depth dimension and type [entire_depth].
3. Select depth dimension of the counterbore, then type
[cbore_depth].
4. Click Done from the DIM COSMETIC menu, then click Done from
the MODIFY menu.
Task 6. Inspect the parameter in the model using various methods.
1. Click Setup > Parameters > Info from the MODEL PARAMS
menu.
2. Read the INFORMATION window; then click Close .
3. Click Done from the PART SETUP menu.
4. Click Relations > Show Rel .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re l a t i ons a nd Pa r a me t e r s Page 9- 17
NOTES
Figure 10: Relation Information Window
5. Notice that the system lists the relations you have defined along
with the parameters. Also notice that the new symbolic names are
now displayed.
6. Click Close > Done .
7. Save the model and click File > Close Window.
8. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 9- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you learned that:
• Relations are user-defined mathematical equations composed of
symbolic dimensions and parameters, which capture design
relationships within a part or among the many component parts of an
assembly.
• There are four different kinds of relations: Assembly Relations, Part
Relations, Feature Relations, and Pattern Relations.
• The ordering of relations is crucial in capturing design intent as
Pro/ENGINEER evaluates relations in consecutive order.
• During model regeneration, invalid or conflicting relations are
highlighted by prompts for resolution.
• The user should always plan ahead to make relations an integral part of
the design of parts and assemblies.
• Relations can be intelligently used to make child features drive their
parent features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 10-1
Module
1
1
0
0
Behavioral Modeling
CAD technology has matured through four distinct stages: 2-D
drafting, 3-D wireframe modeling, 3-D solid modeling, and 3-D solid
modeling with associative, parametric, and feature-based
characteristics.
The latest state-of-the-art, 5
th
generation CAD technology is called
Behavioral Modeling. In this module you learn about the behavioral
modeling capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe the purpose of Behavioral Modeling.
• Describe various Behavioral Modeling components and their uses.
• Analyze mass properties.
• Create model and relation analysis features.
• Conduct sensitivity, feasibility, and optimization studies.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
BEHAVIORAL MODELING
Product requirements are becoming increasingly volatile and products are
being custom-tailored more and more. In such a scenario, the requirements
for a mechanical design automation technology that automates mundane
design tasks so that the designer can concentrate on creative work
becomes apparent. Behavioral Modeling is such a technology.
Figure 1: CAD Evolution
Behavioral Modeling Features
The power of Behavioral Modeling derives from three factors:
1. Smart Models
2. Objective-Driven Design Capabilities
3. Open Extensible Environment
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: Cornerstone of Behavioral Modeling
Smart Models
• Smart models are intelligent designs that adapt to their environment.
• They contain all the specifications and process information they need
within them.
• As smart models are “aware” of their contexts and purposes, the
designer can develop innovative, differentiated, and customer-
responsive products.
Figure 3: Smart Model Adapting to Changing Needs
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Objective-Driven Design Capability
• The objective-driven design approach automatically optimizes designs
to meet any number of objectives captured in a smart model.
• It can simultaneously resolve conflicting objectives, a task that was
often impossible using traditional approaches.
• In addition to defining a problem with standard types of measurements
such as the center of gravity or an edge length, more complex
requirements can be captured in features such as surface or curve
analysis or complex equations.
For example, perhaps you want to place a hole coincident with the axis of
the center of gravity of a design. Capturing the center of gravity in a
feature and parametrically tying it to the hole will ensure that the features
remain coincident, even as other design changes are made and the center
of gravity moves to reflect these changes.
Open Environment
• Smart models can accommodate features that link to information in
other applications.
• These external features make the design solution infinitely extensible.
• External features reside within smart models and link to other
applications.
USING BEHAVIORAL MODELER
The following are the uses of the Behavioral Modeler:
• Create feature parameters based on measurements and analyses of the
model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 5
NOTES
No Overall
Height
Dimension
Figure 4: Creating Parameters
• Create datum geometry based on measurements and analyses of the
model.
Figure 5: Creating Datum Features
• Create new types of measurements tailored to your specific needs.
Surface Area normal to
the centerline of the pipe
at any given location. All
geometry needed for the
calculation is part of the
measurement.
Figure 6: Creating New Types of Measurements
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• Analyze the behavior of measured parameters as dimensions vary.
X-Axis = width of tank
Y-Axis = volume of tank
Figure 7: Analyze Varying Measurements
• Automatically find the dimension values that achieve a desired
behavior of the model.

Center of Gravity
and Axis of Rotation
must line up
vertically.
Size of the crank can
vary to achieve the goal
while also minimizing
the mass.
Figure 8: Finding the Correct Distance and Size
• Allow information to be passed between external programs and
Pro/ENGINEER.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 7
NOTES
• Spreadsheet programs:
Differential equation solvers
Technical computing environments in numeric computation and high-
level programming languages
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
Light or optics analysis
Piping or HVAC analysis.
Solve model configuration that best satisfies multiple goals and
constraints.
Two pipes in heat
exchangers that cannot
intersect; that have a
minimum allowable bend
radius; and whose length
must be minimized.
Figure 9: Solving Complex Problems
• Perform graph matching.
Measured Curve - Graph
of analysis feature of
current model
Ideal Curve - Match
model to this curve
Figure 10: Graph Matching
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• Perform motion analyses.
Analyze the distance
between these two
points through the
full range of motion
Analyze the
angle through the
full motion range
Figure 11: Analyzing Motion
Defining the Behavioral Modeler Components
• Analysis Features – A datum feature that measures or evaluates
geometry and produces parameters and geometry as result.
Analysis features
Figure 12: Analysis Features Symbols

Not e:
Analysis features are evaluated every time the model is
regenerated. The system establishes a parent-child relationship
between the analysis features and their predecessors in the
regeneration cycle.
• Field Points – A datum point that is partially constrained and free to
move within that constraint.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 9
NOTES
Figure 13: Field Points
• User-Defined Analysis (UDA) – An analysis that is customized to
the users need, and is defined by a set of features.
Figure 14: User-Defined Analysis
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• Sensitivity Analysis – An analysis that plots how a change to
particular parameter affects the results of an analysis. In the following
figure, the X-axis measures the width dimension and the Y-axis
volume dimension.
Figure 15: Sensitivity Plot
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 11
NOTES
• Feasibility Study – A study that determines if a specified constraint
or goal can be achieved by varying certain model parameters within
specified ranges.
Figure 16: Feasibility Dialog Box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• Optimization – If there are multiple solutions to a specified set of
constrains or goals, then optimization is used to determine which
solution provides the minimum or maximum value of a specified goal.
You can incorporate optimization into a model as a feature so that
modifications to the model will be incorporated automatically.
Figure 17: Optimization Dialog Box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 13
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory your learn the diverse practical applications of
behavioral modeling functionality.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a datum analysis feature to measure mass
properties by designing a new propeller blade for underwater applications.
In Exercise 2, you create three analysis features. It is shown that the
position of each analysis feature in the MODEL TREE is critical in order to
ensure that the proper parameter is calculated.
In Exercise 3, you create and use Sensitivity, Feasibility and Optimization
Studies.
Tools
Table 1: Behavioral Modeling Icons
Icons Description
Build feature
Build feature and repeat the same feature type creation
Go to next page
Preview feature geometry
Create an analysis feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Datum Analysis Feature to
Measure Mass Properties
Task 1. Change the working directory and open the blade part.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 10_behavioral_modeling.
3. Click > BLADE.PRT.
4. Clear the display of datum planes.
5. Click Utilities > Environment to remove the spin center from the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box. The model appears as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 18: The Blade Part

Not e:
The model’s design cycle is partially completed. The model’s
state shown on the screen represents the model with the
preliminary machining step. Not only do you want to find the
mass of the model, but also you want a datum coordinate
system that represents the center of gravity to be created at the
current location in the regeneration cycle.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 15
NOTES
Task 2. Create a datum analysis feature that measures mass.
1. Click Insert > Datum > Analysis.
2. Type [MASS_PROPS] in the NAME box and press <ENTER>.
3. Select MODEL ANALYSIS as the type of analysis, and click
[Next Page].
4. Leave the default Model Mass Properties as the TYPE.
5. Click Compute.
6. If prompted for density in the message window, type [.75].
(The current model units are lbs/in3 )
7. Close the MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box.
Task 3. Create the VOLUME and MASS parameters.
1. In the RESULT PARAMS section of the ANALYSIS dialog box,
check that VOLUME is set to YES. Scroll down and set the Mass
parameter name to Yes. Click CREATE section.
2. Click [Next Page].
Task 4. Create a COORDINATE SYSTEM at the center of gravity.
1. With CSYS_COG_95 highlighted, click Yes.
2. Click [Preview]. The following figure displays the
created coordinate system.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 19: Created Coordinate Analysis Feature
3. Click [Build Feature].
Task 5. View the values of the newly created parameters as columns in
the MODEL TREE.
1. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display.
2. Select Feat Params as the TYPE.
3. Type [MASS] in the NAME box, then press <ENTER>.
4. Type [VOLUME] in the NAME box, then press <ENTER> and click
OK.
5. Notice the parameter values in the MODEL TREE.
(If necessary, widen the model tree or change the width of the
columns.)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 17
NOTES
Figure 20: Parameter Values Reflected in Model Tree
6. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Item Display > Suppressed
Objects > OK.
7. Select the cut in the MODEL TREE and click > Resume.
Notice the MASS and VOLUME parameters have updated.
Figure 21: Updated Parameter Values in Model Tree
Task 6. Create a copy of the analysis feature and reorder it to confirm
that the measurement regenerates in the order of creation.
1. Click Feature > Copy > , select the MASS PROPS feature, and
click > .
2. Expand the group in the MODEL TREE to view the new analysis
feature. Then select the group and click > Ungroup. Notice
that both are indicating the same MASS and VOLUME parameters.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Select the new analysis feature, then click > Redefine. Modify
the name to MASS_PROPS_2, press <ENTER> and click .
Figure 22: Creating a New Analysis Feature
4. Drag the first MASS_PROPS analysis feature above the cut. Notice
the changing values and COG coordinate system location.

Figure 23: Dynamic Value Changes in Mass Property Calculations

Not e:
An Analysis feature’s results are governed by its position in
the model tree. If you were to continue with this model,
additional features could be created that are based on the
results of these analysis features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 19
NOTES
5. Click File > Close Window.
6. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Analyze Fluid Volume in a Cup
Task 1. Measure the volume before the shell feature up to a ‘fluid-level’
plane.
1. Open STYROFOAM.PRT.
Figure 24: Start Model
2. In MODEL TREE, click and drag the red insert marker above the
shell feature.
3. Click > Offset and select DTM2. Click Enter Value,
type [4.0] and click .
4. Click Setup > Name, select the newly created plane from the
MODEL TREE and enter [FLUID_LEVEL]. Click Done from the
PART SETUP menu to return to the highest level.
5. Click [Analysis Feature] > Model Analysis.
6. Type [VOL_SOLID] for the name and press <ENTER>.
7. Click [Next Page].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 21
NOTES
8. Select One-Sided Volume from the TYPE drop-down menu in the
MEASURE dialog box.
9. Select the FLUID_LEVEL datum plane from the model tree.
10. Click Fl i p (so that the arrow faces downward) and OKAY.
11. Notice the calculated volume in the Results section, and click
Close .
12. Ensure that the volume parameter is set to Yes, edit the name to
[VOL], and press <ENTER>.
13. Click [Build Feature].
14. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display.
15. Select Feat Params as the Type .
16. Type [Vol] in the name box, then press <ENTER> and click OK.
Figure 25: Model Tree with Volume Parameter
Task 2. Measure the one-sided volume after the shell feature.
1. Click and drag the Insert marker below the shell feature.
2. Click [Analysis Feature] > Model Analysis.
3. Type [VOL_SHELL] for the name and press <ENTER>.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
4. Click [Next Page].
5. For the TYPE, select One-Sided Volume.
6. Select the FLUID_LEVEL datum plane.
7. Click Flip (so that the arrow faces downward) and OK. Notice the
calculated volume in the RESULTS section, and click Close.
8. Ensure that the volume parameter is set to Yes, edit the name to
[VOL], and press <ENTER>.
9. Click [Build Feature].
Task 3. Create relation type analysis feature. This relation will
calculate the difference between the previous one-sided volumes.
1. Click [Analysis Feature] > Relation from the type button.
2. Type [VOL_FLUID] for the name and press <ENTER>.
3. Click [Next Page].
4. When the text editor appears, type the relation on one line as
[vol=vol:fid_vol_solid - vol:fid_vol_shell]
5. Click [Build Feature], and observe the volume
calculations as shown below.
Figure 26: Volume Calculations of Styrofoam Cup
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 23
NOTES
Task 4. Investigate the fluid volume when the model is modified.
1. Modify the height of the Fluid_Level plane to [5.0] and
Regenerate .
2. Toggle the model tree display off and on to refresh its display. The
volume values should update as shown below.
Figure 27: Updated Volume Values
3. Modify the height of the Fluid_Level plane to [2.50], Regenerate,
and refresh the Model tree.
4. Select the first protrusion from the model tree, and click >
Modify.
5. Modify the dimensions as shown in the following figure,
Regenerate , and refresh the Model tree.
Figure 28: Modified Styrofoam Model
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
6. The new fluid volume with the modified dimensions is 43.15in
3
and is shown in the model tree.
Task 5. Use behavior modeling capabilities to solve for a fluid volume
of an even 50.0
1. Click Add > Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization in the main
menu.
2. Refer to the following figure and set Study Type to Feasibility.
3. Set the design constraint to solve for a vol_fluid = [50.0]. Click
Add from the design constraints area and select VOL: VOL_FLUID.
4. From the parameter drop-down in the DESIGN CONSTRAINTS
dialog box, click Set and enter [50] as the value followed by OK.
5. Click Add Dimension and select the dimension corresponding to
the Fluid Plane (2.5 dimension).
6. Click Done Sel and enter [2. 0] and press <ENTER> for the
minimum value and enter [3. 0] for the maximum value.
Figure 29: Conducting a Feasibility Study
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 25
NOTES
7. Click Options > Preferences followed by Run and edit the
Convergence % to [0.001] as shown in the following figure and
click OK.
Figure 30: Setting Convergence Value
8. Click Compute.
9. After notification of a feasible solution, click Close > Confirm.
10. Refresh the model tree and observe that the vol_fluid is [50.0] with
a fluid level of [2.788].
Figure 31: The “Feasible” Solution
11. Click > File > Close Window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 26 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Crankshaft Optimization
Task 1. Create an analysis feature to measure the mass properties of the
part. Output a MASS parameter and a datum coordinate system at the
center of gravity.
1. Open CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
Figure 32: Start Model
2. Click [Analysis Feature] > Model Analysis.
3. Type [Mass_Props] for the name, press <ENTER> and click
[Next Page] .
4. If necessary, select Model Mass Properties as the Type, and click
Compute > Close.
5. Toggle the Volume parameter to NO, and the Mass parameter to
YES to create only the Mass parameter.
6. Click [Next Page] .
7. Toggle the Csys creation to YES, edit the name to [COG], press
<ENTER>, and click .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 27
NOTES
8. Click > Side and note that the current COG is well below the
axis of revolution. Create another analysis feature that measures
the distance between the center of gravity coordinate system and
the crankshaft’s axis of rotation, A_1.
9. Click [Analysis Feature] > Measure.
10. Type [COG_DIST] for the name, press <ENTER> and click
[Next Page] .
11. Select Distance as the Type, and select A_1 and COG to measure
between them as shown. (The distance should be approximately
0.35)
.
Figure 33: Distance Measurement
12. Click Close , verify the Distance parameter is set to YES, and
click
Task 2. Use a sensitivity study to determine which dimension
modification (height or width) has the most impact on the COG.
1. Set the following config option which will use Excel to create
graphs instead of the Pro/E graph window. Ask your instructor if
you need assistance.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 28 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 34: Setting Configuration Option
2. Click Analysis > Sensitivity Analysis > Dimension, and select
the main lobe of the crank as shown below. Note that dimensions
d28 and d27 are the main height and width dimensions. If
necessary, click Info > Switch Dimensions to see dimensions in
their symbolic form.
Figure 35: Selecting Main Lobe of Crank
3. Select d27 and notice that the system by default has placed Min
and Max values for the Variable range at +/- 10%.
4. Click > DISTANCE:COG_DIST > Ok to set the parameter to
plot.
5. Click Compute. After a few moments, the following graph should
appear:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 29
NOTES
Figure 36: Sensitivity Plot

Not e:
This is an Excel spreadsheet running inside of Pro/E. on
the graph will allow you to Open, Edit, or Delete the graph.
6. Record the difference between the high and low values on the
vertical graph scale. (0.404 - 0.304 = 0.1) Therefore, changing
this dimension by +/-10% would move the COG by [0.1].
7. Select the graph and > Delete . Then click Dimension, select
d28, and click Compute.
Figure 37: Modified Sensitivity Plot
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 30 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
8. Again, record the difference between the high and low values on
the vertical graph scale. (0.529 - 0.229 = 0.3) Therefore, changing
this dimension by +/-10% would move the COG by [0.3].
9. In conclusion, the Sensitivity Study has determined that the height
dimension (d28) has more of an impact on the COG than the width
dimension (d27).
10. Click Close .
Task 3. Create a FEASIBILITY STUDY to get the center of gravity and
axis of revolution to equal zero. There are certain dimensions that you
already know you can change.
1. Click Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization > Feasibility.
2. Click Add, select the DISTANCE:COG_DIST parameter, Set the
value to [0], and click OK > Cancel.
3. Click Add Dimension, and select dimensions d27, d28, and d31,
then click .
4. Enter the Min and Max values as shown.
Figure 38: Minimum and Maximum Values
5. Click Options > Preferences, check only Graph constraints and
click OK. Click Compute for the results.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 31
NOTES
Figure 39: Optimization Limit Convergence Graph
6. Notice the COG distance quickly dropped from 3.5 to a value very
close to zero with only two iterations.
7. Compare the before and after dimension values as shown below.
Note that the radius value hardly changed, and therefore could be
removed from future studies.
Figure 40: Comparing Dimension Values
8. Click > Side and notice that if these new values were kept, the
COG Csys would coincide with the rotation axis. Conclusion:
balancing this model is feasible.
9. Undo the changes and close the dialog box for now. Click Undo,
then Close from the OPTIMIZATION/FEASIBILITY dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 32 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 4. Create a third analysis feature so that the material between the
main shaft and the balancing body stays above a certain value.
1. Click [Analysis Feature] > Measure .
2. Type [MATL_DIST] for the name, press <ENTER> and click
[Next Page] .
3. Select Distance as the Type, and select the two edges shown.
Figure 41: Selecting Edges
4. Click Close , verify the Distance parameter is set to YES, and
click .
Task 5. Redo the Feasibility study to see if a feasible solution can be
found when this new distance parameter is added as another design
constraint.
1. Click Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization. Notice that the
previous values are maintained.
2. Click Add > DISTANCE:MATL_DIST. Set the parameter value to
be ‘>=’ a set value of [0.25]. Then click OK > Cancel.
3. Click Options > Preferences, and uncheck any available graph
options.
4. Compute the results. (A feasible solution should be found)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 33
NOTES
TASK 6. For the final criteria, check that the mass of the part is
minimized, as well as all the other constraints by running an
OPTIMIZATION STUDY.
1. Click Optimization from the top of the dialog box.
2. Leave Minimize and Mass:Mass_Props as the goal.
3. Compute the results. Notice the reduction of mass on the graph
and that the dimensions are now varied differently.
Figure 42: Observing Graph and Model
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 34 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 7. Next, incorporate the Optimization into the model as a feature
so that modifications to the model will be incorporated automatically.
Modify the model to confirm this.
1. From the Optimization/Feasibility dialog, click File > Make
Feature > . Then click Close and repaint the screen. Notice
the Optimization feature in the model tree.
2. Select the Optimization feature from the model tree and click
> Suppress > OK.
3. Display suppressed features in the model tree. Click Vi ew > Model
Tree Setup > Item Display and select Suppressed Objects.
4. Modify the diameter dimension as shown in the following figure
from [1.25] to [0.75] and Regenerate.
Figure 43: Modifying Diameter Dimension
5. Add the distance parameter column to the model tree and switch to
a side view. Notice that now the COG is slightly below center
(0.077).
Figure 44: Side View of Model
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Be ha v i or a l Mode l i ng Page 1 0- 35
NOTES
6. Select the Optimization feature from the model tree and click
> Resume. Notice the model is now balanced again.
Figure 45: Optimized Model
7. Save the model and click File > Close Window.
8. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 0- 36 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that:
• Behavioral Modeling gives you the tools you need to design product
models that are driven by your requirements and specifications.
• In traditional design systems, you need to manually iterate the
geometry of designs. Now with Behavioral Modeling tools, you can
now explore optimal solutions with a complete understanding of the
performance and behavior of your design.
• Analysis features allow you to measure geometric properties of the
model at specific points in the list of features or components of the
model. These measurements produce parameters and logical datums
that you can use to determine geometric properties such as mass,
volume, curvature, the center of gravity, and many others. You can
even create your own parameters as the result of a relation or a user-
defined analysis.
• A Feasibility Study searches for a solution within the range of chosen
dimensions to meet a set of constraints. You specify the constraints by
means of one or more analysis feature parameters.
• An Optimization Study solves a feasibility problem with an additional
condition, a goal. The goal is to minimize or maximize some analysis
feature parameter.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 11-1
Module
1
1
1
1
Drawings and Drawing Templates
You can use the Drawing mode in Pro/ENGINEER to create
detailed drawings of all Pro/ENGINEER models. You can also
import drawings from other systems into Pro/ENGINEER.
Pro/ENGINEER associates drawings with their parent models. The
model automatically reflects any changes that you make to a
drawing. Conversely, drawings also reflect any changes that you
make to a model in Part, Sheetmetal, Assembly, or Manufacturing
modes.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe the different types of drawing views in Pro/ENGINEER.
• Create a production drawing for an existing part model.
• Explore the associativity that exists between a model and its
drawing.
• Create dependency between certain drawing views.
• Create a simple production drawing that will detail dimensions and
notes.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS
Creating a Drawing
After selecting Drawi ng from the NEW dialog box and assigning it a
name, the NEW DRAWING dialog box will open. This dialog box gives
you multiple options in which you can assign an associated model, select
the sheet size, and specify an orientation:
• With a portrait orientation, the system uses the larger sheet dimension
as the height and the smaller one as the width.
• With a landscape orientation (the default setting), the system uses the
larger sheet dimension as the width and the smaller one as the height.
• With a variable orientation, the system uses values that you specify for
the height and width of the drawing sheet.
You also have the ability to assign a predefined company format. The
format that you select will automatically define the sheet size and
orientation.
Adding Drawing Views
After selecting a format or specifying a sheet size, you can add views to
your drawing using the Vi ews option. The first view must be a general
view. When first placed, it appears in the default view orientation. Using
the ORIENTATION dialog box, you can reorient it during placement.

Not e:
You should always use default datums to orient a general
view.
Types of Views
The five primary view types available in the VIEW TYPE menu are:
• Projection – An orthographic projection of an object as seen from the
front, top, right, or left.
• Auxiliary – A view created by projecting 90 degrees to an inclined
surface, datum plane, or along an axis.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 3
NOTES
• General – A view that you orient and is not dependent upon any other
view for its orientation.
• Detailed – A view that you create by taking a portion of an existing
view and scaling it for dimensioning and clarification purposes. The
boundary for the detailed view can be a circle, ellipse (with or without
a horizontal or vertical major axis), or a spline.
• Revol ved – A planar area cross-section revolved 90 degrees about the
cutting plane line and offset along its length.
Figure 1: The Five Main Types of Views
Using the View Type Menu
Using other options in the VIEW TYPE menu, you can specify how much
of the model is visible in the view, as shown in the following figure.
• Full View – Shows the entire model.
• Half View – Shows only the portion of the model on one side of a
datum plane.
• Broken View – Removes sections from large objects between two
points and moves the remaining sections close together.
• Partial View – Shows only the portion of the view that is contained
within a boundary.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 2: Specifying How Much of the Model to Make Visible
Adding a Cross-section
To determine if a view is a single surface or a cross-section, you use the
VIEW TYPE menu options:
• Section – Displays a cross-section for a particular view.
• No Xsec – Does not display a cross-section.
• Of Surface – Displays only the selected surface of a particular view
orientation.
The following figure illustrates the various types of cross-sectional views
that you can create using the XSEC TYPE menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 5
NOTES
Figure 3: Cross-Sectional Views
Manipulating Views
Using the Move View option, you can move general and detailed views
anywhere on the sheet. However, you can move projection, auxiliary, and
revolved views only along their line of projection.
Using the Delete View option, the PARENT views—views used to create
projection views—cannot be deleted. Instead, they have to be erased with
the Erase View option. Restore erased views using Resume View.
Using the Disp Mode option, you display views independently of the
ENVIRONMENT dialog setting such as Wireframe, Hidden line , and No
Hi dden. For example, you can show some views with hidden lines and
others with no hidden lines. Any views that you establish with this option
remain at the same setting regardless of any changes that you make to the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box settings.
Using the Scale option, you can place certain views. Those views have
their own scale parameters that you can change using the Modify option.
When you modify them, only those views and their children change; the
change does not affect the other views in the drawing.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DEFINING DRAWING TEMPLATES
Drawing templates are provided by the system to automatically generate
drawings of models.
Drawing templates:
• Automatically create views.
• Set desired view display.
• Create snap lines
• Show model dimensions based on the template.
Drawing templates contain three types of information for creating new drawings.
• Basic information – makes up a drawing but is not dependent on the
drawing model. This information is copied from the template into the
new drawing.
• Instructions – used to configure drawing views and the actions that
are performed on that view, also to build a new drawing with a new
drawing object (model).
• Parametric notes – update to new drawing model parameters and
dimension values. The notes are re-parsed or updated when the
template is instantiated.
Use drawing templates to:
• Define the layout of views
• Set view display
• Place notes
• Place symbols
• Define tables
• Create snap lines
• Show dimensions
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 7
NOTES
Customizing Drawing Templates
You can also create customized drawing templates for the different types
of drawings that you create. The advantage of this is the template allows
the creation of portions of drawings automatically.
For example, you can create a template for a machined part versus a cast
part. The machined part template can define the views that are typically
placed for a drawing of a machined part. You can:
• Set the view display of each view.
• Place company standard machining notes.
• Automatically create snap lines for placing dimensions.
DETAILING THE DRAWING
Detailing is important as a method for communicating design intent to
machinists, mold makers, and other production personnel.
Once the views are created on a drawing, showing the dimensions are
usually just a click of a button. Therefore the redundancy involved in both
the designer and the draftsman duplicating the same dimensions is
eliminated.
In manufacturing, additional dimensions in the drawing will need to be
created to convey additional information.
Once the driving dimensions in the drawing are in place, they are fully
modifiable and changes are immediately reflected in the model. This
associativity allows fast and efficient design development.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Creating Feature Dimensions
Feature dimensions are created in the actual part and assembly models. In
the drawing, they only appear in a single view to prevent double
dimensioning.
Feature Dimensions have many options:
• Show All – Shows all dimensions for the model.
• View – Shows all dimensions of a selected view.
• Feature – Shows the dimensions of a selected feature.
• Feature & View – Shows all dimensions of a selected feature in a
selected view.
• Part – Shows the dimensions of a selected part.
• Part & View – Shows the dimensions of a selected part in a selected
view.
Creating Driven Dimensions
Dimensions that you actually create in Drawing mode are known as
Driven dimensions. To create them, click Create from the DETAIL menu
and Dimension from the DETAIL ITEM menu; then select the desired
geometry.
Modifying and Deleting Driven Dimensions
In contrast to feature dimensions, you cannot modify driven dimensions in
a production drawing because their values are based on the part model.
However, you can delete them from a drawing.
Manipulating Dimensions
Once you have displayed dimensions in a drawing, you can use options in
the DETAIL menu to manipulate them in various ways:
• Use Move Text to relocate the dimension text along the dimension or
leader elbow line.
• Use Mod Attach to locate dimensions of rounds and chamfers on
another reference of the same feature.
• Use Switch View to move a dimension to another view.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 9
NOTES
• Use Fl i p Arrows to flip arrows inside or outside the extension lines.
• Use Cl i p to clip extension lines to a selected location.
• Use Break to break an extension line.
• Use Al i gn to align dimensions.
Creating Drawing Notes
Use the Note option in the DETAIL ITEM menu to create drawing notes by
either typing them in or pasting from a text file.
The NOTE TYPES menu allows you to specify leaders, text justification,
and text styles.
Parametric Notes
When you include a dimension or parameter in a note, it is referred to as a
Parametric Note.
To change a dimension value in a Parametric Note, choose Modify from
the DRAWING menu and select the value. To specify parameter
information, use the following format:
• Dimensions – &d#, where # is the dimension ID.
• Instance number – &p#, where # is the parameter ID (for example,
&p0).
• User-defined parameters – &xxxxx, where xxxxx is the symbolic
name of the parameter
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you create detailed drawings of solid parts and explore
the associativity between drawings and part models.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a drawing of a gear part from a default template.
You explore various options available and create additional views.
In Exercise 2, you modify the views in the drawing in different ways and
regenerate it to explore its associativity with the solid gear part.
In Exercise 3, you retrieve the gear part drawing that you started earlier,
manipulate its dimensions and create notes.
Tools
Table 1: Drawing and Interface Icons
Icons Description
Select icon
Wireframe display
Dimension
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 11
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing
First view
Third view
Fourth view
Second view
3-D view from
template
Figure 4: Completed Gear Part Drawing
Task 1. Create drawing called gear from the default ptc_std template.
1. Click .
2. In the NEW dialog box, click Drawi ng, type [gear], and click OK.
3. In the NEW DRAWING dialog box, click Browse in the Default
Model section and browse to GEAR.PRT in <user home
directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 11_drwgs_drw_templates.
4. Click Browse in the TEMPLATE section and browse to
PTC_STD.DRW as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 5: The New Drawing Dialog Box
5. Click OK.
6. The drawing is created with the 3-D view automatically.
Task 2. Create and orient the first view of the gear model using a
general view.
1. Click Vi ews from DRAWING menu.
2. Click General > Done to accept the default selections in the menu
manager.
3. Select in the drawing window towards the left for the general view.
Do not be too concerned with the placement; you can move the
view later.
4. Select DTM3 for the FRONT REFERENCE and DTM2 for the TOP
REFERENCE in the ORIENTATION dialog box.
5. Click OK to finish view creation.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 13
NOTES
Task 3. Move the general view that you just created.
1. Click from the INTENT MANAGER.
2. Select on the view to activate it and place it at a new location.
3. Experiment with moving the view. Finally, position the view
toward the left side of the sheet.
Task 4. Add the second view as a projection view using the general
view as its parent.
1. Click Add View from the VIEWS menu.
2. Leave the defaults Projection > Full View > No Xsec > No Scale.
3. Click Done.
4. Place the projection view by selecting a location above the view
you just added (General View) near the top of the sheet as shown
in the first figure of this exercise.
5. Read the message area and note that there is a conflict in the parent
view. Select the first view you added.
Task 5. Add the auxiliary view with a cross section displayed.
1. Click Add View > Auxiliary > Full View > Section > No Scale >
Done.
2. Define a cross section through the entire view. Click Full > Total
Xsec > Done .
3. Select a location to the lower right of the first view to place the
cross section view.
4. Read the message area and select DTM4 as shown in the following
figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Select
DTM4
Figure 6: Orienting the Auxiliary Reference
5. The auxiliary view appears to the lower right of the general view.

Not e:
This part has a previously created cross section named “C.”
The system allows you to use cross sections that have been
defined in part mode.
6. Select C from the XSEC NAMES menu.
7. Read the message area.
8. Now once again click on the general view you created. This
displays the cutting arrow.
9. Click Done/Return from the VIEWS menu.

Not e:
You can create cross sections in the drawing if you have a
license for the optional add-on module Pro/DETAIL.
Task 6. Change the cross-hatching to improve its display on the
drawing.
1. Click in the INTENT MANAGER if its not already selected.
2. Select the cross-hatching line as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 15
NOTES
Figure 7: Selecting Cross-Hatching
3. Click Edit > Properties.
4. Click Spacing > Half.
5. Click once again Hal f.
6. Click Angle > 0 > Done . The resulting modified cross-hatching is
shown in the following figure.
Figure 8: The Modified Cross-Hatching
Task 7. Add an isometric view.
1. Click Views > Add View > General > Scale > Done .
2. Select a location toward the upper right of the drawing to place the
view.
3. Scale the view to [.75].
4. Select DTM3 for FRONT REFERENCE and DTM2 for the TOP
REFERENCE in the ORIENTATION dialog box. Do not close the
dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
5. If you make a mistake, click Undo.
6. Click Angl es from the TYPE drop-down menu
7. Click Horizontal from the REFERENCE drop-down list.
8. Type [45] for the angle followed by Appl y.
9. Click Edge/ Axi s from the REFERENCE drop-down list.
10. Select the vertical left edge of the gear.
11. Type [30] for the angle followed by Appl y.
12. Finish the orientation. Click OK from the ORIENTATION dialog
box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 17
NOTES
EXERCISE 2:Modifying Created Views and Testing
for Associativity
First view
Third view
Fourth view
Second view
3-D view from
template
Figure 9: Completed Gear Part Drawing
Task 1. Modify the display of hidden and tangent edges from the default
settings.
1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp from the MENU
MANAGER.
2. Change the display of the projected and AUXILIARY view by
selecting the SECOND view and the THIRD view shown in the
preceding figure. Click Done Sel .
3. Click No Hidden > Tan Solid > Done from the VIEW DISP menu.
4. Change the display of the general and isometric views (First and
Fourth views). Click the two views followed by Done Sel .
5. Cick Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
6. Click [Wireframe display]. Click [Repaint]. Notice that
there is no change in the display of the views.
7. Click [Hidden line] to revert to hidden line display. Click .
Task 2. Projected and auxiliary views are children of their parent view.
Experiment with moving these view types
1. Click in the INTENT MANAGER.
2. Select the PROJECTED view or SECOND view and move to new
location.
3. Place the view.
4. Click Done/Return to return to the highest menu.
5. Now select the GENERAL view or FIRST view and move to new
location. Observe how the PROJECTED view and SECTION views
move in relation to the GENERAL view.
Task 3. Modify the scale value for the sheet.
1. Click Edit > Value and select the sheet scale value 1.000 on the
lower left corner of the screen, shown in the following figure.
Figure 10: Modifying Drawing Scale
2. Type [.625].
3. Change scale back to 1.000. Click Edit > Value , type [1.000].
4. Save the drawing file. Do not erase the drawing.
Task 4. Create a feature on the gear part to view the associativity
between the part model and the drawing.
1. Click and open GEAR.PRT.
2. Create a straight hole on the flat surface of the slot feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 19
NOTES

Not e:
You can choose the dimension and attributes of the hole, since
you are going to delete it later.
3. Activate the DRAWING window and select GEAR.DRW. Note that
the hole appears in all of the views.
4. Return to the gear part. Click Window and select GEAR.PRT.
5. Delete the hole feature.
Task 5. Erase the drawing and the part without saving the hole feature.
1. Close the GEAR PART window. Click File > Close Window.
2. Activate the GEAR DRAWING window again. Click Window and
select GEAR.DRW.
3. Save before erasing both files from memory. GEAR.DRW is used
again in the next exercise.
4. Click Erase > Current > Select All > OK. The system erases the
gear drawing.

Not e:
Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically save to disk any
change that you have made to the model. A simple way to
revert back to the last saved version is to erase the model from
memory without saving.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Detailing the Gear Part Drawing
Figure 11: Detailed Gear Drawing with Dimensions
Task 1. To begin the detailing process, show the model dimensions.
1. Retrieve the gear drawing GEAR.DRW.
2. Click View > Show/Erase .
3. In the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, click and select Vi ew in
the SHOW BY options.
4. Now select the lower left general view (First view) on the screen.
Click Done Sel .
5. Close the SHOW/ERASE dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 21
NOTES
Task 2. Clean up the display of dimensions.
1. Click Tools > Clean Dims in the DETAIL menu.
2. Select the first view again; then click Done Sel .
3. Clear the Create Snap Lines check box.
4. Click Apply > Close .
5. Click Done/Return in the TOOLS menu.
6. Select the 76.66 dimension with the select cursor and move it
to another location.
7. Select other dimensions and adjust them similarly.
8. Click to repaint the screen.
Task 3. Erase extra dimensions in the drawing
1. Click View > Show/Erase > Erase .
2. Click .
3. Select the two extra 6.3mm dimensions shown in the following
figure and click Done Sel from the GET SELECT menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 12: Erasing Dimensions
4. Click Close .
5. Click to view the results.
Task 4. Enable the display of dimensions for the section view and clean
up their display.
1. Follow the same procedure to do this task as for the FIRST view.
Task 5. Create a parametric note that displays the value of the pin hole
diameter.

Not e:
The system allows for notes to be displayed with the
parametric dimension within the text. This allows the note to
automatically update with changes in the dimensions.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dr a wi ngs a nd Dr a wi ng Te mpl a t e s Page 1 1- 23
NOTES
Figure 13: Creating a Parametric Note
1. Click Insert > Note .
2. Click Leader > Normal Ldr > Make Note leaving alone all the
other defaults from the NOTE TYPES menu.
3. In the cross section view, select the edge of the small hole as the
entity to which the system should attach the note. Use Query Sel ,
if necessary.
4. Select a location for the note. All the dimensions and parameters
change to their symbolic form.
5. Look at the lower right or cross section view and identify the
symbolic dimension representing the diameter of the small hole
(for example: symbol:d26).
6. Select the ∅ symbol from the SYMBOL PALETTE window.
7. Type [&d26 drill thru] in the message area, then press
<ENTER>.
8. Type [one place] and press <ENTER>.
9. Save the drawing.
10. Click File > Close Window.
11. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 1- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• There are five primary Drawing View types—Projection, Auxiliary,
General, Detailed, and Revolved.
• General views are not dependent on any other view.
• General views can have their own scale.
• General views can be in any orientation and placed using the default
view, and saved views from part mode.
• Default datum planes should always be used to orient the first general
view.
• View types have four further sub-options: Full View, Half View,
Broken View, and Partial View.
• Views can be moved and deleted; their display modes can be changed
and scale values modified.
• The principle of associativity works between solid part models and
their drawings.
• Cross-sections can be created in part mode or drawing mode during
view placement.
• The majority of dimensions included on the drawing come from the
part model.
• There are two types of dimensions: Feature Dimensions and Driven
Dimensions.
• Dimensions can be manipulated.
• Drawing notes can be created to provide other information and for
documentation.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 12-1
Module
1
1
2
2
Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy
In this module you will learn how to duplicate features using
Pro/ENGINEER. When creating complex parts and assemblies,
often a need arises for duplication. The design intent in these cases
specifies identical features or parts to be placed at separate locations
in the same model.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Duplicate features using two different methods: Patterning and
Copying.
• Differentiate between Dimension Patterning and Reference
Patterning.
• Implement patterns with three different options: Identical, Varying,
and General.
• Specify different location options for the Copy feature.
• Establish dependence among various copied features.
• Use various copying techniques.
• Select features for copying.
• Specify the dependency of copied features.
• Use the Transform option to duplicate surfaces and datum curves.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
CREATING PATTERNS
You can use patterns to create multiple instances of a single feature. The
original feature that you base the pattern on is referred to as the “pattern
leader.” There are two ways to define patterns:
• Increment the pattern leader’s dimensions.
• Reference an existing pattern.
If you do not increment a dimension value, the system assigns the
dimension value of the pattern leader to all instances in the pattern.
Patterning Benefits
The patterning method of feature duplication offers numerous benefits:
• A pattern behaves as a single feature.
• The pattern is parametric. Therefore, you can change pattern
parameters and regenerate.
• When you modify the dimensions of the pattern leader, the system
automatically updates the whole pattern.
• The system automatically groups all entities belonging to a pattern
together in the model tree for ease of selection.
Pattern Types
Dimension Patterns
With dimension patterning, you increment existing dimension values of
the leader in one or two directions to specify the pattern instances. If you
use the second direction, the system takes all instances that are created by
the first direction and increments them in the second direction.
Reference Patterns
With reference patterning, you reference an existing pattern to define the
locations of the new instances. This pattern type is only available if the
leader feature for the new pattern references the leader feature of the
existing pattern. This is illustrated in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 3
NOTES

Not e:
In contrast to a dimension pattern, the system does not provide
parameters for the number of instances or increment values in
a reference pattern. It obtains this information from the pattern
that it references. A reference pattern updates automatically
when the pattern that it references changes.
A reference
pattern of a
counter-
bore hole
Figure 1: Reference Pattern
Pattern Options
There are three patterning options: Identical, Varying, and General.
Figure 2: Pattern Options
Pro/ENGINEER places certain restrictions on pattern options; these
restrictions are listed in the following table.
Identical
Varying
General
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Table 1: Patterning Restrictions
Pattern
Option
Regeneration
Speed
Varying
Instances
Allowing Instance
Intersections
Identical Fastest No No
Varying Moderate Yes No
General Slowest Yes Yes
1st
1st
1st
I
II
III
Figure 3: Pattern Parameters
Figure 4: Pattern Parameters
I II
III
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 5
NOTES
1st
2nd
1st
2nd
Figure 5: Pattern in Two Directions
Figure 6: Pattern in Two Directions
Creating Rotational Patterns
To create a rotational pattern for a hole, you must increment an angular
dimension using radial placement. However, for a sketched feature (such
as a protrusion, cut, or rib), you must create an internal datum plane at an
angle.
A
B
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 7: Rotational Pattern of a Sketched Feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 7
NOTES
Figure 8: Rotational Pattern of a Sketched Feature

Not e:
Do not use a sketched centerline to create the rotational
dimension. A sketched centerline has no direction associated
with it, so the pattern results may not be consistent.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
COPYING FEATURES
Once you have created a feature, it is often more efficient to reuse it rather
than re-create it. Copying is an effective technique for duplicating multiple
features. Once you have created a feature, it is often more efficient to
reuse it rather than re-create it. Copying is an effective technique for
duplicating multiple features. The Copy feature allows you to create new
features by copying existing features to a new location. You must specify
a location for the copy, Select the features to copy, and then establish
dependence or independence for the copied feature’s dimensions.
Specifying Copy-To Locations
To select a location for the copy, click one of these options from the
COPY FEATURE menu:
• New Refs – Specifies new feature references. You can retain each
reference or click an alternate.
• Same Refs – Retains the same feature references.
• Mirror – Mirrors the features about a planar surface or datum plane.
• Move – Specifies rotation and/or translation.
Copying Methods
You can copy a feature by specifying new references, using the same
references, mirroring, and moving. Using any of these techniques, you can
specify whether the copy and the original features should share
dimensions.
Copying by Translating and Rotating Features
When copying a feature by translating or rotating it, you must specify a
reference for the direction of translation or rotation: a plane normal; a
straight curve, edge, or axis; or a coordinate system.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 9
NOTES
Arrow shows positive rotation
using the right-hand rule.
Figure 9: Rotation
Specifying Copied Feature Dependencies
You can control the level of design intent that you capture in your model
by making the copied features dependent or independent.
• Independent –the system assigns each copied feature its own
dimensions so you can modify them without affecting the original.
Likewise, any changes that you make to the original do not affect the
copy.

Not e:
If you copy a feature from a different model or version, the
system automatically makes the geometry independent.
Change to rib
height does
not affect
others.
Figure 10: Independent Copies
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• Dependent – any dimensions that were unchanged at the time of the
copy creation become dependent on the original feature. In this
example, the two dimensions specified when the copy was made are
independent. Changing one of them on the second rib only affects the
second rib. The other dimensions are dependent, so changing the value
affects both ribs.
Change to rib
height affects all
dependent
features.
Figure 11: Dependent Copies

Ti ps & Techni ques:
If you create a copy as dependent, you can break that
dependency using the Make Indep option in the MODIFY
menu. You can make individual dimensions or the entire
section independent.
Choosing Features to Copy
To select which features to copy, select one of these options from the
COPY FEATURE menu:
• Click – Selects features to copy from the current model.
• All Feat – Selects all features in the current model. This option is
available when you select Mirror or Move.
• FromDifModel – Selects the features to copy from a different model.
This option is available when you select New Refs.
• FromDifVers – Selects the features to copy from a different version of
the current model (for example, xxxx.prt.3 when the current model is
xxxx.prt.5). This option is available when you select New Refs or
Same Refs.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 11
NOTES
Specifying Dependency Options
To make the copied feature dimensions independent of their parent
dimension, use the Independent option. Copies that you create using the
FromDifModel and FromDifVers options are automatically independent.
To specify that copied feature dimensions (that you have not changed)
depend on the parent feature for their values, click the Dependent option.
When you create a dependent copy, you can make the entire section or
individual dimensions independent by clicking Modify and Make I ndep.

Ti ps & Techni ques:
If you use the Mirror Geom option instead of Copy, you can
mirror all of a model’s geometry about a plane without
creating new features. The system adds a Merge reference to
the Model Tree.
Before copy operation
After copy operation
1. Original model
2. Same Ref copy
3. Move copy
4 New ref
copy
5. Mirror copies
Figure 12: Instances of the Copy Feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
The goal of this lab is to duplicate geometry using patterns and copy
features.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a dimension pattern. To produce the end result,
you pattern the cut and then modify the angle of the slot.
In Exercises 2 and 3, you create a reference pattern and a rotational pattern
respectively.
In Exercise 4, you work on a model using the copy feature and mirror
geometry options.
In Exercise 5, you create mounting tabs on the steering column support
shaft by using various copy options.
Tools
Table 2: Interface Icons
Icons Description
Hidden line display
Datum Plane
Datum axis
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 13
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Dimension
Pattern
Start model
Model after patterning and modifying
Figure 13: Dimensional Pattern of a Cut
Task 1. Open an existing part to be used for creating a pattern.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 12_duplication_features.
3. Click and open DIM_PATTERN.PRT.
4. Click [Hidden line].
Task 2. Create a varying pattern of cuts.
1. Click Feature > Pattern and select the cut.
2. Click Varying > Done .
3. Select the 10 dimension on the cut.
4. At the prompt, type [4] as the incremental value between pattern
members and press <ENTER>.
5. Click Done from the EXIT menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
6. Type [12] as the total number of instances in this direction and
press <ENTER>.
7. Click Done from the EXIT menu once again. Click Done from the
FEAT menu.
Figure 14 Varying Pattern
Task 3. Modify the angle of the leader to change the angle of the entire
pattern.
1. Click Modify. Select the cut. Select the 45-degree dimension and
type [-45] as the new value and press <ENTER>.
2. Regenerate the model.
3. Save the model and erase it from memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 15
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Reference Pattern
Start model
Finished Model
Figure 15: Reference Pattern
Task 1. Start creating the reference pattern.
1. Open file REF_PATTERN.PRT.
Task 2. Create an identical pattern of holes in two directions.
1. Click Feature > Pattern and Select the hole.
2. Click Identical > Done .
3. Select the 20 di mension and type [20] as the new value and press
<ENTER>.
4. Click Done from the EXIT menu.
5. Type [3] as the total number of instances.
6. Now Select the 10 dimension and type [20] and press <ENTER>.
7. Since this is the only dimension that you are going to increment in
the second direction, click Done from the EXIT menu.
8. Type [2] as the total number of instances in this direction.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 16: Identical Hole Pattern in Two Directions
Task 3. Create a square cut on the leader feature of the pattern, so that
you can create a reference pattern of it.
1. Click Insert > Cut > Extrude .
2. Click One Side > Done .
3. Select the top surface of the protrusion as the sketching plane.
4. Click Okay from the DIRECTION menu.
5. Click Defaul t for orientation.
6. Delete the current references in the REFERENCE dialog box.
7. Specify the axis A_1 as a reference.
Task 4. Sketch the section shown in the following figure.
1. Work on the leader figure shown, so that it can act as the reference
feature later.
2. Sketch vertical and horizontal centerlines passing through axis
A_1. This should be the only reference in the dialog box. Should
you have selected any other references by accident, delete them.
3. Sketch a square centered on axis A_1 making sure Intent Manager
makes the assumption of equal line lengths and symmetry.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 17
NOTES
Figure 17: Section for Slot
4. Modify the width to 10mm. The model regenerates automatically.
5. Click to exit from sketcher.
6. Remove the material to the inside of the cut by selecting Okay.
7. Click Blind > Done . Type [2.5] as the depth value.
8. Complete the feature. Click OK.
Task 5. Create a reference pattern of the cut feature.
1. Click View > Model Tree, hold mouse over the feature Cut id
1205 and . Select Pattern in the pop-up menu.
2. Define the pattern using the leader reference. Click Ref Pattern >
Done.
3. Save the part and erase it from memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Rotational Patterns of
Sketched Features
Task 1. Start creating the rotational pattern
1. Open BLOWER.PRT.
2. Click [Datum plane] and [Datum axes] to display datum planes
and axes.
Figure 18: Blower Base with Dimensions Shown
Task 2. Create a horizontal/vertical reference plane for sketching, with
an angle associated with it.
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude .
2. Click One Side > Done .
3. Select the top face of the disk as the sketching plane for blower
blades.
4. Click Okay to accept the default direction.
5. Click Bottom from the SKET VIEW menu.
6. Click Make Datum from the SETUP PLANE menu.
7. Click Through; then Query Sel to Select axis A_1.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 19
NOTES
8. Click Angl e, then Select DTM3 and click Done.
9. Click Enter Value and type [30].
10. Specify the references as the outer edge of the circular protrusion
and the datum you just created. Make sure you do not specify
DTM3 or DTM1 as a reference.
11. Sketch the section as shown in the following figure. Make sure that
the bottom straight edge has a constraint of perpendicular to the
outer edge of the base protrusion.
Section Pick Datum for
horizontal
reference
Figure 19: Sketching the Section

Ti ps & Techni ques:
To help aid you in your sketching, you should sketch your
sections large, then modify the dimensions to change the size
of the model.
12. Add the dimensioning scheme as shown in the following figure.
Modify dimensions to the values specified and then click
[Done].
13. Accept the default Blind > Done .
14. Type [73.5] as the protrusion depth value.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 20: Sketch of Blower Blade
Task 3. Pattern the blower blade protrusion in one direction using a
varying pattern.
1. Select in model tree the protrusion you just created, >
Pattern.
2. Click Varying > Done.
3. Select dimension 30.
4. Type [60] as the increment value and press <ENTER>.
5. Do not define any other dimensions to increment. Click Done.
6. Type [6] as the number of instances for the pattern.
7. Do not create instances in the second direction. Click Done from
the EXIT menu.
8. The final pattern of blades is as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 21
NOTES
Original angle
Pattern angle
Figure 21: Pattern of Blades
9. Close the window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Copying Features
Start model
Finished model
Figure 22: Copying Features
Task 1. Retrieve an existing model and copy some of the features.
1. Open the part file FEATURE_COPY_MIRROR.PRT.
2. Change the display to hidden line.
Task 2. You can make copies either independent or dependent. The
selection you make will be based on you design intent. Create a dependent
copy of the lower right slot.
1. Click Feature > Copy.
2. Click Same Refs.
3. Click Dependent > Done .
4. Select the slot. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu.
5. Select the Dim 1 and Dim 3 check boxes, which are the 45-degree
angle and the 65-inch dimension respectively. Click Done.
6. For Dim 1, type [0.00] and press <ENTER>.
7. For Dim 3, type [410.00] and press <ENTER>.
8. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 23
NOTES
9. Click Done twice to return to the highest level menu.
Task 3. Experiment with modifying dimensions; then make the copy
independent of the parent slot.
1. Click Modify and select the parent slot.
2. Select the 125.00 dimension, type [75.00] as the new value, and
regenerate.
3. Modify the length of the slot back to 125.00, as described in the
previous step.
4. Modify the 45-degree angle of the parent slot. Type [30.00]. Note
that the angle of the copy does not change because you broke the
dependence of that dimension when you modified it to create the
copy.
5. Change the angle of the parent slot to back to 45 degrees.
Task 4. Break the dependency between the two slots.
1. Click Modify > Make Indep from the MODIFY menu.
2. Click Secti on from the MAKE INDEP menu.
3. Select the copy and click Done Sel and Done.
4. All of the copy’s dimensions are now independent of the parent
slot.
Task 5. You have the ability to mirror the entire model by using various
options. Mirror all of the features to complete the part using Copy.
1. Click Feature > Copy from the FEAT menu.
2. Click Mirror > All Feat > Independent from the COPY FEATURE
menu; then click Done.
3. Select DTM1.
4. Save the model and erase it from memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 5: Building the Steering Column
Figure 23: Steering Column Support Shaft
Task 1. Create a copy of the first tab at the bottom of the shaft 90
degrees to the first. To do this, use a move type copy.
1. Open STEERING_COLUMN.PRT.
2. Show axes and datum planes if the system is not already showing
them.
3. Click Feature > Copy > Move > Select > Dependent > Done .
4. Select the protrusion, axis, hole, and round features that compose
the first tab in the Model Tree; then click Done Sel > Done .
Protrusion Round
Axis and hole
Figure 24: Features to Copy
5. Click Translate .
6. Toggle to show datum planes and Select FRONT datum.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 25
NOTES
7. Flip the arrow so that it is pointing in the appropriate direction.
Click Okay.
Figure 25: Translation References
8. Type [7.5] as the translation value.
9. Click Rotate > Crv/Edg/Axis.
10. Select axis A1 as the motion reference for the rotation. (Toggle
if the axes are not visible.)
11. Point the arrow as shown in the following figure and click Okay to
accept direction.
12. Type [90] as the rotation value.
Figure 26: Rotation Direction
13. Click Done Move to complete the move.
14. Select the 2.0 length dimension and click Done from the GP VAR
DIMS menu to complete definition of the feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 26 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
15. Click OK.
Task 2. Mirror the copied tab about the SIDE datum.
1. Click Feature > Copy > Mirror > Dependent > Done .
2. Select the COPIED tab from the Model Tree. Click Done.

Not e:
Because the system placed the copied tab features in a group
when it copied them, you can select them as a single item.
3. Mirror the tab about the SIDE datum plane.
Figure 27: Mirrored Tab
Task 3. Make the original tab longer, and thicken the tab for strength.
Because the other two tabs are dependent copies, break their dependency
to create a thickness that is different from that of the original.
1. Click Modify. Select the protrusion (protrusion id 50) of the
original tab.
2. Change the 2.00 length to 3.00 and the 0.25 thickness to 0.375.
3. Regenerate the model.
4. Notice that the two copied tabs also change thickness. They do not,
however, change length. This is because when you copied the first
one, you gave it a new length, which automatically made the
length dimension independent.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Dupl i c a t i ng Fe a t ur e s : Pa t t e r ns a nd Copy Page 1 2- 27
NOTES
Task 4. Break the thickness dependency between the tabs.
1. Click Modify > Make Indep > Dimension. Select the protrusion ID
50 again and the 0.375 thickness dimension.
2. Select the features to make the dimension independent. Notice the
2 highlighted copied tabs that are current and dependent.
3. Select both of the copied tabs from the model. Click Done Sel >
Done Sel .
4. Modify one of the copied tabs. Type [0.125] as the thickness.
Type [60] as the new value for the 90-degree rotation angle; then
regenerate.
5. Save the model.
Figure 28: Finished Steering Column Support Shaft
6. Click File > Close Window.
7. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 2- 28 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• Duplication is important for capturing design intent and
Pro/ENGINEER enables it through Pattern and Copy.
• Patterning is of two kinds: Dimension Patterning and Reference
Patterning.
• There are three Pattern options: Identical, Varying, and General.
• In the Rotational Pattern for a hole, the angular dimension must be
incremented using radial placement.
• Dependence/Independence can be established between copied entities.
• Copies of part geometry can be created using Move and Mirror.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 13-1
Module
1
1
3
3
Creating Assemblies
In this lesson you learn how to create a functional assembly of solid
components.
Objectives
In this module, you will learn to:
• Create assemblies.
• Modify assemblies.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
OVERVIEW
To create an assembly you must join components (parts) by selecting
surfaces and features. There are several things to consider when building
assemblies:
• Always begin an assembly with a base component, a component that
you are unlikely to remove from the assembly later on.
• Consider how you might break down the assembly into separate
subassemblies.
• Begin your assembly with default datums.
• Add the first part or subassembly onto the default assembly datums.
Figure 1: Assembly Default Datum Templates
The Surface Normal Vector
A surface normal vector is an imaginary vector that is perpendicular to the
model surface. Pro/ENGINEER can distinguish between the outside
surface and inside surfaces that comprise your solid models.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: A Model’s Surface Normal Vectors
Constraining Component Parts
Placement constraints create parent/child relationships between the
assembled components and the new component that you want to add. The
following is a list of commonly used constraints:
• Mate – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in opposite
directions and become co-planar.
Figure 3: Mate Constraint
• Mate Offset – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in opposite
directions and are offset by a specified negative or positive value.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Offset
Figure 4: Mate Offset Constraint
• Al i gn – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in the same direction
and are made co-planar. Align will also make two axes co-axial.

Not e:
Pro/ENGINEER does not associate any direction to the
alignment of an axis.
Figure 5: Align Constraint
Align Offset – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in the same
direction and are offset by a specified negative or positive value.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 5
NOTES
Offset
Figure 6: Align Offset Constraint
• Orient – Selected surfaces, utilizing their normal vector, point in the
same direction and are parallel.
Figure 7: A Usable Reference for Orient Constraint
• Insert – Selected cylindrical surfaces of revolution become co-axial.
These surfaces do not need to be full 360-degree cylinders, as shown
in figure below.
Surfaces of revolution
Figure 8: Insert Constraint
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Placing Components
All the constraints, such as mate, align, insert, and coord sys, are
available in a single component placement dialog box. As shown in the
next figure, this allows for efficient component placement workflow.

Figure 9: The Component Placement Interface
The following features are available from the Component Placement
dialog box:
• A consolidated list of assembly constraints beginning with Automatic
provided as a drop-down list
• A Flip button to reverse a component by 180 degrees
• An editable offset value in the constraint list
• A toolbar at the top of the dialog box that allows you to:
Control whether the new component appears in the Assembly
window or new window
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 7
NOTES
Toggle between the Constraint Placement and Move dialog box
options
Fix component or place it in the default position
Access Component Interfaces
Change Preferences
Packaging Under-Constrained Components
Under-constrained components are those components which are not
completed oriented into the assembly. This means that there is some
ambiguity in the component placement that Pro/ENGINEER cannot
resolve. This situation can be resolved with packaging.
Packaging allows you to:
• Add components to an assembly without fully constraining them.
• Add components to an assembly without defining its true or final
location.
• Allocate space in an assembly for components that will be added at a
future time.
Over-Constrained Components
When you over-constrain a component, you add more constraints than is
necessary in order to capture additional design intent.
MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES
Since Pro/ENGINEER is associative, you can make changes to all
components in sub-assemblies while working in the assembly. However,
the system limits the scope of those changes through the MOD ASSEM
menu options listed below:
• Mod Dim allows you to modify any dimension in the assembly.
• Mod Assem allows you to modify only the top-level assembly
dimensions.
• Mod Subasm allows you to modify any subassembly in the top-level
assembly, which includes assembling components into the
subassembly.
• Mod Part allows you to modify parts in the assembly, which includes
modifying dimensions, redefining existing features, adding new
features, as well as most operations that you can perform at part level.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Not e
When creating part features at the assembly level, you should
use caution to avoid creating unwanted parent/child
relationships between the part and the assembly.
Modifying Your Design Intent
You can modify your design intentions with the following commands:
• Reorder – Changes the order in which the system regenerates
components in the assembly.
• Insert Mode – Inserts a component in between two components in the
regeneration cycle of the assembly.
• Reroute – Changes the external references that a component has for
constraints.
• Delete – Removes components or assembly features from the
assembly model.
• Suppress – Temporarily removes components from the assembly.
• Resume – Resumes components in the assembly model.
Saving Assemblies
When you save an assembly, the system automatically saves any changes
that you made to any of the parts in that assembly.

Not e:
If you rename a part in an assembly, but the assembly is not in
RAM, the placement fails when you retrieve that assembly.
OTHER ASSEMBLY OPTIONS
Generating Bills of Material
Bills of Material (BOMs) are lists of sub-assemblies and components,
including component quantities. With Pro/ENGINEER you can generate
BOMs with the Info pull-down menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 9
NOTES
Creating Exploded Views
Using the Explode option in the Vi ew pull-down menu, you can create
exploded views of the assembly model.

Not e
You cannot assemble components in an exploded view. If you
try to do so, the system asks you to unexplode the assembly
using the Unexplode option in the View pull-down menu.
Figure 10: Unexploded Machine Assembly
Figure 11 Exploded Machine Assembly
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this exercise you will learn how to create and modify assemblies.
Method
In Exercise 1, you will assemble existing components into a subassembly
by using the insert, mate, and align constraints from the component
placement interface.
In Exercise 2, you a machine crank assembly by using the subassembly
created in Exercise 1.
Tools
Table 1: Assembly Icons
Icons Description
Assemble component at default location
Show component in separate window
Specify new constraint
Remove selected constraint
Change orientation of constraint (flip)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 11
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Create a Subassembly of Three Parts
Figure 12 Completed Base Subassembly
Task 1. Start creating the subassembly.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 13_creating_assemblies.
3. Click . Select Assembl y and type [BASE] as the name. Make
sure Use default template is checked.
4. In the menu manager, click Set Up > Units. > millimeter Newton
Second > Set.
5. Click OK > Close .
6. Scroll the menu down by clicking the blue arrow and then click
Done to return to the high-level menu.
Task 2. Assemble the bracket part.
1. Click Component > Assemble and open BRACKET.PRT from
your working directory.
2. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box, click
[Assemble at default location].
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Click OK.
Task 3. Begin to assemble the bushing part to the bracket part.
1. Click Component > Assemble and open BUSHING.PRT.
2. Toggle off the datum planes.

Figure 13: Assembly of the Bushing
Task 4. Insert the bushing into the bracket using the revolved surfaces
on the models.
1. The default constraint type is Automatic in the COMPONENT
PLACEMENT dialog box.
2. Click Insert from the drop-down list.
3. Select on the outside cylindrical surface of the bushing part and
again on the inside revolved surface of the slot on the bracket part,
as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 13
NOTES
Figure 14: Selecting Component References for Insert
Task 5. Mate the lip on the bushing to the back of the bracket.
1. Click Mate from the CONSTRAINT TYPE drop-down list.
2. Select on the planar flange surface on the bushing, pointed by the
cursor in the following figure.
Figure 15: Selecting References for the Mate Constraint
3. Select the back surface of the bracket using Query Sel , highlighted
in the preceding figure. Click Accept when the proper surface
highlights.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
4. Type [0] for the offset value and press <ENTER>.
5. You will see the results of the mate constraint.
6. Now click [Change orientation of the constraint]. You will
notice that the bushing gets flipped.
7. Click once again to the original position.
Task 6. Add a third Align constraint so that the key on the bushing lines
up with the d slot in the bracket.
1. Click [Show component in separate window].
2. The bushing part is shown in a separate window.
3. Click to add another constraint. Select the bushing key as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 16: Selecting References for the Align Constraint
4. Now Select on the top surface of the bracket as shown.
5. Accept the default offset value near the message area.
6. But you don’t actually need this offset. So click on the offset value
in the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box to get a drop-down
list.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 15
NOTES
Figure 17: Orienting the Bushing to the Bracket
7. Click Al i gn for the constraint type and Ori ent ed for the offset and
click OK.
8. The subassembly is fully constrained.

Not e:
You can always delete constraints you have created by
clicking and specify a new constraint by clicking .
Task 7. Assemble the ring part to the bushing part using constraints.
1. Turn off the display of the datum planes.
2. Click Assemble; then select RING.PRT
3. Zoom in on the bushing model so that you can see the snap ring
groove more clearly, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 18: Base Zoomed In
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Insert references
Mate references
Figure 19: Constraints for Assembling Base with Ring
4. Add an insert constraint between the inner revolved surface of the
snap ring and the small, revolved surface of the recess in the
bushing.
5. Add a mate constraint between the front side surface of the base
and the back of the snap ring, as shown in the preceding figure.
Type [0] followed by <ENTER> as offset.
6. Click to add another constraint. Orient the tabs so they match
the orientation of the flat of the bushing. Select on the surfaces
shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 17
NOTES
Figure 20: Aligning Snap Ring to the Flat of the Bushing
7. Click Al i gn for the constraint type and Ori ent ed for the offest in
the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box.
8. Click OK.
9. Click and close window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Exercise 2: Create the Machine Assembly
Task 1. Start creating the new assembly.
1. Click , select Assembl y and type [MACHINE] as the name.
Uncheck Use default template option. Select Empty for the
template and click OK.
2. Setup the assembly to use millimeter units. Click Set Up >Units >
millimeter Newton Second > Set > OK > Close .
3. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to create three default datum plane
features.
Task 2. Assemble the base assembly into the machine assembly using
the datum planes.
1. Click Component > Assemble; then open BASE.ASM.
2. Assemble the base subassembly to the machine assembly by
clicking [Assemble at default placement].
Task 3. Assemble the shaft component by using constraints.
1. Assemble the MASTER_SHAFT part into the machine assembly.
2. Insert the shaft into the hole in the bushing.
Figure 21: Selecting References for Align Constraint
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 19
NOTES
3. Create an Al i gn constraint between the end surface of the shaft and
the bracket surface.
4. Specify an offset value of [100] and press <ENTER>.
Task 4. Add the crank part to the assembly by using the assembly
constraints.
Figure 22: Assembling the Crank Part to the Machine Assembly
1. Assemble the crank part.
2. Insert the crank into the shaft.
Figure 23 Assembled Crank
3. Align the small hole on the crank with the small hole on the shaft
by Selecting the axes.
4. The system says it is fully constrained, but orient the back of the
crank with the end of the shaft.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 5. Assemble the gear component to the machine.
1. Assemble the gear part into the assembly using constraints similar
to those that you used for the crank part.
2. Save the assembly.
Task 6. While working at the assembly level, accommodate a change in
the design intent by modifying the bracket width.
1. Click Modify from the ASSEMBLY menu.
2. Click Mod Part from the ASSEM MOD menu.
3. Select the bracket part.
4. Select the base feature to display the dimensions.
5. Select the 25 dimension. Type [50.0], then press <ENTER>.
6. Regenerate only the part model.
Task 7. Accommodate another change in the design intent by adding an
edge round on the two top edges of the bracket.
1. Create a new part feature. Click Feature > Create .
2. Add a simple edge round to the bracket with a 20mm unit radius.
shows the modified bracket.
Figure 24: Modified Bracket
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng As s e mbl i e s Page 1 3- 21
NOTES
Task 8. Generate a Bill of Materials for this assembly.
1. Click Bill of Materials from the INFO pull-down menu. Click OK.
2. Read the entire INFORMATION WINDOW; use the scrollbar if
necessary.
3. Click Close from the INFORMATION WINDOW
4. Close the working window.
5. Erase all models that are not displayed. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 3- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• Assembly creation has to begin ideally with base components and
these usually are the Default Assembly Datums.
• There are various constraint options for adding new components to an
assembly.
• Components of an assembly can be deliberately under-constrained or
over-constrained.
• Packaged or under-constrained components are usually added to
assemblies to get a spatial feel for the completed assembly. Once the
look is right, the component can be fully constrained.
• Over-constraining occurs to capture additional design intent.
• Since Pro/ENGINEER is associative, you can make changes to all
components and sub-assemblies while working in an assembly.
• Modifying parts at the assembly level is adopting a top-down approach
to design. Sometimes this is necessary to capture the higher level
design intent by creating part geometry in the context of the assembly.
• You can extract a Bill of Materials of an assembly.
• You can create exploded views of assemblies.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 14-1
Module
1
1
4
4
Principles of Top-Down Design
In this module you will learn the principles of top-down design.
Robust models can be built only by the rigorous implementation of
the principles of top-down design.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe the principles of top-down design.
• List the advantages of top-down design.
• Describe the Pro/ENGINEER tools that support the top-down
design process.
• Study reference control in relation to the top-down design
approach.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 4- 2 Pr o/ ENGI NEER Adv a nc e d Top- Down De s i gn
NOTES
INTRODUCTION
Definition
Top-down design is a method of designing a product by capturing top-
level design criteria first and then passing this information from the top
level of the product’s structure to all related subsystems.
Stages of Top-Down Design
• Planning
• Creating product structure
• Sharing design-critical information
• Capturing interactions between individual components
The Approach
Top down design can be conceived as an ongoing process of capturing,
communicating, and managing design information. It is the best
methodology to harness and control Pro/Engineer’s associative design
tools when conceptualizing and building large assemblies.
Figure 1: Top-Down Design Architecture
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Top- Down De s i gn Ov e r v i e w Page 1 4- 3
NOTES
Comparing Top-Down Design to Traditional
Approaches
In Top-down design the distribution of information happens from top
design levels to lower design levels.
Design
Information
Component Component Component
Figure 2: Distribution of Information from Top to Bottom
In the traditional assembly design approach, an engineer designs
individual components independent of the assembly, using a manual
approach to ensure that components fit properly and meet design criteria.
Assemble
Components
Component
Design
Component
Design
Component
Design
Figure 3: Traditional Design Approach
Characteristics of the Traditional Design Approach
• The designer places components in subassemblies and then brings
those subassemblies together to develop the top-level assembly.
• Often, after creating the assemblies, a designer discovers that the
models do not meet the design criteria (for example, a critical interface
on two models does not match).
• After detecting problems, the designer manually adjusts each model.
• As the assembly grows, detecting these inconsistencies and correcting
them consume a considerable amount of time.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 4- 4 Pr o/ ENGI NEER Adv a nc e d Top- Down De s i gn
NOTES
Benefits of Top-Down Design Methodology
Top-down design methodology has many advantages. It can be used to
manage large assemblies, organize complex designs, control motion and
support more flexible assembly designs.
This methodology can be used to manage large assembly designs by
allowing the user to retrieve only the skeleton structure of the assembly
into memory and make desired changes. The skeleton contains the
important criteria of a design such as mounting locations, space
requirements for subsystems and parts, and design parameters such as
critical dimensions. Changes can be made to the skeleton and these
changes will be propagated to the subsystems of the entire design.
Top-down design organizes and helps enforce the interactions and
dependencies between components of an assembly. Many interactions and
dependencies exist in an actual assembly design and it is desirable to
capture these in the model of the design. An example of a desirable
dependency is the location of a mounting hole in one part and the
corresponding location in another part. Therefore, if one of the mounting
hole locations is moved, the corresponding mounting hole on the mating
part also moves. Tools exist in Model Tree design to enable users to
capture desirable dependencies while limiting undesirable ones.
An organized assembly structure allows information to be shared between
different levels of an assembly. If a change is made at one level, it is
shared among all of the other related assemblies and/or components. This
supports a team environment where different groups or individuals own
different subsystems and components. Furthermore, a complex assembly
design may be divided easily into separate tasks to be assigned to the
different team members in the early stages of a design.
THE SIX STEPS OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN
• Defining Design Intent
• Defining Preliminary Product Structure
• Introducing Skeleton Models
• Communicating Design Intent
• Continued Population of the Assembly
• Managing Part Interdependencies
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Top- Down De s i gn Ov e r v i e w Page 1 4- 5
NOTES
Step 1 - Defining Design Intent
All products are designed with some preliminary planning. Sketches,
ideas, proposals and specifications may exist to define the products'
purpose, function and design. This planning helps the designer understand
the product better and start the design of the system and/or detailed
components. The designer can leverage this information to begin defining
the structure of the design and detailed requirements of individual
components within Pro/ENGINEER.
Step 2 - Defining Preliminary Product Structure
The product structure consists of a list of components and their hierarchy
within the assembly design. Many of the major subsystems required for
the design will be determined when defining design intent.
The product structure can be created easily in Pro/ENGINEER allowing
the creation of subassemblies and parts without having to create any
geometry. Existing subassemblies and parts can also be added to the
product structure without actually having to be assembled.
Defining the preliminary product structure helps to organize the assembly
design into manageable tasks that can be assigned to design teams or
individual designers.
Step 3 - Skeleton Models
Skeleton models act as a 3-D layout of the assembly and may be used to
represent space requirements, important mounting locations, and motion.
Also, they can be used to share design information between subsystems
and act as a means to control the references (or interactions) between these
subsystems. Skeleton models serve a variety of purposes defining form,
fit, and function of an assembly. Some examples are:
• Space claim (form / fit)
• Component to component interface definition (fit)
• Motion representation (function)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 4- 6 Pr o/ ENGI NEER Adv a nc e d Top- Down De s i gn
NOTES
Step 4 - Communicating Design Intent
Top-level design information such as important mounting locations and
space claim requirements can be placed in the top-level assembly skeleton
model. This information then can be distributed to the appropriate
subassembly skeleton models as needed. This allows for each subassembly
to contain a skeleton model with only the pertinent design information for
that subassembly. This means that the subassembly design team can work
confidently on their own design since they have local access to the top-
level design criteria.
Consequently, many separate design teams can be working on their
subassembly and referencing the same top-level design information. The
result is an assembly developed concurrently that fits together the first
time.
The recommended Pro/ENGINEER tool for storing design intent at
different levels of the product structure is the skeleton model. Various
data-sharing features such as Copy Geometry and Shrinkwrap can be
used to communicate and propagate the design intent from level to level
and from model to model.
Step 5 - Continued Population of the Assembly
Once the skeletal representation of the assembly has been defined, and the
top-level design criteria have been distributed, individual component
design can begin.
Many methods exist for populating the assembly structure with detailed
parts. Existing components can be assembled, or components can be
created in the context of the assembly. These individual parts can be
related to each other using other functionality such as assembly relations,
skeleton models, layouts, and merge features to further capture design
intentions.
Step 6 - Managing Part Interdependencies
One of the greatest benefits of parametric modeling is the ease with which
designs can be changed. Methods can be used to manage the many desired
interdependencies between components of a design in an organized
manner. Managing interdependencies allows components from one design
to be used in another and provides a means for controlled change and
update of the entire assembly design.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Top- Down De s i gn Ov e r v i e w Page 1 4- 7
NOTES
Tools exist in Pro/ENGINEER to help guide users in setting up the
dependencies between parts and subassemblies that will propagate the
desired changes throughout the entire design. Reference control can be
configured to limit undesired dependencies and allow desirable ones.
Furthermore, a Global Reference Viewer tool has been provided to help
users investigate and understand existing interdependencies between
components.

Not e:
As the design evolves and the designers are able to obtain
more information about the design, they may need to further
define the design intent, edit the skeletons, pass the critical
data to other models and continue to populate the assembly.
This is an iterative process—one in which the design becomes
more detailed and specific throughout the project. You should,
therefore, expect to perform the sequence of steps listed above
more than once in order to complete the project.
PRO/ENGINEER TOP-DOWN DESIGN TOOLS
The following Pro/ENGINEER tools enable you to successfully capture
design intent using the top-down design approach:
Layouts
Layouts are central locations in which you can capture non-geometrical
top-level design criteria. A layout is an especially useful tool in cases
where you do not have exact information about the geometry.
Dimensions, parameters, and relations defined in a Layout can be
parametrically linked to skeletons or part models.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 4- 8 Pr o/ ENGI NEER Adv a nc e d Top- Down De s i gn
NOTES
Figure 4: Layout for a Race-Car Model
Figure 5: Using Layouts as a Top-Down Design Tool
Skeletons
Skeletons are central locations in which you can capture geometrical
central design information for a model. You can use skeleton models to
represent the design information in a layout in a 3-D representation. There
are three typical uses for skeletons:
• Space claim (form / fit)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Top- Down De s i gn Ov e r v i e w Page 1 4- 9
NOTES
Figure 6: Using Skeletons for Space Claimes
• Component to component interface definition (fit)
Figure 7: Using Skeletons for Fit
• Motion representation (function)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 4- 10 Pr o/ ENGI NEER Adv a nc e d Top- Down De s i gn
NOTES
Figure 8: Using Skeletons for Motion Representation
Data Sharing Features
• Publish Geometry– A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows a
designer to document the design information, making it easier for
others to later use the Copy Geometry function.
Figure 9: The Publish Geometry Dialog Box
• Copy Geometry – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows you to
transfer design information such as surfaces, datum planes, and datum
axes from one model to another.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Top- Down De s i gn Ov e r v i e w Page 1 4- 11
NOTES
Figure 10: Accessing the Copy Geometry Feature
• Shrinkwrap – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows you to
‘shrinkwrap’ a model or assembly with a surface, thereby dramatically
reducing regeneration time in the recipient model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 4- 12 Pr o/ ENGI NEER Adv a nc e d Top- Down De s i gn
NOTES
Figure 11: Accessing the Shrinkwrap Feature
Managing References / Interdependencies
Two functions that help the user in the sixth and ongoing step of top-down
design are Reference Control and the Global Reference Viewer
Reference Control
The Reference control dialog box allows users to define the allowable
scope for external references that the system will create. This function is
particularly useful when designing in an assembly, or when creating Copy
Geometry features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Top- Down De s i gn Ov e r v i e w Page 1 4- 13
NOTES
Figure 12: Reference Control Dialog Boxes
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 4- 14 Pr o/ ENGI NEER Adv a nc e d Top- Down De s i gn
NOTES
Global Reference Viewer
The Global Reference Viewer is a very powerful tool that gives you the
ability to find any type of external reference between models in an
assembly. This tool is useful to ensure that only desired references have
been created, or for troubleshooting of existing assemblies.
Figure 13: Model and Global Reference Viewer Dialog Boxes
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Top- Down De s i gn Ov e r v i e w Page 1 4- 15
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that:
• Top down design can be conceived as an ongoing process of capturing,
communicating, and managing design information.
• There are six steps in the Top-Down Design process: Defining Design
Intent, Defining Preliminary Product Structure, Introducing Skeleton
Models, Communicating Design Intent, Continued Population of the
Assembly, Managing Part Interdependencies.
• Layouts, Skeletons, Publish Geometry, and Copy Geometry tools
enable the Top-Down Design approach.
• Managing references and interdependencies using reference control
options and the global reference viewer are an important part of the
ongoing cycles of working in models built with the Top-Down Design
principles.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 15-1
Module
1
1
5
5
Additional Datum Features and Skeletons
In this module you learn how to create additional datum features
like datum axes, datum curves, datum points, and datum coordinate
systems.
In addition you will be introduced to skeleton features and their
uses.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe all available additional datum features in the software
• Create additional datum features using different methods.
• Employ additional datum features as robust references for solid
geometry
• Create a basic skeleton feature
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES
Datum features are mass-less, non-solid features that can be used as
references and as parents to solid geometry. All datum features serve the
purpose of construction type geometry.
Datum Axes
Datum axes appear as dashed yellow lines that often have name-tags such
as A_1, A_2, and A_3.
Uses
• As centers of coaxial holes
• As references for assembly constraints
• As aids for the creation of other datum features
Methods of Creation
• Thru Edge – Created through a straight edge of the model
• Normal Pln – Normal to a selected surface with linear dimensions to
two references
• Pnt Norm Pln – Normal to a selected surface and though a datum
point
• Thru Cyl – Created through the “imaginary” center of any surface of
revolution
• Two Planes – Created at the intersection of two planes
• Two Pnt/Vtx – Created through two datum points or two vertices of
the model
• Point on Surface – Goes through a point normal to the surface
• Tan Curve – Created tangent to a datum curve or at the end point of a
model’s edge
Datum Curves
Datum curves appear on the model as orange lines. They can be straight or
curved and open or closed loops.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 3
NOTES
Uses
• As trajectories for swept features
• To help define the shape of assembly skeletons
• To aid in surface creation
• To measure features of a model
Methods of Creation
• Sketch – Uses sketcher functionality to create the curve on a flat
surface.
• Intr. Surf – Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces.
• Thru Points – Create a curve through a series of datum points.
• Proj ected – Projects a 2D curve onto a solid surface.
• Formed – Transfers a datum curve onto a surface as a formed curve.
The formed curve preserves the length of the original curve.
• 2 Projection – Creates a projected datum curve from two sections on
non-parallel sketching planes.
• From Equation – Creates a curve based of mathematical equations.
Datum Points
Datum points appear as small yellow “x”s on the model, with name tags
such as PNT1
Uses
• Help in creating datum curves and datum axes.
• Used when creating holes that are placed on point.
• Used as references for assembly constraints.
Methods of Creation
• On Surface – Creates a point on a selected surface using linear
dimension to two references
• On Vertex – Point is defined at a vertex on the solid model
• Offset Csys – Points are defined offset from a coordinate system
using Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinates
• At Center – Creates a point at the center of an arc or a circle
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• On Curve – Creates a point along a datum curve or model edge with
the following dimensional options.
Offset – Places a point on the curve offset at a distance from a
planar surface.
Length Ratio – Places a point on the curve as a percentage of
the overall length (0.0 and 1.0 are the start and end points of
the curve).
Actual Length – Places the point using the actual arc length
distance of the curve.
• Field Point – Places a free-floating point on a selected reference such
as a surface or a curve.
Datum Coordinate Systems
Datum Coordinate Systems appear yellow on the model and usually have
nametags, such as CS1. Each axis on the coordinate system is also labeled
(x,y,z).
Uses
• Ability to define a zero position for datum points read in from file.
• Orientation for manufacturing procedures.
• References for assembly constraints.
Methods of Creation
• 3 Planes – Origin at the intersection of three planes.
• Pnt + 2Axes – Origin at a datum point, vertex, or origin of another
datum coordinate system.
• 2 Axes – Origin at the intersection of two axes, straight edges or
straight datum curves.
• Defaul t – Origin at the first vertex of the base feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 5
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
The goal of this lab is to create additional datum features and use them
as references to solid geometry.
Method
In Exercise 1, you start with the default datums and a datum coordinate
system included in any new part. Then you create datum points and a
datum curve to create a door handle.
In Exercise 2, you use several datum features to create a simple skeleton.
In Exercise 3, you open and ‘flex’ an assembly with a skeleton.
Tools
Table 1: Additional Datum Features
Icons Description
Insert datum coordinate system
Insert datum points
Insert sketched curve
Insert datum curve
Insert datum axis
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Additional Datum Features.
Task 1. Create a new part and define the control points for the handle.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 15_addtl_dtm_feats_skels .
3. Create a new part with the name DOOR_HANDLE.
Task 2. Since we already have a coordinate system, we will create
points at x, y, z positions relative to it.
1. Click [Insert datum points] from the sidebar and click Offset
Csys from the DATUM POINT menu.
2. Select the PRT_CSYS_DEF coordinate system from the model
tree.
3. Click Cartesian as the coordinate type.
4. Click Enter Points and type [0] for x, [0] for y, and [0] for z.
Task 3. Once the first datum point’s x, y, z positions have been defined,
enter in the x, y, z data for the other points.
1. Create a second datum point at 4,0,0. Enter [4], [0], [0] at the
prompt.
2. Create a third datum point at 4,16,0. Enter [4], [16], [0] at the
prompt.
3. Create a fourth datum point at 0,16,0. Enter [0], [16], [0] at the
prompt.
4. Once the coordinates of the last point have been entered, type
<ENTER> on a blank line.
5. Click Done to complete the feature. The part should look as shown
in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 7
NOTES
Figure 1: Datum Points
Task 4. Create a datum curve through these points. The order the points
are created does matter because the curve will connect them in that order.
1. Click [Insert datum curve], click Thru Points > Done.
Task 5. Define a specific radius that the curve will take through each
point.
1. Click Single Rad, and select PNT1. Type [1.0].
2. Click Done Sel > Done .
3. Click OK to finish the feature
Task 6. Create a swept protrusion as the door handle geometry. The
trajectory is the datum curve that you created.
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Sweep.
2. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain.
3. Select the datum curve; then click Select All > Done > Okay.
4. Define a 1.0 inch diameter circle as the cross-section, centered at
the intersection of the centerlines.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
5. Click .
6. Click OK to finish the feature. The final part should look as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 2: Final Solid Geometry
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 9
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a simple skeleton
Task 1. Create a datum curve.
1. Create a new part called LINK_SKEL using the default template.
2. Select the FRONT datum plane and click [Insert sketched
datum curve].
3. Sketch the following three line segments.
Figure 3: Sketching Three Lines
4. Click .
Task 2. Create points at the vertices
1. Click [Insert datum points] > On Vertex, then select the
vertices shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 4: Selecting Vertices
2. Click Done Sel > Done .
Task 3. Create axes through the points
1. Click [Insert datum axis] > Pnt Norm Pl n and select the
FRONT datum plane and PNT0. Then click Done Sel > Done .
2. Click [Insert datum axis] > Pnt Norm Pl n and select the
FRONT datum plane and PNT1. Then click Done Sel > Done .

Not e:
To accept default selections that the system provides such as
Done Sel and Done , you may also use for ease of use.
3. The model is as shown in the following figure. (The tags for the
points and axes have been turned off for clarity)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 11
NOTES
Figure 5: Sketched Preliminary Model
Task 4. Create two additional datum planes
1. Click [Insert datum plane] > Though and select the curve
shown in the following figure.
Figure 6: Creating a Through Datum Plane
2. Click Parallel and select the RIGHT datum plane and click Done.
3. Click > Though and select the diagonal curve.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
4. Click Normal and select the FRONT datum plane and click Done.
Task 5. Create a coordinate system
1. Click [Insert datum coordinate system] > Orig+Zaxis > .
Then select the vertex as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7: Selecting Vertex
2. Select DTM1 and Okay to accept the direction for the Z-axis.
3. Click Plane Norm, select the FRONT datum and click Fl i p >
Okay to accept the direction for the X-axis.
Figure 8: Creating Normal Plane
4. Turn off the display of .
5. Select the datum curve and click > Modify.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 13
NOTES
6. Select the 40. 0 dimension, modify to [15. 0], and Regenerate .
Figure 9: Regenerated Model
7. Notice the planes, points, axes, and csys have updated with the
changes.
8. Modify the overall height dimension back to [40. 0] and
Regenerate .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: The Link Skeleton in an assembly
Task 1. Open and ‘flex’ an assembly with a skeleton.
1. Open LINK_SKEL.ASM, and turn off the display of datum features.
Figure 10: Link Assembly
2. Notice that the LINK_SKEL (from the last exercise) has been
assembled as a skeleton in this assembly. The three solid models
have been assembled to the skeleton.
Task 2. Make modifications to the skeleton.
1. Select the Link_Skeleton from the model tree, and click >
Modify, then select the curve as shown in the following figure.
Figure 11: Selecting Curve to Modify
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 15
NOTES
2. Select the 40. 0 dimension, modify to [15. 0], and Regenerate >
Automatic.
Figure 12: Model with Modified Dimensions
3. Notice that the components move with the skeleton.
4. Modify the overall height dimension to [48. 0], and Regenerate >
Automatic.
Figure 13: Model with Further Modified Dimensions
5. Save the model and click File > Close Window.
6. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: The Vice Grip
Task 1. Open a partially finished model consisting of datum features.
Create additional features to complete the ‘skeleton’.
1. Open VICE_GRIP.PRT.
Figure 14: Start Model
2. Select the FRONT datum plane and click .
3. Select the two default references and click Del ete.
4. Display ONLY Axes and points.
5. Select axis A_1 and the two points for references as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 15: Creating References
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 17
NOTES
Task 2. Sketch the following curve.

Not e:
If you have difficulty creating the sketch, you may wish to
open the completed vice-grip model.
Figure 16: Sketching a Model
1. After completing the sketch, click and select the 45°
dimension.
2. Increase the sensitivity slider to its maximum and scroll the thumb-
wheel approximately between 45° and 15°. Notice how the curves
work together to form a ‘linkage’. The following figure has the
angle modified to 18°.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 5- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 17: Modified Angle
3. This ‘skeleton’ model now could be used to either design parts
from as part of a top-down design process, or models could be
directly assembled to simulate motion.
4. Complete the feature, save the model, and erase it from memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Addi t i ona l Da t um Fe a t ur e s a nd Sk e l e t ons Page 1 5- 19
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that
• Additional Datum features are convenient and hassle-free features that
aid model creation.
• Datum features are mass-less and non-solid; therefore, they can be
deployed frequently when creating solid geometry.
• Datum Axes are created for all types of revolved features, holes, and
extruded circles.
• Datum Curves often aid in surface creation using sketcher
functionality.
• Datum Points are used as references for assembly constraints and to
place holes on point when they are created.
• Datum Coordinate Systems are used for orientations in manufacturing
procedures.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 16-1
Module
1
1
6
6
Layers and Suppression
In this module you will learn how to use layers. Layers enable you to
organize model components – features, datum planes, and parts – so
that you can perform operations on those items collectively.
Typical operations you might perform with layers include
manipulating the model view by displaying or blanking, selecting,
suppressing, and so on.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Create layers for a given model.
• Associate items to a layer.
• Manipulate layer display status.
• Control data with the suppression function.
• Re-work existing parent/child relationships.
• Resume suppressed features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DEFINING LAYERS
Functionality
• Layers provide a means of organizing object items into related groups
to avoid confusion
• They allow you to perform certain collective operations on groups of
items such as features in a part, components in an assembly, draft
items on a drawing, even other layers.
• Using layers, you can control the information that the system displays
on the screen
• Layers enable certain actions as deletion, plotting, and suppression for
certain items.
Working With Layers
• If you use a default template, Pro/ENGINEER automatically
associates the different features of a model to specific default layers.
For example,
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 3
NOTES
Figure 1: Default Layers when Creating New Models from Template
• You can create additional default layers using two methods. The first
is through the Config file and the second is by using the def layers
command from the Layer pull-down menu in the LAYERS dialog box.
• A single item can be associated with multiple layers.
• You can have as many layers as needed or none at all.
CREATING LAYERS
Selecting the Object
The active object is the model in which you actually create the layers and
make changes. The principle is to associate those items to a layer that exist
at the layer level. For example, if you select the top-level assembly as the
active object, you can associate only items from the top-level assembly to
a top-level assembly layer.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Not e:
In Drawing mode, you can select either the model or the
drawing as the active model.
Creating Layers
• Pro/ENGINEER identifies layers by name only.
• You can express the name in numeric or alphanumeric form, using a
maximum of 31 characters.
• After you have established the active model, you can define a new
layer by clicking the .
• Once you have typed one layer name you can create multiple new
layers by simply typing a new name and pressing <ENTER>.
Associating Items to a Layer
Once you have created layers, you can associate items to them
automatically as well as manually.
For example in the following figure, you can associate axis to a new layer
automatically by selecting from the Default Layer Types. Similarly other
feature-types can also be associated either to the same layer or to another
layer.
Figure 2: New Layer Dialog Box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 5
NOTES
Using options in the LAYER dialog box, you can associate items to and
remove them from selected layers manually as well. You can copy them or
switch them from one layer to another.
Table 1: Item Types
Component
(Assembly mode only)
Select component parts and/or assemblies. Click All
Instancesor Individual in the LAYER COMP menu.
Feature
• Click the following feature options in the
LAY FEAT menu:
• Select – Specifies the particular feature.
• Range – Specifies a range of features.
• All of Type – Specifies a feature type from the
ALL FEATURES menu.
• Feat/Child – Specifies a feature and all of its
children.
Curve Select a datum curve.
Quilt Select a quilt.
2-D Items Select detail items.
Text Select nametags for datum planes, axes, points, and
coordinate systems. When text tags are blanked, Click
Sel By Menu, or select from the MODEL TREE
Point Select a datum point.
Datum Plane Select a datum plane.
Layer Select a layer. Creates a layer hierarchy with sub-layers.
Solid Geometry Select a feature. Blanks all solid features of the part.

Not e:
If you attempt to associate an item to a layer that does not exist
in the active model, the system identifies the native model for
the item. You can select or create a layer in the native model,
or ignore the selection of that item.
Setting the Display Status of a Layer
One of the main reasons that you would organize items using layers is to
control the kind of information that the system displays on the screen for
that particular object. You can perform the following procedures, as
illustrated in the following figure:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• Show selected layers on the screen.
• Blank selected layers from the screen by removing them.
• Isolate selected layers by displaying them on the screen and removing
all non-isolated layers from the screen.
• Hide components associated to the selected layer by displaying them
entirely as hidden lines when working in Hidden Line mode, or
remove them from the screen when working in No Hi dden mode (in
Assembly mode only). The Hide display status has no effect when the
environment setting is Wi reframe.
Figure 3: Layer Display Dialog Box
Not all layer items are available for manipulation in every
Pro/ENGINEER mode.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 7
NOTES

Not e:
Pro/ENGINEER does not save the display status of a layer by
default when it saves the object. The next time that you
retrieve the object, the display status reverts back to Show for
all layers. If you want to save the display status with the
object, you must click Save Status from the LAYER
DISPLAY dialog box.
Manipulating Layer Display Status
In the following figure you create layers in Part mode and Assembl y
mode, associate items to them, and vary the display status of the items.
In Part mode, you have a protrusion and three datum planes.
• Create the layers PROT, DATUM_A and DATUM_B.
• Associate the protrusion to the PROT layer.
• Associate datum plane A to the DATUM_A layer.
• Associate datum plane B to the DATUM_B layer.
• Do not associate datum plane C to any layers.
In Assembl y mode, you have three components (A, B, and C) and two
assembly datum planes.
• Create layers COMP_B, COMP_C and ADATUM_A.
• Associate component B to the COMP_B layer.
• Associate component C to the COMP_C layer.
• Associate assembly datum plane A to the ADATUM_A layer.
• Do not associate component A and assembly datum plane B to any
layers.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Part Mode
Assembly
Mode
A
B
C
D
E F
Figure 4: Illustration of Layer Display Status
• A – All layers have a display status of Shown.
• B – PROT: Bl ank; DATUM_A: Shown; DATUM_B: Bl ank
• C – PROT: Shown; DATUM_A: Shown; DATUM_B: Isolate
• D – All layers have a display status of Show.
• E – COMP_B: Bl ank; COMP_C: Show; ADATUM_A: Bl ank
• F – COMP_B: Isolate ; COMP_C: Show; ADATUM_A: Show
SUPPRESSION FUNCTIONALITY
• Suppression temporarily removes a feature or component from the
model
• The system does not regenerate the item, and the model appears as if
you had never created the item.
• When you suppress items, you can resume them at a later date.
Suppress differs from delete in that it is not permanent.
Using Suppression
• To simplify the model
• To reduce regeneration time
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 9
NOTES
• To reduce screen repaint time
• To use design alternatives
Suppressing Parent/Child Relationships
If you suppress a feature or a component that has children and do not
select the children as well, Pro/ENGINEER requires you to do one of the
following:
• Reroute the child references.
• Change the dimensioning scheme of the child.
• Suppress the child.
• Suspend action on the child until you regenerate the model.
• Freeze the component (in Assembly mode only).
Saving and Resuming Suppressed Features
You can save a model with suppressed features and/or components. When
you retrieve or regenerate it, Pro/ENGINEER informs you that it has
suppressed items.
When you resume or regenerate suppressed features, the system returns
them to their original location in the feature list. You can resume them by
selecting them from the MODEL TREE window or using one of the
following options in the RESUME menu:
• Al l – Resumes all items that are currently suppressed.
• Layer – Resumes items by layer.
• Last Set – Resumes the last group of suppressed items.
• Feat ID – Resumes items by specifying the feature ID of the item.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
The goal of this lab is to use layers for organizing items in a model. You
will also use the suppression function to remove items from a model
temporarily.
Method
In Exercises 1 and 2, you learn to control the information that the system
displays in a part model and an assembly model. You learn to use layers to
control the display of the datum planes and axes of the part in Exercise 1,
as opposed to turning their display off.
In Exercise 3, you suppress a feature in a part.
In Exercise 4, you experiment with suppressing a component in an
assembly.
Tools
Table 2: Layers Icons
Icons Description
Saved views list
Create layers
Add item to selected layer
Layers blanked
Show layers
Select all
Unselect all
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 11
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers in Part Mode
Figure 5: Layer Crank Part
Task 1. Retrieve the crank part; then shade and spin the model.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 16_layers_suppression.
3. Click [File open] to open LAYER_CRANK.PRT.
4. Shade the model if it is not already so.
Task 2. Create two layers called DATUMS and AXES.
1. Click [Saved views list]. There’s only one Defaul t view here.
2. Click View > Layers and click [Create layers].
3. Type [DATUMS], then click Add.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
4. Type [AXES], then click OK.
Task 3. Associate the default datum planes to the datum layer.
1. Select the Datums layer from the layers list. Make sure the Axes
layer is not highlighted.
2. Click the [Add item to selected layer].
3. Click Datum Plane from the LAYER OBJ menu.
4. Select DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3 from the MODEL TREE, then -
click Done Sel > Done/Return
Task 4. Associate the axes of the part to the axes layer.
1. Unselect layer Datums and select layer Axes.
2. Click the icon and click Feature from the LAYER OBJ menu.
3. Click Query Sel . Select the A_1 boss protrusion. Accept the
selection.
4. Now Select A_5 and the cross-hole protrusion. Accept the
selection.
5. Click Query Sel . Select axis A_2 . Accept the selection.
6. Click Done Sel > Done Return > Done Return.
Task 5. Use the LAYER dialog box to see the features you associated
with layers.
1. Click Show > Layer Items.
2. Tree > Expand >All .
Task 6. Change the display status of the two layers you just created.
1. Click Axes and Datums in the LAYERS dialog box
2. Click and then click .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 13
NOTES
3. The system no longer displays the datum planes and axes on the
screen, but they still exist. You can verify this by using the
MODEL TREE.
4. Close the LAYERS dialog box.
5. Save the model and close the window

Not e:
Pro/ENGINEER does not save the display status of the layers
unless you click Save Status prior to exiting the LAYERS
dialog box.
Figure 6: Layer Display Status Set to Blank
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Using Layers in Assembly Mode
Figure 7: Layers Assembly
Task 1. Open an existing assembly and define two layers at the top-
level assembly called crank and gear.
1. Open the PINION.ASM.
2. Click View > Layers and click [Create layers].
3. Type [CRANK] and press <ENTER>.
4. Type [GEAR], then click OK.
Task 2. Associate the crank part to the CRANK layer and the Gear part
to the GEAR layer.
1. Unselect the GEAR layer and select the CRANK layer.
2. Click .
3. Click Component from the LAYER OBJ menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 15
NOTES
4. Click Individual from the LAYER COMP menu.
5. Click Sel By Menu, then select LAYER_CRANK.PRT.
6. Finish the association. Click Done Sel > Done/Return >
Done/Return.
7. Repeat the steps above to associate the gear part to the gear layer
Task 3. Blank the crank and gear layers.
1. Select the crank and gear layers.
2. Click [Blank layers].
3. Repaint the screen and turn off the datum planes and axes.
4. The system no longer displays the layer crank and layer gear
components on the screen.
Figure 8: Layers Blanked from Display
Task 4. Verify that the components still exist.
1. Click Info > Feature List.
2. Click Top Level > Apply.
3. Read the information window and close the information window and
the FEATURE LIST dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 5. Set the gear model to hidden line display.
1. Click [Hidden line].
2. Click View > Layers.
3. Click Gear in the LAYERS dialog box.
4. Click from the LAYERS dialog box.
5. Repaint the screen. The system displays the component on the
screen again.
Task 6. Determine the effect that other environment settings have on the
Hidden Line setting for the layer.
1. Click .
Figure 9: Hidden Line Display Mode
2. Click from the toolbar.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 17
NOTES
Figure 10: No Hidden Display Mode

Not e
The icons next to the layer names in the dialog box indicate the
current status of the layers. If [Show layers] next to the
layer name is gray, then some of the layers of the same name
in assembly sub-components have varying display statuses set
Task 7. Determine the status of the datums layer.
1. In the LAYERS dialog box.
2. Click Show > Layer I tems.
3. Expand the datums layer items. Click the + icon next to DATUMS.
4. Notice all the models have a layer called DATUMS, but only some
of them are blanked.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 8. Set both layers back to Shown.
1. Click the [Select all] icon from the LAYERS dialog box
2. Click .
3. Repaint the screen.
4. All components and their datums should be visible again. If the
datums and axes are not visible, check the environment icons in the
toolbar,
Task 9. You have the ability to effect the display of layers within all
levels of the assembly, as well as associate items at any level. Change the
display of all the part level datum planes.
1. Click [Unselect all].
2. Select all the entries under Datums, except IN_LAYER_BASE.ASM.
3. Click .
4. Repaint the screen. The system no longer displays the datum
planes of the parts on the screen, but does display the assembly
datums.
Task 10. Add the layer called Datums at the top level and associate the
default datums of the assembly.
1. Click .
2. Type [asm_datums], then click OK
3. Select the datums layer and click .
4. Select the three assembly level datum planes in the PINION.ASM.
5. Complete the association. Click Done Sel , then click Done/Return
from the LAYER OBJ menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 19
NOTES
Task 11. Save the display status of the datum planes for the next time
that you retrieve the assembly, or any of the associated components,
1. Click Save Status from the LAYERS dialog box.
2. Click Close .
3. Save the assembly.
4. Erase the assembly from memory and all associated objects.
Figure 11: Top-Level Default Datum Planes
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Suppressing in Part Mode
In this exercise, you suppress a feature to make it easier to retrieve and
regenerate the part.
In the following figure, each hole has a cut that represents the threads;
therefore, it requires a great deal of time to retrieve and regenerate it. For
this design you only need the threads for mass property calculations, and
not for other operations.
Figure 12: PLATE.PRT with Threaded Notes
Task 1. Modify the circular protrusion which comes before the helical
threads in the regeneration list of the start model.
1. Open the part named PLATE.PRT, note the amount of time the
system uses to retrieve the part.
2. Modify the height of the circular boss to 10mm. Click Modify and
Select the boss protrusion. Select the 5 dimension and type[10].
3. Regenerate the part. Note the amount of time that the system
requires to update the geometry.
Task 2. Suppress the complex thread cuts.
1. Click Feature > Suppress from the menu manager.
2. Select the pattern of cuts from the MODEL TREE.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 21
NOTES
3. Click Done Sel from the GET SELECT menu. Click Done from
the SELECT FEAT menu.
4. Note that the cuts are no longer in the model. Verify this by
checking in the MODEL TREE.
Task 3. Once a feature is suppressed, Pro/ENGINEER does not consider
it as existing in the model. Test the speed that the system regenerates the
model without the threads in the model.
1. Click Done from the FEAT menu.
2. Change the height of the circular boss back to 5. Click Modify and
Select the 10 dimension, then type [5].
3. Regenerate the part. Note that the system updates the model much
faster now.
4. Save the model and erase it from memory.
Figure 13: Thread Cuts Suppressed
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Suppressing Components in
Assembly Mode
Figure 14: Alternate Components
Task 1. Suppress the crank components in the assembly to see what the
assembly will look like with a different crank part.
1. Open the SECOND_PINION.ASM,
2. Click Component from the ASSEMBLY menu. Click Suppress
and Select the crank part.
3. Click Done Sel > Done . Note that the system no longer includes
the component in the assembly.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 23
NOTES
Task 2. You can assemble different components to test their
compatibility with an assembly design. Assemble a model to replace the
crank.
1. Click Component > Assemble and double-click
HAND_CRANK.PRT
2. Click Al i gn from the constraint drop-down list in the
COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box.
3. Select axis A_1 of hand crank model.
4. Select axis A_1 of shaft model.
Figure 15: Axes Aligned
5. Select Align for the second constraint.
6. Select axis A_5 of hand crank model.
7. Select axis A_3 of shaft model.
8. Finish the placement.
9. Read the message in the message area, then click OK.
10. Close the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box.
Task 3. Suppress the hand crank model.
1. Click Suppress.
2. Select the HAND_CRANK using the MODEL TREE.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 24 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu to complete the
operation.
Task 4. Constrain the wheel crank to the end of the shaft.
1. Click Assemble. and double click the WHEEL_CRANK.PRT
2. Click Al i gn from the CONSTRAINT TYPE drop-down list.
3. Align A_1 of wheel crank with axis A_1 of shaft model
4. Align axis A_5 of wheel crank model with axis A_3 of shaft
model.
5. Finish the placement
Task 5. With components suppressed you can easily switch between
representations of the assembly to test which one is the most plausable.
Suppress the third crank model and resume the original one
1. Suppress the wheel crank component. Click Suppress and Select
the wheel crank part. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu.
2. List the suppressed components in the MODEL TREE. Click Vi ew
> Model Tree Setup > Item Display
3. Select Suppressed Objects and click OK
4. Resume the original layer crank component. Right mouse click the
LAYER_CRANK.PRT entry in the MODEL TREE, and select
Resume from the pop-up menu.
Task 6. Suppression temporarily removes a component from the
assembly. A suppressed model is still associated to the assembly. Resume
the suppressed components; then permanently delete them from the
assembly.
1. In the MENU MANAGER, click Component > Resume > All >
Done
2. Click Delete > Clip
3. Select only the hand crank part from the MODEL TREE.
4. Click Done Sel > Done .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
La y e r s a nd Suppr e s s i on Page 1 6- 25
NOTES

Ti ps & Techni ques:
You can use the MODEL TREE to delete suppressed features
or components without resuming them first.
5. Save the model and click File > Close Window..
6. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 6- 26 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• The Layers feature is designed for greater flexibility of models and
less clutter.
• Items have to be deliberately associated to specific layers of a model.
• Any number of layers can be created.
• The display status of a layer can be set to Hidden
• Suppression of features in a part and of components in a model leads
to greater maneuverability in design.
• Suppressed features can effect the parent/child relationship.
• Suppressed features can be resumed.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 17-1
Module
1
1
7
7
Creating Surfaces with Freeform
Interactive Surface Design in Pro/ENGINEER (also referred to as
“ISDX”) adds many new features to Pro/ENGINEER surface
modeling. In this module you learn some of the ways to use ISDX,
including an overview of the Style feature.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe the capabilities of ISDX.
• Explain the use of the new hybrid modeling paradigm.
• Describe how to use the tools and menus to create Style features.
• Describe how to use the single- and quad-view window layouts.
• Create 2-D and 3-D freeform curves.
• Create freeform surfaces using boundary curves.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DESIGNING WITH INTERACTIVE SURFACES
ISDX offers a spline-based freeform modeler that allows you to create 2-D
and 3-D curves and freeform surfaces. You can use ISDX to create
freeform surface models for:
• Conceptual design
• Engineering design
• Reverse styling
ISDX enables you to create STYLE features. Within the Style feature, you
can create freeform curves and surfaces easily.
THE STYLE FEATURE
A Style feature can contain several curves and surfaces or quilts. It
appears in the MODEL TREE as Style.
Figure 1: The Style feature in the Model Tree
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: A Style feature Containing Several Curves and Surfaces
The Style feature opens up a new modeling environment with a single or
four-view window layout.
Figure 3: Four-View Window Layout
HYBRID MODELING
Most products are a combination of geometric forms and freeform shapes.
Style offers a unique situation where you can integrate the traditional
feature based parametric modeling of Pro/ENGINEER with freeform
unconstrained surfacing. You can create freeform curves and surfaces that
can reference other geometric features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Any change in a parametric model regenerates the Style features allowing
you to freely mix unconstrained freeform surfaces with geometrical
parametric surfaces.
This unique situation also allows you to carry out total product design in a
single modeling environment.
CREATING SURFACES WITH ISDX
You can use ISDX to create curves and freeform surfaces where geometry
is either not defined or requires great flexibility. Also, you can use it when
the design intent is dependent on visual or aesthetic criteria.
Specifically, you can use ISDX to create:
• 2-D and 3-D curves (referenced or unconstrained)
• Curves On Surface (COS)
• Styling design models
• Blends and transition surfaces
• Freeform surfaces along with parametric surfaces in engineering
design models
• Reverse styling surfaces
Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves
You can use Style as a 2-D or 3-D sketcher to create unconstrained or
referenced curves. These curves can be attached to features like points,
curves, or edges and so on, and can be used to create Style or other
Pro/ENGINEER features.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 5
NOTES
Figure 4: Defining Curves in 3-D Space
Figure 5: A Blend Surface based on a Freeform 3-D Curve

Figure 6: Surfaces Created from 3-D Curves
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Using COS
You can create Curve on Surface (COS) by sketching them directly on to
the base surface or by using the Drop tool. Style allows easy manipulation
or modification of the COS in order to capture the design intent. You can
use COS to build further surfaces or to trim the surfaces.
Figure 7: Using COS for Trimming
Creating Styling Models
You can use freeform, intuitive curves and surfaces to conceptualize
products. Conceptualizing in ISDX allows you to access the inside
engineering components directly in the same part or assembly while
designing outer body shapes.
You can also model using concept images that can be applied on to base
surfaces as shown in the following figure.
(A) (B)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 7
NOTES
(C)
Figure 8: (A) Sketch (B) Sketch Applied on to the Base Surface (C) Model Developed
Using the Sketch
Creating Freeform Surfaces with Parametric
Controls
While designing products you may need to impose dimensional controls
on freeform surfaces. ISDX allows freeform curves and surfaces to
reference with parametric curves or surfaces, enabling you to control the
freeform surfaces using dimensions.
Figure 9: Dimensionally Controlling a Style Model
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Creating Blends and Transitions
You can use Style to create quick and high quality spline blends to
improve the aesthetics or smoothness of products.
Figure 10: Typical Transition Surfaces
Figure 11: Interactive Manipulation of Tangency
Applying Style Surfaces to Engineering Models
You can combine Style surfaces with parametric surfaces while creating
high curvature or transition surfaces.
Figure 12: High Curvature Transition Surfaces
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 9
NOTES
Reverse Styling
You can conveniently refer to imported scan curves and faceted or surface
data to build Style curves and surfaces.
Figure 13: Reverse Styling
CREATING STYLE SURFACES
You can create Style surfaces using any four touching boundaries. For this
purpose, Style curves, datum curves and edges as boundaries can be used
as shown in the following figure

Figure 14: Style Surfaces from Four Touching Boundaries
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
The goal of this lab is to use the Style interface and create simple style
surfaces.
Method
In Exercise 1, you redefine a Style feature created in a PDA model. You
navigate through menus, shortcut menus and tool bars and also set
different view orientations.
In Exercise 2, you create surfaces for a flashlight part by connecting four
style curve boundaries.
Tools
Table 1: ISDX Icons
Icons Description
Set active datum plane
Create and edit curves
Display curvature plot
Clear curvature plot
Regenerate all
Create surfaces from boundary curves
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 11
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Interrogating the STYLE Interface
Task 1. Experiment with an existing Style feature.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 17_surfaces_freeform.
3. Open PALM.PRT.
Figure 15: The Start Model

Not e:
The ‘LCD screen’ is actually a *.jpg image applied on the
model in Pro/E as a texture.
4. In the MODEL TREE, click STYLE id 89 and click >
Redefine .
5. Notice the Style working environment and particularly the new
tools added to the interface as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 16: The Style Tool Bars
6. The grid displayed on the TOP plane indicates that TOP is set as
the active plane.
7. Click View > Active Plane Orientation. The TOP is set parallel to
the screen.
8. In the window, > Default Orientation.
Task 2. Change the window layout.
1. Click View > Show All.
2. Click Styling > Set Active Plane . Select the Obl i que plane from
model tree.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 13
NOTES
3. In the top left window, > Active Plane Orientation from the
pop-up menu.
4. Rotate the model randomly in any window.
5. Click View > Default Orientation to reset all the windows.
6. Click anywhere in the window and then > Show All.
7. Reset the active plane. Right-click Set Active Plane and select the
TOP plane.
8. Press <CNTRL> + <D> to get to the default orientation.
Task 3. Familiarize yourself with the Style preferences.
1. Click and .
2. Click Utilities > Styling Preferences.
3. Change the spacing of the grid. In the grid area of the dialog box,
type [15] and press <ENTER>.
Figure 17: Changing Grid Spacing
4. In the Display area of the STYLING PREFERENCES dialog box,
clear the Grid checkbox.
5. In the Surface Mesh area, move the quality slider to the right to
make the mesh dense.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
6. Click [Shading].
7. In surface mesh area, click On to display mesh on the shaded
model.
Figure 18: Displaying Mesh on Shaded Model
8. Display the model without the curve and mesh display. Click Vi ew
> Shade .
9. Close the STYLING PREFERENCES dialog box.
10. Click [Repaint].
Task 4. Familiarize yourself with the selection procedure.
1. Click close to the cluster of curves as shown in the following
figure.
Click here to
select a curve
Figure 19: Selecting a Curve
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 15
NOTES
2. Click > Next from among the many commands in the pop-up
menu.
3. Choose entities from the selection bin. Right-click Show Sel Bi n.
In the SELECTION dialog box, click Style: (1) Curve:CF-116.
4. Exit the Style feature, click
5. Close the window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Handle on the Flashlight
Task 1. Add a Style feature to the flashlight body.
1. Open FLASHLIGHT.PRT.
Figure 20: Start Model
Task 2. Create the first handle curve.
1. Click Insert > Style.
2. Click and select the FRONT datum from the model tree.
3. Click > Front.
4. Click > New > Planar and create a curve with four points as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 21: First Handle Curve
5. Click [Display curvature plots]
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 17
NOTES
6. Click Edi t and drag the curve points to form a shape similar to the
one shown in the following figure.
Figure 22: Editing Curve
Task 3. Create the second handle curve.
1. Click [Clear curvature plot] to turn off the curvature plot.
2. Click New in the CURVE dialog box and create a curve with five
points as shown in the following figure.
Figure 23: Creating Second Curve
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Click [Display curvature plots]
4. Click Edi t and drag the curve points to form a shape similar to the
one shown in the following figure.
Figure 24: Editing Second Curve
5. Click [Clear curvature plot] to turn off the curvature plot.
Task 4. Create third handle curve.
1. Click > New > Free and create the first cross section by
clicking <ALT> and snapping to the existing curves as shown in
the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 19
NOTES
Figure 25: Creating a Free Curve
2. Click Add > Midpoint and select a location as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 26: Selecting a Midpoint Location
3. Click Edi t and use the <SHIFT> key to pull the point perpendicular
from the FRONT plane. Shape the curve as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 27: Shaping Curve
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 20 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 5. Using the same techniques, create another new curve and shape
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 28: Creating and Shaping a Second Curve
1. Click OK to close the CURVE dialog box.
2. Click , select the four curves that form the handle, and click
OK.
3. Click .
4. Click to shade the model.
Figure 29: Creating Surface from Four Style Curves
5. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge .
6. Select the handle surface and then the body surface.
7. Toggle the mesh for the Quilt Sides as shown in the following
figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 21
NOTES
Figure 30: Quilting Sides
8. Click .
9. Click Feature > Mirror Geom and select the FRONT plane.
Figure 31: Mirroring Geometry
10. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge , select the left and
right halves of the flashlight body, and click .
11. Click Insert > Thin Protrusion > Use Quilt, and select the
surface quilt.
12. Flip the Material Side arrow to add material to the INSIDE of the
surface.
13. Enter a thickness value of [2. 0] and click . (You may wish to
add the Style curves to a layer and blank the layer)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 7- 22 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 32: Finished Model
14. Save and click File > Close Window.
15. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cr e a t i ng Sur f a c e s wi t h Fr e e f or m Page 1 7- 23
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that:
• ISDX integrates freeform surfacing and parametric modeling to
enhance existing surfacing capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER, enabling
you to create product forms that require flexible surfaces.
• Style allows you to create geometry using a single-view layout or 4-
view layout.
• While creating a Style feature, a new menu named Styling is added
and many new commands are available.
• A curve can be created as a free 3-D curve or as a planar curve.
• To create a Style surface you need four touching boundary curves.
• To change the shape of a surface, you need to manipulate the shape of
the boundary curves.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 18-1
Module
1
1
8
8
The Resolve Environment
Pro/ENGINEER provides the Resolve Environment to help you fix
regeneration failures.
By learning how to use the Resolve Environment, you will be able to
refine existing features and parameters. This is preferable and more
efficient than recreating them.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe several regeneration failure types.
• Start the Resolve Environment.
• Diagnose feature regeneration problems.
• Run the “quick fix” to resolve failed regenerations.
• Describe some of the ways to change your model designs to
resolve feature regeneration failures.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 8- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
REGENERATION FAILURES
Failures usually occur because a feature gets changed and the effected
change conflicts with other features. These types of failures occur due to
the following reasons:
• You create new features that are unattached and have one-sided edges.
• You resume a feature that now conflicts with another (such as having
an edge round and a chamfer on the same edge).
• The feature intersection is no longer valid because dimensional
changes have moved the intersecting surfaces.
• An assembly you retrieve cannot open the required models that are
included in the assembly.
• The assembly constraints for a component are invalid.
• You have violated a relation constraint.
Starting the Resolve Environment
As soon as a regeneration failure occurs, Pro/ENGINEER automatically
starts the Resolve Environment. When this happens:
• The Fi l e pull-down menu is grayed out (unavailable) so you cannot
save the model.
• The failed feature and all subsequent features remain un-regenerated.
• The current model displays only the features that have regenerated up
to the point of failure.
• Pro/ENGINEER displays an explanation of the problem in the
Message Area.
• Pro/ENGINEER displays the RESOLVE menu options in the MENU
MANAGER and a diagnostics window.
Resolving Regeneration Failures
Once you have entered the Resolve Environment, you can address the
failure problem using any of the following methods:
• Undo all of the changes that you have made since the last successful
regeneration.
• Diagnose the cause of the model failure using the current (failed)
model or the backup model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Re s ol v e Env i r onme nt Page 1 8- 3
NOTES
• Attempt a quick fix of the problem using shortcuts for performing
standard operations on the failed feature only.
• Change the failed model or a backup model using standard part or
assembly functionality.
Specifying a Model
When you diagnose the problem or change the model, you can work on
the current failed model or a backup model. If you use a backup model,
Pro/ENGINEER shows all features in their pre-regenerated state, so that
you can modify or restore dimensions of the features that are not displayed
in the current model.
If you select the Regen Backup option from the ENVIRONMENT dialog
box, the system saves a copy of the current model to disk with the name
REGEN_BACKUP_MODEL####.PRT prior to each regeneration, and
removes the file when you exit the Resolve Environment. Otherwise, it
uses the last version of the current model saved on disk prior to the failure.
Undoing Changes
Rather than attempt to resolve the problem, you can simply undo the step
that brought you into the Resolve Environment. However, this may not be
the best choice in some cases. For example, if the feature fails because of
the change that you have made, even if you undo the change, the model
itself still remains problematic. The Undo approach is most appropriate in
those cases in which you either did not intend to make the change or you
want to fix the problem in the model without using the Resolve
Environment tools.

Not e:
Keep in mind that the Resolve Environment tools are designed
to resolve failures in order to allow you to build more robust
models.
Diagnosing the Problem
When you use the Resolve Environment, it is always good practice to
interrogate the model to determine what has caused the model failure. The
system gives you many diagnostic tools to perform an investigation. To
interrogate the model, you can use the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window
to display the following information:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 8- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
• A description of the current model and backup models.
• Information concerning the failed feature.
• Hints on resolving the problem.
Figure 1: FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS Window
If you need to investigate the problem further, you can use the Investigate
option to obtain the following information about the current model or the
backup model, if it exists:
• Modified dimensions.
• All modifications and changes.
• All references for the failed feature in the model.
• Invalid geometry of the failed feature.
You can then choose to roll the model back to one of the following: the
failed feature (for the backup model only), the feature just before the
failed feature, the state at the end of the last successful feature
regeneration, or a specified feature.
Performing a Quick Fix on the Failed Feature
Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can perform the following operations on
the failed feature only:
• Redefine it.
• Reroute it.
• Suppress the failed feature along with its children.
• Delete it with its children.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Re s ol v e Env i r onme nt Page 1 8- 5
NOTES

Not e:
When you make changes in the Resolve Environment, they can
affect the failed feature or another specified feature. If you
suppress features using the QUICK FIX menu, you should
investigate the cause of the failure before continuing with the
part design. If you do not make any corrections, you may not
be able to resume the feature later in the design.
Changing the Model
Using the FIX MODEL menu, you can change any feature or component
to solve the regeneration problem. As you change a model in the Resolve
Environment, however, consider any parent/child relationships that exist
between features and components to avoid changing the intent of the
model itself. Specifically, you can use any of the following approaches:
• Use the FEAT menu to perform feature operations on the model.
• Modify dimensions using the standard MODIFY menu.
• Regenerate the model again.
• Restore dimensions, parameters, relations, or all of these to their
values prior to the failure.
• Add, delete, or modify relations, as necessary, to regenerate the model.
• Display the PART SETUP menu to perform additional part set up
procedures.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 8- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
The goal of this lab is resolve regeneration failures by using the resolve
environment.
Method
In this exercise, you add features to a part, which causes other features to
fail. You then investigate and resolve the problem in the Resolve
Environment.
EXERCISE 1: Resolving a Regeneration Failure
Task 1. Use the Feature List and Model Player options to determine
how the chamfer part was built.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 18_resolve.
3. Retrieve CHAMFERS.PRT.
4. Open the feature list. Click Info > Feature List . Review the
Information Window and close it.
5. Regenerate the model in steps. Click Utilities > Model Player.
6. First click to rewind the model player to begin at the first
feature.
7. Click to regenerate feature by feature.

Not e:
The system regenerates the two chamfers after the two
protrusions. You will not see datum planes if you have them
off.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Re s ol v e Env i r onme nt Page 1 8- 7
NOTES
Task 2. Insert an edge round on the bottom edge of the model. Add the
rounds after the second (triangular) protrusion.
1. Click Feature > Insert Mode > Activate from the MENU
MANAGER.
2. Insert after the second protrusion. Select the second protrusion
feature of the model. Note that the system no longer displays the
chamfers, as shown in the following figure.
Round these
four edges.
Insert after this
protrusion
Figure 2: The Resolve Model
3. Click Insert > Round.
4. Leave Simple as the default. Then click Done from the ROUND
TYPE menu.
5. Leave Constant and Edge Chain the defaults; and click Done
from the RND SET ATTR menu.
6. Click Surf Chain from the CHAIN menu.
7. Query Sel the hidden bottom surface and click Accept.
8. Select all the highlighted edges to round. Click Select All from the
CHAIN OPT menu; then click Done from the CHAIN menu.
9. Enter a radius value. Type [2.0] followed by <ENTER>.
10. Complete the round feature. Click OK.
11. Click Feature List from the INFO pull-down menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 8- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Not e:
The system created the round feature after the second
protrusion. Also, note the regeneration status of the two
chamfers.
12. Click Close to exit the INFORMATION window.
13. Click Feature > Insert Mode > Cancel to exit insert mode. When
the system asks you if you want to resume the features that it
suppressed when activating insert mode, type [yes].
Task 3. Pro/ENGINEER places you in the Resolve Environment
because it cannot regenerate the chamfer feature. The references for the
chamfer feature no longer exist because the system replaced them with the
round feature that you created in insert mode. Diagnose the model’s
problem.
1. Review all of the information provided in the FAILURE
DIAGNOSTICS window.
2. Click Overview and review the Resolve Feature Overview. Close
the window.
3. Click Feature Info and review the Failed Feature Info. Close the
window.
4. Click Resolve Hints and review Pro/ENGINEER’s suggestions
for resolving the problem. Close the window.
5. Click Investigate from the RESOLVE FEAT menu. Accept the
default Current Modl , and click Show Ref from the
INVESTIGATE menu.
6. Navigate through the window of the missing chamfer by clicking
on each item and showing references. When you have finished
showing the missing references, click Close .

Not e:
The edge references for the chamfer appear on the screen, but
they are no longer part of the model. The round feature that
you created removed these edges. Because it regenerated prior
to the chamfer, it regenerated successfully and the chamfer
failed.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
The Re s ol v e Env i r onme nt Page 1 8- 9
NOTES
Task 4. Resolve the failed feature by removing the failed chamfer
feature from the part model. Recall that the quick fix option for resolve
only works on the failed feature.
1. Click Quick Fix from the RESOLVE FEAT menu; then click
Delete from the QUICK FIX menu. Read the prompt. Click Delete
All > Yes from the YES/NO menu to exit the Resolve Environment.
2. Again review the feature list. Click Info > Feature List . Note that
the chamfer feature is no longer part of the model.
3. Save the model and erase it from memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 8- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• It is not uncommon for models to fail due to problems in design.
• Pro/ENGINEER provides a Resolve Environment to rectify failed
features.
• Failures usually occur due to design changes in certain parts after an
extensive model has been built up.
• The Failure Diagnostics window in the Resolve Environment displays
accurate and specific information regarding particular failures.
• Rerouting, redefining, suppressing, and deleting a feature along with
its children are some of the quick fixes that can be performed on a
failed feature.
• A failed model can more permanently fixed by using the FIX MODEL
menu.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 19-1
Module
1
1
9
9
Information Tools
In this module you learn how to obtain many kinds of information
from your models and assemblies. You will learn how to query your
designs to obtain regeneration information, clearance and
interference characteristics, and more.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Obtain information about features, parts, and assemblies.
• Obtain regeneration information.
• Calculate mass properties.
• Calculate clearance and interference between parts.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 9- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
MODEL INFORMATION
It is good design practice to determine the way a model was built before
making any modifications and additions. For this, Pro/ENGINEER
provides useful tools to extract information about individual features,
regeneration, assembly components, and entire models.
Obtaining Information about a Specific Feature
Using the Info Feature option, you can obtain information about a
particular feature in PART, ASSEMBLY, and DRAWING modes.
Obtaining Regeneration Information
Using Utilities > Model Player, you can step successively through the
regeneration of the part—starting from a specified feature or from the
beginning—in the current order of creation.
Figure 1: The Model Player Dialog Box
The model player option is particularly useful because it allows you to
observe the design of a part, and assists you in determining if poor design
practices were used to create it.
Accessing Information about Part Features
Using the Model option, you can access information about every feature
on a part. The system lists regenerated and suppressed features, all
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I nf or mat i on Tool s Page 1 9- 3
NOTES
coordinate systems, cross-sections, and reference dimensions in an
INFORMATION WINDOW.
Using Feature List , you can list all features in the model in their
regeneration order and obtain the feature number, feature ID, name, type,
suppression order, and regeneration status for each.
Obtaining Information about Assemblies
Using the Component option in ASSEMBLY mode, you can obtain
information about how a component was assembled, how its parent/child
relationships and parameters were formed.
You can also use the Model option to access information about selected
assembly components. In the INFORMATION WINDOW, the system
displays the names of the components in a hierarchical structure to show
how they were assembled.

Ti ps & Techni ques:
The system lists only the names of the objects in the
Information Window. However, if you set the configuration
file option DISPLAY_FULL_OBJECT_PATH to yes, it
displays the full pathnames of the objects, along with their
object-types and version-number suffixes.
MEASUREMENT, INTERFERENCE, AND MASS
PROPERTIES
With Pro/ENGINEER’s ANALYSIS pull-down menu you can:
• Add engineering information to a model.
• Analyze the model through measurement.
• Check interference.
• Calculate mass properties.
Calculating Mass Properties
Using the Model Analysis option, you can compute mass properties for
parts, assemblies, and cross-sections.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 9- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
In a mass properties calculation, the system does not include the mass of
suppressed features or suppressed components in any assembly.

Not e
By default, mass properties do not automatically update when
you make changes to the model. You must recalculate the
mass properties to Using the Model Analysis option, you
can:
• Calculate volume or interference between pairs of any combination of
subassemblies, parts, surfaces, cables, and entities.
• Perform a global clearance check to find all pairs of parts or
subassemblies with clearances less than a specified clearance distance.
• Perform a global interference check to find all interfering pairs of parts
or subassemblies.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I nf or mat i on Tool s Page 1 9- 5
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you learn to extract information to determine how a
part was created.
Method
In Exercise 1, you learn to use information tools to calculate measurements.
EXERCISE 1: Using Information Tools
Task 1. Interrogate the regeneration cycle of a gear part .
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 19_info_tools.
3. Open GEAR_COUNTERWEIGHT.PRT.
4. Click Utilities > Model Player.
5. Click to rewind the model player.
6. Click to step through the model.
7. Click Show Dims.
8. Click Feat Info to obtain information about the feature to see how
it was created.
9. Click Close in INFORMATION WINDOW.
10. Click to continue to step through the regeneration of the part,
feature by feature.
11. Complete the regeneration and close the MODEL PLAYER dialog
box.
12. Click I nfo > Model .
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 9- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
13. Scroll through the feature list in the INFORMATION WINDOW
dialog box, then close.
Task 2. Determine mass properties for the model.
1. Click Analysis > Model Analysis.
2. Click Compute, accepting all the default options in the MODEL
ANALYSIS dialog box.
3. Click Info in the MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box. Information on
the mass properties gets displayed.
4. Scroll down the INFORMATION WINDOW and close it when you
are done.
5. Close the MASS PROPERTIES dialog box.
Task 3. Measure the model.
1. Click Analysis > Measure
2. In the MEASURE dialog box, click Area from the TYPE drop-down
list.
3. Select the front cylindrical surface.
select this edge
to measure the
length.
First select this
surface to calculate
the surface area.
Figure 2: Measuring Surface Area and Curve Length
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I nf or mat i on Tool s Page 1 9- 7
NOTES
Task 4. Measure the length of the gear edge feature.
1. Click Curve Length in the TYPE drop-down list.
2. Select the gear edge as shown in the preceding figure.
3. The length of the edge appears in the message area of your screen
and also in the RESULTS area of the dialog box.
Task 5. Measure the distance between two vertices:
1. Click Distance from the TYPE drop-down list.
2. Click Vertex from the FROM drop-down list.
3. Select the vertex as shown in the following figure.
4. Select Vertex from the TO drop-down list
5. Select the second vertex as shown.
6. The system measures the distance between vertices and displays it
in the message area and in the RESULTS area of the dialog box.
7. Click Close .
Select this
vertex first.
Select this
vertex second
Figure 3: Measuring Distance
8. Save the model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 1 9- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
9. Click File > Close Window.
10. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I nf or mat i on Tool s Page 1 9- 9
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that:
• With Pro/ENGINEER you not only provide information to the system
while building models but you can also retrieve information for
analysis or manufacturing purposes.
• In any model you can obtain information about any specific feature.
• You can access information about any specific part to learn how it was
built feature by feature using the Regen Info option
• You can calculate mass properties for parts, assemblies, and sections
using the Model Analysis option.
• In a part you can measure, among other things, distances between
vertices, length of curve edge, and surface areas.
• You can calculate interference between pairs of any combination of
subassemblies, parts, surfaces, cables, and entities to reduce the
amount of calculation time needed to perform a global interference
check among all components.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 20-1
Module
2
2
0
0
Configuring Pro/ENGINEER
In this module you learn how to modify your Pro/ENGINEER
working environment. You learn how to configure Pro/ENGINEER
either to create a company-wide standard or to suit your own
individual needs.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Locate network-based Pro/ENGINEER configuration files.
• Create customized Pro/ENGINEER work sessions.
• Automate processes with map keys.
• Configure your toolbar and model tree
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 2 Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
CUSTOMIZING PRO/ENGINEER
You use configuration files to customize your Pro/ENGINEER work
environment. These files can include your preferences for tolerance,
display formats, calculation accuracy, the number of digits used in
Sketcher, and so on. The default name for the Pro/ENGINEER
configuration file is CONFIG.PRO.
You can edit configuration files to set company standards in several areas,
including:
• Storing drawing formats.
• Submitting project objects.
• Setting default measurement units for new parts (such as millimeters
instead of inches).
• Setting library file locations.
Defining Configuration Files
Pro/ENGINEER can read configuration files from several areas, as shown
in the following figure. However, if a particular option is present in more
than one configuration file, uses the last value read will be used.
When starting, Pro/ENGINEER first reads a protected configuration file
called CONFIG.SUP (the “.sup” extension stands for “Supervisor’s
configuration file”) from the directory <LOADPOINT>/TEXT (the
directory from which you install Pro/ENGINEER). These options override
the same options that may be set in other configuration files.
This file can be used to establish customized company standards for all of
your Pro/ENGINEER users. Every entry in the CONFIG.SUP file locks out
any duplicate entries in your local CONFIG.PRO configuration files.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 3
NOTES
Figure 1: Possible Locations of Configuration Files on a Network
Pro/ENGINEER reads in configuration files from the following directories
in this order:
• The CONFIG.PRO file in the LOADPOINT directory.
• The CONFIG.PRO file in your home directory.
• The CONFIG.PRO file in your start-up directory.
• Default values built into the software.

Not e
For a complete listing of configuration file options and
defaults, refer to the Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER User’s
Guide.
Editing Configuration Files
You can edit configuration files during your working session. Do this by
using the Options option in the UTILITIES menu.
The following figure shows the OPTIONS dialog box.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 2: Preferences Dialog Box

Not e
Configuration files are not automatically loaded after editing.
They have to be loaded by clicking the Appl y button.
Creating Mapkeys
A Mapkey is a keyboard macro that you can create using the Mapkeys
option in the UTILITIES pull-down menu. It performs a series of selections
when you type only one or two keystrokes.
The MAPKEYS dialog box lists each mapkey that is in session and
provides a description of its function. The RECORD MAPKEY dialog box
allows you to create, modify, run, delete, and save mapkeys to a
configuration file. Both are displayed in the following figures.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 5
NOTES

Figure 3: Mapkeys and Record Mapkey Dialog Boxes
CUSTOMIZING YOUR TOOLBAR
Adding Icons to Existing Toolbars
All pull-down menu options can be associated with easy-to-use toolbar
icons. To do this, you can create new icons and add them to existing
toolbars
The CUSTOMIZE dialog box includes a list of existing pull-down menu
options on the left with corresponding icons on the right. This is illustrated
in the following figure.
As you go down the menu options on the left, you can simply drag the
associated icon of your choice onto the toolbar.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 4: Setting Toolbar Icons
Saving the Settings
You save your changes to toolbars by using the Automatically Save To
option in the CUSTOMIZE dialog box. This option creates a file called
CONFIG.WIN in the same directory that the file resides in.
This file automatically loads when Pro/ENGINEER is started the next
time.
Creating Pull-down Menus
You can create a separate pull-down menu for newly defined Mapkeys.
This allows the use of the mouse to select your mapkey definitions. Quick
keys, such as F1, are also valid for the mapkey.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 7
NOTES

Ti ps & Techni ques:
Name keystrokes so that you can easily remember what they
refer to. An example is sd for Cosmetic Shade."
Associating New Icons for Mapkeys
Mapkeys have a default icon associated with them but you have the option
to change the icon. With the CUSTOMIZE dialog box open, you can
modify the displayed icon. The modifying options include the ability to:
• Delete the icon.
• Copy the icon image.
• Paste a copied icon image.
• Edit the icon image with an icon editor.
• Choose a button image from a predefined list.
• Show the text associated to the icon.
THE MODEL TREE
The MODEL TREE is a powerful tool to organize and manipulate active
objects.
Most importantly, the MODEL TREE is an information tool as well as an
interactive operations tool, complete with a configurable interface and
search engine.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 5: MODEL TREE Display
In addition to using the MODEL TREE tool to display features, you can
also configure it to maintain predefined and customized columns that
correspond to items in the tree.
Some commonly used columns are:
• Info – provides information regarding:
Status (regenerated, unregenerated, failed, frozen, or
suppressed)
Feature number
Feature ID (as shown in the preceding figure.)
Feature type
Feature name
• Layers – Provides the status of layers.
• Model Params – Displays new model parameters affecting the entire
model.
• Feat Params – Displays new parameters affecting a feature.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 9
NOTES
Figure 6: MODEL TREE COLUMNSDialog Box
The MODEL TREE COLUMNS dialog box is available with the VIEW
menu Model Tree Setup option.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you learn to configure the default Pro/ENGINEER
interface to suit your working environment.
Method
In Exercise 1, you develop a configuration file and a toolbar to customize
the Pro/ENGINEER working environment.
In Exercise 2, you create a mapkey to help increase efficiency.
Tools
Table 1: Interface Icons
Icons Description
Save as
Mapkey icon you create
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 11
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up a Configuration File
Task 1. Create a new configuration file in the local directory and edit it.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 20_config_proe.
3. Open BUSHING.PRT.
4. Click Utilities > Options.
Figure 7: Editing the Configuration File
Task 2. Alter default values to tailor the working environment to suit
your preferences.
1. In the SHOWING dropdown menu, select Current Session.
2. Clear the Show only options loaded from file check box.
3. In the SORT drop-down box, select By Category. Now, set it back
to Alphabetical.
4. Scroll down the list and select spin_center_display.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
5. The default Value is YES, which means the spin center will always
be displayed when Pro/ENGINEER is launched.
6. In the VALUE drop-down list, select No, then click Add/Change .
Figure 8: Selecting a Configuration File Option.
7. Check the Show only options loaded from file box. Only the
options you have changed from the default settings will be listed.
8. In the OPTION box, type [spin_with_part_entities], then
press <ENTER>.
9. In the VALUE drop-down list, select YES and click Add/Change .
This option is added to the list of changed settings for this session
of Pro/ENGINEER.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 13
NOTES
Figure 9: Second Option Added
Task 3. Add additional options using a Keyword Search. Look for an
option that will prompt you to save any "unsaved" data when you exit
Pro/ENGINEER.
1. In the OPTIONS dialog box, click Fi nd.
2. In the TYPE KEYWORD box, type [exit].
3. Click Find Now. One option is found. Read the description and
select it.
4. Set the default value to YES in the SET VALUE dialog box. Click
Add/Change .
Task 4. Add an option that includes more lines to the message area of
Pro/ENGINEER.
1. In the TYPE KEYWORD box, type [message].
2. Click Find Now.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Select visible_message_lines.
4. Select visible_message_lines in the CHOOSE OPTIONS dialog
box. Type [5] in the SET VALUE box.
5. Click Add/Change > Close .
6. Click Appl y in the OPTIONS dialog box.
Task 5. Save the changes to the settings such that they are effective
every time Pro/ENGINEER is launched.
1. Click .
2. Leave the default [config.pro] as the name.
3. Click OK > Close .
4. Click File > Exit to save the file and exit the editor.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 15
NOTES
Task 6. Verify that the changed settings are currently in effect. Some
settings will require a software restart to be active
1. Click File > Exit.
2. Start a new session of Pro/ENGINEER and open BUSHING.PRT.
3. Spin the part using the mouse. Notice that the datum planes remain
displayed during spinning. This is a result of the change to the
spin_with_part_entities option.
4. Modify a feature. Click Modify. Select the center hole of the
bushing. Select the 19.12 dimension, type [10.00].
5. Click Regenerate to update the geometry. Notice that the message
window has been expanded to list five lines.
6. Click File > Exit > Yes. Since you modified the bushing but did
not save it, you are presented with the option to save the model.
7. Press <ENTER> to save the part.
8. Restart Pro/ENGINEER.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 16 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Mapkey
Task 1. Create a mapkey that will rename a feature.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \
intro_proe_320 \ 20_config_proe.
3. Open CRANK.PRT.
4. Click Utilities > Mapkeys.
5. Click New in the MAPKEYS dialog box.
Task 2. Define a mapkey to develop .
1. Type [fn] as the KEY SEQUENCE.
2. Type [Feature Name] as the NAME.
3. Type [Name a feature for easy identification] for
DESCRIPTION.
4. Select Pause for keyboard input.
5. Click Record.
Task 3. Record the mapkey.
1. Click Setup > Name.
2. Select on the hole feature in the model.
3. Type [Shaft_bore] and press <ENTER>
4. Click Done.
5. Click Stop in the RECORD MAPKEYS dialog box.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Save leaving the default name CURRENT_SESSION.PRO.
8. Close the RECORD MAPKEY dialog box
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 17
NOTES
Task 4. Test your new mapkey.
1. Type [fn].
2. Select on the boss and type [boss] as the new name.
3. Click Info > Feature List . You will notice the new names you
have given to the model features.
Task 5. Learn to include an icon onto your toolbar.
1. Click Utilities > Customize Screen.
2. Select the third icon from the right; then click Description.
3. Read the description, then click <ENTER>.
4. Drag the icon next to the OPEN icon on the SAVE toolbar, as
shown below:
Figure 10 Inserting Erase Icon into the Standard Toolbar
Task 6. Customize your toolbar to include an icon for the [fn] mapkey
you created.
1. In the CUSTOMIZE dialog box, select Mapkeys in CATEGORIES
to highlight it.
2. In the MAPKEYS area of the dialog box, click the smile face .
3. Click Modify Selection > Choose Button Image .
4. In the SELECT MAPKEY ICON dialog box, click
5. Now drag it from the dialog box onto your toolbar.

Not e
The system will automatically save the changes the
CONFIG.WIN file to your working directory. You can change
the directory that the file is saved to.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 0- 18 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Task 7. Finish the definition of the toolbars.
1. Notice the entry at the bottom of the dialog box. Leave the option
to automatically save the file and click OK.
2. A part of your customized toolbar could look like this:
Feature name mapkey icon
Figure 11:Customized Toolbar
3. Erase the current testing model from memory. Click the newly
added Erase Current icon from the toolbar, then click Yes.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Conf i gur i ng Pr o/ ENGI NEER Page 2 0- 19
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• The Pro/ENGINEER environment is customizable.
• You should first load the CONFIG.PRO file in order to configure your
environment.
• You can create mapkeys, or macros, of frequently used series of steps
in the design process.
• New toolbars and toolbar icons can be created to associate with the
mapkeys you create.
• New pull-down menus can be created.
• The MODEL TREE can be used as an effective information tool with
many customizable columns.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 21-1
Module
2
2
1
1
Modeling Philosophy
Design intent is the concept that connects the various techniques for
creating parts, assemblies, and drawings. Capturing design intent by
various methods is the core of Pro/ENGINEER's modeling
philosophy.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe how to incorporate your design intent into new models.
• Describe the benefits of using parent/child relationships in your
designs.
• Describe how to use relations.
• Describe the importance of associativity in Pro/ENGINEER.
• Describe how to change design intent in your models.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 1- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DESIGN INTENT
Before you start designing parts and assemblies in Pro/ENGINEER, it is
important that you first define the intention of your design. At this
preliminary stage, the high-level design intent is usually already
understood. Before starting a new design in Pro/ENGINEER, you should
be able to answer following questions:
• What is the purpose of the product? How will it satisfy this purpose?
• What are the major subsystems necessary to satisfy this function?
• How will these individual subsystems be incorporated into the overall
product?
• What design changes are likely to occur as the product is being
developed?
• Is this a new design or is it based on an existing product?
• What are the relevant design constraints? (size, weight, cost, and so
on)
• How will this product interact with its environment?
Answers to many of these questions may already exist in the form of
product specifications, product quotes, and proposals. Also, any
conceptual design work that has already been completed should provide
information on how the product will look and how each of its subsystems
will interact with one another.
This information can be managed using Pro/INTRALINK and
Pro/ENGINEER. Existing documents that are not Pro/ENGINEER files
can be managed by Pro/INTRALINK. Dependencies between the non-
Pro/ENGINEER files and the assemblies and parts with which they are
associated can be created, so that this information is available to the
designer working on the detailed components.
In addition, conceptual design results and ideas can be captured in
Pro/NOTEBOOK. Pro/NOTEBOOK (also known as Layout Mode) is an
optional module within Pro/ENGINEER that provides tools to create two-
dimensional layouts. Two-dimensional sketches and pictures of an
assembly design can be documented with critical design dimensions, notes
and parameters. These parameters can be shared globally among all
components of the assembly and can be used to drive design parts,
assemblies and skeletons.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Model i ng Phi l osophy Page 2 1- 3
NOTES
Recording Your Design Criteria
Before you start creating a model, you should record the design criteria for
the model that would include:
• Order of features • Feature form
• Base feature • Feature type
• Feature
duplication
• Depth
Using Pro/ENGINEER as a Parametric Tool
• One of the major facets of the parametric nature of Pro/ENGINEER is
the ability to generate parent/child relationships.
• You can also use Pro/ENGINEER to interrelate feature dimensions by
creating relations without creating parent/child relationships.
Creating Parent/Child Relationships
Methods
The following are some of the ways in which you can create parent/child
relationships among features:
• Specifying the sketching/placement plane.
• Orienting the reference plane.
• Dimensioning and specifying Sketcher references and constraints.
• Defining feature depth /depth references.
• Edge references (Rounds/Chamfers)
• Component Assembly constraints.
Using Relations
Relations allow you to create a relationship between features or
components in an assembly without creating a parent/child relationship in
which child features control their parents.

Not e
You can document the modeling intent by commenting the
relation and changing the symbolic name.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 1- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Optimizing Designs with Relations
If you have developed good parent/child relationships along with a well-
defined parametric behavior of the model, relations can elevate as well as
optimize certain design criteria.
Optimizing Designs with Behavioral Modeler
With Behavioral Modeler you have the ability to perform an iterative
analysis of your design by developing a Design Study. A multitude of
objectives can be met this way. You can:
• Determine the dependency between a design specification and a model
parameter or dimension using a Sensitivity Analysis.
• Find a set of values of specified model parameters that satisfy a set of
design specific criteria using a Feasibility study.
• Find a set of values of specified parameters that optimize the design
based on some criteria while satisfying a set of design specifications
using an Optimization study.
Advantages of Pro/ENGINEER Associativity
Creating Assemblies
Associativity among drawings, parts, features leads to easy regeneration
while reducing the effort needed in designing complex machines.
Creating Skeleton Parts
You can also create parts at the assembly level, referred to as skeletons, to
capture the intent of the interrelationship between components in an
assembly. You can also use these parts to define motion in an assembly.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Model i ng Phi l osophy Page 2 1- 5
NOTES
Figure 1: Skeleton Example
Using Engineering Notebooks
Pro/ENGINEER allows you to generate a centralized location to capture,
document, and control the design intent of a product model. Layouts and
parametric relations can be stored and retrieved as necessary
Changing Design Intent
• Redefine – Changes any of the originally defined elements in features
or defined constraints in an assembly.
• Reroute – Changes the external references that features and
components have in a model.
• Insert Mode – Changes the regeneration cycle by allowing you to
insert features or components into the regeneration cycle.
• Reorder – Changes the order of the regeneration of existing features
in a part or components in the assembly.
• Interchange Mode – Changes the design intent of an assembly by
swapping one functionally equivalent model with another.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 1- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
The goal of this lab is to review in a classroom question-answer format
the main points about capturing design intent with Pro/ENGINEER.
Methods
In Part 1, capturing Part Level Design Intent is discussed.
In Part 2, capturing Assembly Level Design Intent is discussed.
Part I: Part Level Design Intent
In the following part model the goal is to build the model as efficiently as
possible, while maintaining Design Intent. Since the only source of design
intent available is the drawing on the following page, it must be strictly
followed. The entire model must be built using only those dimensions
shown: no more, no less. For example if a particular feature uses a certain
dimension, no other feature may use the same dimension.
Figure 2: Building a Model with Specific Design Intent
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Model i ng Phi l osophy Page 2 1- 7
NOTES
Decision Process Questionnaire
1. What should the base feature be?
ANS:
2. What feature types are possible for the base feature?
ANS:
3. Which of the possible feature types will best fit out Design Intent?
ANS:
4. What type of feature(s) can create next feature?
ANS:
5. Which of the possible feature types will best fit out Design Intent?
ANS:
6. What order should the features be created in?
ANS:
7. How should the small hole be created twice?
ANS:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 1- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
8. When should the rounds be created?
ANS:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Model i ng Phi l osophy Page 2 1- 9
NOTES
Figure 3: Drawing of Part Model
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 1- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Part II: Assembly level Design Intent
For the next discussion, consider the following views and drawing of the
VALVE assembly. Overall, determine courses of action to create the
assembly. The part models may or may not have already been created in
Pro/ENGINEER.

Figure 4: Assembling Parts
Decision Process Questionnaire
1. What technique could be used to help relate the components
together for assembly and motion analysis purposes?
ANS:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Model i ng Phi l osophy Page 2 1- 11
NOTES
2. What types of features could exist in a skeleton?
What might it look like?
ANS:
3. Which component should be assembled first? Second? How is
this affected when using a skeleton?
ANS:
4. What implications could arise from deleting the center shaft?
Suppressing? Blanking on a Layer? Replacing? How could some
of these issues be handled?
ANS:
5. How should the assembly be structured with subassemblies?
ANS:
6. We wish to be able to change the angular constraint on the center
shaft from 0° to 90°. How does this affect our decisions?
ANS:
7. What effect would changing the center shaft diameter have on the
other components?
ANS:
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 2 1- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
8. How would interactions with other components affect the process?
ANS:
Figure 5: Assembly Drawing
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Model i ng Phi l osophy Page 2 1- 13
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• Pro/ENGINEER's modeling philosophy is driven by considerations of
effectively capturing design intent.
• Pro/ENGINEER's feature-based, parametric, and associative nature
has many advantages in achieving the desired intent.
• The capacity to introduce parametric relations while creating models is
a special feature of the software that furthers the cause of design intent
capture.
• Parent/Child Relationships in Assemblies and methods of specifying
and altering them enables changes in intent.
• Information tool, drawings, engineering notebooks, the behavioral
modeler, the ability to customize Pro/ENGINEER environment, the
Resolve Environment to solve regeneration problems—all in their own
respective ways help in the overarching goal of capturing design intent
and thus are essential components of Pro/ENGINEER's modeling
philosophy.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A-1
Appendix
A
A
Review Questions
This module contains review questions intended for an interactive
daily discussion in class. It is divided into five sections corresponding
to the five days of instructor-led training.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Review the important concepts and principles that are covered
during each training day.
• Participate in discussion of related topics.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DAY 1: REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. What is design intent?
2. List three pick and place features.
3. List two types of sketched features.
4. What are the advantages of a solid model?
5. List three types of holes. What are the placement options for each?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 3
NOTES
6. How does the sketching plane capture design intent? The
Reference Plane?
7. List two ways to create an edge chain round.
8. What is the difference between a hole and a cut?
9. Must the reference plane always be perpendicular to the sketching
plane?
10. What is the Pro/ENGINEER convention for orienting the view of
the sketching plane when creating a feature that adds material?
Removes material?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
11. What does feature-based modeling mean?
12. What does parametric mean?
13. List two functions that References provide in Sketcher.
14. What is the most important thing to ‘build’ into your sketch before
exiting Sketcher?
15. What is the difference between the options for ONE SIDE
compared to BOTH SIDES for a protrusion or cut?
16. List the nine Sketcher constraint options. Which of these options
are multi-purpose?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 5
NOTES
17. Can you over-dimension or under-dimension a section in Intent
Manager?
18. With what features can Dynamic Modify be used? How is it
activated?
19. Why does Intent Manager create “weak” dimensions? How can
you remove them?
20. What is the easiest procedure for deleting or redefining features?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DAY 2: REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. What is a model template? What does it contain?
2. When should you use a start template? Can it be customized?
3. What is the importance of the first solid ‘base’ feature?
4. Do the sketching plane and reference plane always become parents
to a sketched feature?
5. When orienting the sketching plane using a horizontal reference, if
you click Top from the menu and select Datum TOP, which side of
Datum TOP will face the top of the computer screen?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 7
NOTES
6. What is a parent/child relationship in Pro/ENGINEER, and why is
it so important?
7. Do Sketcher references establish parent/child relationships?
List six ways a Sketcher reference can be established.
8. Why would you want to set up a parameter in Pro/ENGINEER?
9. What is required in the sketch of a revolved feature? What is the
case with more that one of this entity type?
10. What are the two sections required for a swept feature?
11. How would you create a 3-Dimensional (3-D) sweep?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
12. What is the minimum number of sections required for a blended
feature?
13. What are the requirements for each section of a blend?
14. Is it possible to create a swept or blended cut?
15. For what purpose do you use relations? Give an example.
16. How do you know if your relation is working correctly?
17. What are the three types of blends? What are the two options for
each?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 9
NOTES
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 1 0 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DAY 3: REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. What is a Datum Analysis feature and how is it used? List three
types.
2. What does BMX stand for?
3. Sensitivity and Optimization/ Feasibility studies are major
components of Behavioral Modeler. Briefly define each.
4. What is the difference between an Analysis and an Analysis
Feature? An Optimization and an Optimization Feature?
5. What is a drawing template? List at least three functions that a
template can be setup to perform.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 1 1
NOTES
6. How can you make multiple instances of a single feature? A single
instance of multiple features?
7. Why is it important to use default datum planes when orienting a
general view in a drawing?
8. What is unique about a general view?
9. What is the difference between a Projection view and an Auxiliary
view? A Detail view and a Partial View?
10. How can you create a rotational dimension in a sketched feature
that you are going to pattern?
11. How do you include a dimension and/or parameter in a drawing
note?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 1 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
12. How should you start every assembly?
13. What is the importance of the base component in an assembly?
14. Are parent/child relationships relevant in Assembly mode?
15. A drawing is created from bracket.prt, and modifications are then
made to the bracket. The drawing views will then have to re-
projected. True or False? What about the assembly using the
bracket? What is this ability called?
16. How can you change a component’s placement references without
having to delete the component and reassemble it? How can this
be accomplished with no menu interaction?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 1 3
NOTES
17. What does <CTRL> <ALT> and the three mouse buttons do when
assembling a component?
18. List five of the constraint types for assembling a component.
19. What is the importance of subassemblies, and how can you create
them in Pro/ENGINEER?
20. What are the differences among Mod Dim, Mod Assem, Mod
Subasm, and Mod Part?
21. List the various options for Copying features.
22. List and compare the three Pattern types. How many directions are
available for each?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 1 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
DAY 4: REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. For what purpose can you use layers in Part mode?
Assembly mode? Drawing mode?
2. What are three reasons why you might want to suppress a
Pro/ENGINEER feature?
3. Layers do not affect parent/child relationships, while Suppression
does. True or False?
4. List four types of additional datum features.
5. What are some uses for datum curves?
6. Describe the major concepts of Top Down Design
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 1 5
NOTES
7. What are six steps or phases of Top Down Design?
8. What is a skeleton and how can it be used?
9. Can a skeleton be used for part design as well as assembly design?
If so, How?
10. What is a surface? What types of models benefit from surfacing?
11. What does ISDX stand for?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 1 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
12. Is ISDX the only way to create surfaces in Pro/ENGINEER?
13. What can be accomplished with the STYLE feature?
14. How many features (curves, surfaces) can be contained in a style
feature?
15. What is required to generate a surface using ISDX?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 1 7
NOTES
DAY 5: REVIEW QUESTIONS
1. What is a parent/child relationship in Pro/ENGINEER?
2. List seven ways to establish a parent/child relationship in
Pro/ENGINEER.
3. What is design intent?
4. What does associativity mean?
5. What is a configuration file in Pro/ENGINEER, and why should
you use these files?
6. What is a mapkey?
7. When does Pro/ENGINEER activate the Resolve Environment?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page A- 1 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
8. Will Pro/ENGINEER allow you to save a model that has a failed
feature?
9. What is the difference between the Quick Fix and Fix Model
options in the RESOLVE menu?
10. Why should you generally try to fix failed features instead of using
the Undo Changes option in the Resolve Environment?
11. What is the difference between Redefine and Reorder?
12. What are some advantages of feature-based modeling?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Re v i e w Que s t i ons Page A- 1 9
NOTES
13. Name four ways to capture design intent in a part model.
14. Name three ways to capture design intent in an assembly.
15. What options are avialable under Analysis> Measure ? In
Analysis > Model Analysis?
16. What is the model player and how can it be used?
17. What is your next step in the process of attaining mastery with
Pro/ENGINEER?
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B-1
Appendix
B
B
Project Laboratory
This module contains an advanced self-paced project that you can
work on after finishing the standard module exercises. The purpose
of this project is to provide you with an opportunity to practice the
skills you learned in the class without relying on step-by-step
instructions.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Apply the skills you learned in the course to real-world design
projects.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
INTRODUCTION
Throughout the next few days you will design several assembly
components. It is suggested that you use the project components that you
create during this course as part of this project lab. However, you may
choose to skip portions of the project and instead use the supplied models
to complete sections of the project laboratories.
As shown in the next figure, you will create a motor part, lower housing
part, snap ring part, and upper housing part. These components will be
used to build a blower and motor assembly.
Throughout the project, you will be working in the directory named
project. All measurement units are in metric.
Motor shaft
Blower
Lower
housing
Cover
Motor
housing
Snap rings
Upper
housing
Figure 1: Exploded View of Completed Project
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 3
NOTES
PART CREATION
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Part
To follow the design intent of the motor part, you must build it using only
those dimensions shown in the following figure. You create the part using
extruded sketched features, along with holes. In addition, you also use
relations to constrain the electronics support foundation (rectangular
shaped protrusion) a constant distance from the back surface of the base
feature.
Figure 2: Dimensions for Motor Part
1. Create a part named motor.prt.
2. Create the first solid feature. You may want to extrude a 70.00-
diameter circle to a blind depth of 90.00.
3. Add a feature to represent the electronics support foundation. This
foundation must be rectangular, measuring 82.5 X 60.0, as shown
in the following figure (with the height measuring 60.00 from the
center of the motor).
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 3: Electronics Support Foundation
4. To follow the design intent, place the electronics support
foundation a distance of 7.5 away from the surface of the
cylindrical base feature. Write a relation to cause the size of the
electronics support (base feature) to change when the base feature
depth changes. Regenerate the part and test the relation by
modifying the depth dimension of the base feature. Remember to
change the dimension back to the original depth value of 90.
5. Add the 100.0-diameter front protrusion feature to the model. You
will use that for a bolt flange.
6. Add a cut feature to the model so that you can remove material to
receive an armature. Assign it a 60.00-diameter and leave a 5.0-
wall thickness at the back of the motor, as shown in Section A-A.

Ti ps & Techni ques:
You should pay careful attention to your selection or creation
of a datum plane for the section, as well as what type of feature
you create. The 5.0 wall thickness is the key to these
selections.
7. Add a 15.0-diameter hole feature to the back of the motor to use
for the motor shaft.
8. Save the model and clear the window by erasing the part.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 5
NOTES
SECTION 2: Creating the Lower Housing Part
According to the design intent of the lower housing part, the revolved cut
must remain a specific distance from the side surfaces of the base feature
so that the model maintains a specific wall thickness. In addition, if the
diameter dimensions of the base support changes, the support feature and
flange feature should change as well.
Figure 4: Lower Housing Part
1. Create a part named lower_housing.prt.
2. Create the first solid feature. You may want to extrude a 120-
diameter semicircle to a blind depth of 80.
3. Create a flange to bolt this part to another component in an
assembly. As shown in the following figure, give the flange feature
dimensions of 15 x 4.1 (Hint: Using the power of feature-based
modeling, create the feature with an open section.)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 5: Lower Housing Flange
4. Add the base support feature to the model. Sketch the feature on
the central datum plane and extrude the feature in both directions,
as shown in the two following figures.
Figure 6: Lower Housing Base Support
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 7
NOTES
Figure 7: Lower Housing Base Support Section

Not e:
In this figure, the sketched centerline is aligned to the
silhouette edge of the cylindrical surface of the base feature.
5. Add a revolved cut feature to the model as shown in the following
figure. Regardless of how the base feature changes in depth, the
wall thickness should remain 2.5.
Figure 8: Lower Housing Revolved Cut
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
6. Cut away part of the front housing, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 9: Lower Housing Cut
7. Add a 30-diameter hole feature at the rear of the housing as shown
in the Lower Housing dimensions at the beginning of this section.
After you have finished, save the model and erase the part from
memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 9
NOTES
SECTION 3: Creating the Snap Ring Part
The snap ring part is purchased directly from a supplier, so it does not
need a flexible design. You can create it with only two features.
Figure 10: Snap Ring Dimensions
1. Create a part named snap_ring.prt.
2. Create a solid feature by extruding the outline of the snap ring, as
shown in the following figure. The part has a thickness of 1.5mm
Figure 11: Snap Ring Section
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 1 0 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
3. Add a 2-radius simple edge round as indicated. After you have
finished, save and erase the model.
Round these
edges.
Figure 12: Snap Ring Rounds
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 1 1
NOTES
SECTION 4: Creating the Upper Housing Part
According to the design intent of the upper housing part, the diameter of
the base feature relates to all the other features. You place the discharge on
the model symmetrically back-to-front. You use a swept feature to create a
portion of the model geometry that represents the housing, centering the
sweep about the base feature. By extruding the base feature on both sides
of the sketching plane, you can avoid having to create an additional datum
plane later. To complete the housing discharge geometry, you create a
blend feature to incorporate the widening characteristic of the discharge
housing.
Figure 13: Upper Housing Dimensions
1. Create a part named upper_housing.prt.
2. Extrude a 120-diameter semicircle to a depth of 80. Extrude on
both sides of the sketching plane so that you can use the same
sketching plane for the trajectory of the discharge housing.
3. Use a swept protrusion with the Free Ends attribute to create a
portion of the housing discharge as shown in the first following
figure. Make the trajectory of the sweep a line and arc, giving it a
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 1 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
distance of 81.5 from the end of the line to the center of the
housing, and assigning a radius of 100 to the arc. Ensure that the
sweep remains attached to the base feature at this location,
regardless of the diameter of the base feature, by aligning the
endpoint of the arc to both the cylindrical and planar surfaces of
the base feature (see the second following figure). Locate the start
point of the trajectory at the end of the line (notice the centerlines
in the third following figure). Create the cross-section as a
rectangle.
Trajectory
Section
Figure 14: Completed Sweep
Start point
Trajectory
Figure 15: Sweep Trajectory Section
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 1 3
NOTES
Centerlines (provided by
system)
Figure 16: Sweep Section
4. Create a straight parallel blend to complete the discharge of the
housing. Use only two sections with a depth of 57.5 for Section 2.
Create Section 1 of the blend using the edge of the sweep. (Hint :
Use a centerline to denote symmetry in Sketcher).
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 1 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 17: Blend Sections
5. Your part should look like the following figure.
Figure 18: Blend Complete
6. Create a simple, edge chain round with a radius of 15. Your part
should look as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 1 5
NOTES
Pick this edge for the
tangent chain of the
40 radius
Pick this edge
for the 5
radius
Figure 19: Upper Housing Rounds
7. To improve airflow, create a simple edge round with a radius value
of 40.
8. Create another simple edge round with a radius of 5. As references,
pick the edges where the swept protrusion intersects the first solid
feature, as shown in the previous figure.
Remove two hidden surfaces
for the shell feature.
Figure 20: Shell References
9. Create a shell feature. Remove these two surfaces as references:
the end surface of the discharge diffuser (planar surface of the
blended feature), and the bottom flat surface of the first solid
feature. Specify a value of 2.5 for the shell thickness.
10. Add a 04.1-thick bolting flange, as shown in the following figure.
Make this feature similar to the flange on the motor part.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 1 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
11. Make a 97.5-diameter cut in the front of the housing, as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 21: Upper Housing Flange and Cut
12. Make a 30-diameter hole in the back of the housing. If an axis
exists in the model, create a coaxial hole. If the model does not
have an axis, create a datum axis.

Not e:
To create a datum axis choose Insert, Datum, Axi s, Thru
Cyl i nder and select the cylindrical surface of the base
protrusion. You will learn more about datum axis in a later
chapter.
Flange
Hole Detail
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 1 7
NOTES
Figure 22: Upper Housing
13. Add a straight hole, as shown in Detail A of the Upper Housing
dimensions at the beginning of this section. After you have
finished, save the model and erase it from memory.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 1 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
CREATING ASSEMBLIES
To complete the parts for these assemblies, you modify the parts, create
new features, and add relations in both Part and Assembly modes.
Although the models are not complete, you also start creating
production drawings and assemblies. As you complete this project, you
can observe the associativity between the part, assembly, and drawing
files.

Not e:
You should attempt to use the models that you completed from
the previous project lab. When creating these assemblies and
production drawings, you can either use the models that you
created previously or the models that are stored in a library
which reflect the model at the end of the previous project. The
stored models are indicated in parenthesis ( ).
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Assembly
In keeping with the design intent of the motor assembly, you must fully
constrain all part models into the assembly. The motor part must be placed
as the first component. In this portion of the project, you only change the
motor part in Part mode.
Figure 23: Exploded View of Completed Motor Assembly
1. Create an assembly named motor.asm.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 1 9
NOTES
2. Assemble the motor part you created in the previous project lab (or
beta_motor.prt) to the default assembly datum planes. After
placing it in the assembly, turn off the datum planes to make it
easier to place the remaining component.
3. Assemble the motor shaft part (beta_shaft.prt) into the assembly
(see the following two figures).
Figure 24: Motor Shaft Assembled into Motor
Align inside surface of
revolved cut of motor shaft
with back surface of motor.
Figure 25: Alignment References for Motor Shaft
4. Create another snap ring groove in the shaft so that it does not slide
into the motor. Retrieve the motor shaft part (beta_shaft.prt) in a
separate window.
5. Pattern the first snap ring groove to create a second one 141.8 from
the leader, as shown in the following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 2 0 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 26: Patterning the Groove
6. Save and close the shaft part model.
7. Open the motor assembly. Note that the snap ring groove now
appears in the shaft.
8. Assemble snap_ring.prt (beta_ring.prt) into the shaft groove
(revolved cut) of motor shaft.
9. Assemble the motor cover (beta_cover.prt) to the motor part. Only
create parent child references between the motor part and the
cover.
10. Create an assembly pattern to assemble the second snap ring into
the assembly using “ref pattern.”
11. Turn the datum planes back on.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 2 1
NOTES
Figure 27: Motor Assembly
12. Note that the patterned snap ring groove is positioned too far down
on the shaft. Modify the offset of the patterned grove in the motor
shaft part (beta_shaft.prt). Change the distance to 127.5 and
Regenerate.
13. Save the assembly.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 2 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
SECTION 2: Concurrent Design of the Motor
Housing
At this point in the design process the motor housing and most other
assembly components have not been completed. You can work
concurrently between assemblies and parts in Pro/ENGINEER. To prepare
the motor for mounting holes, create a set of holes in the motor to match
the ones that you are going to create in the cover.
1. Open the motor part (beta_motor.prt). Add a hole at an angle using
radial placement. When prompted for the dimensioning scheme,
use a radial dimension.
2. Create a radial pattern using three instances. When you have
finished, save the model and close the window.
Create this
hole first
Figure 28: Radial Pattern of Holes in the Motor
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 2 3
NOTES
SECTION 3: Creating the Blower Assembly
According to the design intent of this assembly, you use the lower housing
as the base component and assemble everything to it. As you place
components into the assembly, you will find that several features are
missing. Create these features using the Modify in Assembly mode.
1. Create an assembly named blower.asm.
2. Assemble lower_housing.prt (beta_lower.prt) to the three default
assembly datum planes.
3. The lower housing was created without any holes in the mounting
flange. Modifying the part at assembly level, create the hole in
lower housing and pattern it in Assembly mode. Create a straight
hole on the flange with the dimensioning scheme shown in the
following figure.

Not e:
Do not exit the FEATURE menu after creating the hole. In the
next task, you use Pattern from the same menu.
Figure 29: Hole Dimension
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 2 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
4. Pattern the hole for a total of four (4) instances including the
original. If you exited the FEATURE menu, choose Modify, Mod
Part. Select the lower housing; then choose Feature .

Not e:
Do not exit the FEATURE menu after creating the pattern. In
the next task, you use Copy from the same menu.
5. According to the design intent, you should mirror the flange along
with the pattern of holes to the other side of the model (as shown in
the following figure).
Mirror
plane
Mirror protrusion
and holes
Offset from this
surface for the
blower .
Figure 30: Mirror References
6. Assemble the blower that part you completed in the “Patterns and
Feature Copying” lesson. (If you did not finish the model, use the
part called beta_blower in the current directory.) Use a mate offset
command with an offset value of 1 to place it with respect to the
back of the lower housing. Exit the part modification menus.
7. View the obvious interference between lower housing and blower
by shading the model. Change the dimension for the blower fins
from 73.5 to 65.0 and regenerate the part.
8. Assemble the upper housing part (beta_upper.prt) to the lower
housing. Fully constrain the component by mating the flange
surfaces, aligning the central axis, and aligning the front faces on
both components.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 2 5
NOTES
9. The upper housing does not have a pattern of mounting holes on
the flange. Open the part so that you can make the changes in Part
mode in its own window.
10. Create the four holes by patterning them with an increment of 20.
11. Use Copy, Mirror to create the bolt flange and holes on the other
side of the base feature.
Mirror protrusion
and holes.
Figure 31: Upper Housing Copy Command
12. Save the part file and close the window. Activate the assembly
window. Note that the assembly now reflects the changes that you
made in Part mode. Save the assembly and erase the window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 2 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
SECTION 4: Creating the Motor Part Drawing
Although you have not completely finished the motor part, you now begin
creating the production drawings. In the drawing, the views and
dimensions update with changes to the part model regardless of whether
you made the changes in Part, Assembly, or Drawing mode. In this portion
of the project, you set up the drawing views only; you do the detailing
later.
1. Create a drawing named motor.drw.
2. Use a C-size sheet and associate motor.prt (beta_motor.prt) with
the drawing.
FIRST VIEW
THIRD VIEW
SECOND VIEW
FOURTH VIEW
FIFTH VIEW SIXTH VIEW
Figure 32: Placement of Views for Motor Drawing
3. Add the first general view. Orient it to a side view of the motor
model using the default datum planes. Use No Scale to allow
Pro/ENGINEER to determine the scale of the drawing.
4. Add the front projected view, labeled as the second view in the
previous figure.
5. Add the back projected view, labeled as the third view in the
previous figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 2 7
NOTES
6. Add the top projected view, labeled as the fourth view in the
previous figure.
7. Add the cross-section view, labeled as the fifth view in the
previous figure.
8. Add sixth view as a general view with a scale of 0.75.
9. Change the display mode of the views. For the first, third, and fifth
views, change the display mode to Hidden line , Tan Phantom.
10. Change the display mode of the remaining views to No Hi dden,
No Disp Tan.

Not e:
Once you set a view using Display Mode , it remains at that
setting even if you change the Environment setting.
11. Save the drawing.
12. Create a drawing named motor_asm.drw.
13. Use a C-size sheet and associate the MOTOR.ASM model to the
drawing using the dialog box.
FOURTH VIEW
THIRD VIEW
FIRST VIEW
SECOND VIEW
Figure 33: Placement of Views for the Motor Assembly Drawing
14. Place the first general view. Choose No Scale.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 2 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
15. Place the second projection view.
16. Place the third projection view.
17. Place the fourth projection view.
18. Change the display mode of all of the views to No Hidden, No
Di sp Tan. When you have finished, save the model and erase all.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 2 9
NOTES
INTERROGATING YOUR MODELS
For this project, you continue developing the models according to the
original design intent. You do this by adding features, analyzing mass
properties for individual parts and whole assemblies, and investigating
interference between components. You also write relations to prevent
interference between components. After completing these tasks, you place
the blower subassembly into the motor assembly.
The cover part is incomplete. According to the design intent, you must
create tabs to mount the cover to the motor part, and add cooling slots to
the top of the cover, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 34: Cover Modifications
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 3 0 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
SECTION 1: Designing the Cover Part
1. Open the cover part.
Figure 35: Cover Part
2. To make it easier to create the slotted cuts representing cooling
slots, suppress the protrusion, hole, and round on top of the base
feature.
3. Add the first slot, as shown in Detail C of the cover modifications.
4. Pattern the slot for a total of seven (7) instances, including the
original.
5. Resume the suppressed features.
6. Note in the following figure, the system removed the underside of
the small cylindrical boss when you added the cooling fins. The
second protrusion was originally sketched on the inside of the base
feature. Reorder the cut and pattern after the first protrusion, and
note the difference on the model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 3 1
NOTES
Material is
removed due to
feature order.
Figure 36: X-Section of Cover Before Reorder
Reorder leaves
material in place.
Figure 37: X-Section of Cover after Reorder
7. Add a protrusion that you can pattern rotationally. For the
horizontal or vertical reference plane, use an internal datum at an
angle. You can then use the associated angle to pattern later.
Sketch the open section shown in the following figure. Extrude to a
depth of 5.0.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 3 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Open section
Figure 38: Sketching open section
Angle from Make
Datum
Cylindrical
surface for axis
Figure 39: Rotational Pattern
8. Pattern the leader tab, incrementing the angle by 120 degrees.
Make a total of three instances, including the original.
9. Create a datum axis through the cylindrical surface of the leader
tab.
10. Reference pattern the datum axis.
11. Create a co-axial straight hole on the leader tab. Make the diameter
7.5.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 3 3
NOTES
Figure 40: Cover Before Reference Pattern of Holes
12. Reference pattern the straight hole. When you have finished, save
the model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 3 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
SECTION 2: Completing the Motor Part
You have now determined the final design of the base support for the
motor part. In this section of the project, you create a support foundation
on the cylindrical base feature.
Figure 41: Changes to the Motor Part
1. Open the motor part (gamma_motor.prt).
2. Suppress all features, except for the first solid protrusion and the
default datum planes.
3. Add a feature for the motor foundation, as shown in the following
figure (Hint: Use a section that will not fill the central hole when it
is resumed. An open section will also work).
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 3 5
NOTES
Figure 42: Motor Foundation
4. Resume all suppressed features.
5. Create a cut on the side of the electronics foundation, as shown in
Detail A of the changes to be made to the motor part. Pattern the
cut to include four (4) instances, including the original.
Figure 43: Side Cut
6. Mirror the patterned cut features that are on the side of the
electronics foundation to the other side. After you have finished,
save the model and erase all.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 3 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
SECTION: 3: Completing the Blower Assembly
To finish the assembly, you measure interference and create an assembly
relation to prevent the blower part from interfering with the other
components. In addition, you also create a Bill of Materials (BOM) and
calculate the mass properties of the components in the assembly.
1. Open blower.asm (gamma_blower.asm).
2. Change the height of the blower parts (gamma_blower.prt) blade
from 65 depth to 73.5. Regenerate the assembly.
3. Measure the interference between the members of the blower
assembly. Use the Model Analysis… option in the Analysis pull-
down menu. Select Global Interference from the Type drop-down
list in the dialog box. Choose the defaults shown in the following
figure. Toggle the results of the models by clicking on the arrows
in the dialog box.
Figure 44: Modal Analysis Dialog Box
Toggle
between
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 3 7
NOTES
4. Explode the assembly model so that you can see inside the model.
Click Modify, Mod Explode to change the position of the blower
using a normal plane, as shown in the following figure.
Select this
surface to
define the
normal
direction
Select these
two surfaces
Figure 45: Exploding the Assembly
5. Determine the distance that can be used for the blower. Measure
the distance from the back inside surface of the blower to the front
inside surface of the blower using Analysis, Measure , Distance
and selecting the surfaces shown in the previous figure. Remember
the distance value.
6. Modify the blade height again on the blower so it will fit within the
lower housing of the model. Change the blade length to be the
distance you just measured minus the thickness of the top and base
of the blower and a clearance. At the current values the distance is
equal to 75 – (5 + 2.5 + 5) or 62.5.
7. Develop a relation that drives the blower to always be centered
within the lower housing by driving the offset value. Use the
parameters shown in the next figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 3 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
BLOWER PART
LOWER_HOUSING PART
Figure 46: Symbolic Dimensions for Assembly Relations
8. Note that the lower housing part does not have any dimensions that
control the inside dimension of the interior opening. According to
the design intent, you must control the wall thickness. This intent
was captured by driving the revolved cut off the dimension of 2.5
(shown as d8:0, d10:0, and d9:0 in the previous figure) from all the
edges of the surface of the model.
9. Create a number parameter in the lower housing part. Open the
lower housing (or the gamma_lower.prt) part in a sub-window.
Choose Relations and pick the revolved cut and base protrusion to
show their symbolic dimensions.
10. Write a relation that is equal to the length of the cut (cut_length =
d1 – (d8+ d10)). Remember to use symbolic dimensions. Enter the
parameter name in the relation to automatically create a number
parameter in the model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 3 9
NOTES
11. Save lower_housing.prt (or the gamma_lower.prt) and close the
window. Activate the assembly window again.
12. Create another parameter in the blower model that represents the
overall height of the blower including the base, blade and top.
Open the blower part (or gamma_blower.prt) in another window.
Add the following relation, height = d1+d9+d18, to automatically
create the parameter height.
13. Save the blower and close the window.
14. Drive the offset of the blower model within the lower housing so
that they are equally offset. Enter a relation similar to d0:1 =
(cut_length:0 - height:2)/2.
15. Regenerate the model. Check the message area to see if the system
displayed a warning; you may have to regenerate twice, depending
on the order in which you added the relations. (Hint: Use Sort
Rel s.)
16. Click Analysis > Model Analysis to calculate the mass properties
of the assembly. Add the density values of your choice to the
components. (example 7.63e-9 tonne/mm
3
for steel)
17. Use the Info menu to create a BOM. When you have finished, save
the model.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 4 0 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
SECTION 4: Completing the Motor Assembly
In this portion of the project, you complete the motor assembly by
constraining the blower assembly into the motor assembly. You also
examine the difference between blanking layers in an assembly and
suppressing components using the Model Tree tool. While suppressing
components, the system places you into the Resolve Environment because
component references are missing.
1. Open motor.asm (gamma_motor.asm).
2. Redefine the component constraints of the cover so that the mount
holes align with the motor holes. Add an alignment constraint. Pick
the axis on the first hole of the tabs on the cover, and the
appropriate axis on the motor.
3. Assemble blower.asm (gamma_blower.asm) into motor.asm (or
gamma_motor.asm). Use your own discretion when choosing the
constraints.
4. Change the column display of the Model Tree to show Status and
FeatID. List suppressed components by choosing Vi ew, Model
Tree Setup, and Item Display.
Figure 47: Model Tree for Motor Assembly
5. Create a layer at the top-level assembly called “base_comp.”
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 4 1
NOTES
6. Set all of the components (not the sub-assemblies) of the motor
part to the BASE_COMP layer.
7. Blank the BASE_COMP layer, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 48: Set Display Dialog Box

Not e:
Note that the motor part is no longer visible in the working
window, but it is still listed in the Model Tree with the status
of Regenerated.
8. Unblank the BASE_COMP layer.
9. Suppress the motor component.

Not e:
Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to select an option for the child
components. However, you cannot reroute or redefine them
because they all reference the base component of the assembly.
10. Suspend all child components.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 4 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Not e:
Suspend is a temporary action; it only suspends components in
place until the next regeneration, which in this situation occurs
as soon as you choose Done/Return. This action causes the
assembly to fail.
11. The system places you into the Resolve Environment because the
child components have missing references. To exit the Resolve
Environment, select Quick Fix and Freeze for all of the
components. As soon as the system freezes one component,
another component causes you to remain in the Resolve
Environment because it is also missing references.
12. Once you have exited the Resolve Environment, review the
suppressed, frozen, and regenerated components listed in the
Status column of the Model Tree.
13. Resume the motor part. Note that all frozen components
automatically update in the Model Tree. Save the model and erase
all components.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 4 3
NOTES
COMPLETING THE PROJECT
You are now ready to complete the project by finishing the parts,
assemblies, and drawings. After documenting the motor part and motor
assembly in production drawings, you review the associativity between all
three modes of Pro/ENGINEER.
Front
flange
Figure 49: Changes to Motor Part
SECTION 1: Developing the Motor Part
According to the design intent, you increase the width of the front flange
of the motor part and change the holes in the flange. You make these
changes in Part mode.
1. Open motor.prt (delta_motor.prt).
2. Change the thickness of the front flange to 15.
3. Delete the three holes on the front flange.
4. Create three sketched holes using a radial placement. The sketched
section is detailed in the next figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 4 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Figure 50: Sketched Hole Section
Figure 51: The Completed Holes
5. Save the model and close the window.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 4 5
NOTES
SECTION 2: Finishing the Lower Housing
According to the design intent, you strengthen the cylindrical wall of the
base feature by creating some ribs with draft features attached to them.
1. Open lower_housing.prt (delta_lower.prt). Build a rib between the
cylindrical base feature and the foundation base. See the figure
below for dimensions, and use Make Datum to create an offset
datum as the sketching plane taking care of the offset direction.
Datum offset
dimension
Single sketched
line
Figure 52: Rib Dimensions
2. Extract the body of the part from a mold. Create a draft feature on
the two parallel sides of the rib. Accept the default attributes of
Neutral Plane , No Split, and Constant. Create a neutral plane
through the top edge of the rib, parallel to the base surfaces. Use
the neutral plane as the reference plane. Enter [ -10] as the draft
angle.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 4 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Draft surfaces
Figure 53: References for Draft Feature (surfaces meshed for clarity)
3. Copy the rib and draft features to create two supports. Use Move
and select the attribute of Dependent. Translate the features with
reference to the front of the model by a distance of 3.00
4. Mirror the ribs and draft features to the other side of the part. If the
mirroring operation fails because you cannot construct the
geometry, redefine the draft angle to -10 degrees. After you have
finished this task, save the model.
Copy these ribs
with the draft.
Mirror plane
Figure 54: References for Copy of Rib and Draft Features
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 4 7
NOTES
SECTION 3: Completing the Drawing
To complete the motor assembly and part drawings, you must detail them.
In the part drawing all of the dimensions are feature dimensions. In the
assembly drawing, most of the dimensions exist at the component level;
the only assembly dimensions are those that you use for offset constraints.
Because the assembly dimensions assist in describing the part, they were
created in Drawing mode. After detailing the motor drawing, you modify
the feature dimensions to show the full associativity of all of the models.
1. Open motorasm.drw (delta_motor_asm.drw).
2. The system automatically places you into the Resolve
Environment. Read the prompt in the resolve window. The system
cannot place the cover because you deleted the holes from the
motor part earlier.
3. Use the Qui ck Fi x option to redefine the placement constraints.
Change the missing reference for the assembly to the axis of the
sketched hole that you created earlier.
4. Detail the drawing as shown in the following figure, and add the
ISO view in the corner. Keep in mind that most of the dimensions
were created in Drawing mode. After you have finished the task,
save the drawing and close the window.
Figure 55: Assembly Drawing.
5. Open motor.drw (delta_motordrw.drw if you did not complete the
motor part or drawing from the previous project lab). Notice how
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 4 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
the features you added to the motor part have automatically been
added to the drawing.
Figure 56: The Original Motor Drawing
6. Add additional views, change the default scale to 0.7, and move
the additional views to an added sheet on the drawing. Detail the
drawing according to the next two figures. When you have
finished, save the model.
Figure 57: Sheet 1 of the Motor Drawing
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 4 9
NOTES
Figure 58: Sheet 2 of the Motor Drawing
7. Notice that the axis circle does not appear around the patterned
holes on the flange. Change the setup file in the drawing so that
radial_pattern_axis_circle is set to YES. Then show the axis of
the patterned holes.
Figure 59: Pattern Axis Circle
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page B- 5 0 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
8. Modify the dimensions of the motor part (delta_motor.prt)
foundation in the drawing so that its depth is 7.5. Regenerate the
model. Retrieve the motor part into session and examine the
changes to the part.
Copy this protrusion
translated from this
surface
Figure 60: The Modified Base
9. Create a dependant copy of the base using the move option
translated 60 units from the surface, as shown in the preceding
figure. Add another protrusion to cap of the base with the
dimensions shown in the following figure.
Figure 61: The Completed Base
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Appe ndi x B Page B- 5 1
NOTES
10. Open the motor assembly (delta_motor.asm) and examine the
changes to the assembly. Finally, retrieve motor drawing and
notice how the changes are reflected. Save the drawing, assembly,
and parts by saving the assembly drawing.
11. Erase the models from memory and close Pro/ENGINEER.
12. Congratulations!
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6-1
Appendix
Us|ng the Pro|F|6|EN6Y Eva|uator
In this module you learn how to complete a Pro/FICIEACY
Evaluator assessment.
0bject|ves
AIter completing this module, you will be able to:
• Start Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator and log in.
• Complete assigned assessments.
• View your assessment results.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 2 Append| x 6
N0TE8
TE6hN0L0CY-ßA8E0 LEARN|NC Q PT6
PTC Technology-based Learning Solutions (TBLS) are intended to
complement our instructor-led training. TBLS are an important adjunct to
traditional instructor-led training because:
• The prevalence oI 'virtual teams¨ in most companies has led to
distributed workgroups that require 'just-in-time¨ training
usually in more than one location simultaneously.
• Employees expect high-quality 'e-learning¨ to be available, along
with most advanced product design tools, such as Pro/ENGINEER.
• Employees expect and need opportunities to learn new skills, both
to maintain existing proIiciencies, and also Ior proIessional
growth.
• Time constraints which are oIten more restrictive than budgetary
limitations oIten dictate whether one can participate in training
opportunities. The ability to participate in training during
unconventional hours and Irom the user`s desktop can be a major
beneIit.
In today's web-enabled economy, most product development companies
want to take advantage oI new technology to increase productivity and
respond to dynamic market conditions. Simultaneously, workIorce
training must remain current with the new technology. PTC Technology-
based Learning Solutions are design to help you achieve this goal.
The PTC TBLS product portIolio consists oI three key components:
• Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator
• Precision Learning Web-Lessons
• Precision Learning Web-Courses
Pro|F|6|EN6Y EVALUAT0R
By using PTC`s Precision Learning methodology during the class, you can
assess your comprehension oI the course materials with the
Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator.
The Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator is designed to address a growing demand
Irom our customers Ior a tool that can accurately assess the skills oI the
PTC product users. We Iound that both users and their managers want to
measure proIiciency.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pro| F| 6| EN6Y EVALUAT0R Page 6- 3
N0TE8
The Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator enables users to understand where they can
improve their own abilities. It helps managers understand how they can
optimize team development, and also maximize their training budget
return-on- investment (ROI).
A88E88HENT 6R|TER|A
The Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator is designed to Iairly and accurately assess
the users` skills. Our assessment methodology meets or exceeds industry
standards Ior objective assessment tools.
The Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator development process is based on the
Iollowing:
• The questions and perIormance problem exercises are related directly
to the soItware Ieatures and Iunctions.
• The assessment grading algorithm is automated; there is no subjective
component to the grading process.
• An objective third-party review and approval process Iollowing strict
guidelines Ior employee evaluation.
A letter Irom a third-party law Iirm delivering their opinion on the extent
to which the Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator complies with United States Equal
Opportunity Employment laws and regulations is available on our web
site. More inIormation is available Irom the TBLS gateway page. The
TBLS gateway page is displayed when you login to Pro/EICIENCY
Evaluator.
Eor more inIormation, please visit:
www.ptc.com/services/edserv/proficiency.htm
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- 4 Append| x 6
N0TE8
LAß0RAT0RY PRA6T|6AL
Coa|
In this laboratory you start Pro/FICIEACY Evaluator, complete an
assessment, and view the results.
Hethod
In Exercise 1, you take an Evaluator assessment and view the results.
EXER6|8E 1: 6omp|et|ng Eva|uator Assessments
Task 1. Logon to TBLS
1. In the browser, type |http://www-ed.ptc.com/Evaluator/|
address area.
2. The Technology Based Learning Solutions (TBLS) gateway page
displays.
Eigure 1: TBLS Gateway Page
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pro| F| 6| EN6Y EVALUAT0R Page 6- 5
N0TE8
3. Select the TBLS Logon icon.
4. At the next screen, type the User Name and Password provided
by your instructor in the appropriate Iields, and then click the
Logon icon.
Task 2. Take the Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator exam.
1. Your user inIormation is displayed at the top oI the screen. Scroll
down to the section labeled Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator
Assessments.
Eigure 2: Taking an Exam
2. Select SAMPLE EXAM Irom the drop-down list, and click the
Take Exam icon.
3. At the bottom oI the USER AGREEMENT screen, click Agree. The
Iirst multiple choice question displays.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page 6- ô Append| x 6
N0TE8
4. To answer a question, select the circle next to the desired answer,
and then click the Submit for Grading icon.
5. Answer all the multiple choice questions in the same Iashion
Task 3. Download the perIormance-based test.
1. Select the Go to Performance-Based Quizzes link.
2. Review the drawing oI the shaIt. Note the length oI the shaIt is
required to be 250.
Task 4. Load the shaIt part into EVALUATOR Ior grading.
1. In Pro/EICIENCY EVALUATOR, click the Browse icon and
locate MASTER¸SHAET.PRT Irom your working directory.
2. Click the Submit for Grading icon.
Task 5. Complete the EVALUATOR test.
1. Click the Finish Test icon to complete the EVALUATOR exam.
Task 6. View the results.
1. A screen displays the results oI the exam. It provides your overall
score and a table oI the results Ior each section and sub-section. A
section contains questions on a core topic, such as Modeling or
Drawing. A sub-section contains questions on sub-topics, such as
Relations or round Ieatures.
2. The next section lists every question in the exam. A green
checkmark indicates a correct answer. A red X indicates an
incorrect answer.
3. To close the TBLS, click the icon.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pro| F| 6| EN6Y EVALUAT0R Page 6- 7
N0TE8
H00ULE 8UHHARY
In this module, you learned that:
• How to take a Pro/EICIENCY Evaluator assessment.
• How to view the results oI a completed exam.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page D-1
Appendix
D
D
Using PTC Help
You can use PTC Help to quickly search for Pro/ENGINEER
information. PTC Help includes quick references and detailed
information on selected topics.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Start PTC Help.
• Search for specific information about Pro/ENGINEER.
• Obtain context-sensitive help while performing a task.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page D- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
PTC HELP OVERVIEW
PTC Help is a fully functional help system that is integrated into
Pro/ENGINEER.
PTC Help Features
PTC Help offers:
• A new help system with a table of contents, an index, and searching
capability
• Context-sensitive help, allowing access to PTC Help with a click of
the mouse
• Online Tutorials focussed on teaching different aspects of the software
• Expanded help topics available as special dialog boxes
Please visit the PTC Technical Support Online Knowledge Database ,
which features thousands of Suggested Techniques. For more
information, see the Technical Support Appendix.
USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP
Launching Help: Four Methods
There are four procedures for launching the help system.
1. Main Menu
This is the standard way of accessing the full-blown help system complete
with contents, index, and search capabilities. Depending on your system
speed, it may take a few seconds to launch the entire help system.
Click Help > Contents and Index from the main menu as shown in the
following figure.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Us i ng PTC He l p Page D- 3
NOTES
Figure 1 Starting PTC Help
The Pro/ENGINEER Online Help homepage appears in your web browser
window.
Figure 2: Contents and Index in PTC Help
In the left frame of the window, you see a list of topics arranged in a tree
structure. By clicking on each higher level topic, you can access sub-
topics, and by clicking the sub-topics you can access detailed instructions,
explanations, and tips.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page D- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
2. Context-Sensitive Help
1. Click on the right end of the main toolbar.
2. Click on any icon or any part of the Pro/ENGINEER main window
about which you want an explanation.
3. A browser window opens that explains the topic.
4. In the following example, clicking on the model tree icon in the
toolbar launched a browser window that explained the icon
functionality.
Figure 3: Context-Sensitive Help
5. In addition, you will also notice at the lower left there is a “See
Also” link which on clicking provides a list of related topics that
may be of immediate interest.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Us i ng PTC He l p Page D- 5
NOTES
6. You may click on any topic you want to read additionally.
Figure 4: The ‘See Also’ List of Topics
3. Pro/ENGINEER Menu Manager
1. Click on the right end of the main Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
2. Click any menu command from the menu manager.
3. A TOPIC ROUTER browser window opens with a list of topic links
that explain the menu command.
4. Click the topic you want to read.
5. In the following example, clicking on X-Section in the menu
manager launched the TOPIC ROUTER browser window with a list
of two useful topics.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page D- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES

Figure 5: Launching Help through Menu Manager
4. Vertical Menu Commands
1. Right-click and hold on a menu command until the GETHELP
window appears.

Figure 6: Right-Clicking in Menu Manager
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Us i ng PTC He l p Page D- 7
NOTES
PTC HELP MODULES
There are four main branches in the PTC Help table of contents:
Welcome, Pro/ENGINEER Foundation, Using Foundation Modules, and
Using Additional Modules.
Figure 7: Four Main Branches in Help System
Refer to the following list to find a particular module in the table of
contents:

Figure 8: Foundation and Additional Modules in Help
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E-1
Appendix
E
E
PTC Global Services: Technical Support
PTC Global Services is committed to providing top quality assistance
to our customers. In addition to our Technical Support Hotline, we
also offer Web-based assistance to fit your individual needs by
providing 24 hour / 7 day availability.
PTC Global Services is committed to continually improving customer
service. Through our Quality Monitoring Program we have
demonstrated our commitment to service by achieving Global ISO
9000 Certification for our Technical Support offerings.
Objectives
After completing this module you will be able to:
• Open a Technical Support Call.
• Register for on-line Technical Support.
• Navigate the PTC Products Knowledge Base.
• Find telephone numbers for technical support and services.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E- 2 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE
Choose Support from the PTC Home Page www.ptc.com or go directly to
www. ptc.com/support/support.htm.
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS
Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail
Send email to cs_ptc@ptc.com with copen as the e-mail subject.
Please use the following format (or download the template from
www.ptc.com/cs/doc/copen.htm):
FNAME: First Name
LNAME: Last Name
CALLCENTER: U.S., Germany, France, U.K., Singapore, or
Tokyo
PHONE: NNN NNN-NNNN x-NNNN
CONFIG_ID: NNNNNN
PRODUCT: X
MODULE: XX
PRIORITY: X
DESC_BEGIN:
description starts
description continues
description ends
DESC_END
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cus t ome r Suppor t I nf or ma t i on Page E- 3
NOTES
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone
Call us directly by telephone (refer to the Contact Information page for
your Local Technical Support Center).
The Technical Support Engineer will ask you for the following
information when logging a call:
• Your PTC software Configuration ID
• Your name and telephone number
• The PTC product (module) name
• Priority of the issue
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web
You can use the PTC Web site www.ptc.com/support to open Technical
Support calls 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, by using the Pro/CALL
LOGGER
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support
To send data files to PTC Technical Support, please follow the
instructions at: www.ptc.com/support/cs_guide/additional.htm.
When the call is resolved your data will be deleted by the Technical
Support Engineer. Your data will not be divulged to any third party
vendors under any circumstances. You may also request a Non-Disclosure
Agreement from the Technical Support Engineer.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E- 4 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Routing Your Technical Support Calls
Call
Customer question
Telephone Call Web Call
Tech SupportEngineer
creates a call in the database
Call is automatically created
in the database
Investigation Call Back and Investigation
Support Engineer
solves issue or
reports it
to Development (SPR)
SPR
Software Performance Report
Software Performance Report (SPR)
SPR Verification through Tech. Support Engineer
Update CD to customer
SPR fixed from Development
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cus t ome r Suppor t I nf or ma t i on Page E- 5
NOTES
Technical Support Call Priorities
• Extremely Critical – Work stopped
• Critical – Work severely impacted
• Urgent – Work impacted
• Not Critical
• General Information
Software Performance Report Priorities
• Top Priority – Highly critical software issue that is causing a work
stoppage.
• High – Critical software issue that affects immediate work and a
practical alternative technique is not available.
• Medium – Software issue that does not affect immediate work or a
practical alternative technique is available.
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT
Go to www.ptc.com/support and click Sign-up Online , to open the
registration form and enter your Configuration ID.
To find your Pro/ENGINEER Configuration ID, click Help > About
Pro/ENGINEER.
Complete the information needed to identify yourself as a user with your
personal data. Please write down your username and password for future
reference.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E- 6 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
ONLINE SERVICES
After you have registered, you will have full access to all Online Tools.
You can search our Knowledge Base using a Search-Engine. Our Online
Support Applications controls the status of calls (Call Tracker) and SPRs
(SPR Tracker) and adds comments to these. If you add a comment, the
Technical Support Engineer assigned to your call will be notified
automatically.
Additionally, contact information such as the customer feedback line and
electronic order of software and manuals are available.
The Software Update Tool allows you to request the latest software
updates for any PTC product.
FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE
The Technical Support Knowledge Base contains over 18,000 documents.
Technical Application Notes (TANs), Technical Point of Interest (TPIs),
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and Suggested Techniques offer up-
to-date information about all relevant software areas. All FAQs and
Suggested Techniques are available in English, French, and German.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cus t ome r Suppor t I nf or ma t i on Page E- 7
NOTES
Terminology used by Technical Support
TAN – Technical Application Note provides information about SPRs that
may affect more than just the customer originally reporting an issue.
TANs also may provide alternative techniques to allow a user to continue
working.
TPI – Technical Point of Interest provides additional technical information
about a software product. TPIs are created by Technical Support to
document the resolution of common issues reported in actual customer
calls. TPIs are similar to TANs, but do not reference an SPR.
Suggested Techniques – Provides step-by-step instructions including
screen snapshots, on how to use PTC software to complete common tasks.
FAQ – Frequently Asked Questions provides answers to many of the most
commonly asked questions compiled from the PTC Technical Support
database.
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E- 8 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION
To subscribe to our Knowledge Base Monitor e-mail service, go to
www.ptc.com/support.
1. Click Technical Support > Online Support Applications >
Knowledge Base Monitor.
2. Select the PTC Product or Module for which you want to get
information.
3. You will receive daily e-mail with update information; this can
help you by upgrading to a new PTC product or to a new release.
Figure 1: Knowledge Base Monitor Sign Up
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cus t ome r Suppor t I nf or ma t i on Page E- 9
NOTES
CONTACT INFORMATION
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic
Services.
These services are available seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
Web:
• www.ptc.com/support/index.htm (Support)
• www.ptc.com/company/contacts/edserv.htm (Education)
E-mai l :
• cs_ptc@ptc.com (for opening calls and sending data)
• cs-webmaster@ptc.com (for comments or suggestions about
the Customer Service Web site)
FTP (for transferring files to PTC Technical Support):
• ftp.ptc.com
Technical Support Customer Feedback Line
The Customer Feedback Line is intended for general customer service
concerns that are not technical product issues.
E-mai l :
• cs-feedback@ptc.com
Telephone:
• www.ptc.com/cs/doc/feedback_nums.htm
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E- 10 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Telephone
For assistance with technical issues, contact the Electronic Services noted
in the previous section, or the Technical Support line as listed in the Phone
and Fax Information sections below.
PTC has nine integrated Technical Support Call Centers in North
America, Europe, and Asia. Our worldwide coverage ensures telephone
access to Technical Support for customers in all time zones and in local
languages.
North America Phone Information
Customer Services (including Technical Support, License Management,
and Documentation Requests):
Within the United States and Canada:
• 800-477-6435
Outside the United States and Canada:
• 781-370-5332
• 781-370-5513
Maintenance:
• 888-782-3774
Education:
• 888-782-3773
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cus t ome r Suppor t I nf or ma t i on Page E- 11
NOTES
Europe Phone Information
Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Austria 0800 29 7542
Belgium 0800-15-241 (French)
0800-72567 (Dutch)
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117092
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 0180-2245132
49-89-32106-111 (for Pro/MECHANICA® outside of
Germany)
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Israel 1-800-945-42-95 (All languages including Hebrew)
177-150-21-34 (English only)
Italy 800-79-05-33
Luxembourg 0800-23-50
Netherlands 0800022-4519
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
South Africa 0800-991068
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 0800-55-38-33 (French)
0800-83-75-58 (Italian)
0800-552428 (German)
United Kingdom 0800-318677
License Management Phone Numbers:
Belgium 0800-75376
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117-092
Eastern Europe 44 1252 817 078
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E- 12 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-0
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Italy 39 (0) 39-65651
Netherlands 0800-022-0543
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
Russia 44 1252 817 078
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-8-24-34-44
United Kingdom 0800-31-8677
Education Services Phone Numbers:
Benelux 31-73-644-2705
France 33-1-69-33-65-50
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-325
Italy 39-039-65-65- 652
39-039-6565-1
Spain/Portugal 34-91-452-01-00
Sweden 46-8-590-956-00 (Malmo)
46-8-590-956-46 (Upplands Vasby)
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-820-00-80
United Kingdom 44-0800-212-565 (toll free within UK)
44-1252-817-140
Asia and Pacific Rim Phone Information
Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Australia 1800-553-565
China* 10800-650-8185 (international toll free)
108-657 (manual toll free)
Hong Kong 800-933309
India* 000-6517
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Cus t ome r Suppor t I nf or ma t i on Page E- 13
NOTES
Indonesia 001-803-65-7250
7-2-48-55-00-35
Japan 120-20-9023
Malaysia 1-800-80-1026
New Zealand 0800-44-4376
Philippines 1800-1-651-0176
Singapore 65-830-9899
South Korea 00798-65-1-7078 (international toll free)
080-3469-001 (domestic toll free)
Taiwan 0080-65-1256 (international toll free)
080-013069 (domestic toll free)
Thailand 001-800-65-6213
*Note: Callers dialing from India or China must provide the operator with
the respective string:
China MTF8309729
India MTF8309752
The operator will then connect you to the Singapore Technical Support
Center.
License Management Phone Numbers
Japan 81 (0) 3-3346-8280
Hong Kong (852) 2802-8982
Education Services Phone Numbers
Australia 61 2 9955 2833 (Sydney)
61 3 9561 4111 (Melbourne)
China 86-20-87554426 (GuangZhou)
86-21-62785080 (Shanghai)
86-10-65908699 (Beijing)
Hong Kong 852-28028982
India 91-80-2267272 Ext.#306 (Bangalore)
91-11-6474701 (New Delhi)
91-226513152 (Mumbai)
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Page E- 14 I nt r oduc t i on t o Pr o/ ENGI NEER
NOTES
Japan 81-3-3346- 8268
Malaysia 03-754 8198
Singapore 65-8309866
South Korea 82-2-3469-1080
Taiwan 886-2-758-8600 (Taipei)
886-4-3103311 (Taichung)
886-7-3323211 (Kaohsiung)
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
Up-to-Date
Information
+
Worldwide
ISO 9000
Certification
Quality Control
System
= Maximum
Productivity
with
PTC
Products
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I NDEX Pa ge -1
INDEX
Assemblies
Constraining Components, 13-3
Design Intent, 13-8
Modifying, 13-7
Options, 13-8
BOM, 13-8
Exploded Views, 13-9
Overview, 13-2
Placing Components, 13-6
Surface Normal Vector, 13-2
Under-Constrained Components, 13-7
Associativity, 1-5
Behavioral Modeler
Achieving Desired Results, 10-6
Analyzing Effects of Parameter Changes, 10-6
Components
Analysis Features, 10-8
Feasibility Studies, 10-11
Field Points, 10-8
Optimization, 10-12
Sensitivity Analysis, 10-10
User-defined Analysis, 10-9
Creating Datum Geometry, 10-5
Creating Feature Parameters, 10-4
Creating New Measurement Systems, 10-5
Graph Matching, 10-7
Interaction with Data Analysis Tools, 10-6
Motion Analysis, 10-8
Behavioral Modeling
Applications, 10-4
Definition, 10-2
Features, 10-2
Objective-Driven Design, 10-4
Smart Models, 10-3
Config.PRO File, 20-2
Configuration Files
Config.PRO, 20-2
Editing, 20-3
Mapkeys, 20-4
Order of Precedence, 20-3
Constraints
Sketcher Mode, 4-9
Copy
Choosing Features, 12-10
Dependency Options, 12-11
Methods, 12-8
Customizing
Pro/ENGINEER, 20-2
Deleting Files, 2-10
Design Intent, 21-2
Assemblies, 13-8
Associativity, 21-4
Changing, 21-5
Design Criteria, 21-3
Parent/Child Relationships, 21-3
Pro/NOTEBOOK, 21-2
Dialog Boxes, 2-5
General, 2-5
Models, 2-6
Option Buttons, 2-6
Dimensions
Angular, 5-9
Diameter, 5-7
Linear, 5-6
Modifying in Sketcher, 4-8
Radial, 5-8
Sections, 5-5
Display Area, 2-3
Drawings
Adding New Views, 11-2
Creating, 11-2
Cross Sections, 11-4
Detailing, 11-7
Dimensions
Drawing Notes, 11-9
Driven, 11-8
Features, 11-8
Manipulating, 11-8
Parametric Notes, 11-9
Manipulating Views, 11-5
Templates, 11-6
Applications, 11-6
Customizing, 11-7
View Type Menu, 11-3
Broken View, 11-3
Full View, 11-3
Half View, 11-3
Partial View, 11-3
Views
Auxiliary, 11-2
Detailed, 11-3
General, 11-3
Projection, 11-2
Revolved, 11-3
Edge, 4-9
Extruded Forms, 5-2
Feature-Based Models, 1-3
Features
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa ge -2 I NDEX
Copy To Locations, 12-8
Copying, 12-8
File Commands
Closing Windows, 2-10
Deleting Files, 2-10
Saving Your Work, 2-9
File Types, 2-4
Assemblies, 2-4
Drawings, 2-4
Parts, 2-4
Sketches, 2-4
Freeform Surfaces
Applying to Engineering Models, 17-8
Blends and Transitions, 17-8
Parametric Controls, 17-7
Geometry
Creating in Sketcher Mode, 4-6
Help, 2-8
Hybrid Modeling, 17-3
Information
About Features, 19-2
Model Info, 19-2
Regeneration Info, 19-2
Intent Manager, 4-3
Interference, 19-3
ISDX, 17-2
2-D Curves, 17-4
3-D Curves, 17-4
Creating Surfaces, 17-4
Curves On Surface (COS), 17-6
Style Models, 17-6
Layout Mode, 21-2
Macros
Mapkeys, 20-4
Mapkeys, 20-4
Mass Properties, 19-3
Calculating, 19-3
Measurement, 19-3
Menu Manager, 2-8
Menus, 2-2
Adding Mapkeys, 20-7
Customizing, 20-6
Message Area, 2-4
Viewing Information, 2-4
Model Tree, 2-7, 20-7
General Usage, 20-8
Models
Multiple Models, 2-8
Retrieving (Opening), 2-6
Sub-windows, 2-8
Offset Edge, 4-10
Parallel Blends
Creating, 8-3
Straight and Smooth Attributes, 8-5
Tools, 8-4
Parameters
Symbols Used to Describe, 9-4
Parametric Features, 1-4
Parametric Relations, 9-2
Assembly, 9-2
Design Changes, 9-8
Design Intent, 9-4
Examples, 9-5
Feature, 9-3
Order of Operations, 9-6
Part, 9-2
Pattern, 9-3
Parent Features
Modifying, 7-3
Redefining, 7-4
Rerouting, 7-3
Parent/Child Relationships
Definitions, 7-2
Pick-and-Place Features, 7-2
Sketched Features, 7-2
Patterns
Benefits of Using, 12-2
Creating, 12-2
Options, 12-3
Rotational, 12-5
Types, 12-2
Dimensions, 12-2
Reference, 12-2
Preferences
Sketcher, 4-13
Pro/ENGINEER
Customizing, 20-2
Pro/NOTEBOOK, 21-2
Problems
Diagnosing Regeneration Problems, 18-3
Reference Planes, 5-3
Default, 5-3
Regeneration
Model Info, 19-2
Regeneration Failures, 18-2
Resolve Environment, 18-2
Regeneration Problems
Feature Reorder, 7-6
Insert Mode, 7-6
Parent/Child Features, 7-5
Resolving, 7-5
Resolve Environment
Diagnosing Problems, 18-3
Resolving, 18-2
Specifying a Model, 18-3
Starting, 18-2
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
I NDEX Pa ge -3
Undoing Changes, 18-3
Resolve Environment:, 18-4
Reverse Styling, 17-9
Revolved Forms, 5-2
Saving Your Work, 2-9
Sketched Features
Cuts, 5-2
Defining, 5-2
Extruded and Revolved Forms, 5-2
Protrusions, 5-2
Sketcher
3-D Sketching, 4-13
Arcs, 4-6
Best Practices, 4-14
Circles, 4-6
Constraints, 4-9
Copying, 4-10
Creating Geometry, 4-6
Customizing, 4-13
Dimensioning, 4-7
Intent Manager, 4-3
Interface Features, 4-2
Lines, 4-6
Menus, 4-4
Mirroring, 4-11
Moving, 4-11
Points, 4-12
Pop-Up Menus, 4-3
References, 4-5
Replacing, 4-11
Section Analysis, 4-11
Selecting Sketched Entities, 4-3
Sketcher Mode, 4-4
Tools, 4-9, 5-5
Trimming, 4-11
Sketching Planes, 5-3
Solid Modeling
Associativity, 1-5
Core Concepts, 1-2
Feature-Based Models, 1-3
Parametric Features, 1-4
Style
Creating Style Surfaces, 17-9
Features, 17-2
Introduction, 17-2
Sweeps and Trajectories
Creating, 8-2
Templates
Drawing Templates:, 11-6
Toolbar
Customizing, 20-5
Toolbars, 2-3
Top-Down Design, 14-2
Approach, 14-2
Benefits, 14-4
Characteristics, 14-3
Comparison with Traditional Approaches, 14-3
Pro/ENGINEER Tools, 14-7
Process, 14-4
Stages, 14-2
Use Edge, 4-10
User Interface, 2-2
Dialog Boxes, 2-5
Display Area, 2-3
Menus, 2-2
Message Area, 2-4
Pro/ENGINEER, 2-2
Toolbars, 2-3
Windows
Closing, 2-10
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Pa ge -2 I NDEX
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Copyright
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
Copyright © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. This Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Training Guide may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced to any form, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means, electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance. User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary: Advanced Surface Design, CADDS, CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, Windchill, and the InPart logo. Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary 3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, BOMBOT, CDRS, CounterPart, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DVS, DVSAFEWORK, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, e-Series, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker, Flexible Engineering, ICEM, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, i-Series, ISSM, MEDEA, ModelCHECK, NC Builder, Nitidus, PARTBOT, PartSpeak, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM -POST, Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN,Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK, Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator, PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Virtual Design Environment, Windchill e-Catalog, Windchill e-Series, Windchill ProjectLink, CV-Computervision logo, DIVISION logo, and ICEM logo.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Copyright
Third-Party Trademarks Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Metaphase is a registered trademark of Metaphase Technology Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. Unigraphics is a registered trademark of EDS Corp. I-DEAS is a registered trademark of SDRC. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of Solidworks Corp. Matrix One is a trademark of Matrix One Software. SHERPA is a registered trademark of Inso Corp. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systems. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc. Rational Rose 2000E, is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Excalibur Technologies Corporation. VisualCafé is copyrighted software of WebGain, Inc. VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI. HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, Massachusetts 02494 USA © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. Unpublished – all rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

PRINTING HISTORY Document No. Date T779-320-01 T779-320-02 T779-320-03 05/18/01 08/15/01 11/08/01

Description Initial Printing of Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for Release 2001 Revisions to Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for Release 2001 Revisions to Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for Release 2001

Order Number DT-779-320-EN Printed in U.S.A

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ
7+( 35(&,6,21 /($51,1* 0(7+2'2/2*<
37& *OREDO 6HUYLFHV LV GHGLFDWHG WR FRQWLQXDOO\ SURYLGLQJ WKH VWXGHQW ZLWK DQ HIIHFWLYH FRPSUHKHQVLYH OHDUQLQJ H[SHULHQFH 7RZDUG WKLV JRDO 37& GHYHORSHG 3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ ZKLFK PDWFKHV WKH ULJKW WUDLQLQJ WR WKH ULJKW SHRSOH DW WKH ULJKW WLPH XVLQJ WKH ULJKW PHWKRG 3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ LV EDVHG RQ D WKUHH VWDJH /HDUQ²$VVHVV²,PSURYH PHWKRGRORJ\

6WDJH  /($51 7KH VWXGHQW DWWHQGV D 37& WUDLQLQJ FRXUVH LQFOXGLQJ DQ\ • • • ,QVWUXFWRUOHG WUDLQLQJ FRXUVH DW D 37& WUDLQLQJ FHQWHU 2QVLWH WUDLQLQJ FRXUVH &XVWRPL]HG WUDLQLQJ FRXUVH

• :HEEDVHG WUDLQLQJ :%7

FRXUVH
6WDJH  $66(66 7KH LPSDFW RI D WUDLQLQJ FRXUVH LV DVVHVVHG XVLQJ WKH 3UR),&,(1&< (YDOXDWRU 7KH 3UR),&,(1&< (YDOXDWRU LV D ZHEEDVHG VNLOOV DVVHVVPHQW DQG GHYHORSPHQWSODQQLQJ WRRO ,W LV GHVLJQHG WR GHOLYHU LQIRUPDWLRQ WKDW ZLOO KHOS LPSURYH WKH VNLOOV DQG SURGXFWLYLW\ RI WKH VWXGHQW

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ
6WDJH  ,03529( 7KH 3UR),&,(1&< (YDOXDWRU ILQGLQJV HQDEOH FXVWRPHUV WR LGHQWLI\ DUHDV IRU LPSURYHPHQW 7KH WUDLQLQJ ZL]DUG ZLOO GLUHFW FXVWRPHUV WR WKH DSSURSULDWH FODVV EDVHG RQ WKHLU MRE UHVSRQVLELOLWLHV &XVWRPHUV KDYH DFFHVV WR D UDQJH RI UHVRXUFHV WKDW LQFOXGH • • • ,QWHUQDO DQG H[WHUQDO XVHU JURXSV 37& WHFKQLFDO VXSSRUW UHVRXUFHV :HEEDVHG FRXUVHV DQG OHVVRQV

&217,18286 ,03529(0(17
7KH 3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ PHWKRGRORJ\ SURYLGHV D FRQWLQXRXV F\FOH RI NQRZOHGJH H[SDQVLRQ DQG LPSURYHPHQW

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ
35(&,6,21 /($51,1* ,1 7+( &/$665220
7KH /HDUQ²$VVHVV²,PSURYH 3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ PHWKRGRORJ\ LV DOVR LPSOHPHQWHG LQ VHOHFWHG 37& LQVWUXFWRUOHG FRXUVHV 7KURXJKRXW WKH FODVV VWXGHQWV ZLOO WDNH 3UR),&,(1&< (YDOXDWRU DVVHVVPHQWV WR HYDOXDWH WKHLU RZQ FRPSUHKHQVLRQ 7KH JURXS UHVXOWV DUH DOVR XVHG WR LGHQWLI\ DUHDV IRU WKH LQVWUXFWRU WR UHYLHZ ZLWK WKH FODVV DV D ZKROH $W WKH HQG RI WKH FODVV HDFK VWXGHQW ZLOO FRPSOHWH DQ (GXFDWLRQ &LUFXLW IRUP 7KLV (GXFDWLRQ &LUFXLW LV WKH VWXGHQW
V DFWLRQ SODQ LGHQWLI\LQJ WRSLFV IRU LPSURYHPHQW DV ZHOO DV WKH VWHSV WR WDNH LQ RUGHU WR HQKDQFH WKH VNLOOV LQ WKRVH DUHDV 7KH IROORZLQJ SDJHV SURYLGH D VDPSOH (GXFDWLRQ &LUFXLW DFWLRQ SODQ DQG D EODQN DFWLRQ SODQ ,QVWUXFWLRQV IRU XVLQJ WKH (GXFDWLRQ &LUFXLW DFWLRQ SODQ ZLOO EH GLVFXVVHG LQ WKH FRXUVH

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ
('8&$7,21 &,5&8,7 (;$03/(
7KH IROORZLQJ LV DQ H[DPSOH RI D VWXGHQW
V (GXFDWLRQ &LUFXLW DW WKH HQG RI WKH ,QWURGXFWLRQ WR 3UR(1*,1((5 WUDLQLQJ FODVV

3UR),&,(1&< (YDOXDWRU ([DP 5HVXOWV
$IWHU UHYLHZLQJ WKH UHVXOWV RI WKH (YDOXDWRU H[DPV IRU WKLV FRXUVH WKH IROORZLQJ OLVWV WKH TXHVWLRQV , DQVZHUHG LQFRUUHFWO\ DQG QHHG WR UHVHDUFK IXUWKHU

4XHVWLRQ

:HDN DQG VWURQJ GLPHQVLRQV 'UDIW )HDWXUHV &RQILJXUDWLRQ ILOH RSWLRQV

3UDFWLFH FUHDWLQJ VLPSOH IHDWXUHV ZLWK WKH GHVLUHG GLPHQVLRQLQJ VFKHPH :HE /HVVRQ 'LPHQVLRQLQJ 6FKHPH 6HH FROOHDJXH DW ZRUN IRU DGYLFH DQG SURGXFW H[DPSOHV &RQVXOW FRPSDQ\ XVHU JURXS IRU JXLGHOLQHV

,PSURYH $FWLRQ

&ODVV (YDOXDWLRQ )RUP 7RSLFV
$IWHU UHYLHZLQJ WKH TXHVWLRQV RQ WKH FODVV (YDOXDWLRQ IRUP WKH IROORZLQJ OLVWV WKH WRSLFV , QHHG WR UHVHDUFK IXUWKHU

2EMHFWLYH

6HWWLQJ XS WKH GHIDXOW YLHZ RI D SDUW &UHDWLQJ VZHHSV 5HVROYH 0RGH 5HVROYH 0RGH

3UDFWLFH RQ VLPSOH SDUWV XVLQJ GLIIHUHQW VNHWFKLQJ SODQHV DQG UHIHUHQFH SODQHV :HE /HVVRQ 6ZHSW )RUPV &UHDWH VRPH VLPSOH PRGHOV DQG PDNH WKHP IDLO :HE OHVVRQ 5HVROYH 0RGH

,PSURYH $FWLRQ

)XWXUH &RXUVHV
$IWHU UHYLHZLQJ WKH 5ROH %DVHG 7UDLQLQJ JXLGHOLQHV WKH IROORZLQJ OLVWV WKH FRXUVHV UHFRPPHQGHG WR LPSURYH P\ VNLOOV DQG HQKDQFH P\ MRE SHUIRUPDQFH

1H[W &RXUVHV

)XQGDPHQWDOV RI 'HVLJQ 'HVLJQLQJ ZLWK 6XUIDFHV

1H[W &RXUVHV

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ
3UR),&,(1&< (YDOXDWRU ([DP 5HVXOWV
$IWHU UHYLHZLQJ WKH UHVXOWV RI WKH (YDOXDWRU H[DPV IRU WKLV FRXUVH WKH IROORZLQJ OLVWV WKH TXHVWLRQV , DQVZHUHG LQFRUUHFWO\ DQG QHHG WR UHVHDUFK IXUWKHU

4XHVWLRQ

,PSURYH $FWLRQ

&ODVV (YDOXDWLRQ )RUP 7RSLFV
$IWHU UHYLHZLQJ WKH TXHVWLRQV RQ WKH FODVV (YDOXDWLRQ IRUP WKH IROORZLQJ OLVWV WKH WRSLFV , QHHG WR UHVHDUFK IXUWKHU

2EMHFWLYH

,PSURYH $FWLRQ

)XWXUH &RXUVHV
$IWHU UHYLHZLQJ WKH 5ROH %DVHG 7UDLQLQJ JXLGHOLQHV WKH IROORZLQJ OLVWV WKH FRXUVHV UHFRPPHQGHG WR LPSURYH P\ VNLOOV DQG HQKDQFH P\ MRE SHUIRUPDQFH

1H[W &RXUVHV

1H[W &RXUVHV

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

T r aining Ag enda
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
Day 1
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER The Pro/ENGINEER Interface Pick-and-Place Features Sketcher Basics Sketched Features

Day 4
Principles of Top-Down Design Additional Datum Features and Skeletons Layers and Suppression Creating Surfaces with Freeform

Day 2
Default Datum Templates Parent/Child Relationships Sweeps and Blends Relations and Parameters

Day 5
The Resolve Environment Information Tools Configuring Pro/ENGINEER Modeling Philosophy Appendix A: Review Questions

Day 3
Behavioral Modeling Drawings and Drawing Templates Duplication Features: Patterns and Copy Creating Assemblies Appendix B: Project Laboratory Appendix C: Precision Learning Appendix D: PTC Help Appendix E: Technical Support

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
The following is a list of telephone and fax numbers you may find useful:

Education Services Registration in North America
Tel: Fax: (888)-782-3773 (781) 370-5553

Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.) (781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.) Fax: (781) 370-5650

License Management
Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.) (781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.) Fax: (781) 370-5795

Contracts
Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.) (781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)

In addition, you can find the PTC home page on the World Wide Web can be found at: http://www.ptc.com. The Web site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions, as well as information on PTC, the Pro/ENGINEER product line, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and Pro/PARTNERS.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

.............................................2-4 WORKING WITH MODELS..........................................................................................2-10 Deleting Files ..............................................................2-15 EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Model Tree................1-4 Taking Advantage of Associativity........................................................... 2-11 EXERCISE 1: Using the Pro/ENGINEER Environment...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-5 Retrieving Models .....................2-8 Working with Multiple Sub-Windows .......................................................2-3 Viewing Information in the Message Area...........................................2-12 EXERCISE 2: Manipulating Model Size and Orientation.............2-9 Closing Windows.....................................................................................2-2 The Base Window........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-10 LABORATORY PRACTICAL..........................................................................................................2-21 MODULE SUMMARY ..........................................................1-2 Designing Feature-based Models ........................2-8 Retrieving Multiple Models .......................................................................................2-6 Using the Model Tree......................................................................................................................2-4 Working with Dialog Boxes...........................................................Table of Contents Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER INTRODUCTION TO PRO/ENGINEER 1-1 PRO/ENGINEER CORE CONCEPTS ........................................................................................................................................................................................1-2 Solid Modeling Benefits ................................................................................2-18 EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise......................................................................... 2-25 For University Use Only ..............................................................................................................................................Commercial Use Prohibited - .......2-3 Manipulating Your Designs in the Display Area.................................................................................................................................................................2-2 Accessing Commands with Pull-Down Menus ............................2-2 Accessing Frequently-used Commands with the Toolbar.....................................................................................................2-7 Using the Menu Manager........................................................................................................................................................................1-5 THE PRO/ENGINEER INTERFACE 2-1 ELEMENTS OF THE INTERFACE...........................2-8 Saving Changes ...................................................................................................................1-3 Designing with Parametric Features ...........................2-8 Obtaining Additional Information with Help .....................................

.................................... 4-24 EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3 Specifying Radius Values for Simple Rounds ......................3-31 SKETCHER BASICS 4-1 THE SKETCHER INTERFACE ................................................... 4-4 Accessing Commands with Sketcher Menus.................................................................................................. 4-17 Method........................ 3-11 EXERCISE 2: Creating Chamfers and Rounds .......... 3-14 EXERCISE 3: Exploring the Straight Hole Feature ......................................................... 4-6 Dimensioning Sketches ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Setting Sketcher Preferences ............................... 4-13 TAKING ADVANTAGE OF SKETCHER MODE .............................................................................................................................................................................Commercial Use Prohibited - ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4-14 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-5 Creating Geometry................................................. 3-21 EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise................................................................................................................................. 3-5 Hole Features....................... 4-18 EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps ............................................................................................3-10 EXERCISE 1: Shell and Automatic Round Features................................................ 4-2 The Intent Manager................................................................. 4-17 EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics ............... 3-2 Generic Method of Creation............................4-34 SKETCHED FEATURES 5-1 DEFINING SKETCHED FEATURES....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3 Accessing Commands with Pop-Up Menus.......... 3-29 MODULE SUMMARY ............................... 4-4 Specifying References ............................................................................................................PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES 3-1 DEFINING PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-17 Tools . 3-2 Creating Edge Chamfers...................................................................................................................................... 3-6 Creating the Straight Hole Feature................ 4-9 Other Sketcher Tools ................................................................. 3-2 Shell Features ...............................................................................................................................................4-17 Goal.............................. 4-3 THE SKETCHER MODE............................................................................... 3-6 LABORATORY PRACTICAL . 4-31 MODULE SUMMARY .................... 3-3 Creating Simple Rounds....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Adding Constraints.................... 5-2 For University Use Only ...........................................................................

.....................................................................5-5 Dimensioning Sections ..........................................6-11 MODULE SUMMARY .....................................................5-5 LABORATORY PRACTICAL.......................................................................................................................................................................8-3 LABORATORY PRACTICAL..............................................................................................................................................Sketching Cuts and Protrusions........................................................................................................................................................6-2 Using a Default Datum as the Base Feature .............................7-2 Sketched Feature Parent/Child Relationships....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-4 EXERCISE 1: Creating a New Part ............8-2 Creating Parallel Blends ...........7-2 Pick-and-Place Feature Parent/Child Relationships .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-7 EXERCISE 1: Creating Parallel Blend Features ................................................................................................................................ 6-15 PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS 7-1 PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS IN PRO/ENGINEER.......................................................7-9 EXERCISE 2: Using Feature Redefine...........6-3 Creating Internal Datum Planes.............................................................................................................7-2 LABORATORY PRACTICAL........................... 5-24 DEFAULT DATUM TEMPLATES 6-1 USING DATUM PLANES AS BASE FEATURES ...............................................................................................5-11 EXERCISE 2: Creating a Protrusion......................................................6-5 EXERCISE 2: Creating an Internal Datum Plane .5-20 MODULE SUMMARY .......................7-14 MODULE SUMMARY .....................8-8 EXERCISE 2: Create a Simple Sweep Protrusion...............................................................................................................................................................................6-2 Base Features ....................................................................................... 5-10 EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cut ......6-3 LABORATORY PRACTICAL...............8-14 MODULE SUMMARY .....................................................................6-2 Defining a Datum Plane.5-2 USING THE SKETCHER TOOLS .......................................................................Commercial Use Prohibited - ............... 8-17 For University Use Only .............................................................................7-8 EXERCISE 1: Using Feature Reroute..............................................................8-2 Creating Sweeps and Trajectories ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-2 Creating Datum Planes............................... 7-20 SWEEPS AND BLENDS 8-1 SWEEP AND TRAJECTORIES...................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................... 9-8 LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................................................................................................................10-14 EXERCISE 2: Analyze Fluid Volume in a Cup...........................................................10-2 Behavioral Modeling Features....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-8 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ...................................... 11-8 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ............................................................................................................... 9-10 EXERCISE 2: Creating Parameters for Feature-Control...................................................................11-11 EXERCISE 2: Modifying Created Views and Testing for Associativity ............................................................................................................10-20 EXERCISE 3: Crankshaft Optimization............................................................11-2 Creating a Drawing............. 9-4 Incorporating Your Design Intent Using Relations .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 EXERCISE 1: Creating Relations ........................10-26 MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2 Adding Drawing Views ........11-10 EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing......................................................... 10-2 USING BEHAVIORAL MODELER .................................... 11-3 Adding a Cross-section...............................................................11-6 DETAILING THE DRAWING.............................9-18 BEHAVIORAL MODELING 10-1 BEHAVIORAL MODELING.............................................................................................................10-13 EXERCISE 1: Creating a Datum Analysis Feature to Measure Mass Properties .................................................................................................11-7 Creating Feature Dimensions ..................................................................................................................................................11-17 EXERCISE 3: Detailing the Gear Part Drawing................................................ 11-2 Using the View Type Menu. 11-4 Manipulating Views ................................................................ 9-15 MODULE SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 11-2 Types of Views............................................Commercial Use Prohibited - ................................................ 11-8 Manipulating Dimensions.......................................... 9-6 Design Changes ....................RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS 9-1 RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS...........................................................................................................................11-20 For University Use Only .... 11-8 Creating Driven Dimensions ........................................................................................................10-4 Defining the Behavioral Modeler Components .............. 9-2 Parametric Relations .................................................................... 11-5 DEFINING DRAWING TEMPLATES .. 9-2 Representing Relations: Types and Symbols ......... 9-4 Order of Relations .......................................................................................................10-36 DRAWINGS AND DRAWING TEMPLATES 11-1 DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS....................

............... 13-2 The Surface Normal Vector.............................................................................................................................................................. 14-2 For University Use Only .........................................................................................................................................................13-8 Creating Exploded Views ..................................................12-2 Pattern Types ..........................Commercial Use Prohibited - ......13-2 Constraining Component Parts ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................12-10 Specifying Dependency Options ..... 13-22 PRINCIPLES OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN 14-1 INTRODUCTION ......................................... 12-7 Specifying Copy-To Locations..................................................................................................12-8 Specifying Copied Feature Dependencies ...............................................................................................................................12-3 COPYING FEATURES ...................................12-18 EXERCISE 4: Copying Features .................................. 12-12 EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Dimension Pattern........................................................................................................................................................................................................12-15 EXERCISE 3: Creating Rotational Patterns of Sketched Features ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................13-8 OTHER ASSEMBLY OPTIONS......................................................................................................13-9 LABORATORY PRACTICAL............................................... 13-7 Modifying Your Design Intent ...................................12-8 Copying Methods....................12-13 EXERCISE 2: Creating a Reference Pattern ..................................12-9 Choosing Features to Copy ..........................................................12-2 Pattern Options........................................................... 11-24 DUPLICATING FEATURES: PATTERNS AND COPY 12-1 CREATING PATTERNS.................................................12-22 EXERCISE 5: Building the Steering Column ....................................................................................... 13-8 Generating Bills of Material...............................................................................................................................................................13-7 MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES.........12-10 LABORATORY PRACTICAL.............................. 13-10 EXERCISE 1: Create a Subassembly of Three Parts .......................................................12-24 MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2 Patterning Benefits................................................................................................................................................................ 12-28 CREATING ASSEMBLIES 13-1 OVERVIEW ..........................................................................................................................................13-11 Exercise 2: Create the Machine Assembly .............................................................................................................................................13-3 Placing Components............................................13-6 Packaging Under-Constrained Components .............................................................................13-18 MODULE SUMMARY ..............................MODULE SUMMARY ......................

............................................................................................... 14-2 Stages of Top-Down Design..................................................................Commercial Use Prohibited - ..... 14-6 Step 5 ....................................................................................... 15-9 EXERCISE 3: The Link Skeleton in an assembly ..............Defining Preliminary Product Structure ................................................................ 14-3 Benefits of Top-Down Design Methodology ....................................16-2 Functionality.....Communicating Design Intent........................................................................... 15-2 Datum Curves...........15-2 Datum Axes ................................... 14-4 THE SIX STEPS OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN.................................................14-7 Layouts ................... 16-4 Associating Items to a Layer............................... 16-3 Creating Layers ..... 16-4 For University Use Only ..................................14-12 MODULE SUMMARY ............................ 16-2 Working With Layers.............................. 15-3 Datum Coordinate Systems ................................... 14-5 Step 4 ..................................................................... 14-2 The Approach........................................................................................................................................................................Continued Population of the Assembly...................Defining Design Intent................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-6 Step 6 ............................................................... 14-8 Data Sharing Features ......... 14-6 PRO/ENGINEER TOP-DOWN DESIGN TOOLS ................................................................................................. 14-5 Step 2 ............................... 16-2 CREATING LAYERS.................................................15-16 MODULE SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-10 Managing References / Interdependencies..........................................Managing Part Interdependencies................................................................................................................................................. 14-2 Comparing Top-Down Design to Traditional Approaches ....................... 15-6 EXERCISE 2: Creating a simple skeleton ..... 14-5 Step 3 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................14-15 ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES AND SKELETONS 15-1 ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES............................15-5 EXERCISE 1: Creating Additional Datum Features.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Skeleton Models ........................................................ 15-2 Datum Points .............................................................. 15-4 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Definition......................14-4 Step 1 .............................................................................16-3 Selecting the Object..................................................................................................................................................................15-19 LAYERS AND SUPPRESSION 16-1 DEFINING LAYERS...............15-14 OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: The Vice Grip .......................................................................................................................................... 14-7 Skeletons........................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-2 HYBRID MODELING ..............18-2 LABORATORY PRACTICAL.......................................................................................Setting the Display Status of a Layer.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................16-22 MODULE SUMMARY ............. 17-4 Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves ......................................................................................................16-9 Saving and Resuming Suppressed Features .................................................................... 16-8 Using Suppression ............16-20 EXERCISE 4: Suppressing Components in Assembly Mode.......................................................................................................................................................17-8 Applying Style Surfaces to Engineering Models .......................................................................................................................................................... 17-2 THE STYLE FEATURE..........................16-8 Suppressing Parent/Child Relationships................................................... 17-10 EXERCISE 1: Interrogating the STYLE Interface....18-6 MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................17-16 MODULE SUMMARY .....................................................................16-14 EXERCISE 3: Suppressing in Part Mode..................................................................................................................................................... 17-23 THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT 18-1 REGENERATION FAILURES ...17-7 Creating Blends and Transitions .......................................... 18-6 EXERCISE 1: Resolving a Regeneration Failure............................. 18-10 For University Use Only ...................... 18-2 Starting the Resolve Environment........................................................................16-5 Manipulating Layer Display Status ......................................................................................................16-9 LABORATORY PRACTICAL............. 16-10 EXERCISE 1: Using Layers in Part Mode................18-2 Resolving Regeneration Failures............................................................................................Commercial Use Prohibited - ...............17-6 Creating Freeform Surfaces with Parametric Controls ...........17-4 Using COS......................................17-9 CREATING STYLE SURFACES..........................................................................................................................17-8 Reverse Styling.................................................................................................................................................................................17-6 Creating Styling Models ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-9 LABORATORY PRACTICAL..................................................... 17-3 CREATING SURFACES WITH ISDX.......................................................................................................................................16-11 EXERCISE 2: Using Layers in Assembly Mode ....... 16-26 CREATING SURFACES WITH FREEFORM 17-1 DESIGNING WITH INTERACTIVE SURFACES.......................................................................................................................................................16-7 SUPPRESSION FUNCTIONALITY ..........................................17-11 EXERCISE 2: Creating a Handle on the Flashlight.......................................

..........................................................................21-13 For University Use Only ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................21-10 Decision Process Questionnaire ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 21-5 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................ 20-4 CUSTOMIZING YOUR TOOLBAR............................................20-7 LABORATORY PRACTICAL ................... 20-2 Creating Mapkeys............................................................ 21-3 Using Pro/ENGINEER as a Parametric Tool............................................................................................21-10 MODULE SUMMARY .................................................................... 21-3 Advantages of Pro/ENGINEER Associativity ................. INTERFERENCE........................................................................................................ 21-6 Part II: Assembly level Design Intent ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................20-11 EXERCISE 2: Creating a Mapkey............ 19-5 MODULE SUMMARY ............20-19 MODELING PHILOSOPHY 21-1 DESIGN INTENT.............................................. AND MASS PROPERTIES .........21-6 Part I: Part Level Design Intent.......................20-5 Adding Icons to Existing Toolbars ...... 21-3 Creating Parent/Child Relationships......................................................................................... 20-6 THE MODEL TREE .........................................................................................................20-10 EXERCISE 1: Setting Up a Configuration File.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-2 Obtaining Information about Assemblies .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-2 Accessing Information about Part Features .......................... 21-4 Changing Design Intent................................19-5 EXERCISE 1: Using Information Tools ..................... 20-5 Creating Pull-down Menus ..........................................................................20-16 MODULE SUMMARY ...................19-2 Obtaining Information about a Specific Feature..................................................................................................................................... 19-2 Obtaining Regeneration Information... 19-3 LABORATORY PRACTICAL .......................................................................... 19-3 MEASUREMENT......................................................................21-2 Recording Your Design Criteria.......................................................................20-2 Defining Configuration Files .................................INFORMATION TOOLS 19-1 MODEL INFORMATION...........................19-3 Calculating Mass Properties ......................19-9 CONFIGURING PRO/ENGINEER 20-1 CUSTOMIZING PRO/ENGINEER...............Commercial Use Prohibited - .....................

.....................A-2 DAY 2: REVIEW QUESTIONS. C-2 THE PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR .......................................................................................................................................... C-3 A Powerful Planning Tool................. B-2 PART CREATION ........B-26 INTERROGATING YOUR MODELS.......................................................................................................Commercial Use Prohibited - ............... C-3 COMPLYING WITH EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYMENT REQUIREMENTS................B-36 SECTION 4: Completing the Motor Assembly ...................B-45 SECTION 3: Completing the Drawing ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. B-43 SECTION 1: Developing the Motor Part .............................................................................................................B-11 CREATING ASSEMBLIES ....................................................................................................................................................................................B-40 COMPLETING THE PROJECT........................................................... C-3 Measurable Training Outcomes.........................................................................................................................................B-22 SECTION 3: Creating the Blower Assembly....................................................................................................................................................................REVIEW QUESTIONS A-1 DAY 1: REVIEW QUESTIONS............................................................................................................................................................... B-18 SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Assembly.................................................................................................................................................................. B-3 SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Part ............................................. A-17 PROJECT LABORATORY B-1 INTRODUCTION ..................................B-34 SECTION 3: Completing the Blower Assembly .............................................. C-4 EXERCISE 1: Completing Evaluator Assessments ......... C-2 TBLS: Necessity and Advantages ........................................................................ A-10 DAY 4: REVIEW QUESTIONS..................... B-9 SECTION 4: Creating the Upper Housing Part ......................................................................................................................................B-43 SECTION 2: Finishing the Lower Housing................. C-2 TBLS Components .......................................................... B-3 SECTION 2: Creating the Lower Housing Part................................................................................................................................................................................. B-29 SECTION 1: Designing the Cover Part.B-30 SECTION 2: Completing the Motor Part................ A-14 DAY 5: REVIEW QUESTIONS.......................... C-8 For University Use Only ................................................... B-5 SECTION 3: Creating the Snap Ring Part ................................B-47 USING THE PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR C-1 TECHNOLOGY-BASED LEARNING @ PTC.........................................................................................................................................................................................................B-23 SECTION 4: Creating the Motor Part Drawing............................................................B-18 SECTION 2: Concurrent Design of the Motor Housing................................... C-5 MODULE SUMMARY .............................................................................................................A-6 DAY 3: REVIEW QUESTIONS...............................

.................................................................................................................................................................... D-2 USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP .......................E-8 CONTACT INFORMATION ..........E-10 ELECTRONIC SERVICES .........Commercial Use Prohibited - ..................................................................E-9 Telephone....................................................E-5 Software Performance Report Priorities ........................................................E-4 Technical Support Call Priorities ..............................................E-3 Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support ......................E-3 Routing Your Technical Support Calls ....................................E-9 PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services................................................E-2 OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................E-6 Terminology used by Technical Support.....................E-6 FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE ............................................................................................................................................. D-2 PTC Help Features.............................................................E-2 Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... D-2 PTC HELP MODULES..E-3 Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web..................................................................................................................................................E-2 Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail............................................................................................................................E-7 GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION .................................... E-14 INDEX I-1 For University Use Only ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... D-7 PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT E-1 FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE ........................................................E-5 ONLINE SERVICES.......................USING PTC HELP D-1 PTC HELP OVERVIEW ....................................... D-2 Launching Help: Four Methods...............................E-5 REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT ...................

For University Use Only . Describe the three main Pro/ENGINEER design concepts. Objectives After completing this module. you will be able to: • • Describe how to use Pro/ENGINEER as a solid modeling design tool. Page 1-1 .Commercial Use Prohibited -Module 1 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER In this module you learn about the core Pro/ENGINEER features and concepts.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES PRO/ENGINEER CORE CONCEPTS You use Pro/ENGINEER to create solid models of your designs. Wireframe 3. When you manipulate a solid model. 1. No Hidden Line 2. Solid Shade Figure 1: Solid Model Display For University Use Only . Hidden Lines 4. The three-dimensional work environment enables you to take advantage of: • • • Feature-based modeling Associativity Parametric relationships Solid Modeling Benefits Solid modeling enjoys benefits not obtained in two-dimensional design: • • • Solid models have volumes and surface areas. the model itself remains a solid. You can calculate mass properties directly from the geometry you create.

as well as the order in which to create them. you choose your building blocks. Pro/ENGINEER enables you to build a model incrementally by adding individual features one at a time. The following figure shows how a typical part can be designed by adding one feature after another to a base model. Design intent is the reason for adding every feature.Commercial Use Prohibited Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 1. and the holes are needed for the screws. Base Feature Protrusion Added Blind Cut Added Chamfers Added Thru-All Cuts and Holes Added Chamfer Added Rounds Added Figure 2: Building Models Feature by Feature For University Use Only . For example. A feature is the smallest building block in a part model. As you construct your model.NOTES Designing Feature-based Models The models you create in Pro/ENGINEER are feature-based. Creating models in Pro/ENGINEER involves incorporating your “design intent” into the model. you add hole features to a model because the resulting part must be assembled to another part.3 . This means that the geometry of your part model is composed of one or more features.

NOTES Designing with Parametric Features The designs you create in Pro/ENGINEER can be parametric. Modifications to certain features propagate changes to other features. 5 10 Figure 3: Protrusion and Hole Follow Side of Block For University Use Only . Parent/child relationships can be developed between features.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . which are related dimensions. This means that their dimensions are controlled by parameters. Designated features can be related to each other. Parametric modeling has many advantages: • • • • Modifying dimensions can change model geometry.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1.

and drawings. the change will be reflected in the associated part. For example.5 . All of these objects are fully associative. assemblies. This means that changes made at one level will propagate to all the levels.NOTES Taking Advantage of Associativity Pro/ENGINEER models usually consist of several parts. The following figure shows associativity between a part and an assembly.Commercial Use Prohibited Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 1. 5 Original shaft before length modification Shaft associated to assembly 10 Modification of shaft length Assembly automatically updates Figure 4: Associativity For University Use Only . if you change dimensions on a drawing.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

associative. Describe the parametric. erase. save.Commercial Use Prohibited . Describe how to use the Model Tree and the Menu Manager.Module 2 The Pro/ENGINEER Interface In this module you learn how to use the Pro/ENGINEER interface to enhance your design sessions. and feature-based characteristics of Pro/ENGINEER models. P age 2-1 . you will be able to: • • • • • Describe how to use the Pro/ENGINEER interface. Objectives After completing this module. Retrieve.For University Use Only . Describe the different Pro/ENGINEER file types. and delete files in Pro/ENGINEER.

This window has four main parts: • • Pull-down menu Toolbar • • Display area Message area Accessing Commands with Pull-Down Menus The following Pro/ENGINEER pull-down menu options are available in all the different modes of the software: • • • File – Edit – View – File manipulation commands Object manipulation and action commands Model display commands For University Use Only .2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2.NOTES ELEMENTS OF THE INTERFACE Figure 1 Sample Model Display in Main Window The Base Window When you start Pro/ENGINEER. the base window opens on your desktop. You create your designs in this window.

Toolbar buttons are provided as an alternative to menu commands. When you select the model on the screen. curve. and rounds Model. and models on the screen in the display area. For University Use Only . cuts. Figure 2: Pro/ENGINEER Toolbar Manipulating Your Designs in the Display Area Pro/ENGINEER displays parts. You can customize you toolbar. assemblies.NOTES • • • • • • • Insert – Creates features like protrusions. the system distinguishes between an edge and a surface of the model by highlighting them in two different colors. and sensitivity and optimization commands Analysis – Info – Query and report commands – Launch commands for other Pro/ENGINEER modules Applications Utilities – Window – Help Working environment customization commands Window manipulation commands – Help commands Accessing Frequently-used Commands with the Toolbar The Pro/ENGINEER toolbar contains icons for frequently used commands. holes.3 . drawings. motion. Note: Surfaces of models are valid in Pro/ENGINEER regardless of the model display.Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2. surface. An object’s display depends on the current environment settings.

NOTES Viewing Information in the Message Area The message area: • • • • Displays status information for every operation performed. To view old messages.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . such as warnings or status prompts. Displays queries and hints to simplify the task you are working on. For University Use Only . • • • • PRT – Part files allow you to create 3-D models consisting of many features. WORKING WITH MODELS File Types Every type of Pro/ENGINEER object has a different file extension. DRW – Drawing files contain 2-D fully dimensioned drawings of parts or assemblies.. Typical file extensions are described next. ASM – Assembly files contain information on how 3-D parts and assemblies are assembled together.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2. there is also a SKETCHER mode that allows you to create twodimensional sketches that are parametric. SEC – Sketch files contain 2-D non-associative sketches that can be imported while in sketcher mode. it temporarily disables all other functions until you enter the required data. Note: When Pro/ENGINEER requires data input. Prompts you for additional information (the text message is accompanied by an optional audible signal). Displays icons that represent different kinds of information. you can use the scrollbar located on the right. In addition.

5 .Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2. and saving.NOTES Note: When you create new files and save them you do not have to add the file extensions. Title Tabs Drop-down arrow Check boxes Text box Command buttons Figure 3: Example of a Dialog Box For University Use Only . There are two kinds of dialog boxes: general and model. The system automatically associates the correct file extension to the file that you are saving. Working with Dialog Boxes Dialog boxes in Pro/ENGINEER are used for model manipulation. feature creation. The General Dialog Box A general dialog box performs general software environment functions such as setting display options for the model. The following figure represents some of the common elements in a regular dialog box.

manipulate. – Generates a listing of the properties of the feature that you are creating. Preview Retrieving Models When you retrieve files into a working session by clicking File > Open . Figure 4: A Model Dialog Box The option buttons in a model dialog box are: • • • • • • Define Refs – Defines and/or changes selected elements in the dialog box. Optional elements are additional operations that you may perform.NOTES The Model Dialog Box A model dialog box creates and modifies model geometry by prompting you for required and optional elements from the user. and modify model geometry. – Checks geometry before completing the feature definition. OK Cancel – Cancels the current feature or model entity. For University Use Only . Info – Completes the definition of the elements. creating the feature or model entity.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . The following figure illustrates a model dialog box that defines a ROUND feature. Pro/ENGINEER also opens up a model tree window and a menu manager that allow you to create. – Displays the external references of the current selected element. but they are not necessary for completing the feature. Required elements are modifiable properties of a Pro/ENGINEER feature that must be specified to completely define a feature.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2.

MODEL TREE icons indicate the corresponding item type and its current status.7 . You can select features from the MODEL TREE for modification and deletion.NOTES Using the Model Tree The MODEL TREE presents the model structure feature by feature. Figure 5: Model Tree with Added Parameters For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2.

Pro/ENGINEER automatically opens a new main window each time you open another model. you can right-click [ from the pop-up menu. For University Use Only . Using the MENU MANAGER. you must click Window > Activate .8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . If you need Help additional help. Working with Multiple Sub-Windows If the main window currently contains a model. you drive along a certain path to complete a task by making choices from menus. Each time you choose an option from a submenu. Retrieving Multiple Models You can have multiple models in session at one time—each window containing a model—making it possible to refer to one model while working on another. an on-line help message displays on the bottom of the current active window. ] the menu option and select G e t Note: The system administrator must install and setup the online documentation for you to be able to access this functionality. Note: To activate a window.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2.NOTES Using the Menu Manager The MENU MANAGER displays a list of menus that you can use to create. Obtaining Additional Information with Help When you hold your mouse over any menu option. The new main window contains the same toolbars and message area as the first main window. Pro/ENGINEER opens another submenu until you have finished making selections. However. modify. and duplicate model geometry. Pro/ENGINEER only allows you to work on one active window at a time.

NOTES Figure 6: A New Window over the Main Window Saving Changes As you work on your design. you must specify the version number in the retrieval name. The File > Save option creates a new version of the file with an incremental version number. is a good practice to save your file often.Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2. To retrieve an old version. For University Use Only . The All Versions option in the FILE OPEN dialog box displays the version numbers of a file.9 .

The model still occupies RAM space on the computer. you use the Window > Close or the File > Close Window options. For University Use Only .NOTES Figure 7: Opening a Version of a Model Closing Windows To close a window. The Delete > All Versions option deletes all versions of the model from the system memory. you erase it from memory with the F i l e > Erase > Current option. as well as from the hard drive. You can erase all models that are in session but not displayed in the active windows with the Erase > Not Displayed option. Deleting Files The File > Delete option removes old versions of a model.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . If the model is no longer required. However.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2. this does not remove the model from the current session of Pro/ENGINEER.

you learn the Pro/ENGINEER environment. In Exercise 3.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you will get first-hand experience to see how Pro/ENGINEER is a parametric. associative. you how to investigate the associativity between an assembly component and an incomplete drawing. Method In Exercise 1. and feature-based solid modeler. Tools Table 1: Pro/ENGINEER Toolbar Icons Icons Description Datum planes on/off Shading Wireframe display Hidden line display Zoom in Zoom out Refit Orient view Saved view list File save For University Use Only . In Exercise 2: you learn how to manipulate the size and orientation of the model. you learn how to interrogate the MODEL TREE.1 1 .Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2. In Exercise 4.

7. For University Use Only .1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click O p e n to open MASTER. Click [No hidden line] icon to see the graphical preview of the assembly. Figure 8: The Master Assembly Task 2. 5. 2. 6. 3. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2. 4. Click [File open]. In the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Manipulate the display of the assembly. 1. Only the assembly files become visible. clear the Datum Planes and Datum Axes check boxes. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 02_interface. Click File > Set Working Directory . select Assembly for the TYPE dropdown list. Select MASTER. This will show a preview of the model before opening it.ASM.ASM and click Preview >>> . Click Utilities > Environment . 2. Open the master assembly.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Using the Pro/ENGINEER Environment Task 1. In the FILE OPEN dialog box.

2. Click the Datum Plane icon in the toolbar on top of the screen. The datum planes reappear. Toggle the display of datum planes. 4. Figure 9: Hidden Line Display of Assembly Task 4. Change the orientation of the assembly. 5. Do not close the dialog box. Click Apply. Select H i d d e n Line from the DISPLAY STYLE drop-down list. Change the orientation back to Trimetric. Datum planes on/off Datum coordinate system on/off Datum axes on/off Datum points on/off Figure 10: Datum Display Section of Toolbar For University Use Only .NOTES 3. Click Apply. Task 3. Use the toolbar to manipulate the model. Click OK to close the dialog box.Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2.1 3 . 4. 1. 3. Select Isometric from the DEFAULT ORIENT drop-down list. Click Apply. 1.

Click [Wireframe display] to revert back to the hidden line display mode. 6. Click [On/Off ] to turn off the datum planes. Note: Wireframe remains selected on the toolbar because the model is only cosmetically shaded and is not switched to a shaded display mode.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2. 5. Click View > Shade to cosmetically shade the model. Click View > Repaint . 3.NOTES 2. Shade the model. Click Wireframe display No Hidden Line display Hidden Line display Shading display Figure 11: Changing the Model Display 4. [Shading] on the toolbar. For University Use Only .

2. 3. Orient the model so that the bracket faces front. Refit Zoom In Orient the model Repaint Zoom Out Saved Views Figure 12: Model Orientation Options 2.Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2. Task 2. The model zooms in. Click [Orient view].NOTES EXERCISE 2: Manipulating Model Size and Orientation Task 1. 1. The ORIENTATION dialog box opens with the Orient by Reference already selected as shown in the following figure. Select a location in the model.1 5 . Change the size and orientation of the model using the toolbar. Click [Zoom in]. For University Use Only . 1. Click [Zoom out]. Then select a second location to create a zoom box. [Refit] to resize the model. Click 4.

Select this surface as the top for Reference 2. and Reference 2 refers to what orients that parallel reference.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2.NOTES Figure 13: Orientation Dialog Box 3. Reference 1 refers to what is parallel to the screen. Select this surface to face front for Reference 1. 4.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . In OPTIONS. Figure 14: Surface Selection for Orientation For University Use Only . Leave the default Front in the REFERENCE 1 drop-down list and select the front surface of the bracket part as shown in the following figure.

Click Save to save the new orientation. 1. Figure 15: Model after Orientation 6. Toggle between the DEFAULT and the saved SIDE views from the saved view list to observe the model in two different orientations. Select the other surface of the bracket part as Reference 2. Click . The left mouse button zooms the model. Tips & Techniques: You can also manipulate the model orientation by using the mouse buttons and <CTRL> key.1 7 . 8.Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2. Type [SIDE] in the NAME text box. Change the model back to the default orientation. For University Use Only . Click OK in the ORIENTATION dialog box. and the right pans it. [Saved views list]. the middle spins it. Select the SAVED VIEWS bar towards the bottom of the dialog box. The model changes its orientation as shown in the following figure.NOTES 5. 7. Task 3.

In the model tree. Open MASTER_SHAFT. In the ASSEMBLY menu. Click > Default to see model in default view. The shaft moves to its new location. Select the 76 dimension that appears.PRT.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click Modify in MENU MANAGER. The gear and crank parts follow the shaft. 4. right-click on the MASTER_SHAFT. Task 2. In the PRT TO REGEN menu. click View > Model Tree to view the model tree on the left. This proves the parametric nature of the assembly. type [90] and press <ENTER>. 2. Test the associativity by modifying length of the shaft part. Task 3. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2. Click Done in the MODIFY menu of the MENU MANAGER. click Regenerate . Click Done/Return in the ASSEM MOD menu. 1. 3. 1. Click File > Open. If the MODEL TREE is not active.NOTES EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Model Tree Task 1. Select the shaft as shown in the following figure. In the message area. Modify dimensions of model using the MODEL TREE. 6. 2. click Automatic. For University Use Only . 4. Regenerate the assembly. Modify the offset value of the master shaft part. 1.PRT. 3. 5. 3. and select Modify from the pop-up menu.

NOTES

Select the shaft.

Select this dimension to modify.

Figure 16: Modifying the Shaft

5. Select the 152 dimension. 6. Type [250] and press <ENTER>. 7. Click Regenerate in the PART menu. 8. Save the shaft model. Click [Save].

9. Accept the default name of MASTER_SHAFT.PRT. Task 4. Check for associativity between the shaft and the assembly.

1. Close the SHAFT window. Click Window > Close . 2. Make the ASSEMBLY window active. Click Window > Activate . 3. Regenerate the assembly. From the MENU MANAGER, click Regenerate > Automatic. 4. The regenerated assembly appears with modified shaft dimensions, as shown in the following figure.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2- 1 9

NOTES

Figure 17: Assembly after Modification and Regeneration

5. A modification made to a part automatically modifies the whole assembly. This proves the associativity of Pro/ENGINEER.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2- 2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise
Task 1. Investigate the associativity between an assembly component and an incomplete drawing. 1. Open the drawing DRAW_CRANK2. DRW. 2. Turn on the datum planes if they are not on, then repaint the screen. 3. Click Edit > Value . 4. Select the 60.50 dimension. 5. Type [90.5] as the new dimension.

Modify this dimension

Figure 18: Crank2 Drawing

6. Click Regenerate from the DRAWING menu. 7. Click Model from the REGENERATE menu. 8. Save the drawing model. Click File > Save and press <ENTER>.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2- 2 1

NOTES

9. Click File > Close Window . 10. Click Windows > Activate . This activates the assembly window. Notice that the crank is updated in the assembly. This shows the associativity between the part drawing and the assembly. Task 2. Check for interference between the solid models of the assembly. 1. Click Analysis > Model Analysis. The MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 19: Analyzing Global Interference 2. The default type is set to Assembly Mass Properties. Select Global Interference from the TYPE drop-down list.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2- 2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

3. Accept defaults and click Compute . 4. In the RESULTS window, the system indicates that two parts are interfering. Use the arrow to toggle between the interfering part models. This also highlights the volume of interference on the screen. 5. Close the dialog box. 6. Click name. Task 3. to save the ASSEMBLY model. Accept the default

Determine the results of closing the master assembly window.

1. Click Window > Close . Notice the BASE Pro/ENGINEER window cannot be removed as indicated in the message area. 2. Open CRANK2.PRT, which is still in the memory. In the FILE
OPEN dialog box, click

[In Session].

Figure 20: Using the IN SESSION Option

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2- 2 3

NOTES

3. Select CRANK2. PRT. Click O p e n. The system retrieves this model from the system memory, not from the computer hard drive. Task 4. Remove the master assembly models that are not displayed in a window from the session memory. 1. Erase the models that are not displayed. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. 2. A dialog box appears with all the selected models that are in session highlighted. Click OK to complete the operation. Task 5. Retrieve “in-session” models again to determine which ones remain in session. 1. Click . Click . Note that only CRANK2.PRT is listed.

2. Click Cancel . Task 6. Erase the crank model from system memory to conserve RAM.

1. Erase the current file. Click File > Erase > Current . Confirm the operation.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2- 2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you have learned that: • • • • Pull-down menus, toolbars, the display area, and the message area are the four important elements of the Pro/ENGINEER user interface. Models can be oriented and displayed on the screen in various ways. Pro/ENGINEER models such as parts, assemblies, and drawings exhibit feature-based, parametric, and associative characteristics. Pro/ENGINEER automatically opens a new main window each time you open an additional model, so that you can work with multiple windows. Erasing models that are not in use will free up the system memory.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2- 2 5

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Module
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

3

Pick-and-Place Features
Certain Pro/ENGINEER features need not be built with great effort. They are freely provided and can simply be utilized whenever needed. These features are called Pick-and-Place features.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • Identify and define the different types of Pick-and-Place features. Create, delete, and modify the three Pick-and-Place features. Navigate among the various options of the HOLE dialog box to capture the intent of the hole element in the lab practical.

Page 3-1

NOTES

DEFINING PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES
The Pick-and-Place features discussed in this module are: • • • • Shell Edge chamfer Edge round Hole

Generic Method of Creation
To create any of these Pick-and-Place features, you specify the appropriate placement references on your model and provide the required dimensions. Pro/ENGINEER places the feature on that location.

Note:
Pick-and-Place features behave parametrically with respect to their placement references. That is, if the placement reference moves, the feature also moves.

Choosing Hidden References Using Query Select
When you click Query Select and then select on a surface, a dialog box appears with various reference options.

Shell Features
The Shell option removes a surface or surfaces from a solid and hollows out the inside of the solid, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness.

Figure 1: The Shell Feature

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3- 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

When Pro/ENGINEER makes a shell, all the features that were added to the solid before you chose the Shell option are hollowed out. Therefore, the order of feature creation is very important when considering the shell feature.

Creating Edge Chamfers
An edge chamfer feature removes a flat section of material from a selected edge or edges to create a beveled surface between the two original surfaces common to the edges. The Pro/ENGINEER dimensioning schemes for edge chamfers are shown in the following figure.

Figure 2: Edge Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

Note:
When selecting circular edges for chamfers, Pro/ENGINEER only highlights one half of the edge. Since the system places the chamfer on the entire circular edge, you do not have to select the other half of the edge.

Creating Simple Rounds
Round features create a rounded smooth transition between two adjacent surfaces. An edge round smoothes the hard edges between adjacent surfaces.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3- 3

Full Round Figure 4: Full Round Note: Do not dimension other features to the edges or tangent edges of round features.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Simple rounds employ the default round shape and transitions. Figure 3: Constant and Variable Radius Rounds • Full Round – Creates a round that completely removes a model surface. – Specifies radii at every selected edge at the endpoints and. at intermediate vertices along the edge being rounded. For University Use Only . optionally. Advanced rounds employ user-defined round shapes and transitions.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. Radius Options for Simple Edge Chain Rounds • • Constant Variable – Assigns the same radius value to every selected edge. Round features make unstable parents.NOTES Pro/ENGINEER offers two types of rounds: simple and advanced.

or edge end through which the radius of the round should pass. vertex. Round created tangent Original model Figure 6: Using the Select On Surf Option For University Use Only . Select On Surf – Specifies a datum point.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3.NOTES Tip: You should create round features on your model as late in the design process as possible.5 . Use the <ESC> key to select other radius type options. Figure 5: Cut Feature Dimensioned to the Edge Round Specifying Radius Values for Simple Rounds • • • • – (default) Specifies a new radius value that does not appear in the menu. curve. Select on this surface. Thru Pnt/Vtx Default Values – Specifies a radius value as the system default value or a previously entered radius value in the SEL VALUE menu. Enter – Specifies a point on the adjacent surface that determines the radius value.

Dimensions the center of the hole from two surfaces or edges using linear dimensions. Placement Options To place a hole on your model. Creating the Straight Hole Feature Pro/ENGINEER creates all straight holes with a constant diameter. The hole feature always removes material from your model.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. Linear For University Use Only .NOTES Select this vertex. Original Model Figure 7: Using the Thru Pnt/Vtx Option Hole Features There are three types of Holes: • • • Straight Holes Standard Holes Sketched Holes This module primarily deals with the Straight Hole feature and its many options. • – Places the hole on a plane.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you can choose from the following options in the PLACEMENT menu.

or cone. radius. Does not create placement dimensions. Radial holes placed on a plane have a diameter.NOTES Figure 8: Linear Hole • – Places the hole with respect to an axis using polar dimensions on a plane. Coaxial Figure 10: Coaxial Hole For University Use Only . cylinder. or linear dimensioning scheme. Radial Figure 9: Radial Holes on a Plane • – Places the hole co-axially using an existing axis.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. but creates only a diameter dimension for the hole itself.7 .

For University Use Only . On Point Figure 11: On Point Hole Depth Options You can also create the hole from either side of the placement plane or from both sides using the Depth One and Depth Two options in the HOLE dialog box. Figure 12: Side Options The system determines how deep to create the hole based on your depth specification.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . The axis of the hole is normal to the placement surface. The following figure illustrates the various depth options listed in the HOLE dialog box.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3.NOTES • – Places the center of the hole directly on an on surface datum point.

Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3.9 .NOTES Thru All Variable To Reference Thru Next Thru Until Figure 13: Hole Depth Options For University Use Only .

Method In Exercise 1. Tools Table 1: Icons for Pick-and-Place Features Icons Description Shading Hidden line display Repeat feature Select geometric entities For University Use Only . you add chamfers and rounds to a model. you create a straight radial hole placed on a planar surface. In Exercise 2. In Exercise 4. In Exercise 3. you explore the straight hole feature and its many options.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you will learn how to create and implement the important Pick-and-Place features.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. you add a shell feature and a simple tangent chain round feature to a base model by using the automatic round creation functionality.

Select the front surface of the part as shown in the following figure. Click Insert > Shell .Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. 2. 3. Retrieve the AUTOMATIC. After the surface has been selected.1 1 . 5. Select the front surface Figure 15: Selecting the Shell Reference 6. 4. Create a shell feature.PRT from the working directory.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Shell and Automatic Round Features Figure 14: The Start Model Task 1. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 03_pick_place. For University Use Only . 1. Click File > Set Working Directory . click Done Sel > Done Refs.

Click [Select geometry] and select the outer arc-shaped edge as pointed out in the following figure. 2. Click > Round Edges from the pop-up menu. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the screen to complete the round creation. Figure 16: Completed Shell Task 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. Add an automatic round feature using the right mouse button.25] as the shell thickness and press <ENTER>. 1.NOTES 7. Click on the green icons on the round feature and drag it dynamically to modify the size of the round. 4. Select the outer arc-shaped edge Figure 17: Selecting the Round Edges 3. Click OK from the SHELL dialog box to complete the shell feature. 8. Enter [0. For University Use Only . Notice that the system automatically selected the edges that were tangent to the arc-shaped edge to create the simple round feature.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

Erase all objects from memory. Figure 18: Completed Round 5.1 3 . 6. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Accept the default name and press <ENTER> to save the model.NOTES Tangent edges were selected automatically as round references. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. Click OK . 7. Click File > Save . Click File > Close Window to close the current working window.

Retrieve the CHAMFERS. 1.0] as the value for the chamfer dimension. Select the two circular edges on either end of the cylindrical protrusion as shown in the following figure.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Creating Chamfers and Rounds Figure 19: The Start Model Task 1. 5. 2. For University Use Only . Adding the 45 x d edge chamfer to a cylinder. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer.PRT from the working directory. 4.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. 3. Type [1. Click 45 x d from the SCHEME menu. Selecting the edges highlights them in blue.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

For University Use Only .1 5 . 7. Click OK to complete the chamfer. Click Done Sel > Done Refs.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. The completed chamfer is shown in the following figure. Figure 21: The Edge Chamfer Dialog Box 8.NOTES Select these two circular edges Figure 20: Selecting the Circular Edges 6.

3. Switch to a H i d d e n Line view by clicking Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.NOTES Figure 22: Completed Chamfer Task 2. Figure 23: Selecting the Bottom Surface 5. Select d1 x d2 from the SCHEME menu. [Hidden line] in the 4. Click Query Sel . Click Query Sel . Select the front edge and right side edge as edge references. Select the hidden bottom surface. 2. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer. then select the two hidden bottom edges.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only . then select the hidden bottom surface as the reference surface for the d1 dimension. Add the d1 X d2 chamfer to the four edges at the bottom of the 1. Type [1] as the value for d1 and [2] as the value for the d2 dimension. model. 6.

Click OK to complete the chamfer. Click Done Sel > Done Refs.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. Select front and right side edges Figure 24: Selecting the Hidden Edges 7. 8.1 7 . Figure 25: Completed Chamfer For University Use Only . Click [Shading] to see the shaded model. Select these two hidden bottom edges. 9.NOTES Note: Make sure to click Accept from the query bin after picking each edge when using Query Sel.

Select the three visible vertical edges of the base and the invisible edge as shown in the following figure. Create a simple round with a variable radius value.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. Figure 26: Simple Edge Round with Variable Radius 1. Click Insert >Round > Simple > Done . Click One By One in the CHAIN menu to define the single edge references one by one. Switch to the hidden line display by clicking [Hidden line] 4. 3. 2.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Task 3. For University Use Only . Click Variable > Edge Chain > Done . 5.

To select the hidden vertical edge. 1. 3.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. Task 4. For University Use Only . 2. click Query Sel and click Accept in the Query bin. Click Done once again.NOTES Select the fourth (hidden) edge here. Click [Shading]. keeping track of the vertices that Pro/ENGINEER highlights. 8. The system highlights eight vertices. The system now highlights eight vertices. Define radius values for the variable edge round. 9. type [2] as a value for the bottom of the edge. type [0] as a value for the top of the edge.1 9 . As the system highlights each end of every edge in green. Repeat for all four edges. 7. Click OK to complete the round feature. Click Done in the CHAIN menu. Select these three edges Figure 27: Selecting the Variable Round References 6.

Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click File > Close Window .2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. For University Use Only .NOTES Figure 28: Completed Round 4. Click OK . 5.

Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. Click Insert > Hole . shown in the following figure.PRT.NOTES EXERCISE 3: Exploring the Straight Hole Feature Four cooling fins Base feature 270-degree flange Fluid pipe Figure 29: The Start Model Task 1. Open STRAIGHT_HOLES.2 1 . For University Use Only . Create a linear placed hole with a variable depth of 30 on the top of the base feature of the model shown in the preceding figure. 2. 1. Change display to Hidden Line from the toolbar. The HOLE dialog box appears.

Leave the depth one default as Variable and depth two as None . For University Use Only . The Primary Reference defines hole location. Leave the default hole type as Straight . 6. Press <ENTER>.5] as the diameter value . Type [7.2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 7.NOTES Figure 30: Hole Dialog Box 3. 4. Click the top surface of the base feature as the placement plane as shown in the following figure. 5. Type [30] as the depth value .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. Press <ENTER>.

Type [10] as the distance for this reference. Click . 10.NOTES First dimension reference (hidden side surface) Placement plane for Primary Reference Second dimension reference Figure 31: Creating a Linear Placed Hole 8. click Query Sel to select the hidden side of the base feature.2 3 . For the first linear reference. Press <ENTER>.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. Type [15] for the distance from this reference. For the second linear reference again click Query Sel once again and select the visible front surface. Press <ENTER>. Figure 32: The First Completed Hole For University Use Only . 9.

Type [10] as the distance for this reference. 10. Then press <ENTER>. as shown in the following figure. click Query Sel and select the side surface (not the edge) of the top cooling fin. If selecting the side surface of the fin is difficult zoom in the model. 3. Type [12. 2. 1. Click Thru All as the DEPTH ONE option and None as DEPTH TWO.5] for the hole diameter.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. click Query Sel and then select the hidden back surface of the base feature. Add a linear hole that runs through the cooling fins. 8. 5. 9. For the second reference. For the first linear reference. Then press <ENTER>. 4. For University Use Only . Click Insert> Hole . Type [10] for the distance for the second reference.2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . First dimension reference (hidden back surface) Second dimension reference (visible thin surface of fin) Placement plane Figure 33: Creating the Second Straight Hole Feature 6. leave the default hole type as Straight . 7. Press <ENTER>. You may preview the hole feature but do not close the HOLE dialog box.NOTES Task 2. In the HOLE dialog box. Select the top surface of the first cooling fin near the right back corner as the placement plane.

2. Press <ENTER>. then select the bottom surface of the third fin. You may use the repeat button in the HOLE dialog box. By this. 3.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3.NOTES Note: You will be creating another hole feature. you are specifying that the hole has to end at the bottom surface of the third fin. leave the default Straight hole type. 1. For University Use Only . Click Query Sel . Type [12.5] as the diameter.2 5 . In the HOLE dialog box. Figure 34: The Second Hole Placed Task 3. Use the TO REFERENCE depth option to create another linear hole through the top three fins. Click To Reference in the Depth One option dropdown menu.

select the visible side surface of the cooling fin. 7. For University Use Only . Press <ENTER>.2 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For the Primary Reference. Select this surface as the placement plane Second dimensional reference First dimensional reference Figure 36: Creating the Third Hole 5. Type [10] for the distance. Complete hole feature.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3. select the front part of the base feature and type [10] for the distance. For the second Linear Reference. For the first Linear Reference.NOTES Select the hidden underside surface Figure 35: The To Reference Hole 4. 6. select the top surface of the first fin as shown in the following figure.

6. Make Depth One to be a To Reference . Click Query Sel and select the visible front surface of the base feature as shown in the preceding figure.NOTES Task 4. Create a coaxial hole to the cylindrical feature. Select the front surface of the cylindrical protrusion as the primary reference. Click Insert > Hole 2. Select Coaxial from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. Axis line (A_3) Depth surface to extrude up to Select here for the placement pl ne Figure 37: Creating a Coaxial Straight Hole 4. In the HOLE dialog box. Type [5] as a value for the hole diameter. Click to complete the coaxial hole feature. 1. Select the A_3 axis of the cylindrical protrusion as the axial reference. For University Use Only . turn it on by clicking [Datum axes on/off]. If you cannot see the axis. 3. 5.2 7 . leave the default hole type as Straight . 7. 8.

NOTES Figure 38: The Completed Co-Axial Hole Feature For University Use Only .2 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 3.

For University Use Only . Create a straight radial hole placed on a planar surface. Diameter = 15mm Depth One = To Reference Depth Two = None Depth Reference = Invisible surface of the circular flange as shown in the next figure.2 9 . 2. Set the hole placement.NOTES EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise Task 1. Set the hole specifications.Commercial Use Prohibited Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3. Figure 39: The Completed Model 1. Primary Reference = Visible front surface of the circular flange Placement Type = Radial Axial Reference = A_3 of the fluid pipe Distance = 25 mm Angular Reference = Front face of the flange near the angled cut.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

and how to take advantage of the Intent Manager to improve your designs. Constrain sketched entities. P a ge 4-1 . Modify section sketches. You also learn how to use Pro/ENGINEER in Sketcher mode. Create various types of geometry.Module 4 Sketcher Basics In this module you learn how to sketch and define complex parts. you will be able to: • • • • Start a design in Sketcher. Objectives After completing this module.For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited .

2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . A message area below the toolbars. An INTENT MANAGER with fly-out icons on the right to perform frequently used actions. An additional Sketcher toolbar with Sketcher-specific options.NOTES THE SKETCHER INTERFACE The Sketcher interface consists of: • • • • • • A menu bar with pull-down menus that include Sketcher-specific menus EDIT and SKETCH. An additional Sketcher-specific message area at the bottom left of the window describing INTENT MANAGER’s fly-out icons.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. A standard Pro/ENGINEER toolbar. Figure 1: Sketcher Interface For University Use Only .

deleting. These menus offer short-cuts for sketching. It includes fly-out icons which are logically grouped together based on capability. These icons provide access to the most frequently used sketching tools. The Intent Manager The INTENT MANAGER appears automatically on the right side of the screen when you enter the Sketcher mode.NOTES Selecting Sketched Entities Using the mouse. you can select individual or multiple-specific sketched entities. Selected entities highlight in red. modifying.3 . Default cursor to pick entities Icons to create different kinds of geometry To create dimensions To modify dimensions To impose constraints To trim Entities Figure 2: INTENT MANAGER Flyout Icons Accessing Commands with Pop-Up Menus You access Pop-up menus by right-clicking in the SKETCHER display area. dimensioning. For University Use Only . or all entities that fall within a swept box. and undoing steps.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4.

4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . They contain all the commands needed in the sketching environment.NOTES Figure 3: A Typical Sketcher Pop-Up Menu THE SKETCHER MODE Accessing Commands with Sketcher Menus EDIT and SKETCH are top-level menus specific to the SKETCHER mode.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. For University Use Only . Figure 4: Edit Menu The INTENT MANAGER commands and the T e x t option are also available in the SKETCH menu.

For University Use Only . Provide references to place a section. It is good practice to reference before sketching.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4.NOTES Figure 5: Sketch Menu Specifying References In the SKETCHER mode you specify the references of the section when you: • • • Create a new feature.5 . Redefine a feature with missing or insufficient references. Note: The references that you select for a section create Parent/Child relationships. This provides the sketched entities a location to automatically align to and dimension from.

you can create three types of circles: A circle by selecting the center and a point on the circle.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4.NOTES Creating Geometry SKETCHER mode enables the creation of geometrical shapes and entities. A conic arc. and circles—are discussed below. you create four types of arcs: Arcs An arc by 3 points or tangent to an entity at its endpoint. Figure 6: Lines Fly-Out Icons • – Using the Arcs fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER. A concentric arc. • Lines – Using the Line fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER. you create two types of sketched lines: Straight lines from point to point.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Figure 7: Arcs Fly-Out Icons • Circles – Using the Circle fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER. A concentric circle. An arc by selecting its center and endpoints. Figure 8: Circle Fly-Out Icons For University Use Only . A full ellipse. arcs. Centerlines for referencing or constraining entities. The basic ones—lines.

An orderly arrangement of dimensions helps visual clarity. Figure 10: Creating Dimensions for a Rectangle For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4.7 . you dimension it. particularly when the sketch gets complex. You can place a dimension at any point during or after sketching. The following figure illustrates the simple dimensioning of a rectangle. you left-click to select the entity and middle-click to place the dimension.NOTES Sketched circle Concentric to this edge Figure 9: Sketching a Concentric Circle to an Edge Dimensioning Sketches Once a sketch is complete. To place dimensions in SKETCHER.

You also have the options to Regenerate and Lock Scale the sketch.NOTES Figure 11: Grabbing and Moving Dimensions Modifying Dimensions You can modify the dimensions values of a sketch in the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. You can also double-click on a specific dimension in a sketch to dynamically change the value of the dimension. The SENSITIVITY scrollbar allows you to adjust the sensitivity of the control wheels when changing dimensions dynamically. Figure 12: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box For University Use Only .

Creates same points or points on entities. Make two points or vertices symmetrical about a centerline.9 . or same curvature constraint. 5. Create equal lengths. 8. Make a line or two vertices horizontal. 9. Make two entities perpendicular. Make two lines parallel. 6. 4. Make two entities tangent. equal radii. 2. Figure 13: Sketcher Constraints Dialog Box You can use the constraint options to: 1.NOTES Adding Constraints Sketcher applies system default constraints to a sketch to establish the initial design intent.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. You can override the default constraints from the CONSTRAINTS dialog box. Place a point on the middle of the line. 7. Other Sketcher Tools Edge The Edge tool has two instances represented by its two fly-out icons in the Intent Manager. Make a line or two vertices vertical. as shown below: For University Use Only . 3.

making legacy data easier to manipulate. Use Edge Figure 15: Using Existing Model Edge to Create Sketched Entities • – Uses existing model edge to create sketched entities at an offset distance. Automatically selects the edge as a specified reference. You can move and scale a section. Copy The Edit > Copy option copies 2-D drafts and imports entities from a drawing. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Figure 14 Edge Fly-Out Icons • – Uses an existing model edge to create sketched entities. Offset Edge Figure 16: Creating Sketched Entities at an Offset Distance Note: The Use Edge and Offset Edge options create parent/child relationships with the referenced feature.

1 1 . replacing the original with two new entities.NOTES Mirror You can mirror sketched entities from one side of a centerline to the other using the Edit > Mirror option. Dimensioning references.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. Trim The Edit > Trim option shortens or extends an entity in three different ways corresponding to the three fly-out icons shown below: Figure 17: Trim Fly-Out Icons • • • The first dynamically trims section entities The second cuts or extends entities to other entities or geometry. Section Analysis The Analysis > Section Analysis option provides you with information about: • • • Intersection and tangency points. Drag Many Rotate90 – Rotates sketched entities about a specified point by multiples of 90 degrees. For University Use Only . Angles and distances. – Translates selected entities within a sketch. Dimension – Repositions a dimension within a sketch. Move The MOVE ENTITY menu displays the following options: • • • • Drag Item – Moves an entity or its vertex to a new location. Replace Replaces a sketched entity from the original section with a newly sketched entity. The third divides an entity at the point of selection.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. Sketcher Points Sketcher points force coincidence among sketched entities and allow slanted dimensions between sketched entity end-points. Figure 18: Midpoint Definition Using Sketcher Point Figure 19 Defining Theoretical Sharps Using Sketcher Points For University Use Only .NOTES • Entity curvature display.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

the Sketcher starts in a 3-D orientation. grid spacing. Figure 20 Sketcher Preferences Dialog Box Use the SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box to: • • • • Modify the display options of various sketcher entities. When you do not select this option. Set grid. Click the Default button to reset the preferences. You can change the view orientation at any time and sketch in For University Use Only . Set constraints preferences by enabling or disabling constraints assumed by Sketcher.1 3 . with the sketching plane parallel to the computer screen). Sketcher starts in a 2-D orientation (that is. and accuracy parameters. Sketching in 3-Dimensions (3-D) When you select the Use2D Sketcher option from the ENVIRONMENT dialog box.NOTES Setting Sketcher Preferences The SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box in the UTILITIES menu modifies the Sketcher environment.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4.

1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you can re-orient a Sketcher section into the 2-D view while in Sketcher mode. Using View > Sketch View .NOTES 3-D.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. Figure 21: The Environment Dialog Box TAKING ADVANTAGE OF SKETCHER MODE Your work sessions will be more productive if you apply the following rules when working with Sketcher: For University Use Only .

as is required with some solid modeling packages. There is no need to sketch sections that extend outside the part. When sketching an open section. Align sketched entities. To prevent Sketcher from making constraints. Use open and closed sections appropriately. 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. Align centers horizontally and vertically. This is extremely useful when sketching features incrementally. Use the grid.1 5 . This rule is particularly helpful when the sketched entities are small. 2. Create lines equal. Do not sketch to scale. you can increase Sketcher accuracy by changing it from 1. Concentrate on getting your geometry straight by sketching large.0 e-9 through 1. This makes the final model flexible and helps regeneration. you should use a closed one since it is easier to regenerate. 6.0 to a lower number. or perpendicular. Resolve the sketch by modifying dimensions. When in doubt over whether you should use an open or closed section. Keep sketches simple. The range for the accuracy is 1. and is less prone to failure. 3. If you use an open section. 4.NOTES 1. you must explicitly align its open ends to the part.0 (default). you cannot have more than one open section per feature. parallel. For University Use Only . Do not extend the sketch outside of the part. 7. Make effective use of Sketcher's accuracy. Use the Undo option The Undo option restores a sketched section to its prior state.

NOTES Protrusion A Protrusion B Cut Figure 22: Open and Closed Sections For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

In Exercise 2.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you practice the basic sketching procedures such as entering sketcher mode. applying constraints. you practice basic sketching procedures. Tools Table 1: Sketcher Basic Tools Icons Description Impose sketcher constraints Perpendicular constraint Tangent arc Create circle Create rectangle Create dimension Dynamic trim Modify dimension For University Use Only .1 7 . you create a hex section using construction entities. creating arcs. Method In Exercise 1. and generating solid models. dimensioning.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. creating straight lines. In Exercise 3. you create a snap ring by sketching in steps.

1. Click [Sketch line] and place by clicking to end line creation. select Sketch . 1. [File new] in the toolbar. Sketch four lines with a horizontal bottom line. Click 2. 4. Click 2. . Create a new sketch named ROUND_RECTANGLE. Sketcher mode activates. Task 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. In the NEW dialog box.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Type [ROUND_RECTANGLE ] for the name and click OK .NOTES EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics Figure 23 Completed Sketch after Exercise 1 Task 1. as shown in the following figure. 3. For University Use Only .

then select two lines to make them perpendicular.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4.1 9 . Click [Impose sketcher constraints]. For University Use Only . as shown in the following figure. 1. Figure 25: Perpendicular Constraint on One Side 2.NOTES Figure 24: Sketching a Quadrilateral Task 3. then click [Perpendicular constraint]. Select the other two lines to make them perpendicular. Apply the constraint to make the lines perpendicular.

2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Delete the two vertical lines. and select the left vertical line. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu. [Tangent arc ]. Select the end point to be the bottom left end point. 3. 1. Task 4. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. Task 5. as shown in the following figure. 3. Close the CONSTRAINTS dialog box. 1. Sketch a tangent end arc on the left side of the section.NOTES Figure 26: Perpendicular Constraint on the Other Side 3. Press and hold <SHIFT> and select the right vertical line. 2. Click the P o i n t e r icon. Select and drag the top left vertex out of the left quadrant of the circle to get a tangent end arc. Click 2.

Figure 28 Sketching Tangent End Arcs on Both Sides Task 7. For University Use Only . Click 2.NOTES Figure 27 Sketching a Tangent End Arc Task 6. 1. 3. then middle-click to place the dimension. Repeat the process on the right side of the section.2 1 . Add the proper dimensions. Select Tangent > Accept and Horizontal > Accept for type and orientation. Select each arc. [Create dimension].Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4.

For University Use Only . Modify the diameter to [2 ] and the linear dim to [4]. Click Press and hold <SHIFT> and click 2.NOTES Figure 29 Dimensioning the Arcs Task 8. Create a diameter dimension on the left arc. 1. 1.2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . and then to place it. and select the horizontal and the diameter dimensions. Select twice the left arc. [Modify dimension]. Figure 30 Dimensioning the Left Arc Task 9. Modify both dimensions.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4.

2 3 .NOTES Figure 31: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box 3.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. Figure 32: Sketch with Modified Dimensions For University Use Only . 4. Save and close the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box. Click to complete the feature.

Click 2.2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. Task 2. as shown in the following figure. Create two offset circles aligned horizontally. Click [Create circle] and draw two circles. 1.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps Figure 33 Completed Snap Ring after Exercise 2 Task 1. 3. 1. Select Sketch . Create a new sketch called SNAP_RING. For University Use Only . Type [SNAP_RING] as the name of the sketch.

Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. For University Use Only . Create a rectangle that snaps to the inside circle on both upper vertices. Click [Dynamic trim]. as shown in the following figure.2 5 . Then use the dynamic trim to create intersections. and then click again to end the sketch. Click in the Sketcher to start the sketch. 2. Click [Create rectangle]. 1. Drag from below the bottom horizontal line and to above the top horizontal line.NOTES Figure 34 Two Offset Circles Aligned Horizontally Task 3.

NOTES Stop cursor here Delete Start dynamic trim here Figure 35 Sketching a Rectangle Inside Circles 3. Highlight each item. 4. Figure 36 Using Dynamic Trim For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. continue to drag over the lines until they do highlight. If all the crossed items are not highlighted.2 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . The result is shown in the following figure.

Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. Figure 37: Section after Trimming Task 4. The results of trimming are shown in the following figure.2 7 . Sketch another rectangle. Snap to the outside circle and the bottom of the two vertical lines. Do not snap through any of the arc's vertices. 1.NOTES 5. For University Use Only . as shown in the following figure.

to trim the unwanted entities.NOTES Figure 38: Sketching a Second Rectangle Task 5. The result is shown in the following figure.2 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. 1. Click 2. Use the dynamic trim to remove the final lines and arc.

to create the dimensions. Dimension the entities. For University Use Only .2 9 .NOTES Figure 39: Capturing Intent with Dynamic Trim Task 6. Select each entity. 1. Refer to the preceding figure to determine the dimensioning scheme (the format of the dimensions and not the actual value) required for capturing design intent. Click 2. Click to modify the six dimension values.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. and then middle-click to place the dimensions. 3.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4.3 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Figure 40: Modifying Dimensions 4. Save and close. For University Use Only .

Create two additional centerlines that pass through the point at an angle. . Select Sketch and type [HEX] as the name. Click the centerline button . 1. Create a sketcher point 1. 3. Click Task 2. Create a vertical centerline that passes through the point. Modify the angles to 60°.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. Task 4. Place a point in the center of the screen. Add vertical centerlines passing through the sketcher point. as shown in the following figure. . Modify the angle between centerlines to 60°. Create a new sketch called HEX. 1. Click the point button 2. Figure 41: Modifying Angles between Centerlines For University Use Only . Task 3. 1. 2.3 1 .NOTES EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon Task 1.

NOTES Task 5.3 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Figure 42: Creating a Construction Circle Task 6. to draw a circle. 1. and select Toggle Construction to convert it to a construction circle.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. Click 2. Figure 43: Creating a Hexagonal Sketch For University Use Only . Create a circle centered on the Sketcher point. Create a hexagon by sketching 6 lines from the intersection points of the circle and the centerlines.

3.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketcher Basics P a g e 4. Add a diameter dimension to the construction circle and modify it's value to [1.3 3 .NOTES 1. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. For University Use Only . Click OK . Click File > Close Window .0] 2.

You can create lines.3 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . the INTENT MANAGER with fly-out icons and pop-up menus.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 4. and Trim . The system notifies you when a model has conflicting constraints. Default dimensions can be modified at any stage of model generation.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. circles. Sketcher preferences can be set using the SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box. Sketched geometry must be dimensioned and constrained. Mirror . splines. you learned that: • The Sketcher interface consists of the main sketcher area. toolbars. rectangles. The EDIT and SKETCH menus contain most of the tools that are unique to Sketcher mode such as Copy . • • • • • • For University Use Only . pull-down menus. message areas. Move . arcs. and many other geometrical entities using the Intent Manager.

Objectives After completing this module. you will be able to: • • • • Sketch cuts and protrusions. Page 5-1 .For University Use Only . Dimension sketched features. and location in a model. Created extruded and revolved forms. shape.Commercial Use Prohibited . Set up sketching planes.Module 5 Sketched Features In this module you learn how to create sketched features by defining their size.

–creates a feature by revolving the sketched section around a sketched centerline.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Figure 1: Protrusion versus Cut Created Extruded and Revolved Forms • • Extrude Revolve – adds or removes material linearly from the sketching plane. For University Use Only .NOTES DEFINING SKETCHED FEATURES Sketching Cuts and Protrusions • • Protrusion Cut – adds material to a model in any desired shape. – removes material from an open or closed cross-section in a model.

NOTES Sketched centerline Figure 2: Extruded versus Revolved Features Selecting a Sketching Plane To create a new feature on a model. The reference plane must be perpendicular to the sketching plane. you may want to manually select the top surface of the model for a perpendicular reference orientation. then you orient the new feature to a reference plane. The surface you choose defines the sketching plane. For University Use Only . The default orientation of the sketching plane orients it parallel to the screen and chooses one of the default datums as a reference plane.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5.3 . Selecting a Reference Plane Once you create and dimension the sketch. For example. begin the sketch on the surface where you intend to place the feature. Changing the Default Reference Plane You can change the default orientation and manually select a new reference plane.

NOTES Top orientation plane Direction of feature creation Sketching plane Sketcher Orientation -.Cut Resulting Protrusion Resulting Cut Figure 3: Two Features Defined by the Same Cross-section For University Use Only .Protrusion Sketcher Orientation -.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. Dimensioning Sections To override weak dimensions with strong ones.NOTES USING THE SKETCHER TOOLS Whenever you create a sketch. then middle-click [ ] to place the dimension at the desired location. you select the entity. Another additional toolbar containing the sketching options and constraints appears on the right side of the SKETCHER window.5 . the Sketch option pull-down menu contains all the necessary sketching tools. Since all sketches are parametric. In SKETCHER main window toolbar. Completes or aborts geometry creation Creates section entities by selecting points Opens pop-up menu Figure 4: Sketcher Mouse Button Functions For University Use Only . Pro/ENGINEER automatically assumes a dimensioning scheme. you can create them in a convenient scale and later modify their dimensions.

For University Use Only .NOTES Linear Dimensions Linear dimensions indicate the length of a line segment or the distance between two entities.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. Figure 5: Linear Dimensions in Sketcher Mode Note: You cannot dimension the length of a centerline. The different types of linear dimensions are illustrated in the following figure.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

Select the entity to dimension and the centerline to use as the axis of revolution. Then select the entity again and place the dimension. select the sketched centerline Third.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. Finally. place the diameter dimension. First.7 . Select twice on the circle to Place the dimension Figure 6: Diameter Dimension on Circle To create a diameter dimension for a revolved section. select the sketched entity once again. select the sketched entity Figure 7: Diameter Dimension for Revolved Section in Sketcher Mode For University Use Only . select the arc or circle twice and place the dimension.NOTES Diameter Dimensions Diameter dimensions measure the diameters of sketched circles and arcs. Second. To create a diameter dimension.

indicating that it is a diameter dimension rather than a radius dimension. To create a radial dimension.NOTES Note: The diameter dimension for a revolved feature extends beyond the centerline.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . select the circle or arc and place the dimension.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. Radial Dimensions Radial dimensions measure the radii of circles or arcs. Select on the ARC (left) Place dimension (middle) Figure 8: Radial Dimension in Sketcher Mode For University Use Only .

NOTES Angular Dimensions Create an angular dimension between lines by selecting two lines. Select the two lines in any order. then the other endpoint. and finally the arc. to place the dimension. Figure 9: Angular Dimensions in Sketcher Mode To create an arc angle dimension. to place the dimension.9 . Select 1 .Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. select one endpoint. Place dimensions in indicated positions.endpoint Select 2 -endpoint Select 3 . Where you place the dimension determines how the system measures the angle.on arc Place dimension Figure 10: Arc Angle Dimension in Sketcher Mode For University Use Only .

Method In Exercise 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. In Exercise 2. you create a cut feature. you create a protrusion.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Tools Table 1: Icons for Sketched Features Icons Description Sketch centerline Toggle grid on/off For University Use Only .NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you add and remove material to a solid part using protrusion and cut features.

Click Insert > Cut > Extrude . Sketch a cut feature within a closed section. For University Use Only .PRT.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5.1 1 . Change to Hidden Line display. 4. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 05_sketch_feat. 2. 5. 3.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cut Figure 11: Start and Finished Models Task 1. 1. Open SKETCHED_FEATURES. Click File > Set Working Directory . Click One Side > Done . 6.

Orient the model by selecting the orientation references. 2. 1. Task 4. For University Use Only .NOTES Select the top planar surface Sketching plane Figure 12: Selecting Sketching Plane Task 2. Leave defaults and Query Sel to select the planar front surface of the block as the plane to sketch the shape of the cut. Note Instead of manually orienting the model.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. 2. Select the top planar surface to begin the SKETCHER. The feature should extrude into the part. highlight and click Delete . 1. Note that Pro/ENGINEER automatically assumes two references. Task 3. you can usually click Default in the SKET VIEW menu to enter the default sketcher mode. Click O k a y from the DIRECTION menu. Click Top from the SKET VIEW menu. The design intent of the cut is to be at a specified distance from the right side and the bottom of the model. To delete these two references from the REFERENCES dialog box.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Define the references. Define the front surface as the sketching plane. 1.

Select the bottom surface and the right side surface as references.NOTES 2. Click .Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. Click Close . Click left to right. .1 3 . you can undo the operation by selecting Undo. Select in the Sketcher to start the line and drag it from ] to end the line. Click the right end point of the line as the start point for the arc and drag a 180-degree arc. Right-click [ ] to 1. Note that the REFERENCE dialog box entries are both SURF:F4 (Protrusion). Note: If you did not sketch what you wanted. 2. For University Use Only . Select this bottom surface as the first reference (selecting it on edge) Select this side surface as the second reference Figure 13: Specifying References Task 5. Define the section for the cut. Click to end the arc creation. Left-click [ finish the line.

NOTES Figure 14: Creating a 3 Point/ Tangent End Arc 3. For University Use Only .1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. 4. From the endpoint of the arc sketch another horizontal line segment. Finally complete the section by sketching another tangent end arc that connects the open end of the second line to open end of the first line.

the RESOLVE SKETCH dialog box appears.1 5 . Impose the Equal Length Sketcher constraint. If the sketch is over-constrained. and . Make the two horizontal lines equal in length. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5.NOTES Figure 15: Completing Section Sketch Task 6. Click 2. Figure 16 Resolve Sketch Dialog Box For University Use Only . 3. Select the two horizontal lines you want to make equal.

4. To create the location dimension from the bottom surface to the left arc center. select the each of the arc centers and to place the dimension. Select a point approximately half way between the two arc centers. Override existing weak dimensions and constraints with your own strong dimensions and constraints. Check for the symmetric constraint symbols—two arrows indicating a symmetric constraint located about the centerline. 1. Or. To create the radius dimension. select the centerline and then select the right surface and to place the dimension. Retain the Equal Lengths constraint and delete any other constraint. Click . Click . 7. select the arc center and the bottom surface and to place the dimension.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. If INTENT MANAGER added a dimension. select the perimeter of the left arc and to place the dimension.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . force it using the CONSTRAINT menu. 6. To create the location dimension from the right surface to the centerline. For University Use Only . Task 7. When the centerline snaps to vertical.NOTES 4. Create the dimensions of the cut section. click Undo and re-create the centerline. click again. 2. To create the arc center-to-center dimension. 5. 3.

Change the dimension values.NOTES Figure 17: Specifying Constraints and Dimensions.1 7 . Click For University Use Only . Task 8.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. . Select a dimension. Complete dimensioning the size and location of the cut section. 1. Modify the dimensions of the cut. 8.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. Repeat the above step to modify all the other dimensions of the cut. Figure 19: Modified Dimensions For University Use Only . 3. Type in the correct number and press <ENTER>.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Figure 18: MODIFY DIMENSION Dialog Box 2.

Click 2. Note: Note that the system placed a circle with an X in the center of the part to indicate the direction of feature creation. Figure 20: Finished Cut For University Use Only . 1. . click Thru All > Done . Click O k a y to accept the arrow pointing towards the inside of the section to define the direction of the cut.NOTES Task 9. 5.1 9 . View your new cut feature in different views. A circle with a dot in the center represents a 2-D arrow perpendicular to the screen in the direction that is out of the screen (toward you). Click OK . 3.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. 4. It represents a 2-D arrow perpendicular to the screen in the direction that is into the screen (away from you). Finish defining the cut. To define the depth.

so that you can clearly see the 3. Click One Side > Done from the ATTRIBUTES menu. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude . For University Use Only . Task 2. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. Create a cylindrical protrusion on the right side of the model. 3. Click Top and select surface shown in the preceding figure. Select the right side of the block as the sketching plane. 2. The arrow points outward from the block. Specify two references for Sketcher in the DEFAULT view. 4. Click O k a y from the DIRECTION menu. 5. [Toggle grid on/off]. 1.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Creating a Protrusion Task 1. Click block. Click View > Default Orientation .2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Delete the two references in the REFERENCE dialog box. TOP orientation reference Sketching plane Create this protrusion Figure 21: The Completed Protrusion 1.

Task 4. 5. Select the circle twice and to place the dimension. 3.NOTES 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. Define the section for the protrusion. Strengthen dimensions. 1.2 1 . Task 3. Click 2. Close the REFERENCES dialog box. For University Use Only . 1. Click View > Sketch Orientation . Click 2. and select Query Select from the pop-up menu to select the back hidden surface. Select in the Sketcher to begin a sketch of a small circle. . Select again to finish the circle. Select this top surface as a reference Select the back surface as a reference Figure 22: Selecting Section References 6. Select the top surface of the model as reference.

2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Place the dimension between the center of the circle and the left reference surface. The MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box appears. Change dimension values for each as shown in the preceding figure. Click Edit > Modify .NOTES 3. 2. 3. Click to close the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box. 4. Task 5. Select the center of the circle and the left reference surface. 4. Click and select each of the three dimensions consecutively while holding <SHIFT>.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. place the dimension. Change the dimension values to reflect the design to Figure 23: Modified Dimensions 1. For University Use Only .

Commercial Use Prohibited Sketched Features P a g e 5. in the INTENT MANAGER to complete the section. View your model in different displays. 6. Click File > Save and press <ENTER>. then click Yes from the dialog box. 4. 1. Define a blind depth value for the protrusion. 5. 3. Click Task 6. 2.2 3 . Click File > Erase > Current . Click OK . Figure 24: The Completed Model For University Use Only . Click Blind > Done from the SPEC TO menu. Type [3] in the ENTER DEPTH window and press <ENTER>.NOTES 5.

For a sketched feature. lines. you not only have to dimension it properly but also have to orient it in relation to reference planes (usually the side surfaces of the base feature). • For University Use Only . parallelism and symmetry. concentricity.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 5. you learned that: • • • • Cut and Protrusion are two important features that can be sketched using the Sketcher Mode Both of these sketched features can be created in extruded and revolved forms When sketching a new feature.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. arcs. perpendicularity.2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . and circles can be constrained to different properties such as equal lengths. you can always sketch it as convenient and later alter the dimensions In a new sketch.

Commercial Use Prohibited . Page 6-1 . Start new designs with default or offset datum planes as base features. Align sketched sections to parts. Describe the difference between internal and external datum planes.Module 6 Default Datum Templates In this module you learn how to use datum planes to create parts.For University Use Only . Objectives After completing this module you will be able to: • • • • • Describe the purpose of using datum planes as base features. Orient additional datum planes within your model.

In the default mode.NOTES USING DATUM PLANES AS BASE FEATURES Base Features A base feature is the first feature that you create when starting a new part. They have no mass or volume. By default. The following figure shows an example where a cylinder is used as the base feature for a part. It is the foundation for the rest of the model. Datum planes are infinite.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6. TOP . and RIGHT. Figure 1: Base Feature Defining aDatum Plane A datum plane is an imaginary plane on which you use as a reference for orienting your parts and assemblies. datum planes have two sides: yellow (the active side) and red (the passive side). Features that are added to the model later depend on the base feature for many or all of their references. the system displays datum planes with a yellow side and a text name such as FRONT. For University Use Only . and perfectly flat.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . twodimensional.

Any associated dimensions positioning the datum plane are included with those of the feature. Datum planes on-the fly become invisible after you create the feature. while displaying the datums only temporarily. Sometimes. especially useful when designing models that do not have any flat surfaces. This gives you more choices for varying dimensions when you create a feature pattern. Creating Datum Planes You can create a datum at any time. on the fly. when specifying sketching or reference planes. Pro/ENGINEER automatically provides a default datum plane as the first feature. Use planar (flat) surfaces as references. you can create an internal datum. it is beneficial to construct internal datums because the system builds their dimensions into your sketched feature. you can define it using several different methods.NOTES Using a Default Datum as the Base Feature When creating new models. For University Use Only . Consider the following rules for datum planes created on-the-fly: • • Datum planes created during feature creation are internal to and belong to that feature. When creating a datum.3 . the Datum Plane constraints are the same: • • • • Parallel Through Offset Tangent • • • Angle Normal Blend Section Creating Internal Datum Planes If you do not want datum planes to be a feature of your model.Commercial Use Prohibited Default Datum Templates P a g e 6. This is done because datum planes enable you to: • • Develop parent/child relationships between different features. You can create additional datum planes as reference features for a model where references do not already exist. Though methods of creation differ.

For University Use Only .4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6.NOTES • When you use Copy/Mirror to copy features and use datum planes onthe-fly as the mirror plane. this datum plane stays visible because it can be referenced by more than one feature.

Method In Exercise 1.Commercial Use Prohibited Default Datum Templates P a g e 6. you create an extruded and a revolved feature using the default datum planes built into the default template. you create a datum plane during the creation of a solid feature to establish good parent-child relationship.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you create new part models in Pro/ENGINEER using the default templates. In Exercise 2.5 . Tools Table 1: Interface Icons Icons Description Saved views Draw circle Done section Zoom in Modify dimension Create dimension For University Use Only .

A default coordinate system and three orthogonal default datum planes. Type [MOTOR_SHAFT]. appear with their yellow sides facing you. Name the part. 4.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6. From the MENU MANAGER click Setup > Units > millimeter Newton Second (mmNs) > Set. FRONT. Figure 1: Default Datum Planes and Coordinate System For University Use Only .6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 3. Click Done to exit from the SETUP menu. Click O K from the WARNING dialog box. Click [Saved views]. Create a new part model using the default template. Accept the Use default template option and click OK .NOTES EXERCISE 1: Creating a New Part Task 1. 5. Notice the list of pre-defined saved views that have been created by using the default template. 1. Click File > New . RIGHT and TOP. 2. then click Close .

3. Use the default datums as your sketching reference for the first 1. If you want to change the attributes of the protrusion you can always use the Redefine option. Figure 2: Sketched Circle at Center of Datums For University Use Only . feature. Click Close . Select the datum tag FRONT to make it the sketching plane. Notice that the INTENT MANAGER places references (RIGHT and TOP) for the intended protrusion automatically. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude . 4. Select the intersection of the default datum planes. 2. Click [Draw circle]. Middleclick to complete the circle creation.Commercial Use Prohibited Default Datum Templates P a g e 6.7 . Drag the diameter out of a circle and place it. Notice that the system automatically selected the reference plane and placed you in the Sketcher mode. The INTENT MANAGER adds a weak diameter dimension. 5.NOTES Task 2.

Click Task 4. Modify the diameter dimension and regenerate the section to see the change. Change the view to the default view. click Modify > Value and select on the protrusion that you just created. Click . Notice that the system automatically assigns a depth and completes the protrusion. 3. 4. From the PART menu. Click OKAY to confirm the direction of creation. For University Use Only . 1. 1. 1. Press <ENTER>. Click > Dynamic Modify after selecting the protrusion id in the model tree. 3. 5. Change the diameter.5]. Click Insert > Cut > Revolve . Query Sel the RIGHT datum plane as the sketching plane. Type [14. Notice that you can use the yellow icon in the middle of the protrusion to dynamically modify the depth by dragging. Click One Side > Done . Select the depth value and type [240]. Now the RIGHT datum plane is the sketching surface. use the default datums. Modify the depth to 240mm. Task 5. 2. 2.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6. and Default. 4. Double-click the diameter dimension. Select LEFT from the SKET VIEW menu and Query Sel the FRONT datum plane as the reference plane. Click Regenerate from the PART menu. 2. Add a revolved cut feature to the protrusion you created. As section references.NOTES Task 3.

Click Sketch > References to access it 3. Close the REFERENCES dialog box. Select the TOP datum plane as the first reference. Sketch three line segments. 2. 1. If the REFERENCES dialog box accidentally closes before you define references. Sketch a centerline that coincides with the TOP datum plane. 6. 4. 7. Select the end surface as the third Select the silhouette edge as the second reference. Select the TOP datum plane as the first reference. Create a centerline and proceed to define the section. For University Use Only . In a revolved section you need to use a centerline in the sketch to define an axis of revolution. Then select the silhouette edge of the protrusion and the left end surface of the protrusion as the second and third references as shown in the following figure.NOTES Task 6. Figure 3: Selecting References for the Cut 5.9 .Commercial Use Prohibited Default Datum Templates P a g e 6. Delete the two references that the INTENT MANAGER automatically provides. Click [Zoom in] and on the left end of the shaft.

NOTES

Figure 4: Sketch for Revolved Cut (dimensions not shown for clarity)

Task 7.

Create the diameter dimension. .

1. Click

2. In order to get the dimension scheme shown, select the horizontal line you sketched. Select the centerline. Select the horizontal line again. Middle-click to place the dimension.

Figure 5: Creating the Diameter Dimension

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6- 1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

3. Modify the dimensions of the section. Click dimension] and change the dimensions.

[Modify

Figure 6: Modified Dimensions

Task 8.

Finish defining the revolved cut on the model.

1. Click

.

2. If necessary, flip the arrow to remove material from the inside of the section. Otherwise, click O k a y. 3. Select 360 and click Done in the REVOLVE TO menu. 4. Click OK to finish the feature. 5. Change to the default view. Click View > Default. 6. Save the model. 7. Click File > Erase > Current > Yes.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Default Datum Templates P a g e 6- 1 1

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating an Internal Datum Plane
In this exercise, you add a protrusion to the model by creating an internal datum plane feature on the fly.

Add this protrusion.

Figure 7: The Start and Finished Models

Task 1. Add a datum plane to the part to use as the sketching reference for the cylindrical protrusion you want to create. 1. Click File > Set Working Directory . 2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 06_templates_datum_planes. 3. Open the part model INTERNAL_DTM.PRT. 4. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude . 5. Click One Side > Done in the ATTRIBUTES menu. 6. Click Make Datum > Offset in SETUP PLANE menu. Select the planar front surface of the block as a reference for the new plane.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6- 1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

Offset from this front surface

Figure 8: Creating a Sketching Plane

7. In the OFFSET menu, click Enter Value . 8. Type [1] as the offset value. Click Done . Task 2. Finish defining the protrusion by using the datum plane as a sketching plane. 1. Flip the direction of the intended protrusion to point towards the model. Click O k a y to accept the direction of feature creation. 2. Click Top and select the top planar surface of the block as the reference plane. 3. Delete the two default references. Make the A_2 axis of the first cylinder as the first reference. Make the visible vertical surface of the block from which the cylinder protrudes as the second reference. Close the REFERENCES dialog box. 4. Click . Sketch a circle on the cylinder with its center coinciding with the A_2 axis. 5. Modify the dimension of the circle’s diameter to 0.88. 6. Modify the distance from the left vertical surface of the base block feature to 1.5.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Default Datum Templates P a g e 6- 1 3

NOTES

.
Figure 9: Modified Dimensions

7. Click

.

8. Click Thru Next > Done in the SPEC TO menu. 9. Complete the feature. 10. Shade and save the model.

Figure 10: Completed Model

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6- 1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

11. Click File > Close Window . 12. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK .

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Default Datum Templates P a g e 6- 1 5

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that: • • • • Datum planes are infinite, two-dimensional, flat references that have no mass or volume. Datum planes act as the ideal base feature to create new parts and models. Additional datum planes can be created in Pro/ENGINEER while creating a model. There are different kinds of datum planes; such as those that are created as Through/Plane, Offset/Plane, Offset/Coord Sys, and Blend Section. You can build internal datum planes when you do not want the datums to be a feature of your model.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 6- 1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - Module

7
Parent/Child Relationships
In this module you learn how to work with parent/child relationships in Pro/ENGINEER. The order that features are created and the references that they provide creates hierarchical relationships. These parent/child relationships determine feature interaction. You will learn how to manage parent/child relationships to achieve the desired behavior in your models.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: • • • • Describe parent/child relationships in Pro/ENGINEER. Describe sketched feature parent/child relationships. Describe Pick-and-Place feature parent/child relationships. Change the parents of a feature in a model using the Reroute , Redefine and Reorder options to change the original design intent.

Page 7-1

NOTES

PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS IN PRO/ENGINEER
Solid modeling is a cumulative process where the creation of certain features must, by necessity, precede others. When creating a new feature, Pro/ENGINEER references it to previously defined features for information on size, shape, location, and orientation. This forms the basis for a parent/child relationship. The feature used as the reference becomes the parent to the new feature, the child. Parent/child relationships determine how features react when other features in the model change.

Pick-and-Place Feature Parent/Child Relationships
Pick-and-Place features also have parent references because they use existing geometry for location and orientation. Any selection of a surface or edge for this purpose generates a parent/child relationship. The system supplies different options to select a reference, resulting in different parents for the feature. • – specifies a reference only to the selected edge, but developing the feature along all edges that are tangent to the selected one.
Tangent Chain One by One Surf Chain

• •

– specifies a reference for each selected edge.

– specifies a reference to the surface that is selected and a single edge. It also can create references to selected edges if the option From-To is used.

Sketched Feature Parent/Child Relationships
When sketching a feature, the sketching plane and the reference plane become parents of the new feature. If the sketching plane moves, the feature moves along with it. Similarly, if the reference plane that determines orientation changes, the orientation of the feature changes as well.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7- 2 Introduction to ProENGINEER

NOTES

Figure 1: Example of Parent/Child Relationship

Modifying a Feature’s Parents
You can alter the parents of a feature by rerouting or redefining it.

Rerouting Parent Features
With the Reroute option in the FEAT menu, you can change the parents of a feature including sketching planes, reference planes, and anything specified as a reference in Sketcher. When rerouting a feature, Pro/ENGINEER highlights its external references one at a time and identifies each reference in the message area. You have two choices. You can click Alternate and select a new reference, or click Same Ref and retain the current reference.

Note:
Pro/ENGINEER considers references that you use for alignment to be dimensioning references.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7- 3

NOTES

Figure 2: Bracket with Datums

Redefining Features
The Redefine option in the FEAT menu also changes the parents of a feature. When you select a feature to redefine, the same feature dialog box appears that is visible during initial feature creation.

Figure 3: Feature Dialog Box

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7- 4 Introduction to ProENGINEER

5 . When you select the Section element for a sketched feature. it adds them to the bottom of the list in the MODEL TREE. the menu displays the following options: – Prompts you to specify a sketching plane and reference. If parent features are missing. Pro/ENGINEER regenerates features one at a time. the system automatically brings you into the RESOLVE environment. For University Use Only . you must also decide what to do with the child features. The features that you created after sketching a section temporarily disappear. following the order in which they appear in the MODEL TREE. add/remove constraints. Note To remove a feature from the regeneration process. The system warns you if you try to delete an entity that is referenced by another feature. As you create new features. and create and delete dimensions. you can change the sketch plane or the sketch itself.NOTES Working with Sketched Features When sketching a section. Regenerating Parent/Child Features When regenerating a model. you can select an alternate reference or retain the same reference. in addition to being able to change the parents of a feature. Sketch Resolving Regeneration Problems Pro/ENGINEER bases the definition of a feature on the parent feature. if they exist. You can select and redefine all of the elements listed in the dialog box. Therefore. For each.Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7. you can also change other elements such as direction and material-side-plane before entering Sketcher mode. Sketch Plane – Allows you to use Sketcher mode to change sketched entities.

After you click Activate . Note You must regenerate a parent feature before you regenerate its children. For University Use Only . Using the Insert Mode option. You can insert features at any point. The system suppresses any features after it in the regeneration process. you can create one or more features at a selected position in the regeneration process. you select the feature after which to insert features. the system places them after the inserted features. If you resume them. you cannot reorder a parent to be after its children. except before the first feature or after the last feature. Or you can simply drag and drop the features in the model tree to reorder their positions.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7. nor can you reorder a child to be before its parents. you must then specify if you want to resume the features that were suppressed when you activated insert mode. Therefore.6 Introduction to ProENGINEER .NOTES Using the Feature Reorder and Insert Modes The R e o r d e r or Insert Mode options in the FEAT menu modify the order of the features. If you click Cancel to stop inserting features.

Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7.NOTES Rectangular base added Base caps hole Cylindrical protrusion with hole added Rectangular Base Added Finished model Figure 4: Reordering the Hole Insert mode activated before hole Protrusion added Figure 5: Inserting the Protrusion For University Use Only .7 .

you delete the second protrusion and modify the shape of the slot feature by using the Redefine feature. This involves creating new parent/child relationships for the cylindrical protrusion. In Exercise 2.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you learn to alter the existing parent/child relationships in a model and create new parent/child relationships to capture the changed design intent. you move the cylindrical protrusion on the base protrusion and place it on the cut feature by using the Reroute feature. Tools Table 1: Interface and Sketcher Icons Icons Description No Hidden Create constraint Create dimension Shading For University Use Only .8 Introduction to ProENGINEER . Method In Exercise 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7.

NOTES EXERCISE 1: Using Feature Reroute Second protrusion Cylindrical protrusion Cut Base protrusion Slot feature Figure 6: Original Model Figure 7: Finished Models after Exercises 1 and 2 Task 1. Retrieve the P_C_EXERCISE. 3. Reroute the half cylinder protrusion to the surface of the cut 1. feature. For University Use Only .9 .PRT. 4. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 07_pc_relationships . Click [No hidden].Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7. Click File > Set Working Directory. 2.

Click Same R e f.1 0 Introduction to ProENGINEER . Click Feature > Reroute in the menu manager and leave the default selections. Select this surface as the sketching plane Select this surface as the second dimension Figure 8: Rerouting References for the Protrusion 10. Select the half-cylindrical protrusion. Leave the default Alternate. It indicates that a slot feature needed to regenerate the model is missing references. Do not roll back the part model.NOTES 5. Leave the back surface as the dimensional reference. 9. Specify a new reference for the sketching plane. For University Use Only . Click S a m e R e f. Click No from the message area. 11. Investigate the problem and resolve it. 6. 1. Task 2. Leave the default Alternate . 7. Leave DTM3 as the horizontal reference. The model enters the Resolve environment because the changes that you have made created a problem. Click Query Sel to select the side of the model. 13. Click Query Sel to select the top surface of the cut. as shown in the preceding figure. 8. Read the INFORMATION window that appears. Change the second dimensional reference. 12.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7.

Select SURFACE ID 16. Select SURFACE ID 64.Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7. 7. In the REFERENCE INFORMATION WINDOW dialog box. select the Parent’s List to highlight it. Click Info > Parent/Child. Select EDGE ID 47. The bottom edge of the cylinder highlights as a dimensional reference. This reference caused the reroute to fail. For University Use Only . This edge was used as an alignment reference. Task 3. Select the slot on the front side of the block.NOTES 2. 3. Figure 9 References Information Window 4. Click Tree > Expand > All . This is an unwanted relationship. The top of the cylinder highlights as the horizontal reference plane. 6. Select EDGE ID 73. 1. 5. Investigate the parent/child relationships of the slot feature. 2. Click Undo Changes > Confirm . The front surface of the block highlights as the sketching plane.1 1 . The right edge of the second protrusion highlights as a dimensional reference.

Click Same Ref. 5. Leave the default Alternate . 2. Task 4. Change the edge of the cylinder's dimensional reference. Leave the default Alternate .1 2 Introduction to ProENGINEER . 7. Click No . Click Query Sel to select the top surface of the large protrusion as the new horizontal reference plane. Second protrusion New horizontal reference New dimensional reference Figure 10: Rerouting the Slot 6. 3. Click Query Sel and select the top surface of the large protrusion as shown in the preceding figure. 9. 4. Read the message window. Break the parent/child relationship between the slot and the cylindrical protrusion.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7.” For University Use Only . Click Close . 8. 1. The message area displays the message: “Feature rerouted successfully. Click Same R e f. Leave the dimensional reference to the second protrusion.NOTES 8. Do not roll back the part model. Click Edit > References.

3. 5. Query Sel and select the top surface of the cut as the new sketching plane. Figure 11: The Re-routed Cylindrical Feature For University Use Only . Query Sel and select the side of the model as the second dimensional reference. Reroute the cylindrical protrusion as planned.Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7.NOTES Task 5. 2. Select PROTRUSION ID 58 in the MODEL TREE and click Edit > Preferences. Click S a m e Ref. 4. Click Same R e f. 1. Do not change the dimensional reference. 6. 7. Do not roll back the model. The successfully rerouted cylindrical feature appears as shown in the following figure.1 3 . Do not change the horizontal reference.

the slot feature in the MODEL TREE and select Redefine . Task 2. Click Section > Define > Sketch from the FEATURE dialog box. For University Use Only .1 4 Introduction to ProENGINEER . 2. Figure 12: Warning Dialog Box 2. 1. The new design intent of this model dictates you should remove the second protrusion from the model by deleting it.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7. Click Cancel in the WARNING window. Right-click PROTRUSION ID 29 in the MODEL TREE.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Using Feature Redefine Task 1. 1. In addition. The slot highlights because it is a child of the second protrusion. 3. Tips & Techniques: You can also double-click on an element to change its definition. then select Delete . Break the parent/child relationship between the slot and the protrusion. change the section of the slot. instead of highlighting and clicking Define .

as shown in the following figure. Click Edit > Delete . Read the message area. 4. Read the message area. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7. > Explain . Change the dimensioning scheme of the slot.NOTES 3. Create a tangent end arc. Sketch this arc. as shown in the following figure. Figure 13: New Section for Slot Task 3. select the left vertical sketched line. To change the section.1 5 . Delete this line segment. Click 2. 4. 3. Select the vertical bar constraint. 1.

7.1 6 Introduction to ProENGINEER . 8. Click View > Default. Add a dimension from the left side of the base protrusion to the center of the left arc.NOTES select this edge select this vertical bar constraint symbol Figure 14: Interrogating a Constraint 5. Click Delete > Close > Yes. as shown in the following figure. 6. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7. Select EDGE: F6. Click . Tips & Techniques: You can easily determine external references to edges and surfaces by looking for the brown dashed line. Click Sketch > References in the MAIN MENU.

Remove the second protrusion from the design. 1. 9. Right-click and select Delete . For University Use Only . Click Task 4. Highlight Protrusion id 29 in the MODEL TREE.Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7. > OK . 2. Click OK to confirm the deletion of the second protrusion.NOTES Figure 15: Dimensioning the Slot Tips & Techniques: It is always good practice to dimension in the default view to avoid unwanted parent/child relationships.1 7 .

model. For University Use Only . Click View > Saved Views >BACK > Set > Close .NOTES Figure 16: Second Protrusion Deleted Task 5.1 8 Introduction to ProENGINEER . Change the design so that the slot passes completely through the 1. Click Depth > Define > Thru All > Done > OK. Click 2. Tips & Techniques: You can also select named views directly by clicking [Saved view list]. Spin the model. Click Feature > Redefine in the menu manager. 3. [Shading]. Analyze the model using shading. Task 6.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7. Select the slot. 2. 1.

Look in the MODEL TREE and confirm that the hole pattern (listed as PATTERN ) is the last feature in the model.NOTES Figure 17: Slot Redefined Using the Thru All Option Task 7. Note that the holes now all have a collar. 5. 3. Select SHELL from the MODEL TREE and drag it below PATTERN.1 9 . 2. Click File > Erase > Current > Yes. Change the holes to have a collar. Close the model without saving the changes. 1. Figure 18: Reordered Shell Feature 4. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7.

Pro/ENGINEER strictly follows the order in which the features were built while accounting for parent/child relationships among them. During regeneration of a model.2 0 Introduction to ProENGINEER . To capture changing design intent. • • For University Use Only . A child feature can never be regenerated before its parent feature. By using the Insert Mode option. and Reorder are used as needed. Redefine .NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. For this. Reroute . parent-child relationships between various features of a model have to be re-negotiated.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 7. you learned that: • • Parent/child relationships are hierarchical relationships within a model whose features are cumulatively built beginning with a base feature. new features can be inserted in between features of an existing model.

Page 8-1 . you will be able to: • • Create swept features. you learn how to add and remove material using sweeps and parallel blends.Commercial Use Prohibited - Module 8 Sweeps and Blends In this module. Objectives After completing this module. Create parallel blend features.For University Use Only .

The trajectory is the path along which you sweep the cross-section.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8. You must locate the cross-section with respect to the trajectory.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES SWEEP AND TRAJECTORIES Creating Sweeps and Trajectories Sweeps consist of two features—the trajectory and the cross-section. For University Use Only . The first step in defining a sweep is to creating a trajectory. A sweep can add material when defined as a protrusion. or remove material when defined as a cut. that is the section does not have to end at the point of origin. the following figure provides three different combinations of trajectories and sections. A sweep trajectory can be sketched as either open or closed. The second step is to create the cross-section. To illustrate this point.

In the following figure.Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8. creating the blended surfaces between the corresponding segments.3 . You can use blends as forms for either protrusions or cuts. Therefore. called subsections. For University Use Only . You create a parallel blend from a single section that contains multiple contours. each segment is matched to the subsequent segment. closed section (No Inn Fcs) Closed Trajectory.NOTES Open trajectory. closed section Closed trajectory. each section or subsection must always have the same number of segments/vertices. Open Section (Add Inn Fcs) Figure 1: Sweep Trajectories and Section Creating Parallel Blends A Blend feature combines at least two planar sections joined together at their edges with transitional surfaces to form a continuous feature.

4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Or you can use the pop-up menu to select a different start point. Figure 3: Start Points and Twisted Blend For University Use Only . Pro/ENGINEER connects the start point of each section and continues to connect the vertices of the sections in a clockwise manner. The Feature Tools option in the SKETCH pull down menu changes the start point for any section to control the blend or twist of the blended surfaces.NOTES Straight transition Smooth transition Figure 2: Parallel Blends When blending the sections together.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8.

Subsections can be located with respect to the other subsections via dimensions or constraints. The feature attribute for parallel blends is smooth or straight. since it captures the design intent of the model. the dimensioning scheme is important.5 . You toggle between sections to distinguish between each sections. The smooth attribute connects the section with spline surfaces.Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8. • • The straight attribute blends the transitional surfaces from one section straight to the next. As with any feature.NOTES Figure 4: Start Points and Blend Shape When creating a parallel blend. you create all of the sections for the blend in the same sketch. If you begin your part with three default datum planes. all subsections can be dimensioned to them. For University Use Only .

NOTES Figure 5: Dimensioning Parallel Blend Sections For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

you create a parallel blend by first retrieving a section to be used for subsections. especially if they are complex. In Exercise 2.7 . you create a swept protrusion. Method In Exercise 1. This is an effective technique to use for common sections.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you will create parallel blends and simple sweeps.Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8. Tools Table 1: Interface Icons Icons Description Toggle grid Refit Toggle datum planes For University Use Only .

Click Insert > Protrusion > Blend 2. Uncheck the Use default template option. 4. Task 2. Create a parallel blended protrusion. Start a new part without using the default datum template. For University Use Only . Create a new part and name it PARALLEL_BLEND. Click Empty > OK in the NEW FILE OPTIONS dialog box. 3.PRT. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8. Accept all the defaults in the BLEND OPTS menu and click Done .8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 4. 1. Figure 6: Creating Part without using Default Template 3. as shown in the following figure. Leave the default Straight in the ATTRIBUTES menu and click Done .NOTES EXERCISE 1: Creating Parallel Blend Features Task 1. 2. Select DTM3 as the sketching reference and click O k a y for direction. Click Insert > Datum > Plane .

For University Use Only . Task 3. Select BLEND. For the Scale option. move and place it so that your vertical and horizontal centerlines snap to DTM1 and DTM2 respectively. Zoom in (about 4 X 4 grid squares) at the intersection of DTM1 and DTM2. Place center point of section at intersection of datums Figure 7: Placing the First Section 6. 0] and press <ENTER>.NOTES 5. DTM1 and DTM2 as section references are placed. Select the center point of the section. Close the REFERENCES dialog box.Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8. 3. 7. 4. leave the default [0 . Toggle to show the gridlines. For Rotate . Do not close the dialog box.9 . 5. [Refit]. Click Sketch > Data from File . type [3 . 1.SEC and click O p e n. Retrieve the first section from disk and place it. 0] value. Click 7. 2. Click in the SCALE ROTATE dialog box. A small blend section and the SCALE ROTATE dialog box will appear. 6. Click Top and select DTM2 as the reference plane.

3. 2. 6. Use the same sketch again for the third section of the blend assigning it a scale factor of 2. Retrieve the same BLEND. but a different scale value. click Sketch > Data from file .0]. To retrieve the BLEND.SEC section again. Task 5. 1. 4. For Scale.NOTES Task 4. Leave the default [0. Notice the first subsection gets deactivated and turns gray. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section . 4. 1. Make sure both the sections are gray before bringing in the final section.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8. 2. For University Use Only . Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section . Place the sections so that the centerlines are coincident with the previous section centerlines.SEC section again and assign a scale factor of [2. 3.0] as the rotating angle. Do not close the SCALE ROTATE dialog box. The three sections should look as shown in the following figure. Click in the SCALE ROTATE dialog box. 5.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . type [1.0] and press <ENTER>. Change the view to default. Add the second section to the sketch using the same sketch.

2. For University Use Only .0] as the depth for the third section and press <ENTER>. 3.1 1 .Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8. Click OK . 1. Click to get out of the intent manager.NOTES Figure 8: Creating the Third Section Task 6. Define the feature.0] as the depth for the second section and press <ENTER>. 4. The blend should look as shown in the figure below except the dimensions will not be visible. Type [30. Type [20. 5.

3. 2. Task 7. Click Attribute > Define > Smooth > Done . 1.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8. Right-click on the blend protrusion in the model tree and select Redefine . 4. Click OK . Change the shape of the transitional surfaces from a straight line transition to a spline transition by using Redefine .NOTES Figure 9: Completed Blend Note: Note that Pro/ENGINEER uses straight lines as transitions to attach the vertices of the subsections. Finish the definition. For University Use Only . Save the file and close the window.

Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8.1 3 .NOTES Figure 10: Straight and Smooth Surfaces For University Use Only .

and then two lines as shown in the following figure. Note: A sweep is a two-part sketch: the trajectory is first and the cross-section follows. a tangent arc.PRT. Create the base feature protrusion as a sweep. 1. Toggle [Insert datum] to turn on the datum planes. 4.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click Bottom and select DTM3 as the reference. Place the correct dimensions. starting with default datum planes. Create a part. Check to see if DTM3 and DTM1 are the default references and close the REFERENCES dialog box. 2. Sketch an open trajectory section consisting of a line. Select DTM2 and click O k a y for the direction. Click Sketch Traj from the SWEEP TRAJ menu. 1. 3. For University Use Only . Click Insert > Protrusion > Sweep. 5. 2. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to create the default datum planes or click 4. Start a new part and name it SWEEP. 3.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8. Task 2. Clear the Use the default template option in the NEW dialog box and check Empty in the NEW FILE OPTIONS dialog box followed by OK . 5. Sketch the trajectory on DTM2 using DTM3 as the bottom reference.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Create a Simple Sweep Protrusion Task 1.

Task 3. Note that the centerlines provided by the system at the start point of the trajectory. 1. The system defines the sketching plane as a plane normal to the trajectory. located at the start point. as shown in the following figure.1 5 . click INTENT MANAGER. Sketch the cross-section of the sweep. Sketch an inverted T cross-section. The system has placed you in another Sketcher session.Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8. from the 7.NOTES Sketched lines Sketched arc fillet Figure 11: Showing Sketch and Dimensions 6. You may want to turn the Sketcher grid off. When you have completed the trajectory. Trajectory starts here Figure 12: Sketching an Inverted “T” For University Use Only .

3. 4. The sweep is rounded where there was an arc in the trajectory. Click OK to complete feature.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES The default view appears as follows: Start point Trajectory Cross-section Figure 13: Default View 2. Save the file and erase it from memory. Figure 14: The Completed Sweep For University Use Only . Click to complete the section.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 8. and mitered where there was a corner (nontangent segment) in the trajectory.

For University Use Only .NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module.1 7 . The parallel blend feature can have either a straight attribute or a smooth attribute. A parallel blend is created from a single section that contains multiple contours called subsections. you learned that • • • • When defining a Swept Feature. you must define its trajectory and its cross-section. Sweeps can either add or remove material depending on whether they are defined as protrusions or cuts.Commercial Use Prohibited Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

Create relations that allow your child features to drive their parent features. Relations create explicit parent-child relationships. Delete and update invalid relations to accommodate changes to the design intent.For University Use Only . Re-order relations.Module 9 Relations and Parameters In this module you learn to drive the design of a model by using relations. Page 9-1 . Describe the four types of relations pertaining to models. you will be able to: • • • • • Describe the purpose of relations.Commercial Use Prohibited . Objectives After completing this module.

2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . They can be used to control the effects of modifications on models. The following figure represents a simple relation between the two dimensions of a rectangular feature. where d0 is always twice the size of d1.Relation: d0 = 2*d1 The four types of model relations are: • • Assembly relations – Relate different component parameters to one another using a coding symbol to designate different components. and to act as constraints for design conditions.NOTES RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS Parametric Relations Relations are user-defined equations written between symbolic dimensions and parameters.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. For University Use Only . Part relations – Relate different feature parameters to one another in a single part. to define values for dimensions in parts and assemblies. Figure 1: Part Relation .

Feature relations: Cam slot shape driven by relation /*hole centered in plate d5=d2/2 d6=d3/2 Part relations Hole centered in plate Assembly relations Bracket centered on plate Figure 2: Different Relation Types For University Use Only .3 .Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9.NOTES • • Feature relations – Relate parameters specific to one feature in the Relate specific pattern parameters within a model. Pattern relations – pattern.

Parametric relations allows you to craft your model in such as way as to reverse the parent/child hierarchy.5 else d12=1 d# – Part dimensions d#:# – Dimensions in Assembly mode rd# – Reference dimensions sd# – Sketcher dimensions tm# – Minus tolerance tp# – Plus tolerance tpm# – Plus/minus tolerance Tolerance Symbols Instance Symbols User Parameters Integer parameter for instances in each direction of a pattern: p0. You can take advantage of this unique capability and use child features to drive the parent features. 32-A24-67B) Yes or no parameter Model note parameter Incorporating Your Design Intent Using Relations Relations enable you to capture sophisticated levels of design intent for your models..e.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER ..67 if (d4>.e.NOTES Representing Relations: Types and Symbols The table below presents the various elements that you can include in relations. etc. p1. Table 1: Elements of Relations Relation Types: Equality: d0=2* Constraint: d1>= 2.67) Character string parameter (i. Note: Do not create relations using reference dimensions. In a traditional parent/child relationship. it is the parent feature which always takes precedence (whether in dimensioning or regeneration).25) endif Dimension Symbols Comparison: d1 d12 = 1. They are an integral part of any advanced design of parts and assemblies.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. p2. For University Use Only . 3. Relations allow one feature to drive another. Numeric parameter (i.

5 . you could write a relation that drives the placement of the hole so that it is centered top to bottom: /*center hole top to bottom d5=d2/2 Figure 3: Plate Showing Parameters You could then write another relationship to keep the hole centered from left to right: /*center hole left to right d6=d3/2 Once you have added these relations. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9.NOTES In the following figure. Pro/ENGINEER automatically centers the hole in the plate and retains it at the center. even when you modify the height or width of the plate later on. Note: You can change the symbolic name of a dimension by using Modify > DimCosmetics > Symbol .

Order of Relations Pro/ENGINEER evaluates relations in sequential order.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. It is also good practice to comment your relations using the /* to document the design intent of the relations. the system evaluates the relations and checks to see if all of them are still valid. If not. Therefore. the order that you enter them in is important. You should always test your relations to be sure that they function correctly.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . During regeneration of the model.NOTES Figure 4: Relations that Drive Hole Location Tips & Techniques: It is good practice to add a relation as soon as you realize that you need it in your design. Do not wait until the end of the design process. For University Use Only . it issues a warning.

The two relations.Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9. d5 = d4 and d4 = d2/2.NOTES The following figure illustrates the consequences of entering relations improperly: Relations added: d5=d4 d4=d2/2 After first regeneration Figure 5: Reordering Relations The design intent is to center the hole on the plate. are added in that order. The final regenerated model is shown in the following figure. Design intent is captured by reversing the order of relations. Relations can be deleted or edited using the Edit Rel option. the relations do not capture the desired intent. After the first regeneration of the model. Figure 6: Model Regenerated with Relations Sorted For University Use Only .7 .

the design intent of a model tends to change. This may invalidate existing relations in the model.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . it automatically highlights the problem and prompts you to correct it. If you have to modify or delete a relation because of a design change or an error. you can edit the relation in the model using a system text editor. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. You can either delete the relation or update it. Whenever Pro/ENGINEER encounters invalid relations during regeneration. The editor that your system uses depends on the type of workstation that you have.NOTES Design Changes As a design cycle progresses.

For University Use Only . Method In Exercise 1. In Exercise 2.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you create relations and manipulate their defining parameters. you create relations to capture the design intent of a part.9 . you create parameters to control features using relations.Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9. test the relations.

The dimensions appear in their symbolic form (i. Select the hole to display its dimensions. d5. Figure 7: Symbolic Dimensions of RELATIONS. 7. 6.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .e. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 09_relations .NOTES EXERCISE 1: Creating Relations Task 1. Click Relations from the PART menu. d6.PRT 5. d7). 8. Change to wireframe display. Center the straight hole on top of the rectangular base solid 1. Task 2. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. feature. 3.. Select the block to display its symbolic dimensions. For University Use Only . Open RELATIONS.PRT. Start adding a relation. 4. 2. Click File > Set Working Directory . Click Add from the RELATIONS menu.

2. Type [d5 = d2/2]. Click Modify from the PART menu.1 1 . 3.Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9. type [/* Center hole left to right]. For University Use Only . Toggle between the numeric and symbolic values. Note If your relation contains an error. 3. Type [/* center hole front to back]. 5. 3. 1. Select the rectangular base. 5. 6. Task 3. click Relations > Edit. Select the depth of the block and change it to [90. Test the two relations by modifying the base feature width and 1. then press<ENTER>. 2. Enter a comment to describe the function of the relation.0] from 50. Select the straight hole to display its dimensions. Press <ENTER>.0] from 50. The hole should move to the center of the block. 4. Click Modify from the PART menu. Click Done from the MODEL REL menu. Press <ENTER> on a blank prompt line to finish adding relations. depth. Regenerate the model. Click Modify from the PART menu. Type [d6 = d4/2]. Task 4. 4. then press<ENTER>. Show the dimensions of the hole. 1. Click Switch Dim from the RELATIONS menu. Click Regenerate . 2. then press<ENTER>.NOTES 2. Select the width of the block and change it to [70. Task 5. For the second relation.

Click Modify > Dimension from the PART menu. Press <ENTER> on a blank line. Type an appropriate comment. (d7). 7. 1. Change the base back to the original dimension values.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. The DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box appears. For University Use Only . Select the hole feature. 1. 4.NOTES 3. 5.0].1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Regenerate the model. 3. Click Done from the MODEL REL menu. and type [50. Type [15 ] as the nominal value and then click OK . Test the relation by modifying the diameter dimension. Click the diameter dimension followed by Done Sel . Task 7. Select each dimension. Click Relations from the PART menu. 5.25. 6. 4.25]. Add a relation that limits the diameter of the hole to be less than or equal to 11. Identify the symbolic name given to the hole diameter. Click Add from the RELATIONS menu. Confirm that the two locating dimensions are 35 and 45. 3. 2. Task 6. 2. Type [d7 <= 11.

select the hole select the diameter dimension. Note the warning in the information window. Click Regenerate from the PART menu to update the model. 7. 4. 1.1 3 . 3. Modify back to a smaller diameter. Type [Y] to continue the regeneration.Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9. Close the window and click Done . 6. For University Use Only . then close it. Regenerate the model. Click Relations > Show Rel . 5. and press <ENTER>. then type [10. Review the relations via the information window. Click Modify . Continue the regeneration regardless of the warning.0]. Task 8. 2.NOTES Figure 8: Dimension Properties Dialog Box 4.

1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 1. Retrieve only the last set of features that were suppressed. Click Last Set > Done from the RESUME menu followed by Done from the FEAT menu.NOTES Task 9. Figure 9: The Resumed Hole For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. Click Feature > Resume . 2. Resume a hole and counterbore that were previously suppressed.

then press <ENTER>. Type [/*control the counterbore depth]. 5. Start to add a relation.1 5 . 4. 1. 2. Regenerate the model. Type [depth_ratio] in the message area followed by <ENTER>. Select the surface of the counterbore hole. Task 3. 7. Type [. 4. 8. 3. Enter a relation to have the conterbore as deep as the hole minus the thread depth.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Creating Parameters for FeatureControl Task 1. Increase the total depth of the hole.Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9. 6. Click the depth dimension and type [30]. 2. Click Add . Task 2. Click Add Param . Click R e a l Number .10] followed by <ENTER>. then press <ENTER>. Define a real number so the depth can vary infinitely. Click Part Rel from the MODEL REL menu. Type [d23 = depth_ratio*d22]. Click Modify and select on the counterbore hole. Press <ENTER> on an empty line. 2. 3. Click Done from the MODEL REL menu. 5. 1. For University Use Only . Add a parameter to the model then control the counterbore depth using the parameter. Test your relation . 1. Click Relations from the PART menu.

Click Set Up from the PART menu. 2. 4. 2. 1. Task 4. Inspect the parameter in the model using various methods. 5. Read the INFORMATION window. then type [cbore_depth]. Click Done from the PART SETUP menu. Click Regenerate . Click Done from the DIM COSMETIC menu. Edit the ratio parameter to change the relationship between the counterbore and hole. Click Done from the PART SETUP menu. 1. 2. Click Modify > Dim Cosmetics. Change the symbolic name of the entire depth of the hole and the counterbore depth to document the design. Select the depth dimension and type [entire_depth]. 1.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 4. For University Use Only . then click Parameters from the PART SETUP menu. then click Done from the MODIFY menu. Regenerate the model. Task 5. 3. 3. Select DEPTH_RATIO and type [. Select depth dimension of the counterbore. 4. Leave the default part and click Modify from the MODEL PARAM menu.NOTES 3. then click Close . Task 6.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9. Click Setup > Parameters > Info from the MODEL PARAMS menu. 3.5]. Click Relations > Show Rel .

8. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click Close > Done .NOTES Figure 10: Relation Information Window 5. 6. 7. Notice that the system lists the relations you have defined along with the parameters. For University Use Only . Save the model and click File > Close Window . Click OK . Also notice that the new symbolic names are now displayed.Commercial Use Prohibited Relations and Parameters P a g e 9.1 7 .

Feature Relations. invalid or conflicting relations are highlighted by prompts for resolution.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module you learned that: • Relations are user-defined mathematical equations composed of symbolic dimensions and parameters. Relations can be intelligently used to make child features drive their parent features. which capture design relationships within a part or among the many component parts of an assembly. and Pattern Relations. There are four different kinds of relations: Assembly Relations. • • • • • For University Use Only . During model regeneration. The user should always plan ahead to make relations an integral part of the design of parts and assemblies. Part Relations.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . The ordering of relations is crucial in capturing design intent as Pro/ENGINEER evaluates relations in consecutive order.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 9.

and optimization studies. Objectives After completing this module. Create model and relation analysis features. parametric. The latest state-of-the-art. Analyze mass properties. 3-D solid modeling. and feature-based characteristics. Describe various Behavioral Modeling components and their uses. P age 10-1 . Conduct sensitivity.Commercial Use Prohibited - Module 10 Behavioral Modeling CAD technology has matured through four distinct stages: 2-D drafting. and 3-D solid modeling with associative. In this module you learn about the behavioral modeling capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER. 5th generation CAD technology is called Behavioral Modeling. 3-D wireframe modeling. feasibility. you will be able to: • • • • • Describe the purpose of Behavioral Modeling.For University Use Only .

Objective-Driven Design Capabilities 3.NOTES BEHAVIORAL MODELING Product requirements are becoming increasingly volatile and products are being custom-tailored more and more.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. Figure 1: CAD Evolution Behavioral Modeling Features The power of Behavioral Modeling derives from three factors: 1.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . In such a scenario. Behavioral Modeling is such a technology. Smart Models 2. the requirements for a mechanical design automation technology that automates mundane design tasks so that the designer can concentrate on creative work becomes apparent. Open Extensible Environment For University Use Only .

NOTES Figure 2: Cornerstone of Behavioral Modeling Smart Models • • • Smart models are intelligent designs that adapt to their environment. Figure 3: Smart Model Adapting to Changing Needs For University Use Only . As smart models are “aware” of their contexts and purposes. and customerresponsive products. the designer can develop innovative. differentiated.3 .Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. They contain all the specifications and process information they need within them.

Open Environment • • • Smart models can accommodate features that link to information in other applications. It can simultaneously resolve conflicting objectives. External features reside within smart models and link to other applications. USING BEHAVIORAL MODELER The following are the uses of the Behavioral Modeler: • Create feature parameters based on measurements and analyses of the model. a task that was often impossible using traditional approaches. For example.NOTES Objective-Driven Design Capability • • • The objective-driven design approach automatically optimizes designs to meet any number of objectives captured in a smart model. These external features make the design solution infinitely extensible.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. even as other design changes are made and the center of gravity moves to reflect these changes. In addition to defining a problem with standard types of measurements such as the center of gravity or an edge length.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only . perhaps you want to place a hole coincident with the axis of the center of gravity of a design. Capturing the center of gravity in a feature and parametrically tying it to the hole will ensure that the features remain coincident. more complex requirements can be captured in features such as surface or curve analysis or complex equations.

Surface Area normal to the centerline of the pipe at any given location.5 .NOTES No Overall Height Dimension Figure 4: Creating Parameters • Create datum geometry based on measurements and analyses of the model. Figure 5: Creating Datum Features • Create new types of measurements tailored to your specific needs. All geometry needed for the calculation is part of the measurement. Figure 6: Creating New Types of Measurements For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0.

6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES • Analyze the behavior of measured parameters as dimensions vary. For University Use Only . Center of Gravity and Axis of Rotation must line up vertically.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. Figure 8: Finding the Correct Distance and Size • Allow information to be passed between external programs and Pro/ENGINEER. Size of the crank can vary to achieve the goal while also minimizing the mass. Y-Axis = volume of tank X-Axis = width of tank Figure 7: Analyze Varying Measurements • Automatically find the dimension values that achieve a desired behavior of the model.

Two pipes in heat exchangers that cannot intersect. Measured Curve .7 .Graph of analysis feature of current model Ideal Curve . and whose length must be minimized.NOTES • Spreadsheet programs: Differential equation solvers Technical computing environments in numeric computation and highlevel programming languages Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) Light or optics analysis Piping or HVAC analysis. that have a minimum allowable bend radius. Figure 9: Solving Complex Problems • Perform graph matching.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Solve model configuration that best satisfies multiple goals and constraints.Match model to this curve Figure 10: Graph Matching For University Use Only .

Analyze the angle through the full motion range Analyze the distance between these two points through the full range of motion Figure 11: Analyzing Motion Defining the Behavioral Modeler Components • Analysis Features – A datum feature that measures or evaluates geometry and produces parameters and geometry as result. The system establishes a parent-child relationship between the analysis features and their predecessors in the regeneration cycle.NOTES • Perform motion analyses. For University Use Only . Analysis features Figure 12: Analysis Features Symbols Note: Analysis features are evaluated every time the model is regenerated.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . • Field Points – A datum point that is partially constrained and free to move within that constraint.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0.

Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Figure 14: User-Defined Analysis For University Use Only .NOTES Figure 13: Field Points • User-Defined Analysis (UDA) – An analysis that is customized to the users need.9 . and is defined by a set of features.

In the following figure. the X-axis measures the width dimension and the Y-axis volume dimension.NOTES • Sensitivity Analysis – An analysis that plots how a change to particular parameter affects the results of an analysis. Figure 15: Sensitivity Plot For University Use Only .1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0.

Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Figure 16: Feasibility Dialog Box For University Use Only .NOTES • Feasibility Study – A study that determines if a specified constraint or goal can be achieved by varying certain model parameters within specified ranges.1 1 .

1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. Figure 17: Optimization Dialog Box For University Use Only . then optimization is used to determine which solution provides the minimum or maximum value of a specified goal.NOTES • Optimization – If there are multiple solutions to a specified set of constrains or goals. You can incorporate optimization into a model as a feature so that modifications to the model will be incorporated automatically.

NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory your learn the diverse practical applications of behavioral modeling functionality. Feasibility and Optimization Studies. you create three analysis features.1 3 . you create and use Sensitivity. Tools Table 1: Behavioral Modeling Icons Icons Description Build feature Build feature and repeat the same feature type creation Go to next page Preview feature geometry Create an analysis feature For University Use Only . In Exercise 2. It is shown that the position of each analysis feature in the MODEL TREE is critical in order to ensure that the proper parameter is calculated. In Exercise 3. you create a datum analysis feature to measure mass properties by designing a new propeller blade for underwater applications. Method In Exercise 1.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0.

PRT. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 10_behavioral_modeling. The model appears as shown in the following figure. 4. Click File > Set Working Directory . Not only do you want to find the mass of the model. Figure 18: The Blade Part Note: The model’s design cycle is partially completed. but also you want a datum coordinate system that represents the center of gravity to be created at the current location in the regeneration cycle. Clear the display of datum planes.NOTES EXERCISE 1:Creating a Datum Analysis Feature to Measure Mass Properties Task 1. 5. Click > BLADE. 2.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 3. Click Utilities > Environment to remove the spin center from the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. For University Use Only . The model’s state shown on the screen represents the model with the preliminary machining step. 1. Change the working directory and open the blade part.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0.

[Next Page]. 2. 2. 5. Click Task 4. and click [Next Page]. For University Use Only . 3. click Yes. (The current model units are lbs/in3 ) 7.1 5 . With CSYS_COG_95 highlighted. Close the MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box. 1. Click CREATE section. In the RESULT PARAMS section of the ANALYSIS dialog box. The following figure displays the created coordinate system. Create a datum analysis feature that measures mass. Type [MASS_PROPS] in the NAME box and press <ENTER>. 6. Leave the default Model Mass Properties as the TYPE. Select MODEL ANALYSIS as the type of analysis. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. 4. Task 3. Click Insert > Datum > Analysis. check that VOLUME is set to YES. Click Compute. If prompted for density in the message window. 1. 2. Create a COORDINATE SYSTEM at the center of gravity. type [. Create the VOLUME and MASS parameters.NOTES Task 2.75]. Scroll down and set the Mass parameter name to Yes. Click [Preview].

Type [MASS] in the NAME box. Click [Build Feature].1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 1. 5. Task 5. 4. View the values of the newly created parameters as columns in the MODEL TREE. Type [VOLUME] in the NAME box. widen the model tree or change the width of the columns.NOTES Figure 19: Created Coordinate Analysis Feature 3. 2. then press <ENTER>. Select Feat Params as the TYPE. then press <ENTER> and click OK.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. Notice the parameter values in the MODEL TREE. 3.) For University Use Only . (If necessary. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display.

1 7 . 7. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Item Display > Suppressed Objects > OK . 1. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. select the MASS PROPS feature. Notice that both are indicating the same MASS and VOLUME parameters. Create a copy of the analysis feature and reorder it to confirm that the measurement regenerates in the order of creation. Click Feature > Copy > click > . Select the cut in the MODEL TREE and click > Resume . Then select the group and click > Ungroup . Figure 21: Updated Parameter Values in Model Tree Task 6. Expand the group in the MODEL TREE to view the new analysis feature.NOTES Figure 20: Parameter Values Reflected in Model Tree 6. For University Use Only . and . Notice the MASS and VOLUME parameters have updated.

Select the new analysis feature. press <ENTER> and click . Notice the changing values and COG coordinate system location.NOTES 3. then click > Redefine . For University Use Only . If you were to continue with this model.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. Drag the first MASS_PROPS analysis feature above the cut. Figure 23: Dynamic Value Changes in Mass Property Calculations Note: An Analysis feature’s results are governed by its position in the model tree. Modify the name to MASS_PROPS_2. additional features could be created that are based on the results of these analysis features. Figure 22: Creating a New Analysis Feature 4.

Click File > Close Window . Click OK .NOTES 5. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. 6.1 9 .Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. For University Use Only .

Click [Next Page]. Click Setup > Name . Measure the volume before the shell feature up to a ‘fluid-level’ 1. Type [VOL_SOLID] for the name and press <ENTER>.PRT. . 5. type [4. select the newly created plane from the MODEL TREE and enter [FLUID_LEVEL].2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES EXERCISE 2: Analyze Fluid Volume in a Cup Task 1. 7. Open STYROFOAM.0] and click 4. Click Done from the PART SETUP menu to return to the highest level. Click > Offset and select DTM2. click and drag the red insert marker above the shell feature. 3.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. 6. Figure 24: Start Model 2. In MODEL TREE. Click Enter Value . Click [Analysis Feature] > Model Analysis. plane. For University Use Only .

Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0.NOTES 8. and click Close . and press <ENTER>. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display. 13. Ensure that the volume parameter is set to Yes. Type [VOL_SHELL] for the name and press <ENTER>. Select One-Sided Volume from the TYPE drop-down menu in the MEASURE dialog box. Type [Vol] in the name box. 14. edit the name to [VOL]. 16. Click [Build Feature]. 9. Figure 25: Model Tree with Volume Parameter Task 2. Select Feat Params as the Type . Click and drag the Insert marker below the shell feature. 3. 1. Select the FLUID_LEVEL datum plane from the model tree. 2. For University Use Only . 12. Click [Analysis Feature] > Model Analysis. Click Flip (so that the arrow faces downward) and O K A Y.2 1 . 10. 15. then press <ENTER> and click OK. Notice the calculated volume in the Results section. 11. Measure the one-sided volume after the shell feature.

This relation will calculate the difference between the previous one-sided volumes.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. Notice the calculated volume in the RESULTS section. Select the FLUID_LEVEL datum plane.vol:fid_vol_shell] 5. 8. edit the name to [VOL]. 9. Task 3. For the TYPE. Type [VOL_FLUID] for the name and press <ENTER>. and observe the volume calculations as shown below.2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click [Build Feature]. 4. Ensure that the volume parameter is set to Yes. Click [Next Page]. Click [Analysis Feature] > Relation from the type button. type the relation on one line as [vol=vol:fid_vol_solid . Click [Build Feature]. Click Flip (so that the arrow faces downward) and OK. 3. and click Close. 6. 2. 5.NOTES 4. select One-Sided Volume . and press <ENTER>. 1. Click [Next Page]. When the text editor appears. 7. Figure 26: Volume Calculations of Styrofoam Cup For University Use Only . Create relation type analysis feature.

0] and Regenerate . 1. 5. and click Modify. Regenerate. Toggle the model tree display off and on to refresh its display.NOTES Task 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Modify the height of the Fluid_Level plane to [2. Select the first protrusion from the model tree. 2.50]. Investigate the fluid volume when the model is modified. and refresh the Model tree. and refresh the Model tree. 4. > Figure 28: Modified Styrofoam Model For University Use Only . The volume values should update as shown below. Figure 27: Updated Volume Values 3.2 3 . Modify the height of the Fluid_Level plane to [5. Regenerate . Modify the dimensions as shown in the following figure.

Task 5. Click Done Sel and enter [2 .0 1. click S e t and enter [50] as the value followed by OK . 2. 6. 3. Use behavior modeling capabilities to solve for a fluid volume of an even 50. Click Add > Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization in the main menu.2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .5 dimension). Refer to the following figure and set Study Type to Feasibility . 0] and press <ENTER> for the minimum value and enter [3 . 5. Figure 29: Conducting a Feasibility Study For University Use Only . Click Add Dimension and select the dimension corresponding to the Fluid Plane (2. Set the design constraint to solve for a vol_fluid = [50. Click Add from the design constraints area and select VOL: VOL_FLUID.0] .NOTES 6. The new fluid volume with the modified dimensions is 43.15in3 and is shown in the model tree. 4. 0] for the maximum value.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. From the parameter drop-down in the DESIGN CONSTRAINTS dialog box.

9.0] with a fluid level of [2. Figure 30: Setting Convergence Value 8. For University Use Only .2 5 . click Close > Confirm. Click Options > Preferences followed by Run and edit the Convergence % to [0.788].001] as shown in the following figure and click OK. Refresh the model tree and observe that the vol_fluid is [50. Figure 31: The “Feasible” Solution 11. Click Compute. After notification of a feasible solution.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Click > File > Close Window . 10.NOTES 7.

and click Compute > Close. Open CRANKSHAFT. and click . edit the name to [COG ]. 5.PRT. select Model Mass Properties as the Type. press <ENTER> and click [Next Page] . Create an analysis feature to measure the mass properties of the part. 4. and the Mass parameter to YES to create only the Mass parameter. Type [Mass_Props ] for the name. Click [Analysis Feature] > Model Analysis. Toggle the Volume parameter to NO . press <ENTER>. Toggle the Csys creation to YES . Output a MASS parameter and a datum coordinate system at the center of gravity.NOTES EXERCISE 3: Crankshaft Optimization Task 1. 6. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. 7. Figure 32: Start Model 2. If necessary.2 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only . Click [Next Page] . 3.

2 7 . 10. and select A_1 and COG to measure between them as shown.NOTES 8. Use a sensitivity study to determine which dimension modification (height or width) has the most impact on the COG. verify the Distance parameter is set to YES . Set the following config option which will use Excel to create graphs instead of the Pro/E graph window. 1. A_1. Click [Analysis Feature] > Measure . 11. Click Close . For University Use Only . Type [ COG_DIST ] for the name. Select Distance as the Type. and click Task 2. Ask your instructor if you need assistance. (The distance should be approximately 0. Create another analysis feature that measures the distance between the center of gravity coordinate system and the crankshaft’s axis of rotation. 9.35) . press <ENTER> and click [Next Page] . Figure 33: Distance Measurement 12.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Click > Side and note that the current COG is well below the axis of revolution.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0.10%.2 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . If necessary. Note that dimensions d28 and d27 are the main height and width dimensions. the following graph should appear: For University Use Only . click Info > Switch Dimensions to see dimensions in their symbolic form. Click Analysis > Sensitivity Analysis > Dimension .NOTES Figure 34: Setting Configuration Option 2. Select d27 and notice that the system by default has placed Min and Max values for the Variable range at +/. > DISTANCE:COG_DIST > Ok to set the parameter to 5. Figure 35: Selecting Main Lobe of Crank 3. Click Compute . and select the main lobe of the crank as shown below. Click plot. After a few moments. 4.

Figure 37: Modified Sensitivity Plot For University Use Only . Then click Dimension . 6.1].Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. 7. and click Compute . (0.404 .0.NOTES Figure 36: Sensitivity Plot Note: This is an Excel spreadsheet running inside of Pro/E. Edit. changing this dimension by +/-10% would move the COG by [0. Select the graph and > Delete .2 9 .1) Therefore. Record the difference between the high and low values on the vertical graph scale. or Delete the graph. on the graph will allow you to Open. select d28 .304 = 0.

0. select the DISTANCE:COG_DIST parameter. and click OK > Cancel. the Sensitivity Study has determined that the height dimension (d28) has more of an impact on the COG than the width dimension (d27). 1. In conclusion.529 . 2. then click . check only Graph constraints and click OK . Create a FEASIBILITY STUDY to get the center of gravity and axis of revolution to equal zero. 10. (0. Click Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization > Feasibility . Task 3. Click Add. 3. Click Close . Figure 38: Minimum and Maximum Values 5. and select dimensions d27. 9. Click Add Dimension .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. For University Use Only . d28.3) Therefore. and d31. Again.3 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Set the value to [0 ]. record the difference between the high and low values on the vertical graph scale.3]. Enter the Min and Max values as shown.229 = 0. Click Options > Preferences.NOTES 8. changing this dimension by +/-10% would move the COG by [0. There are certain dimensions that you already know you can change. 4. Click Compute for the results.

Click Undo. and therefore could be removed from future studies. Notice the COG distance quickly dropped from 3. Conclusion: balancing this model is feasible.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Undo the changes and close the dialog box for now. then Close from the OPTIMIZATION/FEASIBILITY dialog box. Figure 40: Comparing Dimension Values 8. Click > Side and notice that if these new values were kept. Compare the before and after dimension values as shown below.3 1 . 7. the COG Csys would coincide with the rotation axis. For University Use Only .NOTES Figure 39: Optimization Limit Convergence Graph 6. Note that the radius value hardly changed. 9.5 to a value very close to zero with only two iterations.

Figure 41: Selecting Edges 4. 4. (A feasible solution should be found) For University Use Only .3 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 1. Create a third analysis feature so that the material between the main shaft and the balancing body stays above a certain value. Then click OK > Cancel .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. press <ENTER> and click [Next Page] . Set the parameter value to be ‘> = ’ a set value of [0.NOTES Task 4. Click Options > Preferences. 1. and select the two edges shown. 3. Type [MATL_DIST ] for the name. 2. Compute the results. 3. Click [Analysis Feature] > Measure . Notice that the previous values are maintained. Redo the Feasibility study to see if a feasible solution can be found when this new distance parameter is added as another design constraint. and click . Click Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization . verify the Distance parameter is set to YES . Select Distance as the Type. Task 5. Click Add > DISTANCE:MATL_DIST . 2.25]. Click Close . and uncheck any available graph options.

Notice the reduction of mass on the graph and that the dimensions are now varied differently. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. Click Optimization from the top of the dialog box. Compute the results. For the final criteria. Figure 42: Observing Graph and Model For University Use Only . Leave Minimize and Mass:Mass_Props as the goal. check that the mass of the part is minimized.NOTES TASK 6. as well as all the other constraints by running an OPTIMIZATION STUDY.3 3 . 1. 3.

4.077).25 ] to [0.3 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Figure 43: Modifying Diameter Dimension 5. Figure 44: Side View of Model For University Use Only . Notice Feature > the Optimization feature in the model tree. Add the distance parameter column to the model tree and switch to a side view. From the Optimization/Feasibility dialog. Notice that now the COG is slightly below center (0. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. Then click Close and repaint the screen. 2. incorporate the Optimization into the model as a feature so that modifications to the model will be incorporated automatically. click File > Make . Modify the diameter dimension as shown in the following figure from [ 1. Modify the model to confirm this. 3. Next. Display suppressed features in the model tree. Select the Optimization feature from the model tree and click > Suppress > OK . Click View > Model Tree Setup > Item Display and select Suppressed Objects.NOTES Task 7.75 ] and Regenerate.

3 5 .NOTES 6. Save the model and click File > Close Window .Commercial Use Prohibited Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0. 8. For University Use Only . Notice the model is now balanced again. Click OK . Figure 45: Optimized Model 7. Select the Optimization feature from the model tree and click > Resume . Click File > Erase > Not Displayed.

and many others. These measurements produce parameters and logical datums that you can use to determine geometric properties such as mass. Now with Behavioral Modeling tools. • • • For University Use Only . Analysis features allow you to measure geometric properties of the model at specific points in the list of features or components of the model. A Feasibility Study searches for a solution within the range of chosen dimensions to meet a set of constraints. An Optimization Study solves a feasibility problem with an additional condition.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. curvature. you need to manually iterate the geometry of designs.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 0. the center of gravity. you have learned that: • • Behavioral Modeling gives you the tools you need to design product models that are driven by your requirements and specifications. The goal is to minimize or maximize some analysis feature parameter. You specify the constraints by means of one or more analysis feature parameters. you can now explore optimal solutions with a complete understanding of the performance and behavior of your design. In traditional design systems. a goal.3 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . volume. You can even create your own parameters as the result of a relation or a userdefined analysis.

Assembly. The model automatically reflects any changes that you make to a drawing. Conversely. drawings also reflect any changes that you make to a model in Part. Explore the associativity that exists between a model and its drawing. Objectives After completing this module. Create dependency between certain drawing views. you will be able to: • • • • • Describe the different types of drawing views in Pro/ENGINEER.Commercial Use Prohibited . Create a simple production drawing that will detail dimensions and notes.For University Use Only . or Manufacturing modes. Sheetmetal. Create a production drawing for an existing part model. You can also import drawings from other systems into Pro/ENGINEER.Module 11 Drawings and Drawing Templates You can use the Drawing mode in Pro/ENGINEER to create detailed drawings of all Pro/ENGINEER models. Page 11-1 . Pro/ENGINEER associates drawings with their parent models.

When first placed. the NEW DRAWING dialog box will open. The first view must be a general view. The format that you select will automatically define the sheet size and orientation. select the sheet size.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you can add views to your drawing using the V i e w s option. Auxiliary For University Use Only . right. Adding Drawing Views After selecting a format or specifying a sheet size.NOTES DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS Creating a Drawing After selecting Drawing from the NEW dialog box and assigning it a name. or along an axis. you can reorient it during placement. This dialog box gives you multiple options in which you can assign an associated model. the system uses values that you specify for the height and width of the drawing sheet.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. Types of Views The five primary view types available in the VIEW TYPE menu are: • • – An orthographic projection of an object as seen from the front. You also have the ability to assign a predefined company format. Note: You should always use default datums to orient a general view. datum plane. or left. and specify an orientation: • • • With a portrait orientation. Projection – A view created by projecting 90 degrees to an inclined surface. With a variable orientation. With a landscape orientation (the default setting). Using the ORIENTATION dialog box. top. it appears in the default view orientation. the system uses the larger sheet dimension as the height and the smaller one as the width. the system uses the larger sheet dimension as the width and the smaller one as the height.

or a spline.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. Detailed • – A planar area cross-section revolved 90 degrees about the cutting plane line and offset along its length. • • • • Full View Half View – Shows the entire model. The boundary for the detailed view can be a circle. Partial View For University Use Only .NOTES • • – A view that you orient and is not dependent upon any other view for its orientation. – Shows only the portion of the model on one side of a datum plane. – Removes sections from large objects between two points and moves the remaining sections close together. Broken View – Shows only the portion of the view that is contained within a boundary. as shown in the following figure. General – A view that you create by taking a portion of an existing view and scaling it for dimensioning and clarification purposes. ellipse (with or without a horizontal or vertical major axis).3 . you can specify how much of the model is visible in the view. Revolved Figure 1: The Five Main Types of Views Using the View Type Menu Using other options in the VIEW TYPE menu.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. – Does not display a cross-section.NOTES Figure 2: Specifying How Much of the Model to Make Visible Adding a Cross-section To determine if a view is a single surface or a cross-section.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . – Displays only the selected surface of a particular view Of Surface orientation. The following figure illustrates the various types of cross-sectional views that you can create using the XSEC TYPE menu. you use the VIEW TYPE menu options: • • • Section No Xsec – Displays a cross-section for a particular view. For University Use Only .

Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. Any views that you establish with this option remain at the same setting regardless of any changes that you make to the ENVIRONMENT dialog box settings.NOTES Figure 3: Cross-Sectional Views Manipulating Views Using the Move View option. auxiliary. Using the Delete View option. However. the change does not affect the other views in the drawing. they have to be erased with the Erase View option. For example.5 . When you modify them. you can move general and detailed views anywhere on the sheet. For University Use Only . Instead. you display views independently of the ENVIRONMENT dialog setting such as Wireframe . only those views and their children change. you can move projection. Using the Disp Mode option. the PARENT views—views used to create projection views—cannot be deleted. Those views have their own scale parameters that you can change using the Modify option. Hidden line . and No Hidden. you can place certain views. and revolved views only along their line of projection. Restore erased views using Resume View . Using the Scale option. you can show some views with hidden lines and others with no hidden lines.

NOTES DEFINING DRAWING TEMPLATES Drawing templates are provided by the system to automatically generate drawings of models. Instructions Parametric notes – • update to new drawing model parameters and dimension values. also to build a new drawing with a new drawing object (model). Set desired view display.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . • – makes up a drawing but is not dependent on the drawing model. This information is copied from the template into the new drawing. Basic information • – used to configure drawing views and the actions that are performed on that view. Drawing templates: • • • • Automatically create views. Use drawing templates to: • • • • Define the layout of views Set view display Place notes Place symbols • • • Define tables Create snap lines Show dimensions For University Use Only . Create snap lines Show model dimensions based on the template. The notes are re-parsed or updated when the template is instantiated. Drawing templates contain three types of information for creating new drawings.

and other production personnel. The advantage of this is the template allows the creation of portions of drawings automatically. Once the driving dimensions in the drawing are in place. Automatically create snap lines for placing dimensions. In manufacturing. additional dimensions in the drawing will need to be created to convey additional information. The machined part template can define the views that are typically placed for a drawing of a machined part. they are fully modifiable and changes are immediately reflected in the model. you can create a template for a machined part versus a cast part. DETAILING THE DRAWING Detailing is important as a method for communicating design intent to machinists. Once the views are created on a drawing. mold makers. showing the dimensions are usually just a click of a button. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1.7 . Place company standard machining notes.NOTES Customizing Drawing Templates You can also create customized drawing templates for the different types of drawings that you create. For example. This associativity allows fast and efficient design development. Therefore the redundancy involved in both the designer and the draftsman duplicating the same dimensions is eliminated. You can: • • • Set the view display of each view.

Feature Dimensions have many options: • • • • • • Show All View – Shows all dimensions for the model. Manipulating Dimensions Once you have displayed dimensions in a drawing. – Shows all dimensions of a selected view. However. they only appear in a single view to prevent double dimensioning. click Create from the DETAIL menu and Dimension from the DETAIL ITEM menu. Use Mod Attach to locate dimensions of rounds and chamfers on another reference of the same feature. – Shows the dimensions of a selected part in a selected Part & View view. you cannot modify driven dimensions in a production drawing because their values are based on the part model. Part – Shows the dimensions of a selected part. To create them. In the drawing.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Creating Feature Dimensions Feature dimensions are created in the actual part and assembly models. – Shows the dimensions of a selected feature.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. For University Use Only . Use Switch View to move a dimension to another view. you can delete them from a drawing. Creating Driven Dimensions Dimensions that you actually create in Drawing mode are known as Driven dimensions. – Shows all dimensions of a selected feature in a Feature Feature & View selected view. then select the desired geometry. Modifying and Deleting Driven Dimensions In contrast to feature dimensions. you can use options in the DETAIL menu to manipulate them in various ways: • • • Use Move Text to relocate the dimension text along the dimension or leader elbow line.

where # is the dimension ID. – &xxxxx. where xxxxx is the symbolic Instance number &p0). To specify parameter information. Parametric Notes When you include a dimension or parameter in a note. The NOTE TYPES menu allows you to specify leaders. – &p#. text justification.NOTES • • • • Use Flip Arrows to flip arrows inside or outside the extension lines. User-defined parameters name of the parameter For University Use Only . choose Modify from the DRAWING menu and select the value. To change a dimension value in a Parametric Note.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. it is referred to as a Parametric Note.9 . Use Clip to clip extension lines to a selected location. where # is the parameter ID (for example. and text styles. Use B r e a k to break an extension line. Use Align to align dimensions. Creating Drawing Notes Use the Note option in the DETAIL ITEM menu to create drawing notes by either typing them in or pasting from a text file. use the following format: • • • Dimensions – &d#.

Method In Exercise 1. Tools Table 1: Drawing and Interface Icons Icons Description Select icon Wireframe display Dimension For University Use Only . In Exercise 2. you create a drawing of a gear part from a default template.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. manipulate its dimensions and create notes.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you create detailed drawings of solid parts and explore the associativity between drawings and part models.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you retrieve the gear part drawing that you started earlier. You explore various options available and create additional views. you modify the views in the drawing in different ways and regenerate it to explore its associativity with the solid gear part. In Exercise 3.

click Browse in the Default Model section and browse to GEAR. type [gear]. Click Browse in the TEMPLATE section and browse to PTC_STD. Create drawing called gear from the default ptc_std template. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1.DRW as shown in the following figure. In the NEW DRAWING dialog box.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing Fourth view Second view 3-D view from template First view Third view Figure 4: Completed Gear Part Drawing Task 1. Click 2. click Drawing . For University Use Only . In the NEW dialog box.PRT in <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 11_drwgs_drw_templates. and click O K .1 1 . 4. . 3.

Select DTM3 for the FRONT REFERENCE and DTM2 for the TOP REFERENCE in the ORIENTATION dialog box. Click OK to finish view creation. Task 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. 5. 4. 6. 3. Click V i e w s from DRAWING menu. 2. 1.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only . Click General > Done to accept the default selections in the menu manager. Create and orient the first view of the gear model using a general view. Click OK .NOTES Figure 5: The New Drawing Dialog Box 5. Select in the drawing window towards the left for the general view. Do not be too concerned with the placement. The drawing is created with the 3-D view automatically. you can move the view later.

1. Click Add View > Auxiliary > Full View > Section > No Scale > Done . 1. Experiment with moving the view. Finally. from the INTENT MANAGER. 3. Leave the defaults Projection > Full View > No Xsec > No Scale . Select a location to the lower right of the first view to place the cross section view. For University Use Only . Select on the view to activate it and place it at a new location. 5. 2. Click Done . 3. Add the second view as a projection view using the general view as its parent. Read the message area and select DTM4 as shown in the following figure.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. Click Full > Total Xsec > Done . position the view toward the left side of the sheet. 1. Task 4.1 3 . 4. Define a cross section through the entire view. Add the auxiliary view with a cross section displayed. Click 2. Task 5. 4. Click Add View from the VIEWS menu. Select the first view you added. Move the general view that you just created. Read the message area and note that there is a conflict in the parent view.NOTES Task 3. 2. 3. Place the projection view by selecting a location above the view you just added (General View) near the top of the sheet as shown in the first figure of this exercise.

Now once again click on the general view you created. 6. Click in the INTENT MANAGER if its not already selected. Select C from the XSEC NAMES menu. 7. Select the cross-hatching line as shown in the following figure.” The system allows you to use cross sections that have been defined in part mode. 2. Task 6. Read the message area.NOTES Select DTM4 Figure 6: Orienting the Auxiliary Reference 5. 9. 8.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. Click Done/Return from the VIEWS menu. Note: You can create cross sections in the drawing if you have a license for the optional add-on module Pro/DETAIL. For University Use Only . The auxiliary view appears to the lower right of the general view. 1. Change the cross-hatching to improve its display on the drawing. This displays the cutting arrow.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Note: This part has a previously created cross section named “C.

4. Select DTM3 for FRONT REFERENCE and DTM2 for the TOP REFERENCE in the ORIENTATION dialog box. 1.1 5 . Scale the view to [.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. The resulting modified cross-hatching is shown in the following figure. Do not close the dialog box. 3. For University Use Only . 4.NOTES Figure 7: Selecting Cross-Hatching 3. Click Angle > 0 > Done . Click once again H a l f. Click Views > Add View > General > Scale > Done . Figure 8: The Modified Cross-Hatching Task 7. 5. Add an isometric view. Select a location toward the upper right of the drawing to place the view. 2.75]. 6. Click Spacing > Half. Click Edit > Properties.

12. Click Edge/Axis from the REFERENCE drop-down list. Click Horizontal from the REFERENCE drop-down list. 6. Select the vertical left edge of the gear.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . If you make a mistake. 10.NOTES 5. 8. Type [45] for the angle followed by Apply. Type [30] for the angle followed by Apply. Click OK from the ORIENTATION dialog box. click Undo . 11. Finish the orientation. For University Use Only . 9. Click Angles from the TYPE drop-down menu 7.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1.

5. Modify the display of hidden and tangent edges from the default settings. Click Done Sel . Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp from the MENU MANAGER.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. Change the display of the general and isometric views (First and Fourth views). 4. For University Use Only . Cick Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done . Click No Hidden > Tan Solid > Done from the VIEW DISP menu. 2. 3. 1. Click the two views followed by Done Sel .1 7 .NOTES EXERCISE 2:Modifying Created Views and Testing for Associativity Fourth view Second view 3-D view from template First view Third view Figure 9: Completed Gear Part Drawing Task 1. Change the display of the projected and AUXILIARY view by selecting the SECOND view and the THIRD view shown in the preceding figure.

Task 4. 1.000. Save the drawing file. Modify the scale value for the sheet. Create a straight hole on the flat surface of the slot feature. Create a feature on the gear part to view the associativity between the part model and the drawing. Select the PROJECTED view or SECOND view and move to new location. 4. Click [Hidden line] to revert to hidden line display. Observe how the PROJECTED view and SECTION views move in relation to the GENERAL view. 3. Click and open GEAR. Click Edit > Value .PRT. Task 3.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click Edit > Value and select the sheet scale value 1. Task 2.NOTES 6. Click [Repaint]. Change scale back to 1. 3. Do not erase the drawing.625]. Type [. 2. Notice that there is no change in the display of the views. type [1. shown in the following figure. Figure 10: Modifying Drawing Scale 2. Projected and auxiliary views are children of their parent view. 4. 2. Now select the GENERAL view or FIRST view and move to new location. Experiment with moving these view types 1. For University Use Only . Click [Wireframe display]. 7. 5. Click . Place the view.000]. 1.000 on the lower left corner of the screen.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. Click Done/Return to return to the highest menu. Click in the INTENT MANAGER.

Close the GEAR PART window. Task 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. 4. Click Window and select GEAR. Click Erase > Current > Select All > OK . Activate the DRAWING window and select GEAR. 5. since you are going to delete it later. Return to the gear part.PRT. The system erases the gear drawing. 3. For University Use Only . 4. Activate the GEAR DRAWING window again.1 9 . Save before erasing both files from memory. Click File > Close Window . 3.DRW.NOTES Note: You can choose the dimension and attributes of the hole. Delete the hole feature. GEAR. Note that the hole appears in all of the views.DRW is used again in the next exercise. 1. A simple way to revert back to the last saved version is to erase the model from memory without saving. Note: Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically save to disk any change that you have made to the model. Erase the drawing and the part without saving the hole feature.DRW. Click Window and select GEAR. 2.

2. Retrieve the gear drawing GEAR.2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Now select the lower left general view (First view) on the screen.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. 1.NOTES EXERCISE 3: Detailing the Gear Part Drawing Figure 11: Detailed Gear Drawing with Dimensions Task 1. In the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. Click View > Show/Erase . Close the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. For University Use Only . and select View in 4. show the model dimensions. 5. 3. Click Done Sel . click the SHOW BY options. To begin the detailing process.DRW.

Select other dimensions and adjust them similarly. Select the 76.NOTES Task 2.66 dimension with the select cursor to another location. 8. Clean up the display of dimensions. For University Use Only . 3. Click Tools > Clean Dims in the DETAIL menu. 5. Click Apply > Close . 3. 6. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. Clear the Create Snap Lines check box. and move it Erase extra dimensions in the drawing 1. 1. 4. Click Task 3. Click . 2. 7. then click Done Sel .2 1 . Click Done/Return in the TOOLS menu. to repaint the screen. Click View > Show/Erase > Erase . Select the first view again.3mm dimensions shown in the following figure and click Done Sel from the GET SELECT menu. Select the two extra 6.

This allows the note to automatically update with changes in the dimensions. 1. Create a parametric note that displays the value of the pin hole diameter. For University Use Only . Click to view the results.2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click Close . 5. Task 4. Follow the same procedure to do this task as for the FIRST view.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. Enable the display of dimensions for the section view and clean up their display. Task 5.NOTES Figure 12: Erasing Dimensions 4. Note: The system allows for notes to be displayed with the parametric dimension within the text.

Type [one place] and press <ENTER>. Type [&d26 drill thru ] in the message area. Use Query Sel .2 3 . Click File > Close Window . Click Leader > Normal Ldr > Make Note leaving alone all the other defaults from the NOTE TYPES menu. 8. 10. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1. Select the ∅ symbol from the SYMBOL PALETTE window. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. All the dimensions and parameters change to their symbolic form. Look at the lower right or cross section view and identify the symbolic dimension representing the diameter of the small hole (for example: symbol:d26). Click OK For University Use Only . 5. Select a location for the note. Save the drawing. 4. 11. 6. In the cross section view. select the edge of the small hole as the entity to which the system should attach the note.NOTES Figure 13: Creating a Parametric Note 1. if necessary. Click Insert > Note . 3. 9. then press <ENTER>. 7.

The principle of associativity works between solid part models and their drawings. General views can be in any orientation and placed using the default view. their display modes can be changed and scale values modified. Broken View.2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . and Revolved. Auxiliary. General views can have their own scale. Dimensions can be manipulated. Views can be moved and deleted. and saved views from part mode. General views are not dependent on any other view.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 1. Cross-sections can be created in part mode or drawing mode during view placement. and Partial View. The majority of dimensions included on the drawing come from the part model. Default datum planes should always be used to orient the first general view. you learned that: • • • • • • • • • • • • • There are five primary Drawing View types—Projection. Drawing notes can be created to provide other information and for documentation. View types have four further sub-options: Full View. For University Use Only . Detailed.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. There are two types of dimensions: Feature Dimensions and Driven Dimensions. Half View. General.

Use the Transform option to duplicate surfaces and datum curves.Module 12 Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy In this module you will learn how to duplicate features using Pro/ENGINEER. Use various copying techniques. Varying. and General. When creating complex parts and assemblies.For University Use Only . you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • Duplicate features using two different methods: Patterning and Copying. often a need arises for duplication. The design intent in these cases specifies identical features or parts to be placed at separate locations in the same model. Specify different location options for the Copy feature. Establish dependence among various copied features. Specify the dependency of copied features. Select features for copying.Commercial Use Prohibited . Differentiate between Dimension Patterning and Reference Patterning. Objectives After completing this module. Page 12-1 . Implement patterns with three different options: Identical.

The system automatically groups all entities belonging to a pattern together in the model tree for ease of selection. When you modify the dimensions of the pattern leader. Patterning Benefits The patterning method of feature duplication offers numerous benefits: • • • • A pattern behaves as a single feature. Pattern Types Dimension Patterns With dimension patterning. Therefore.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2. the system automatically updates the whole pattern. the system assigns the dimension value of the pattern leader to all instances in the pattern. The original feature that you base the pattern on is referred to as the “pattern leader. This pattern type is only available if the leader feature for the new pattern references the leader feature of the existing pattern. you increment existing dimension values of the leader in one or two directions to specify the pattern instances.” There are two ways to define patterns: • • Increment the pattern leader’s dimensions. For University Use Only . you can change pattern parameters and regenerate. Reference Patterns With reference patterning. Reference an existing pattern.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you reference an existing pattern to define the locations of the new instances.NOTES CREATING PATTERNS You can use patterns to create multiple instances of a single feature. The pattern is parametric. If you do not increment a dimension value. This is illustrated in the following figure. the system takes all instances that are created by the first direction and increments them in the second direction. If you use the second direction.

A reference pattern of a counterbore hole Figure 1: Reference Pattern Pattern Options There are three patterning options: Identical. and General. these restrictions are listed in the following table.NOTES Note: In contrast to a dimension pattern. For University Use Only . A reference pattern updates automatically when the pattern that it references changes. It obtains this information from the pattern that it references. Varying. Identical Varying General Figure 2: Pattern Options Pro/ENGINEER places certain restrictions on pattern options.3 .Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2. the system does not provide parameters for the number of instances or increment values in a reference pattern.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2.NOTES Table 1: Patterning Restrictions Pattern Option Identical Varying General Regeneration Varying Speed Instances Fastest Moderate Slowest No Yes Yes Allowing Instance Intersections No No Yes 1st 1st 1st I II III Figure 3: Pattern Parameters I II III Figure 4: Pattern Parameters For University Use Only .4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

For University Use Only .5 .Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2. However. you must increment an angular dimension using radial placement.NOTES 1st 1st 2nd 2nd Figure 5: Pattern in Two Directions A B Figure 6: Pattern in Two Directions Creating Rotational Patterns To create a rotational pattern for a hole. for a sketched feature (such as a protrusion. cut. you must create an internal datum plane at an angle. or rib).

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2.NOTES Figure 7: Rotational Pattern of a Sketched Feature For University Use Only .6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

For University Use Only . A sketched centerline has no direction associated with it. so the pattern results may not be consistent.Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2.7 .NOTES Figure 8: Rotational Pattern of a Sketched Feature Note: Do not use a sketched centerline to create the rotational dimension.

You must specify a location for the copy. – Mirrors the features about a planar surface or datum plane. For University Use Only . The Copy feature allows you to create new features by copying existing features to a new location. a straight curve. Copying is an effective technique for duplicating multiple features. Once you have created a feature. click one of these options from the COPY FEATURE menu: • • • • – Specifies new feature references. you can specify whether the copy and the original features should share dimensions. Copying is an effective technique for duplicating multiple features.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2. Copying Methods You can copy a feature by specifying new references.NOTES COPYING FEATURES Once you have created a feature. or axis. using the same references. and then establish dependence or independence for the copied feature’s dimensions.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . or a coordinate system. Using any of these techniques. you must specify a reference for the direction of translation or rotation: a plane normal. Select the features to copy. You can retain each reference or click an alternate. and moving. edge. New Refs Same Refs Mirror Move – Retains the same feature references. Specifying Copy-To Locations To select a location for the copy. mirroring. Copying by Translating and Rotating Features When copying a feature by translating or rotating it. it is often more efficient to reuse it rather than re-create it. – Specifies rotation and/or translation. it is often more efficient to reuse it rather than re-create it.

Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2. Independent Note: If you copy a feature from a different model or version. Figure 9: Rotation Specifying Copied Feature Dependencies You can control the level of design intent that you capture in your model by making the copied features dependent or independent.9 . Likewise. Change to rib height does not affect others. Figure 10: Independent Copies For University Use Only . • –the system assigns each copied feature its own dimensions so you can modify them without affecting the original.NOTES Arrow shows positive rotation using the right-hand rule. any changes that you make to the original do not affect the copy. the system automatically makes the geometry independent.

1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .3 when the current model is xxxx. select one of these options from the COPY FEATURE menu: • • • • Click – Selects features to copy from the current model. so changing the value affects both ribs. FromDifModel – Selects the features to copy from a different version of the current model (for example. The other dimensions are dependent. you can break that dependency using the Make Indep option in the MODIFY menu. Dependent Change to rib height affects all dependent features. Figure 11: Dependent Copies Tips & Techniques: If you create a copy as dependent. This option is available when you select New Refs.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2.prt. xxxx. All Feat – Selects the features to copy from a different model.NOTES • – any dimensions that were unchanged at the time of the copy creation become dependent on the original feature. This option is available when you select New Refs or Same Refs. Choosing Features to Copy To select which features to copy. the two dimensions specified when the copy was made are independent.5). In this example. Changing one of them on the second rib only affects the second rib. – Selects all features in the current model. You can make individual dimensions or the entire section independent.prt. FromDifVers For University Use Only . This option is available when you select Mirror or Move .

Move copy 2.NOTES Specifying Dependency Options To make the copied feature dimensions independent of their parent dimension. Copies that you create using the FromDifModel and FromDifVers options are automatically independent.Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2.1 1 . Tips & Techniques: If you use the Mirror Geom option instead of Copy . When you create a dependent copy. Before copy operation 3. use the Independent option. Same Ref copy 4 New ref copy 1. you can make the entire section or individual dimensions independent by clicking Modify and Make Indep. Mirror copies After copy operation Figure 12: Instances of the Copy Feature For University Use Only . Original model 5. you can mirror all of a model’s geometry about a plane without creating new features. click the Dependent option. The system adds a Merge reference to the Model Tree. To specify that copied feature dimensions (that you have not changed) depend on the parent feature for their values.

In Exercise 5.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . To produce the end result. you pattern the cut and then modify the angle of the slot. you create a dimension pattern. Tools Table 2: Interface Icons Icons Description Hidden line display Datum Plane Datum axis For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2. you create mounting tabs on the steering column support shaft by using various copy options. Method In Exercise 1.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal The goal of this lab is to duplicate geometry using patterns and copy features. you work on a model using the copy feature and mirror geometry options. In Exercises 2 and 3. you create a reference pattern and a rotational pattern respectively. In Exercise 4.

1 3 . For University Use Only . and open DIM_PATTERN. 2. type [4] as the incremental value between pattern members and press <ENTER>. 5. 2. 3.PRT. 4. At the prompt. Click Task 2. Click File > Set Working Directory . Click Done from the EXIT menu. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 12_duplication_features. Select the 10 dimension on the cut. Click Varying > Done . [Hidden line]. 1. Open an existing part to be used for creating a pattern. Click 4. Create a varying pattern of cuts. 3. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2. Click Feature > Pattern and select the cut.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Dimension Pattern Start model Model after patterning and modifying Figure 13: Dimensional Pattern of a Cut Task 1.

7. Select the 45. 2. Type [12] as the total number of instances in this direction and press <ENTER>. 3. Select the cut. pattern. Figure 14 Varying Pattern Task 3. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2.degree dimension and type [-45] as the new value and press <ENTER>. Click Done from the EXIT menu once again. Modify the angle of the leader to change the angle of the entire 1. Click Done from the FEAT menu.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click Modify . Regenerate the model.NOTES 6. Save the model and erase it from memory.

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating a Reference Pattern

Start model

Finished Model

Figure 15: Reference Pattern

Task 1.

Start creating the reference pattern.

1. Open file REF_PATTERN.PRT. Task 2. Create an identical pattern of holes in two directions.

1. Click Feature > Pattern and Select the hole. 2. Click Identical > Done . 3. Select the 20 dim ension and type [20] as the new value and press <ENTER>. 4. Click Done from the EXIT menu. 5. Type [3] as the total number of instances. 6. Now Select the 10 dimension and type [20] and press <ENTER>. 7. Since this is the only dimension that you are going to increment in the second direction, click Done from the EXIT menu. 8. Type [2] as the total number of instances in this direction.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 1 5

NOTES

Figure 16: Identical Hole Pattern in Two Directions

Task 3. Create a square cut on the leader feature of the pattern, so that you can create a reference pattern of it. 1. Click Insert > Cut > Extrude . 2. Click One Side > Done . 3. Select the top surface of the protrusion as the sketching plane. 4. Click O k a y from the DIRECTION menu. 5. Click Default for orientation. 6. Delete the current references in the REFERENCE dialog box. 7. Specify the axis A_1 as a reference. Task 4. Sketch the section shown in the following figure.

1. Work on the leader figure shown, so that it can act as the reference feature later. 2. Sketch vertical and horizontal centerlines passing through axis A_1. This should be the only reference in the dialog box. Should you have selected any other references by accident, delete them. 3. Sketch a square centered on axis A_1 making sure Intent Manager makes the assumption of equal line lengths and symmetry.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2- 1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

Figure 17: Section for Slot

4. Modify the width to 10mm. The model regenerates automatically. 5. Click to exit from sketcher.

6. Remove the material to the inside of the cut by selecting O k a y. 7. Click Blind > Done . Type [2.5] as the depth value. 8. Complete the feature. Click OK . Task 5. Create a reference pattern of the cut feature.

1. Click View > Model Tree , hold mouse over the feature Cut id
1205

and

. Select Pattern in the pop-up menu.

2. Define the pattern using the leader reference. Click Ref Pattern > Done . 3. Save the part and erase it from memory.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 1 7

NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Rotational Patterns of Sketched Features
Task 1. Start creating the rotational pattern

1. Open BLOWER.PRT. 2. Click [Datum plane] and and axes.
[Datum axes] to display datum planes

Figure 18: Blower Base with Dimensions Shown

Task 2. Create a horizontal/vertical reference plane for sketching, with an angle associated with it. 1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude . 2. Click One Side > Done . 3. Select the top face of the disk as the sketching plane for blower blades. 4. Click Okay to accept the default direction. 5. Click Bottom from the SKET VIEW menu. 6. Click Make Datum from the SETUP PLANE menu. 7. Click Through ; then Query Sel to Select axis A_1.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2- 1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

8. Click Angle , then Select DTM3 and click Done . 9. Click Enter Value and type [30]. 10. Specify the references as the outer edge of the circular protrusion and the datum you just created. Make sure you do not specify DTM3 or DTM1 as a reference. 11. Sketch the section as shown in the following figure. Make sure that the bottom straight edge has a constraint of perpendicular to the outer edge of the base protrusion.
Pick Datum for horizontal reference Section

Figure 19: Sketching the Section

Tips & Techniques:
To help aid you in your sketching, you should sketch your sections large, then modify the dimensions to change the size of the model.

12. Add the dimensioning scheme as shown in the following figure. Modify dimensions to the values specified and then click [Done]. 13. Accept the default Blind > Done . 14. Type [73.5] as the protrusion depth value.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 1 9

NOTES

Figure 20: Sketch of Blower Blade

Task 3. Pattern the blower blade protrusion in one direction using a varying pattern.

1. Select in model tree the protrusion you just created, Pattern . 2. Click Varying > Done . 3. Select dimension 30. 4. Type [60] as the increment value and press <ENTER>.

>

5. Do not define any other dimensions to increment. Click Done . 6. Type [6] as the number of instances for the pattern. 7. Do not create instances in the second direction. Click Done from the EXIT menu. 8. The final pattern of blades is as shown in the following figure.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2- 2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

Pattern angle

Original angle
Figure 21: Pattern of Blades

9. Close the window.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 2 1

NOTES

EXERCISE 4:Copying Features

Start model

Finished model

Figure 22: Copying Features Task 1. Retrieve an existing model and copy some of the features.

1. Open the part file FEATURE_COPY_MIRROR.PRT. 2. Change the display to hidden line. Task 2. You can make copies either independent or dependent. The selection you make will be based on you design intent. Create a dependent copy of the lower right slot. 1. Click Feature > Copy. 2. Click Same Refs. 3. Click Dependent > Done . 4. Select the slot. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. 5. Select the Dim 1 and Dim 3 check boxes, which are the 45-degree angle and the 65-inch dimension respectively. Click Done . 6. For Dim 1, type [0.00] and press <ENTER>. 7. For Dim 3, type [410.00] and press <ENTER>. 8. Click OK.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2- 2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

9. Click Done twice to return to the highest level menu. Task 3. Experiment with modifying dimensions; then make the copy independent of the parent slot. 1. Click Modify and select the parent slot. 2. Select the 125.00 dimension, type [75.00] as the new value, and regenerate. 3. Modify the length of the slot back to 125.00, as described in the previous step. 4. Modify the 45-degree angle of the parent slot. Type [30.00]. Note that the angle of the copy does not change because you broke the dependence of that dimension when you modified it to create the copy. 5. Change the angle of the parent slot to back to 45 degrees. Task 4. Break the dependency between the two slots.

1. Click Modify > Make Indep from the MODIFY menu. 2. Click Section from the MAKE INDEP menu. 3. Select the copy and click Done Sel and Done . 4. All of the copy’s dimensions are now independent of the parent slot. Task 5. You have the ability to mirror the entire model by using various options. Mirror all of the features to complete the part using Copy. 1. Click Feature > Copy from the FEAT menu. 2. Click Mirror > All Feat > Independent from the COPY FEATURE menu; then click Done . 3. Select DTM1. 4. Save the model and erase it from memory.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 2 3

NOTES

EXERCISE 5: Building the Steering Column

Figure 23: Steering Column Support Shaft

Task 1. Create a copy of the first tab at the bottom of the shaft 90 degrees to the first. To do this, use a move type copy. 1. Open STEERING_COLUMN.PRT. 2. Show axes and datum planes if the system is not already showing them. 3. Click Feature > Copy > Move > Select > Dependent > Done . 4. Select the protrusion, axis, hole, and round features that compose the first tab in the Model Tree; then click Done Sel > Done .

Round Axis and hole

Protrusion

Figure 24: Features to Copy

5. Click Translate . 6. Toggle to show datum planes and Select FRONT datum.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2- 2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

7. Flip the arrow so that it is pointing in the appropriate direction. Click O k a y.

Figure 25: Translation References

8. Type [7.5] as the translation value. 9. Click Rotate > Crv/Edg/Axis. 10. Select axis A1 as the motion reference for the rotation. (Toggle if the axes are not visible.) 11. Point the arrow as shown in the following figure and click O k a y to accept direction. 12. Type [90] as the rotation value.

Figure 26: Rotation Direction

13. Click Done Move to complete the move. 14. Select the 2.0 length dimension and click Done from the GP VAR DIMS menu to complete definition of the feature.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 2 5

NOTES

15. Click OK . Task 2. Mirror the copied tab about the SIDE datum.

1. Click Feature > Copy > Mirror > Dependent > Done . 2. Select the COPIED tab from the Model Tree. Click Done . Note:
Because the system placed the copied tab features in a group when it copied them, you can select them as a single item.

3. Mirror the tab about the SIDE datum plane.

Figure 27: Mirrored Tab

Task 3. Make the original tab longer, and thicken the tab for strength. Because the other two tabs are dependent copies, break their dependency to create a thickness that is different from that of the original. 1. Click Modify . Select the protrusion (protrusion id 50) of the original tab. 2. Change the 2.00 length to 3.00 and the 0.25 thickness to 0.375. 3. Regenerate the model. 4. Notice that the two copied tabs also change thickness. They do not, however, change length. This is because when you copied the first one, you gave it a new length, which automatically made the length dimension independent.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2- 2 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

Task 4.

Break the thickness dependency between the tabs.

1. Click Modify > Make Indep > Dimension . Select the protrusion ID 50 again and the 0.375 thickness dimension. 2. Select the features to make the dimension independent. Notice the 2 highlighted copied tabs that are current and dependent. 3. Select both of the copied tabs from the model. Click Done Sel >
Done Sel .

4. Modify one of the copied tabs. Type [0.125] as the thickness. Type [60] as the new value for the 90-degree rotation angle; then regenerate. 5. Save the model.

Figure 28: Finished Steering Column Support Shaft

6. Click File > Close Window . 7. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK .

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 2 7

NOTES

MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that: • • • • • • Duplication is important for capturing design intent and Pro/ENGINEER enables it through Pattern and Copy. Patterning is of two kinds: Dimension Patterning and Reference Patterning. There are three Pattern options: Identical, Varying, and General. In the Rotational Pattern for a hole, the angular dimension must be incremented using radial placement. Dependence/Independence can be established between copied entities. Copies of part geometry can be created using Move and Mirror.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 2- 2 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Module

13
Creating Assemblies
In this lesson you learn how to create a functional assembly of solid components.

Objectives
In this module, you will learn to: • • Create assemblies. Modify assemblies.

P age 13-1

NOTES

OVERVIEW
To create an assembly you must join components (parts) by selecting surfaces and features. There are several things to consider when building assemblies: • • • • Always begin an assembly with a base component, a component that you are unlikely to remove from the assembly later on. Consider how you might break down the assembly into separate subassemblies. Begin your assembly with default datums. Add the first part or subassembly onto the default assembly datums.

Figure 1: Assembly Default Datum Templates

The Surface Normal Vector
A surface normal vector is an imaginary vector that is perpendicular to the model surface. Pro/ENGINEER can distinguish between the outside surface and inside surfaces that comprise your solid models.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3- 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

Figure 2: A Model’s Surface Normal Vectors

Constraining Component Parts
Placement constraints create parent/child relationships between the assembled components and the new component that you want to add. The following is a list of commonly used constraints: • – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in opposite directions and become co-planar.
Mate

Figure 3: Mate Constraint

Mate Offset –

Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in opposite directions and are offset by a specified negative or positive value.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3- 3

NOTES

Offset

Figure 4: Mate Offset Constraint

– Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in the same direction and are made co-planar. Align will also make two axes co-axial.
Align

Note:
Pro/ENGINEER does not associate any direction to the alignment of an axis.

Figure 5: Align Constraint

– Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in the same direction and are offset by a specified negative or positive value.
Align Offset

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3- 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

Offset

Figure 6: Align Offset Constraint

– Selected surfaces, utilizing their normal vector, point in the same direction and are parallel.
Orient

Figure 7: A Usable Reference for Orient Constraint

– Selected cylindrical surfaces of revolution become co-axial. These surfaces do not need to be full 360-degree cylinders, as shown in figure below.
Insert

Surfaces of revolution

Figure 8: Insert Constraint

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3- 5

NOTES

Placing Components
All the constraints, such as mate , align , insert , and coord sys, are available in a single component placement dialog box. As shown in the next figure, this allows for efficient component placement workflow.

Figure 9: The Component Placement Interface

The following features are available from the Component Placement dialog box: • • • • A consolidated list of assembly constraints beginning with Automatic provided as a drop-down list A Flip button to reverse a component by 180 degrees An editable offset value in the constraint list A toolbar at the top of the dialog box that allows you to: Control whether the new component appears in the Assembly window or new window

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3- 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

NOTES

Toggle between the Constraint Placement and Move dialog box options Fix component or place it in the default position Access Component Interfaces Change Preferences

Packaging Under-Constrained Components
Under-constrained components are those components which are not completed oriented into the assembly. This means that there is some ambiguity in the component placement that Pro/ENGINEER cannot resolve. This situation can be resolved with packaging. Packaging allows you to: • • • Add components to an assembly without fully constraining them. Add components to an assembly without defining its true or final location. Allocate space in an assembly for components that will be added at a future time.

Over-Constrained Components
When you over-constrain a component, you add more constraints than is necessary in order to capture additional design intent.

MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES
Since Pro/ENGINEER is associative, you can make changes to all components in sub-assemblies while working in the assembly. However, the system limits the scope of those changes through the MOD ASSEM menu options listed below: • • •
Mod Dim

allows you to modify any dimension in the assembly. allows you to modify only the top-level assembly

Mod Assem

dimensions. allows you to modify any subassembly in the top-level assembly, which includes assembling components into the subassembly.
Mod Subasm

allows you to modify parts in the assembly, which includes modifying dimensions, redefining existing features, adding new features, as well as most operations that you can perform at part level.
Mod Part

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3- 7

NOTES

Note
When creating part features at the assembly level, you should use caution to avoid creating unwanted parent/child relationships between the part and the assembly.

Modifying Your Design Intent
You can modify your design intentions with the following commands: • • • • • • – Changes the order in which the system regenerates components in the assembly.
Reorder

– Inserts a component in between two components in the regeneration cycle of the assembly.
Insert Mode

– Changes the external references that a component has for constraints.
Reroute

– Removes components or assembly features from the assembly model.
Delete Suppress Resume

– Temporarily removes components from the assembly.

– Resumes components in the assembly model.

Saving Assemblies
When you save an assembly, the system automatically saves any changes that you made to any of the parts in that assembly.

Note:
If you rename a part in an assembly, but the assembly is not in RAM, the placement fails when you retrieve that assembly.

OTHER ASSEMBLY OPTIONS
Generating Bills of Material
Bills of Material (BOMs) are lists of sub-assemblies and components, including component quantities. With Pro/ENGINEER you can generate BOMs with the Info pull-down menu.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3- 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER

you can create exploded views of the assembly model. Note You cannot assemble components in an exploded view.NOTES Creating Exploded Views Using the Explode option in the View pull-down menu.9 . Figure 10: Unexploded Machine Assembly Figure 11 Exploded Machine Assembly For University Use Only . the system asks you to unexplode the assembly using the Unexplode option in the View pull-down menu. If you try to do so.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3.

In Exercise 2. Method In Exercise 1.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this exercise you will learn how to create and modify assemblies. and align constraints from the component placement interface. you will assemble existing components into a subassembly by using the insert.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3. mate. Tools Table 1: Assembly Icons Icons Description Assemble component at default location Show component in separate window Specify new constraint Remove selected constraint Change orientation of constraint (flip) For University Use Only . you a machine crank assembly by using the subassembly created in Exercise 1.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

Assemble the bracket part. Click Component > Assemble and open BRACKET.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Create a Subassembly of Three Parts Figure 12 Completed Base Subassembly Task 1. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box. Start creating the subassembly. 6. In the menu manager. 1. Make sure Use default template is checked. click [Assemble at default location].PRT from your working directory. Click OK > Close .Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3. 4. > millimeter Newton Second > Set. 5. Task 2. Scroll the menu down by clicking the blue arrow and then click Done to return to the high-level menu. 2. Click . 1. click Set Up > Units.1 1 . Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 13_creating_assemblies. 2. Select Assembly and type [BASE] as the name. For University Use Only . 3. Click File > Set Working Directory .

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3. 1. Click Insert from the drop-down list. Click Component > Assemble and open BUSHING.NOTES 3. Begin to assemble the bushing part to the bracket part. 2. The default constraint type is Automatic in the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box. Toggle off the datum planes. as shown in the following figure. For University Use Only .PRT. Select on the outside cylindrical surface of the bushing part and again on the inside revolved surface of the slot on the bracket part. Click OK .1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 3. 2. 1. Figure 13: Assembly of the Bushing Task 4. Insert the bushing into the bracket using the revolved surfaces on the models. Task 3.

NOTES Figure 14: Selecting Component References for Insert Task 5. pointed by the cursor in the following figure. Select the back surface of the bracket using Query Sel .Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3. Select on the planar flange surface on the bushing. 2. Click Accept when the proper surface highlights. Figure 15: Selecting References for the Mate Constraint 3. highlighted in the preceding figure. Click Mate from the CONSTRAINT TYPE drop-down list. 1.1 3 . For University Use Only . Mate the lip on the bushing to the back of the bracket.

Now Select on the top surface of the bracket as shown.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . You will see the results of the mate constraint. 1. Click once again to the original position. Now click [Change orientation of the constraint]. 2. For University Use Only . Click [Show component in separate window]. But you don’t actually need this offset. 5. 3. Select the bushing key as shown in the following figure. 7. 5. 6.NOTES 4. Click to add another constraint. Accept the default offset value near the message area. You will notice that the bushing gets flipped. The bushing part is shown in a separate window. So click on the offset value in the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box to get a drop-down list.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3. 6. Add a third Align constraint so that the key on the bushing lines up with the d slot in the bracket. Type [0 ] for the offset value and press <ENTER>. Figure 16: Selecting References for the Align Constraint 4. Task 6.

PRT 3. Turn off the display of the datum planes. Click Assemble . 8. then select RING. Figure 18: Base Zoomed In For University Use Only . Task 7. as shown in the following figure. 2.NOTES Figure 17: Orienting the Bushing to the Bracket 7. Assemble the ring part to the bushing part using constraints. The subassembly is fully constrained. Note: You can always delete constraints you have created by clicking and specify a new constraint by clicking .Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3. Zoom in on the bushing model so that you can see the snap ring groove more clearly. Click Align for the constraint type and O r i e n t e d for the offset and click OK .1 5 . 1.

6. as shown in the preceding figure. For University Use Only .NOTES Insert references Mate references Figure 19: Constraints for Assembling Base with Ring 4.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3. Type [0] followed by <ENTER> as offset. Orient the tabs so they match the orientation of the flat of the bushing. revolved surface of the recess in the bushing. Add an insert constraint between the inner revolved surface of the snap ring and the small. Select on the surfaces shown in the following figure. Click to add another constraint. 5.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Add a mate constraint between the front side surface of the base and the back of the snap ring.

For University Use Only .1 7 . Click Align for the constraint type and O r i e n t e d for the offest in the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box. Click OK .NOTES Figure 20: Aligning Snap Ring to the Flat of the Bushing 7.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3. Click and close window. 9. 8.

then open BASE. 2. 1. Select Empty for the template and click O K . Insert the shaft into the hole in the bushing. Assemble the shaft component by using constraints.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3. Setup the assembly to use millimeter units. select Assembly and type [MACHINE] as the name. [Assemble at default placement]. Click Component > Assemble . 1. Task 2. 2. Assemble the MASTER_SHAFT part into the machine assembly. 2. Assemble the base assembly into the machine assembly using the datum planes.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Figure 21: Selecting References for Align Constraint For University Use Only .ASM. Assemble the base subassembly to the machine assembly by clicking Task 3. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to create three default datum plane features. Click Set Up >Units > millimeter Newton Second > Set > OK > Close . 1. 3. Click . Start creating the new assembly.NOTES Exercise 2: Create the Machine Assembly Task 1. Uncheck Use default template option.

but orient the back of the crank with the end of the shaft.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3. Figure 22: Assembling the Crank Part to the Machine Assembly 1. Figure 23 Assembled Crank 3.NOTES 3. Add the crank part to the assembly by using the assembly constraints.1 9 . Task 4. 4. The system says it is fully constrained. 2. Align the small hole on the crank with the small hole on the shaft by Selecting the axes. For University Use Only . Specify an offset value of [100 ] and press <ENTER> . Insert the crank into the shaft. Create an Align constraint between the end surface of the shaft and the bracket surface. Assemble the crank part. 4.

4. Save the assembly.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3. Task 6. 5. Create a new part feature. Add a simple edge round to the bracket with a 20mm unit radius.NOTES Task 5. Accommodate another change in the design intent by adding an edge round on the two top edges of the bracket. Type [50. Click Feature > Create . 1. Click Modify from the ASSEMBLY menu. 1. Click Mod Part from the ASSEM MOD menu. 2. Assemble the gear part into the assembly using constraints similar to those that you used for the crank part. Figure 24: Modified Bracket For University Use Only . 2. shows the modified bracket. While working at the assembly level. 2. Task 7. 3. Select the base feature to display the dimensions. Select the bracket part. Select the 25 dimension. accommodate a change in the design intent by modifying the bracket width. then press <ENTER>.2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .0]. Assemble the gear component to the machine. Regenerate only the part model. 1. 6.

Click Bill of Materials from the INFO pull-down menu. Generate a Bill of Materials for this assembly.2 1 . 2. 5. For University Use Only . Click Close from the INFORMATION WINDOW 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3. Click O K . Read the entire INFORMATION WINDOW. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. 1. use the scrollbar if necessary. Erase all models that are not displayed.NOTES Task 8. Close the working window. 3.

Packaged or under-constrained components are usually added to assemblies to get a spatial feel for the completed assembly. You can extract a Bill of Materials of an assembly. You can create exploded views of assemblies.2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Modifying parts at the assembly level is adopting a top-down approach to design. Over-constraining occurs to capture additional design intent.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 3.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. you can make changes to all components and sub-assemblies while working in an assembly. • • • • • For University Use Only . Sometimes this is necessary to capture the higher level design intent by creating part geometry in the context of the assembly. Once the look is right. There are various constraint options for adding new components to an assembly. you learned that: • • • • Assembly creation has to begin ideally with base components and these usually are the Default Assembly Datums. the component can be fully constrained. Since Pro/ENGINEER is associative. Components of an assembly can be deliberately under-constrained or over-constrained.

Commercial Use Prohibited .Module 14 Principles of Top-Down Design In this module you will learn the principles of top-down design.For University Use Only . you will be able to: • • • • Describe the principles of top-down design. P a ge 14-1 . Robust models can be built only by the rigorous implementation of the principles of top-down design. Objectives After completing this module. Describe the Pro/ENGINEER tools that support the top-down design process. Study reference control in relation to the top-down design approach. List the advantages of top-down design.

NOTES INTRODUCTION Definition Top-down design is a method of designing a product by capturing toplevel design criteria first and then passing this information from the top level of the product’s structure to all related subsystems. communicating.2 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design . Stages of Top-Down Design • • • • Planning Creating product structure Sharing design-critical information Capturing interactions between individual components The Approach Top down design can be conceived as an ongoing process of capturing. and managing design information. It is the best methodology to harness and control Pro/Engineer’s associative design tools when conceptualizing and building large assemblies. Figure 1: Top-Down Design Architecture For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 4.

detecting these inconsistencies and correcting them consume a considerable amount of time. an engineer designs individual components independent of the assembly. a critical interface on two models does not match). As the assembly grows. After detecting problems. • • For University Use Only . a designer discovers that the models do not meet the design criteria (for example. after creating the assemblies.3 .NOTES Comparing Top-Down Design to Traditional Approaches In Top-down design the distribution of information happens from top design levels to lower design levels. Often.Commercial Use Prohibited Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4. Design Information Component Component Component Figure 2: Distribution of Information from Top to Bottom In the traditional assembly design approach. the designer manually adjusts each model. using a manual approach to ensure that components fit properly and meet design criteria. Component Design Component Design Component Design Assemble Components Figure 3: Traditional Design Approach Characteristics of the Traditional Design Approach • • The designer places components in subassemblies and then brings those subassemblies together to develop the top-level assembly.

It can be used to manage large assemblies.4 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design . This supports a team environment where different groups or individuals own different subsystems and components. Furthermore. the corresponding mounting hole on the mating part also moves. if one of the mounting hole locations is moved. THE SIX STEPS OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN • • • • • • Defining Design Intent Defining Preliminary Product Structure Introducing Skeleton Models Communicating Design Intent Continued Population of the Assembly Managing Part Interdependencies For University Use Only . An example of a desirable dependency is the location of a mounting hole in one part and the corresponding location in another part. Top-down design organizes and helps enforce the interactions and dependencies between components of an assembly. If a change is made at one level. Many interactions and dependencies exist in an actual assembly design and it is desirable to capture these in the model of the design. Tools exist in Model Tree design to enable users to capture desirable dependencies while limiting undesirable ones.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 4. The skeleton contains the important criteria of a design such as mounting locations. a complex assembly design may be divided easily into separate tasks to be assigned to the different team members in the early stages of a design. organize complex designs. This methodology can be used to manage large assembly designs by allowing the user to retrieve only the skeleton structure of the assembly into memory and make desired changes. control motion and support more flexible assembly designs. space requirements for subsystems and parts. it is shared among all of the other related assemblies and/or components. Changes can be made to the skeleton and these changes will be propagated to the subsystems of the entire design. and design parameters such as critical dimensions.NOTES Benefits of Top-Down Design Methodology Top-down design methodology has many advantages. Therefore. An organized assembly structure allows information to be shared between different levels of an assembly.

Skeleton models serve a variety of purposes defining form. This planning helps the designer understand the product better and start the design of the system and/or detailed components. Also. Step 2 . function and design.Defining Design Intent All products are designed with some preliminary planning.NOTES Step 1 . ideas. The designer can leverage this information to begin defining the structure of the design and detailed requirements of individual components within Pro/ENGINEER.Commercial Use Prohibited Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4. proposals and specifications may exist to define the products' purpose. Defining the preliminary product structure helps to organize the assembly design into manageable tasks that can be assigned to design teams or individual designers. Some examples are: • • • Space claim (form / fit) Component to component interface definition (fit) Motion representation (function) For University Use Only . fit. they can be used to share design information between subsystems and act as a means to control the references (or interactions) between these subsystems. important mounting locations.Skeleton Models Skeleton models act as a 3-D layout of the assembly and may be used to represent space requirements. Sketches.Defining Preliminary Product Structure The product structure consists of a list of components and their hierarchy within the assembly design. and motion. Many of the major subsystems required for the design will be determined when defining design intent. Step 3 .5 . and function of an assembly. The product structure can be created easily in Pro/ENGINEER allowing the creation of subassemblies and parts without having to create any geometry. Existing subassemblies and parts can also be added to the product structure without actually having to be assembled.

Step 6 . Many methods exist for populating the assembly structure with detailed parts. and the top-level design criteria have been distributed. Existing components can be assembled. Step 5 . The result is an assembly developed concurrently that fits together the first time. This means that the subassembly design team can work confidently on their own design since they have local access to the toplevel design criteria. Methods can be used to manage the many desired interdependencies between components of a design in an organized manner. and merge features to further capture design intentions. many separate design teams can be working on their subassembly and referencing the same top-level design information. This information then can be distributed to the appropriate subassembly skeleton models as needed. For University Use Only .Managing Part Interdependencies One of the greatest benefits of parametric modeling is the ease with which designs can be changed. Consequently.Communicating Design Intent Top-level design information such as important mounting locations and space claim requirements can be placed in the top-level assembly skeleton model. Managing interdependencies allows components from one design to be used in another and provides a means for controlled change and update of the entire assembly design.6 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design .Continued Population of the Assembly Once the skeletal representation of the assembly has been defined. or components can be created in the context of the assembly. individual component design can begin.NOTES Step 4 . These individual parts can be related to each other using other functionality such as assembly relations. Various data-sharing features such as Copy Geometry and Shrinkwrap can be used to communicate and propagate the design intent from level to level and from model to model. The recommended Pro/ENGINEER tool for storing design intent at different levels of the product structure is the skeleton model.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 4. layouts. skeleton models. This allows for each subassembly to contain a skeleton model with only the pertinent design information for that subassembly.

For University Use Only . Furthermore. they may need to further define the design intent.NOTES Tools exist in Pro/ENGINEER to help guide users in setting up the dependencies between parts and subassemblies that will propagate the desired changes throughout the entire design. parameters. pass the critical data to other models and continue to populate the assembly.7 . This is an iterative process—one in which the design becomes more detailed and specific throughout the project. You should.Commercial Use Prohibited Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4. Note: As the design evolves and the designers are able to obtain more information about the design. Reference control can be configured to limit undesired dependencies and allow desirable ones. and relations defined in a Layout can be parametrically linked to skeletons or part models. PRO/ENGINEER TOP-DOWN DESIGN TOOLS The following Pro/ENGINEER tools enable you to successfully capture design intent using the top-down design approach: Layouts Layouts are central locations in which you can capture non-geometrical top-level design criteria. a Global Reference Viewer tool has been provided to help users investigate and understand existing interdependencies between components. Dimensions. therefore. expect to perform the sequence of steps listed above more than once in order to complete the project. A layout is an especially useful tool in cases where you do not have exact information about the geometry. edit the skeletons.

8 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 4. There are three typical uses for skeletons: • Space claim (form / fit) For University Use Only . You can use skeleton models to represent the design information in a layout in a 3-D representation.NOTES Figure 4: Layout for a Race-Car Model Figure 5: Using Layouts as a Top-Down Design Tool Skeletons Skeletons are central locations in which you can capture geometrical central design information for a model.

NOTES Figure 6: Using Skeletons for Space Claimes • Component to component interface definition (fit) Figure 7: Using Skeletons for Fit • Motion representation (function) For University Use Only .9 .Commercial Use Prohibited Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4.

datum planes. Figure 9: The Publish Geometry Dialog Box • Copy Geometry – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows you to transfer design information such as surfaces. and datum axes from one model to another. making it easier for others to later use the Copy Geometry function.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 4.NOTES Figure 8: Using Skeletons for Motion Representation Data Sharing Features • Publish Geometry – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows a designer to document the design information.1 0 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design . For University Use Only .

NOTES Figure 10: Accessing the Copy Geometry Feature • – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows you to ‘shrinkwrap’ a model or assembly with a surface.1 1 . Shrinkwrap For University Use Only . thereby dramatically reducing regeneration time in the recipient model.Commercial Use Prohibited Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4.

NOTES Figure 11: Accessing the Shrinkwrap Feature Managing References / Interdependencies Two functions that help the user in the sixth and ongoing step of top-down design are Reference Control and the Global Reference Viewer Reference Control The Reference control dialog box allows users to define the allowable scope for external references that the system will create. For University Use Only . or when creating Copy Geometry features. This function is particularly useful when designing in an assembly.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 4.1 2 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design .

1 3 .NOTES Figure 12: Reference Control Dialog Boxes For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4.

NOTES Global Reference Viewer The Global Reference Viewer is a very powerful tool that gives you the ability to find any type of external reference between models in an assembly. This tool is useful to ensure that only desired references have been created.1 4 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 4. Figure 13: Model and Global Reference Viewer Dialog Boxes For University Use Only . or for troubleshooting of existing assemblies.

and Copy Geometry tools enable the Top-Down Design approach. • • For University Use Only . Layouts. Defining Preliminary Product Structure.Commercial Use Prohibited Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4. Managing Part Interdependencies. you have learned that: • • Top down design can be conceived as an ongoing process of capturing. There are six steps in the Top-Down Design process: Defining Design Intent. Skeletons. Managing references and interdependencies using reference control options and the global reference viewer are an important part of the ongoing cycles of working in models built with the Top-Down Design principles. Communicating Design Intent. communicating. Introducing Skeleton Models.1 5 . and managing design information. Publish Geometry. Continued Population of the Assembly.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

For University Use Only .Module 15 Additional Datum Features and Skeletons In this module you learn how to create additional datum features like datum axes. and datum coordinate systems. Objectives After completing this module. Employ additional datum features as robust references for solid geometry Create a basic skeleton feature Page 15-1 . datum curves. In addition you will be introduced to skeleton features and their uses. you will be able to: • • • • Describe all available additional datum features in the software Create additional datum features using different methods. datum points.Commercial Use Prohibited .

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5.NOTES ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES Datum features are mass-less. For University Use Only .2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Uses • • • As centers of coaxial holes As references for assembly constraints As aids for the creation of other datum features Methods of Creation • • • • • • • • Thru Edge Normal Pln – Created through a straight edge of the model – Normal to a selected surface with linear dimensions to two references Pnt Norm Pln – Normal to a selected surface and though a datum point – Created through the “imaginary” center of any surface of revolution Thru Cyl Two Planes – Two Pnt/Vtx Created at the intersection of two planes – Created through two datum points or two vertices of – Goes through a point normal to the surface the model Point on Surface Tan Curve – Created tangent to a datum curve or at the end point of a model’s edge Datum Curves Datum curves appear on the model as orange lines. non-solid features that can be used as references and as parents to solid geometry. All datum features serve the purpose of construction type geometry. Datum Axes Datum axes appear as dashed yellow lines that often have name-tags such as A_1 . They can be straight or curved and open or closed loops. and A_3 . A_2 .

– Create a curve through a series of datum points.NOTES Uses • • • • As trajectories for swept features To help define the shape of assembly skeletons To aid in surface creation To measure features of a model Methods of Creation • • • • • • • Sketch – Uses sketcher functionality to create the curve on a flat – Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces. or spherical coordinates At Center – Creates a point at the center of an arc or a circle For University Use Only . Intr . Surf Thru Points Projected Formed – Projects a 2D curve onto a solid surface. surface. Datum Points Datum points appear as small yellow “x ”s on the model. with name tags such as PNT1 Uses • • • Help in creating datum curves and datum axes.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5. 2 Projection From Equation – Creates a curve based of mathematical equations. Used as references for assembly constraints. Methods of Creation • • • • – Creates a point on a selected surface using linear dimension to two references On Surface On Vertex – Point is defined at a vertex on the solid model Offset Csys – Points are defined offset from a coordinate system using Cartesian. – Creates a projected datum curve from two sections on non-parallel sketching planes. cylindrical. The formed curve preserves the length of the original curve. Used when creating holes that are placed on point.3 . – Transfers a datum curve onto a surface as a formed curve.

Each axis on the coordinate system is also labeled (x.y. vertex. For University Use Only . Orientation for manufacturing procedures.0 and 1.NOTES • – Creates a point along a datum curve or model edge with the following dimensional options.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5. Uses • • • Ability to define a zero position for datum points read in from file. Length Ratio • – Places the point using the actual arc length distance of the curve. Actual Length Datum Coordinate Systems Datum Coordinate Systems appear yellow on the model and usually have nametags.z). Origin at the intersection of two axes. Pnt + 2Axes – 2 Axes – Origin at a datum point. – Places a point on the curve as a percentage of the overall length (0. or origin of another datum coordinate system. Default – Origin at the first vertex of the base feature.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Field Point – Places a free-floating point on a selected reference such as a surface or a curve. Methods of Creation • • • • 3 Planes – Origin at the intersection of three planes. such as CS1. On Curve Offset – Places a point on the curve offset at a distance from a planar surface.0 are the start and end points of the curve). straight edges or straight datum curves. References for assembly constraints.

you open and ‘flex’ an assembly with a skeleton.5 .NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal The goal of this lab is to create additional datum features and use them as references to solid geometry. In Exercise 2. Tools Table 1: Additional Datum Features Icons Description Insert datum coordinate system Insert datum points Insert sketched curve Insert datum curve Insert datum axis For University Use Only . Then you create datum points and a datum curve to create a door handle. you use several datum features to create a simple skeleton.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5. you start with the default datums and a datum coordinate system included in any new part. In Exercise 3. Method In Exercise 1.

and [0] for z. 3. Once the coordinates of the last point have been entered. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 15_addtl_dtm_feats_skels . Task 3. [16].0. z data for the other points.0. we will create points at x.0. Create a second datum point at 4. 5. Enter [4]. [0]. [0] at the prompt. y. Task 1. 1. Click File > Set Working Directory . [0] at the prompt. 2. [16]. For University Use Only . Click [Insert datum points] from the sidebar and click Offset Csys from the DATUM POINT menu. type <ENTER> on a blank line. z positions have been defined. Enter [4]. [0] at the prompt. Create a new part with the name DOOR_HANDLE.0.16. 1. Create a new part and define the control points for the handle.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 3. Task 2. 1. y. Since we already have a coordinate system.16. Enter [0]. Create a fourth datum point at 0. Click Done to complete the feature. 4. Click Enter Points and type [0] for x. The part should look as shown in the following figure. z positions relative to it. enter in the x. 3. 2. Click Cartesian as the coordinate type. Once the first datum point’s x. 4.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5. 2. y.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Creating Additional Datum Features. [0] for y. Select the PRT_CSYS_DEF coordinate system from the model tree. Create a third datum point at 4.

Create a datum curve through these points. centered at the intersection of the centerlines. then click Select All > Done > Okay. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain. The trajectory is the datum curve that you created. 1. 3. and select PNT1. Click Done Sel > Done . Click Single Rad.0].NOTES Figure 1: Datum Points Task 4. Define a 1. For University Use Only . Click Task 5. Define a specific radius that the curve will take through each 1.0 inch diameter circle as the cross-section. Click OK to finish the feature Task 6. Click Insert > Protrusion > Sweep. click Thru Points > Done . 2. 4. [Insert datum curve]. 1. Select the datum curve. 2. 3. The order the points are created does matter because the curve will connect them in that order. Create a swept protrusion as the door handle geometry. Type [1. point.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5.7 .

Click OK to finish the feature.NOTES 5.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . . Figure 2: Final Solid Geometry For University Use Only . Click 6. The final part should look as shown in the following figure.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5.

1. Create a datum curve.9 . [Insert sketched Figure 3: Sketching Three Lines 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5. .NOTES EXERCISE 2: Creating a simple skeleton Task 1. For University Use Only . 3. 2. then select the vertices shown in the following figure. Click Task 2. Create a new part called LINK_SKEL using the default template. Select the FRONT datum plane and click datum curve]. Create points at the vertices 1. Sketch the following three line segments. Click [Insert datum points] > On Vertex .

NOTES Figure 4: Selecting Vertices 2. Click [Insert datum axis] > Pnt Norm Pln and select the FRONT datum plane and PNT1. Then click Done Sel > Done . you may also use for ease of use. (The tags for the points and axes have been turned off for clarity) For University Use Only . Create axes through the points 1.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Note: To accept default selections that the system provides such as Done Sel and Done . 3. The model is as shown in the following figure. Task 3.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5. Click Done Sel > Done . Click [Insert datum axis] > Pnt Norm Pln and select the FRONT datum plane and PNT0. Then click Done Sel > Done . 2.

3.NOTES Figure 5: Sketched Preliminary Model Task 4. Figure 6: Creating a Through Datum Plane 2. Create two additional datum planes 1. Click [Insert datum plane] > Though and select the curve shown in the following figure. For University Use Only .1 1 . Click > Though and select the diagonal curve.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5. Click Parallel and select the RIGHT datum plane and click Done .

5.NOTES 4. 3. select the FRONT datum and click Flip > O k a y to accept the direction for the X-axis. Select DTM1 and O k a y to accept the direction for the Z-axis. Click [Insert datum coordinate system] > Orig+Zaxis > Then select the vertex as shown in the following figure. > Modify . Turn off the display of . Select the datum curve and click For University Use Only . Click Plane Norm . Figure 8: Creating Normal Plane 4. Click Normal and select the FRONT datum plane and click Done . Create a coordinate system 1. Task 5. . Figure 7: Selecting Vertex 2.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5.

Modify the overall height dimension back to [40.0]. and Regenerate . Select the 40.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5.0 dimension. 8.1 3 . Notice the planes. axes.0] and Regenerate . modify to [15. Figure 9: Regenerated Model 7.NOTES 6. points. For University Use Only . and csys have updated with the changes.

Task 2. and click > Modify . 1. and turn off the display of datum features. Notice that the LINK_SKEL (from the last exercise) has been assembled as a skeleton in this assembly.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Open LINK_SKEL. 1. The three solid models have been assembled to the skeleton. then select the curve as shown in the following figure.ASM.NOTES EXERCISE 3: The Link Skeleton in an assembly Task 1. Figure 11: Selecting Curve to Modify For University Use Only . Figure 10: Link Assembly 2. Select the Link_Skeleton from the model tree. Open and ‘flex’ an assembly with a skeleton.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5. Make modifications to the skeleton.

0 dimension.NOTES 2. modify to [15. and Regenerate > Automatic.1 5 . 6.0]. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Modify the overall height dimension to [48. Notice that the components move with the skeleton. Click OK . Save the model and click File > Close Window . Select the 40.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5. 4. Figure 13: Model with Further Modified Dimensions 5.0]. and Regenerate > Automatic. For University Use Only . Figure 12: Model with Modified Dimensions 3.

3. Figure 15: Creating References For University Use Only . 5. Open a partially finished model consisting of datum features. Figure 14: Start Model 2.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .PRT. 4.NOTES OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: The Vice Grip Task 1. 1. Select the FRONT datum plane and click . Open VICE_GRIP. Display ONLY Axes and points. Select axis A_1 and the two points for references as shown in the following figure.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5. Create additional features to complete the ‘skeleton’. Select the two default references and click Delete.

Figure 16: Sketching a Model 1.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5. Note: If you have difficulty creating the sketch. After completing the sketch. Notice how the curves work together to form a ‘linkage’. The following figure has the angle modified to 18°.1 7 . Sketch the following curve. and select the 45° 2. Increase the sensitivity slider to its maximum and scroll the thumbwheel approximately between 45° and 15°. you may wish to open the completed vice-grip model.NOTES Task 2. For University Use Only . click dimension.

4. Complete the feature.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . or models could be directly assembled to simulate motion. For University Use Only . This ‘skeleton’ model now could be used to either design parts from as part of a top-down design process. and erase it from memory.NOTES Figure 17: Modified Angle 3. save the model.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 5.

you have learned that • • • • • • Additional Datum features are convenient and hassle-free features that aid model creation. therefore. Datum Curves often aid in surface creation using sketcher functionality.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module.Commercial Use Prohibited Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5. holes. Datum features are mass-less and non-solid. Datum Coordinate Systems are used for orientations in manufacturing procedures.1 9 . they can be deployed frequently when creating solid geometry. For University Use Only . and extruded circles. Datum Axes are created for all types of revolved features. Datum Points are used as references for assembly constraints and to place holes on point when they are created.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

Associate items to a layer. datum planes. Re-work existing parent/child relationships. suppressing. Control data with the suppression function. Resume suppressed features. you will be able to: • • • • • • Create layers for a given model. and so on.Module 16 Layers and Suppression In this module you will learn how to use layers. Manipulate layer display status. selecting. and parts – so that you can perform operations on those items collectively. Objectives After completing this module.Commercial Use Prohibited . Page 16-1 .For University Use Only . Layers enable you to organize model components – features. Typical operations you might perform with layers include manipulating the model view by displaying or blanking.

you can control the information that the system displays on the screen Layers enable certain actions as deletion. For example. draft items on a drawing. plotting.NOTES DEFINING LAYERS Functionality • Layers provide a means of organizing object items into related groups to avoid confusion They allow you to perform certain collective operations on groups of items such as features in a part.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. even other layers. and suppression for certain items. Pro/ENGINEER automatically associates the different features of a model to specific default layers. • • • Working With Layers • If you use a default template.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only . components in an assembly. Using layers.

you can associate only items from the top-level assembly to a top-level assembly layer. A single item can be associated with multiple layers. For University Use Only . For example.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6.NOTES Figure 1: Default Layers when Creating New Models from Template • You can create additional default layers using two methods. The principle is to associate those items to a layer that exist at the layer level. • • CREATING LAYERS Selecting the Object The active object is the model in which you actually create the layers and make changes. if you select the top-level assembly as the active object. You can have as many layers as needed or none at all.3 . The first is through the Config file and the second is by using the def layers command from the Layer pull-down menu in the LAYERS dialog box.

Figure 2: New Layer Dialog Box For University Use Only . Creating Layers • • • • Pro/ENGINEER identifies layers by name only. You can express the name in numeric or alphanumeric form.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. using a maximum of 31 characters. After you have established the active model. you can define a new layer by clicking the . you can associate items to them automatically as well as manually.NOTES Note: In Drawing mode. you can select either the model or the drawing as the active model. For example in the following figure. Once you have typed one layer name you can create multiple new layers by simply typing a new name and pressing <ENTER>. Associating Items to a Layer Once you have created layers. you can associate axis to a new layer automatically by selecting from the Default Layer Types. Similarly other feature-types can also be associated either to the same layer or to another layer.

and coordinate systems. You can select or create a layer in the native model. Select a feature. the system identifies the native model for the item. Curve Quilt 2-D Items Text Select a datum curve. When text tags are blanked. points. Select a layer. axes. – Specifies a feature type from the ALL FEATURES menu. Select a quilt.5 . Select a datum plane. Select nametags for datum planes. Point Datum Plane Layer Solid Geometry Note: If you attempt to associate an item to a layer that does not exist in the active model. or select from the MODEL TREE Select a datum point. – Specifies a range of features. Blanks all solid features of the part. Click Sel By Menu. All of Type Feat/Child – Specifies a feature and all of its children. You can copy them or switch them from one layer to another. Click All Instances or Individual in the LAYER COMP menu. You can perform the following procedures. as illustrated in the following figure: For University Use Only . or ignore the selection of that item.NOTES Using options in the LAYER dialog box. Select detail items. Setting the Display Status of a Layer One of the main reasons that you would organize items using layers is to control the kind of information that the system displays on the screen for that particular object.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. Table 1: Item Types Component (Assembly mode only) Feature Select component parts and/or assemblies. • • • • • Click the following feature options in the LAY FEAT menu: Select Range – Specifies the particular feature. you can associate items to and remove them from selected layers manually as well. Creates a layer hierarchy with sub-layers.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6.NOTES • • • • Show selected layers on the screen.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Blank selected layers from the screen by removing them. Isolate selected layers by displaying them on the screen and removing all non-isolated layers from the screen. Figure 3: Layer Display Dialog Box Not all layer items are available for manipulation in every Pro/ENGINEER mode. For University Use Only . Hide components associated to the selected layer by displaying them entirely as hidden lines when working in Hidden Line mode. The Hide display status has no effect when the environment setting is Wireframe . or remove them from the screen when working in No Hidden mode (in Assembly mode only).

In Assembly mode. and C) and two assembly datum planes. associate items to them. the display status reverts back to Show for all layers.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. In Part mode. • • • • For University Use Only . COMP_C and ADATUM_A. Associate datum plane B to the DATUM_B layer. Associate assembly datum plane A to the ADATUM_A layer. B. If you want to save the display status with the object. • Create layers COMP_B. • • • • • Create the layers PROT. Associate the protrusion to the PROT layer.NOTES Note: Pro/ENGINEER does not save the display status of a layer by default when it saves the object. Manipulating Layer Display Status In the following figure you create layers in Part mode and Assembly mode. you must click Save Status from the LAYER DISPLAY dialog box. and vary the display status of the items. you have a protrusion and three datum planes. The next time that you retrieve the object. Associate component B to the COMP_B layer. Do not associate component A and assembly datum plane B to any layers. Do not associate datum plane C to any layers. DATUM_A and DATUM_B.7 . you have three components (A. Associate datum plane A to the DATUM_A layer. Associate component C to the COMP_C layer.

8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . DATUM_B: Isolate D – All layers have a display status of Show . DATUM_A: Shown. DATUM_B: Blank C – PROT: Shown .NOTES Part Mode A B C Assembly Mode D E F Figure 4: Illustration of Layer Display Status • • • • • • A – All layers have a display status of S h o w n . B – PROT: Blank . When you suppress items. ADATUM_A: Show SUPPRESSION FUNCTIONALITY • • • Suppression temporarily removes a feature or component from the model The system does not regenerate the item. you can resume them at a later date. Using Suppression • • To simplify the model To reduce regeneration time For University Use Only . and the model appears as if you had never created the item. E – COMP_B: Blank .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. Suppress differs from delete in that it is not permanent. COMP_C: Show . ADATUM_A: Blank F – COMP_B: Isolate . COMP_C: Show . DATUM_A: Shown.

Saving and Resuming Suppressed Features You can save a model with suppressed features and/or components. Suppress the child. – Resumes the last group of suppressed items. Suspend action on the child until you regenerate the model. Layer Last Set Feat ID – Resumes items by specifying the feature ID of the item. Freeze the component (in Assembly mode only). You can resume them by selecting them from the MODEL TREE window or using one of the following options in the RESUME menu: • • • • All – Resumes all items that are currently suppressed. When you resume or regenerate suppressed features. When you retrieve or regenerate it. Pro/ENGINEER informs you that it has suppressed items. Change the dimensioning scheme of the child.9 . the system returns them to their original location in the feature list. For University Use Only . Pro/ENGINEER requires you to do one of the following: • • • • • Reroute the child references.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. – Resumes items by layer.NOTES • • To reduce screen repaint time To use design alternatives Suppressing Parent/Child Relationships If you suppress a feature or a component that has children and do not select the children as well.

you learn to control the information that the system displays in a part model and an assembly model.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . In Exercise 3.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. you experiment with suppressing a component in an assembly. Tools Table 2: Layers Icons Icons Description Saved views list Create layers Add item to selected layer Layers blanked Show layers Select all Unselect all For University Use Only . You will also use the suppression function to remove items from a model temporarily. as opposed to turning their display off.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal The goal of this lab is to use layers for organizing items in a model. You learn to use layers to control the display of the datum planes and axes of the part in Exercise 1. you suppress a feature in a part. In Exercise 4. Method In Exercises 1 and 2.

[Create layers]. 1. There’s only one Default view here. Task 2.NOTES EXERCISE 1: Using Layers in Part Mode Figure 5: Layer Crank Part Task 1. [Saved views list]. then shade and spin the model. Create two layers called DATUMS and AXES.1 1 . Click File > Set Working Directory . then click Add . Retrieve the crank part. Type [DATUMS].PRT. Click [File open] to open LAYER_CRANK. 1. Shade the model if it is not already so. Click 2. 2. Click View > Layers and click 3. 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. 3. For University Use Only . Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 16_layers_suppression.

1. Click Done Sel > Done Return > Done Return . 3. 1. Accept the selection. Unselect layer Datums and select layer A x e s. 1. 6. Associate the default datum planes to the datum layer. Task 5. Click the [Add item to selected layer]. Click Query Sel . Associate the axes of the part to the axes layer. Click Datum Plane from the LAYER OBJ menu. 4. 4. Select axis A_2 . 3. 1. Click A x e s and Datums in the LAYERS dialog box 2. Make sure the A x e s layer is not highlighted. DTM2. Accept the selection. then click Done Sel > Done/Return Task 4. For University Use Only . Click Show > Layer Items. Change the display status of the two layers you just created.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 2.NOTES 4. and DTM3 from the MODEL TREE. Task 6. Task 3. Type [AXES]. Select the Datums layer from the layers list. Accept the selection. Click and then click . Use the LAYER dialog box to see the features you associated with layers. 2. Select DTM1. Click Query Sel . Tree > Expand >All . Now Select A_5 and the cross-hole protrusion. Select the A_1 boss protrusion. 5. Click the icon and click Feature from the LAYER OBJ menu. then click O K .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. 2.

NOTES 3. but they still exist. Close the LAYERS dialog box. 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6.1 3 . Save the model and close the window Note: Pro/ENGINEER does not save the display status of the layers unless you click Save Status prior to exiting the LAYERS dialog box. 4. The system no longer displays the datum planes and axes on the screen. Figure 6: Layer Display Status Set to Blank For University Use Only . You can verify this by using the MODEL TREE.

NOTES EXERCISE 2: Using Layers in Assembly Mode Figure 7: Layers Assembly Task 1.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 3. 2. For University Use Only . Click View > Layers and click [Create layers]. Task 2. then click O K . Open an existing assembly and define two layers at the toplevel assembly called crank and gear. Open the PINION. Click Component from the LAYER OBJ menu. Associate the crank part to the CRANK layer and the Gear part to the GEAR layer. 3. 1.ASM. Click .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. Type [GEAR]. Unselect the GEAR layer and select the CRANK layer. Type [CRANK] and press <ENTER>. 4. 2. 1.

Click Top Level > Apply. Click Individual from the LAYER COMP menu. 3. Click [Blank layers]. 6. Repeat the steps above to associate the gear part to the gear layer Task 3.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6.1 5 . 1. Select the crank and gear layers.NOTES 4. 3. Repaint the screen and turn off the datum planes and axes. 1. 7. Click Done Sel > Done/Return > Done/Return . Finish the association. The system no longer displays the layer crank and layer gear components on the screen. 4. 2. Click Info > Feature List . Read the information window and close the information window and the FEATURE LIST dialog box. 5. then select LAYER_CRANK. 2. Figure 8: Layers Blanked from Display Task 4. For University Use Only . Verify that the components still exist.PRT. Blank the crank and gear layers. Click Sel By Menu .

For University Use Only .NOTES Task 5. [Hidden line]. Click from the toolbar. Click 2. Click from the LAYERS dialog box. Hidden Line 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. Click G e a r in the LAYERS dialog box. Task 6. 4. Determine the effect that other environment settings have on the setting for the layer. Click Figure 9: Hidden Line Display Mode 2. Set the gear model to hidden line display. 1. The system displays the component on the screen again.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . . Repaint the screen. 5. Click View > Layers. 3.

If [Show layers] next to the layer name is gray. Click Show > Layer Items. 2. Determine the status of the datums layer. In the LAYERS dialog box.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6.1 7 . For University Use Only . Notice all the models have a layer called DATUMS.NOTES Figure 10: No Hidden Display Mode Note The icons next to the layer names in the dialog box indicate the current status of the layers. 3. 1. 4. then some of the layers of the same name in assembly sub-components have varying display statuses set Task 7. Click the + icon next to DATUMS. but only some of them are blanked. Expand the datums layer items.

Repaint the screen. Click the . 4. Complete the association. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. For University Use Only . Type [asm_datums].NOTES Task 8. 4. Select the datums layer and click . The system no longer displays the datum planes of the parts on the screen. Repaint the screen. 3. 4. Select all the entries under Datums . 2. If the datums and axes are not visible. 1. then click Done/Return from the LAYER OBJ menu. [Select all] icon from the LAYERS dialog box 2. 1.ASM. All components and their datums should be visible again. 5. Click . Task 9. Select the three assembly level datum planes in the PINION. but does display the assembly datums. Click . Change the display of all the part level datum planes. Task 10. Set both layers back to S h o w n. Click 3. except IN_LAYER_BASE. check the environment icons in the toolbar. You have the ability to effect the display of layers within all levels of the assembly. Add the layer called Datums at the top level and associate the default datums of the assembly. 1.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . then click OK 3. as well as associate items at any level.ASM. Click [Unselect all]. Click Done Sel .

Save the assembly. 1. Click Close . Save the display status of the datum planes for the next time that you retrieve the assembly.NOTES Task 11.1 9 . Figure 11: Top-Level Default Datum Planes For University Use Only . or any of the associated components. 3. Erase the assembly from memory and all associated objects. Click Save Status from the LAYERS dialog box. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. 4.

In the following figure. therefore.2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . each hole has a cut that represents the threads. 3. Click Feature > Suppress from the menu manager. 1. Figure 12: PLATE. For University Use Only . it requires a great deal of time to retrieve and regenerate it. 2. Modify the circular protrusion which comes before the helical threads in the regeneration list of the start model.PRT. Note the amount of time that the system requires to update the geometry. Click Modify and Select the boss protrusion. Select the 5 dimension and type[10]. you suppress a feature to make it easier to retrieve and regenerate the part. 2. Suppress the complex thread cuts. Task 2. Modify the height of the circular boss to 10mm. note the amount of time the system uses to retrieve the part. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. Open the part named PLATE.PRT with Threaded Notes Task 1. and not for other operations. Regenerate the part. Select the pattern of cuts from the MODEL TREE.NOTES EXERCISE 3: Suppressing in Part Mode In this exercise. For this design you only need the threads for mass property calculations.

Click Modify and Select the 10 dimension. Save the model and erase it from memory. Verify this by checking in the MODEL TREE. Pro/ENGINEER does not consider it as existing in the model. Test the speed that the system regenerates the model without the threads in the model. Task 3. Regenerate the part. 3. then type [5]. Click Done Sel from the GET SELECT menu.2 1 . 4. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. Note that the cuts are no longer in the model. 1. Once a feature is suppressed.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. Figure 13: Thread Cuts Suppressed For University Use Only . Change the height of the circular boss back to 5. Note that the system updates the model much faster now. 2. Click Done from the FEAT menu.NOTES 3. 4.

Open the SECOND_PINION. Click Suppress and Select the crank part.2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click Component from the ASSEMBLY menu.ASM. For University Use Only . 2. Note that the system no longer includes the component in the assembly. 3. Click Done Sel > Done . 1.NOTES EXERCISE 4: Suppressing Components in Assembly Mode Figure 14: Alternate Components Task 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. Suppress the crank components in the assembly to see what the assembly will look like with a different crank part.

Select axis A_1 of hand crank model. Select axis A_1 of shaft model. Suppress the hand crank model. 4. Task 3.Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. Click Align from the constraint drop-down list in the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box. 3.PRT 2. Read the message in the message area. Select axis A_5 of hand crank model. For University Use Only . You can assemble different components to test their compatibility with an assembly design. 10. Click Suppress .2 3 . 8. 2. 7. Click Component > Assemble and double-click HAND_CRANK. Figure 15: Axes Aligned 5. Select Align for the second constraint. Select the HAND_CRANK using the MODEL TREE. then click O K . 1. 6. Assemble a model to replace the crank. 9. Close the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box. 1. Finish the placement. Select axis A_3 of shaft model.NOTES Task 2.

4. Resume the original layer crank component. Finish the placement Task 5. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu.NOTES 3.PRT entry in the MODEL TREE. For University Use Only . 1. List the suppressed components in the MODEL TREE. Align axis A_5 of wheel crank model with axis A _ 3 of shaft model. Task 6. 2. Click Done Sel > Done . Click Assemble . Resume the suppressed components. then permanently delete them from the assembly. Suppress the wheel crank component. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu to complete the operation. Click Suppress and Select the wheel crank part. 1. Select Suppressed Objects and click O K 4. 5. Click Delete > Clip 3. Suppression temporarily removes a component from the assembly. Task 4. Click Align from the CONSTRAINT TYPE drop-down list. Align A_1 of wheel crank with axis A_1 of shaft model 4. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Item Display 3. and double click the WHEEL_CRANK. 3. Select only the hand crank part from the MODEL TREE.2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .PRT 2. Constrain the wheel crank to the end of the shaft. Right mouse click the LAYER_CRANK. In the MENU MANAGER.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. With components suppressed you can easily switch between representations of the assembly to test which one is the most plausable. click Component > Resume > All > Done 2. Suppress the third crank model and resume the original one 1. A suppressed model is still associated to the assembly. and select Resume from the pop-up menu.

Commercial Use Prohibited Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6. 6.NOTES Tips & Techniques: You can use the MODEL TREE to delete suppressed features or components without resuming them first.2 5 . Save the model and click File > Close Window . Click OK . 5. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed.. For University Use Only .

The display status of a layer can be set to Hidden Suppression of features in a part and of components in a model leads to greater maneuverability in design.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 6. Any number of layers can be created. Items have to be deliberately associated to specific layers of a model. you learned that: • • • • • • • The Layers feature is designed for greater flexibility of models and less clutter. For University Use Only . Suppressed features can effect the parent/child relationship. Suppressed features can be resumed.2 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module.

Describe how to use the tools and menus to create Style features. Explain the use of the new hybrid modeling paradigm.and quad-view window layouts.Commercial Use Prohibited - Module 17 Creating Surfaces with Freeform Interactive Surface Design in Pro/ENGINEER (also referred to as “ISDX”) adds many new features to Pro/ENGINEER surface modeling.For University Use Only . Page 17-1 . Create freeform surfaces using boundary curves. In this module you learn some of the ways to use ISDX. Describe how to use the single. including an overview of the Style feature. Create 2-D and 3-D freeform curves. Objectives After completing this module. you will be able to: • • • • • • Describe the capabilities of ISDX.

You can use ISDX to create freeform surface models for: • • • Conceptual design Engineering design Reverse styling ISDX enables you to create STYLE features. Figure 1: The Style feature in the Model Tree For University Use Only .2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . It appears in the MODEL TREE as Style.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7.NOTES DESIGNING WITH INTERACTIVE SURFACES ISDX offers a spline-based freeform modeler that allows you to create 2-D and 3-D curves and freeform surfaces. THE STYLE FEATURE A Style feature can contain several curves and surfaces or quilts. Within the Style feature. you can create freeform curves and surfaces easily.

3 . Figure 3: Four-View Window Layout HYBRID MODELING Most products are a combination of geometric forms and freeform shapes.NOTES Figure 2: A Style feature Containing Several Curves and Surfaces The Style feature opens up a new modeling environment with a single or four-view window layout. You can create freeform curves and surfaces that can reference other geometric features.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7. Style offers a unique situation where you can integrate the traditional feature based parametric modeling of Pro/ENGINEER with freeform unconstrained surfacing. For University Use Only .

Also.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Any change in a parametric model regenerates the Style features allowing you to freely mix unconstrained freeform surfaces with geometrical parametric surfaces. you can use ISDX to create: • • • • • • 2-D and 3-D curves (referenced or unconstrained) Curves On Surface (COS) Styling design models Blends and transition surfaces Freeform surfaces along with parametric surfaces in engineering design models Reverse styling surfaces Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves You can use Style as a 2-D or 3-D sketcher to create unconstrained or referenced curves. you can use it when the design intent is dependent on visual or aesthetic criteria. curves. For University Use Only . CREATING SURFACES WITH ISDX You can use ISDX to create curves and freeform surfaces where geometry is either not defined or requires great flexibility. and can be used to create Style or other Pro/ENGINEER features. This unique situation also allows you to carry out total product design in a single modeling environment. or edges and so on. These curves can be attached to features like points. Specifically.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7.

Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7.5 .NOTES Figure 4: Defining Curves in 3-D Space Figure 5: A Blend Surface based on a Freeform 3-D Curve Figure 6: Surfaces Created from 3-D Curves For University Use Only .

NOTES Using COS You can create Curve on Surface (COS) by sketching them directly on to the base surface or by using the Drop tool. intuitive curves and surfaces to conceptualize products.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7. You can also model using concept images that can be applied on to base surfaces as shown in the following figure. Figure 7: Using COS for Trimming Creating Styling Models You can use freeform. Conceptualizing in ISDX allows you to access the inside engineering components directly in the same part or assembly while designing outer body shapes. (A) (B) For University Use Only . You can use COS to build further surfaces or to trim the surfaces. Style allows easy manipulation or modification of the COS in order to capture the design intent.

ISDX allows freeform curves and surfaces to reference with parametric curves or surfaces. enabling you to control the freeform surfaces using dimensions. Figure 9: Dimensionally Controlling a Style Model For University Use Only .7 .NOTES (C) Figure 8: (A) Sketch (B) Sketch Applied on to the Base Surface (C) Model Developed Using the Sketch Creating Freeform Surfaces with Parametric Controls While designing products you may need to impose dimensional controls on freeform surfaces.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Creating Blends and Transitions You can use Style to create quick and high quality spline blends to improve the aesthetics or smoothness of products. Figure 12: High Curvature Transition Surfaces For University Use Only . Figure 10: Typical Transition Surfaces Figure 11: Interactive Manipulation of Tangency Applying Style Surfaces to Engineering Models You can combine Style surfaces with parametric surfaces while creating high curvature or transition surfaces.

datum curves and edges as boundaries can be used as shown in the following figure Figure 14: Style Surfaces from Four Touching Boundaries For University Use Only .NOTES Reverse Styling You can conveniently refer to imported scan curves and faceted or surface data to build Style curves and surfaces. Figure 13: Reverse Styling CREATING STYLE SURFACES You can create Style surfaces using any four touching boundaries. Style curves.9 . For this purpose.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7. you redefine a Style feature created in a PDA model.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal The goal of this lab is to use the Style interface and create simple style surfaces. You navigate through menus. Method In Exercise 1. you create surfaces for a flashlight part by connecting four style curve boundaries.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Tools Table 1: ISDX Icons Icons Description Set active datum plane Create and edit curves Display curvature plot Clear curvature plot Regenerate all Create surfaces from boundary curves For University Use Only . In Exercise 2. shortcut menus and tool bars and also set different view orientations.

Click File > Set Working Directory . > 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7. Figure 15: The Start Model Note: The ‘LCD screen’ is actually a *. In the MODEL TREE. Open PALM. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 17_surfaces_freeform. 2.1 1 . 3. 4. Notice the Style working environment and particularly the new tools added to the interface as shown in the following figure. For University Use Only .jpg image applied on the model in Pro/E as a texture. 1.PRT. click STYLE id 89 and click Redefine .NOTES EXERCISE 1: Interrogating the STYLE Interface Task 1. Experiment with an existing Style feature.

Click View > Show All . 1. 8. In the window.NOTES Figure 16: The Style Tool Bars 6. 7. Click Styling > Set Active Plane . Change the window layout. Task 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7. For University Use Only . Select the Oblique plane from model tree. The TOP is set parallel to the screen.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 2. The grid displayed on the TOP plane indicates that TOP is set as the active plane. Click View > Active Plane Orientation . > Default Orientation.

5. move the quality slider to the right to make the mesh dense. pop-up menu. In the grid area of the dialog box. Figure 17: Changing Grid Spacing 4. In the top left window. Reset the active plane. 8. clear the Grid checkbox. 2. In the Surface Mesh area.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7. 3. Click anywhere in the window and then > Show All . Click Utilities > Styling Preferences. > Active Plane Orientation from the 4. Click View > Default Orientation to reset all the windows. 7.1 3 . Task 3. 1. Familiarize yourself with the Style preferences.NOTES 3. 6. Press <CNTRL> + <D> to get to the default orientation. type [15] and press < ENTER> . For University Use Only . Change the spacing of the grid. Right-click S e t Active Plane and select the TOP plane. 5. Click and . Rotate the model randomly in any window. In the Display area of the STYLING PREFERENCES dialog box.

1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7. In surface mesh area. Click close to the cluster of curves as shown in the following figure. click On to display mesh on the shaded model. Click here to select a curve Figure 19: Selecting a Curve For University Use Only . Click Task 4. 1. Display the model without the curve and mesh display. Figure 18: Displaying Mesh on Shaded Model 8. Click View > Shade .NOTES 6. Close the STYLING PREFERENCES dialog box. Familiarize yourself with the selection procedure. 7. [Repaint]. 10. 9. Click [Shading].

1 5 . Close the window. For University Use Only . click 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7. Right-click Show Sel Bin . Choose entities from the selection bin. > Next from among the many commands in the pop-up 3. Click menu. click Style: (1) Curve:CF-116 . 4.NOTES 2. Exit the Style feature. In the SELECTION dialog box.

Open FLASHLIGHT. > Front . Figure 20: Start Model Task 2. 4.Commercial Use Prohibited - . Add a Style feature to the flashlight body.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Creating a Handle on the Flashlight Task 1.1 6 [Display curvature plots] Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER For University Use Only . Create the first handle curve. Click and select the FRONT datum from the model tree. 2. 1.PRT. Click Insert > Style . 1. Click 3. Click > New > Planar and create a curve with four points as shown in the following figure. Figure 21: First Handle Curve 5. Click P a g e 1 7.

Click Edit and drag the curve points to form a shape similar to the one shown in the following figure. Figure 23: Creating Second Curve For University Use Only . 1. Click N e w in the CURVE dialog box and create a curve with five points as shown in the following figure.1 7 .Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7. Create the second handle curve. 2. Figure 22: Editing Curve Task 3. Click [Clear curvature plot] to turn off the curvature plot.NOTES 6.

Click Task 4. [Clear curvature plot] to turn off the curvature plot. Figure 24: Editing Second Curve 5.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES 3. For University Use Only . Click Edit and drag the curve points to form a shape similar to the one shown in the following figure. Click [Display curvature plots] 4. Create third handle curve. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7. Click > New > Free and create the first cross section by clicking <ALT> and snapping to the existing curves as shown in the following figure.

NOTES Figure 25: Creating a Free Curve 2.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7.1 9 . Shape the curve as shown in the following figure. Figure 27: Shaping Curve For University Use Only . Click Add > Midpoint and select a location as shown in the following figure. Figure 26: Selecting a Midpoint Location 3. Click Edit and use the <SHIFT> key to pull the point perpendicular from the FRONT plane.

NOTES Task 5. 7. 6. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge . Figure 29: Creating Surface from Four Style Curves 5. Click OK . Using the same techniques. 2.2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . and click . Figure 28: Creating and Shaping a Second Curve 1. Click 4.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7. Click OK to close the CURVE dialog box. to shade the model. For University Use Only . select the four curves that form the handle. Toggle the mesh for the Quilt Sides as shown in the following figure. 3. Select the handle surface and then the body surface. Click . create another new curve and shape as shown in the following figure.

(You may wish to add the Style curves to a layer and blank the layer) For University Use Only .2 1 . 11. Enter a thickness value of [2 . select the left and right halves of the flashlight body.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge . Click Insert > Thin Protrusion > Use Quilt. and select the surface quilt. 0] and click . Click . Click Feature > Mirror Geom and select the FRONT plane. 12. Figure 31: Mirroring Geometry 10. Flip the Material Side arrow to add material to the INSIDE of the surface. 9. 13.NOTES Figure 30: Quilting Sides 8. and click .

Click OK For University Use Only .2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. 15. Save and click File > Close Window .NOTES Figure 32: Finished Model 14.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 7.

To change the shape of a surface. While creating a Style feature. A curve can be created as a free 3-D curve or as a planar curve. a new menu named Styling is added and many new commands are available. Style allows you to create geometry using a single-view layout or 4view layout.Commercial Use Prohibited Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7. you have learned that: • ISDX integrates freeform surfacing and parametric modeling to enhance existing surfacing capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. To create a Style surface you need four touching boundary curves. • • • • • For University Use Only . enabling you to create product forms that require flexible surfaces. you need to manipulate the shape of the boundary curves.2 3 .

Commercial Use Prohibited - .For University Use Only .

Diagnose feature regeneration problems. This is preferable and more efficient than recreating them. you will be able to: • • • • • Describe several regeneration failure types. Start the Resolve Environment. By learning how to use the Resolve Environment.For University Use Only . you will be able to refine existing features and parameters.Module 18 The Resolve Environment Pro/ENGINEER provides the Resolve Environment to help you fix regeneration failures. Run the “quick fix” to resolve failed regenerations.Commercial Use Prohibited . Page 18-1 . Objectives After completing this module. Describe some of the ways to change your model designs to resolve feature regeneration failures.

NOTES REGENERATION FAILURES Failures usually occur because a feature gets changed and the effected change conflicts with other features. The feature intersection is no longer valid because dimensional changes have moved the intersecting surfaces. The assembly constraints for a component are invalid. Diagnose the cause of the model failure using the current (failed) model or the backup model. An assembly you retrieve cannot open the required models that are included in the assembly.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 8. The current model displays only the features that have regenerated up to the point of failure. you can address the failure problem using any of the following methods: • • Undo all of the changes that you have made since the last successful regeneration. Starting the Resolve Environment As soon as a regeneration failure occurs. These types of failures occur due to the following reasons: • • • • • • You create new features that are unattached and have one-sided edges. When this happens: • • • • • The F i l e pull-down menu is grayed out (unavailable) so you cannot save the model. You have violated a relation constraint. Pro/ENGINEER displays an explanation of the problem in the Message Area. For University Use Only . The failed feature and all subsequent features remain un-regenerated.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Resolving Regeneration Failures Once you have entered the Resolve Environment. You resume a feature that now conflicts with another (such as having an edge round and a chamfer on the same edge). Pro/ENGINEER displays the RESOLVE menu options in the MENU MANAGER and a diagnostics window. Pro/ENGINEER automatically starts the Resolve Environment.

If you use a backup model.Commercial Use Prohibited The Resolve Environment P a g e 1 8. Change the failed model or a backup model using standard part or assembly functionality.3 . the system saves a copy of the current model to disk with the name REGEN_BACKUP_MODEL####. and removes the file when you exit the Resolve Environment. Note: Keep in mind that the Resolve Environment tools are designed to resolve failures in order to allow you to build more robust models. However. it is always good practice to interrogate the model to determine what has caused the model failure. this may not be the best choice in some cases. you can use the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window to display the following information: For University Use Only . The Undo approach is most appropriate in those cases in which you either did not intend to make the change or you want to fix the problem in the model without using the Resolve Environment tools. The system gives you many diagnostic tools to perform an investigation. Specifying a Model When you diagnose the problem or change the model.PRT prior to each regeneration. the model itself still remains problematic. For example. even if you undo the change. Pro/ENGINEER shows all features in their pre-regenerated state. If you select the Regen Backup option from the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. To interrogate the model. you can simply undo the step that brought you into the Resolve Environment. Diagnosing the Problem When you use the Resolve Environment.NOTES • • Attempt a quick fix of the problem using shortcuts for performing standard operations on the failed feature only. if the feature fails because of the change that you have made. so that you can modify or restore dimensions of the features that are not displayed in the current model. you can work on the current failed model or a backup model. Otherwise. it uses the last version of the current model saved on disk prior to the failure. Undoing Changes Rather than attempt to resolve the problem.

Delete it with its children. you can use the Investigate option to obtain the following information about the current model or the backup model.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only . Information concerning the failed feature. the feature just before the failed feature. Figure 1: FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS Window If you need to investigate the problem further. if it exists: • • • • Modified dimensions.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 8. you can perform the following operations on the failed feature only: • • • • Redefine it. You can then choose to roll the model back to one of the following: the failed feature (for the backup model only). All modifications and changes. Reroute it. or a specified feature. the state at the end of the last successful feature regeneration. Suppress the failed feature along with its children. Invalid geometry of the failed feature. Performing a Quick Fix on the Failed Feature Using the QUICK FIX menu.NOTES • • • A description of the current model and backup models. All references for the failed feature in the model. Hints on resolving the problem.

delete.5 . Changing the Model Using the FIX MODEL menu. parameters. Restore dimensions. As you change a model in the Resolve Environment.NOTES Note: When you make changes in the Resolve Environment. Regenerate the model again. you can change any feature or component to solve the regeneration problem.Commercial Use Prohibited The Resolve Environment P a g e 1 8. If you suppress features using the QUICK FIX menu. or all of these to their values prior to the failure. Display the PART SETUP menu to perform additional part set up procedures. however. you should investigate the cause of the failure before continuing with the part design. as necessary. For University Use Only . consider any parent/child relationships that exist between features and components to avoid changing the intent of the model itself. relations. If you do not make any corrections. you may not be able to resume the feature later in the design. Specifically. or modify relations. they can affect the failed feature or another specified feature. Modify dimensions using the standard MODIFY menu. you can use any of the following approaches: • • • • • • Use the FEAT menu to perform feature operations on the model. to regenerate the model. Add.

6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .PRT. You will not see datum planes if you have them off. 4.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal The goal of this lab is resolve regeneration failures by using the resolve environment.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 8. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 18_resolve. EXERCISE 1: Resolving a Regeneration Failure Task 1. 5. Use the Feature List and Model Player options to determine how the chamfer part was built. 7. Click Utilities > Model Player. 1. Click Note: The system regenerates the two chamfers after the two protrusions. Review the Information Window and close it. You then investigate and resolve the problem in the Resolve Environment. Method In this exercise. Click File > Set Working Directory . 6. to rewind the model player to begin at the first to regenerate feature by feature. Regenerate the model in steps. you add features to a part. Open the feature list. which causes other features to fail. 3. 2. Retrieve CHAMFERS. First click feature. For University Use Only . Click Info > Feature List .

7.NOTES Task 2. 9. Click Surf Chain from the CHAIN menu. Add the rounds after the second (triangular) protrusion. 4. 8. 10.7 . and click Done from the RND SET ATTR menu. Query Sel the hidden bottom surface and click Accept . 6. Round these four edges.Commercial Use Prohibited The Resolve Environment P a g e 1 8. Leave Simple as the default. as shown in the following figure. Enter a radius value. then click Done from the CHAIN menu. Insert after this protrusion Figure 2: The Resolve Model 3. Select all the highlighted edges to round. Leave Constant and Edge Chain the defaults. For University Use Only . Note that the system no longer displays the chamfers. 11. Click O K .0] followed by <ENTER>. Click Insert > Round . Click Select All from the CHAIN OPT menu. 5. Insert an edge round on the bottom edge of the model. Then click Done from the ROUND TYPE menu. Type [2. Click Feature List from the INFO pull-down menu. 2. 1. Complete the round feature. Select the second protrusion feature of the model. Insert after the second protrusion. Click Feature > Insert Mode > Activate from the MENU MANAGER.

Close the window. click Close . For University Use Only . and click Show Ref from the INVESTIGATE menu. 3. Pro/ENGINEER places you in the Resolve Environment because it cannot regenerate the chamfer feature. type [yes].Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 8. but they are no longer part of the model. The round feature that you created removed these edges. The references for the chamfer feature no longer exist because the system replaced them with the round feature that you created in insert mode. 12. Accept the default Current Modl . 13. Click Resolve Hints and review Pro/ENGINEER’s suggestions for resolving the problem. it regenerated successfully and the chamfer failed. Note: The edge references for the chamfer appear on the screen. Click Feature Info and review the Failed Feature Info. Because it regenerated prior to the chamfer. 2. Close the window. 4. Review all of the information provided in the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window. Diagnose the model’s problem. Also. Navigate through the window of the missing chamfer by clicking on each item and showing references. Close the window. When you have finished showing the missing references. Click Overview and review the Resolve Feature Overview. Task 3. 1. 6.NOTES Note: The system created the round feature after the second protrusion. Click Investigate from the RESOLVE FEAT menu. Click Feature > Insert Mode > Cancel to exit insert mode. 5. When the system asks you if you want to resume the features that it suppressed when activating insert mode.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . note the regeneration status of the two chamfers. Click Close to exit the INFORMATION window.

Commercial Use Prohibited The Resolve Environment P a g e 1 8. then click Delete from the QUICK FIX menu. Save the model and erase it from memory.9 .NOTES Task 4. Recall that the quick fix option for resolve only works on the failed feature. Read the prompt. Note that the chamfer feature is no longer part of the model. Again review the feature list. Click Info > Feature List . Click Quick Fix from the RESOLVE FEAT menu. Resolve the failed feature by removing the failed chamfer feature from the part model. For University Use Only . 3. Click Delete All > Yes from the YES/NO menu to exit the Resolve Environment. 1. 2.

Rerouting. Pro/ENGINEER provides a Resolve Environment to rectify failed features. redefining. A failed model can more permanently fixed by using the FIX MODEL menu.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. you learned that: • • • • • It is not uncommon for models to fail due to problems in design. Failures usually occur due to design changes in certain parts after an extensive model has been built up.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . The Failure Diagnostics window in the Resolve Environment displays accurate and specific information regarding particular failures.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 8. suppressing. • For University Use Only . and deleting a feature along with its children are some of the quick fixes that can be performed on a failed feature.

clearance and interference characteristics. and more. Page 19-1 . Objectives After completing this module. Obtain regeneration information.For University Use Only . and assemblies. Calculate mass properties. parts.Commercial Use Prohibited - Module 19 Information Tools In this module you learn how to obtain many kinds of information from your models and assemblies. you will be able to: • • • • Obtain information about features. You will learn how to query your designs to obtain regeneration information. Calculate clearance and interference between parts.

you can step successively through the regeneration of the part—starting from a specified feature or from the beginning—in the current order of creation. Accessing Information about Part Features Using the Model option.NOTES MODEL INFORMATION It is good design practice to determine the way a model was built before making any modifications and additions. For this. and assists you in determining if poor design practices were used to create it. Pro/ENGINEER provides useful tools to extract information about individual features. you can access information about every feature on a part. Figure 1: The Model Player Dialog Box The model player option is particularly useful because it allows you to observe the design of a part. assembly components.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Obtaining Information about a Specific Feature Using the Info Feature option. and entire models. Obtaining Regeneration Information Using Utilities > Model Player. ASSEMBLY.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 9. and DRAWING modes. regeneration. all For University Use Only . you can obtain information about a particular feature in PART. The system lists regenerated and suppressed features.

name.3 . and regeneration status for each. In the INFORMATION WINDOW. cross-sections. along with their object-types and version-number suffixes. Calculating Mass Properties Using the Model Analysis option. MEASUREMENT. the system displays the names of the components in a hierarchical structure to show how they were assembled. Obtaining Information about Assemblies Using the Component option in ASSEMBLY mode. Using Feature List . type. you can list all features in the model in their regeneration order and obtain the feature number. Tips & Techniques: The system lists only the names of the objects in the Information Window. AND MASS PROPERTIES With Pro/ENGINEER’s ANALYSIS pull-down menu you can: • • • • Add engineering information to a model. you can compute mass properties for parts.Commercial Use Prohibited Information Tools P a g e 1 9. INTERFERENCE. Calculate mass properties. For University Use Only .NOTES coordinate systems. and cross-sections. You can also use the Model option to access information about selected assembly components. However. feature ID. suppression order. Analyze the model through measurement. you can obtain information about how a component was assembled. how its parent/child relationships and parameters were formed. it displays the full pathnames of the objects. assemblies. and reference dimensions in an INFORMATION WINDOW. if you set the configuration file option DISPLAY_FULL_OBJECT_PATH to yes. Check interference.

Perform a global interference check to find all interfering pairs of parts or subassemblies. You must recalculate the mass properties to Using the Model Analysis option. Perform a global clearance check to find all pairs of parts or subassemblies with clearances less than a specified clearance distance. and entities. surfaces.NOTES In a mass properties calculation. Note By default. • For University Use Only . you can: • • Calculate volume or interference between pairs of any combination of subassemblies.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 9. cables. parts. mass properties do not automatically update when you make changes to the model. the system does not include the mass of suppressed features or suppressed components in any assembly.

Complete the regeneration and close the MODEL PLAYER dialog box.PRT. 9. 8. 1. 5. For University Use Only . Open GEAR_COUNTERWEIGHT. EXERCISE 1: Using Information Tools Task 1. Click File > Set Working Directory . 7. 3. Click Utilities > Model Player. Click Feat Info to obtain information about the feature to see how it was created. Click 6.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you learn to extract information to determine how a part was created. 10. 11. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 19_info_tools. Interrogate the regeneration cycle of a gear part . Click Info > Model . feature by feature. Click to rewind the model player. Method In Exercise 1. 12. you learn to use information tools to calculate measurements. 2. 4. Click Close in INFORMATION WINDOW.5 . Click Show Dims. Click to continue to step through the regeneration of the part.Commercial Use Prohibited Information Tools P a g e 1 9. to step through the model.

4. Scroll down the INFORMATION WINDOW and close it when you are done. Click Analysis > Measure 2. 2. then close. Measure the model. Task 3. Close the MASS PROPERTIES dialog box.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Scroll through the feature list in the INFORMATION WINDOW dialog box. 3. 5. 3. select this edge to measure the length. Figure 2: Measuring Surface Area and Curve Length For University Use Only . Click Info in the MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 9. Click Compute . In the MEASURE dialog box. click Area from the TYPE drop-down list. accepting all the default options in the MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box. Information on the mass properties gets displayed. First select this surface to calculate the surface area.NOTES 13. Click Analysis > Model Analysis. Select the front cylindrical surface. Task 2. Determine mass properties for the model. 1. 1.

6. Click Curve Length in the TYPE drop-down list. 2.7 . Task 5. Select Vertex from the TO drop-down list 5. 3. The length of the edge appears in the message area of your screen and also in the RESULTS area of the dialog box. 2. 7. Select the vertex as shown in the following figure.NOTES Task 4. Select the second vertex as shown. Click Distance from the TYPE drop-down list. Measure the distance between two vertices: 1. Select this vertex second Figure 3: Measuring Distance 8. Click Close .Commercial Use Prohibited Information Tools P a g e 1 9. 4. For University Use Only . 3. Select this vertex first. Select the gear edge as shown in the preceding figure. Save the model. 1. The system measures the distance between vertices and displays it in the message area and in the RESULTS area of the dialog box. Click Vertex from the FROM drop-down list. Measure the length of the gear edge feature.

NOTES 9. For University Use Only . Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. 10. Click OK . Click File > Close Window .8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 1 9.

Commercial Use Prohibited Information Tools P a g e 1 9. you have learned that: • With Pro/ENGINEER you not only provide information to the system while building models but you can also retrieve information for analysis or manufacturing purposes. In a part you can measure. • • • • • For University Use Only . assemblies. You can calculate interference between pairs of any combination of subassemblies.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module.9 . In any model you can obtain information about any specific feature. cables. You can access information about any specific part to learn how it was built feature by feature using the Regen Info option You can calculate mass properties for parts. parts. among other things. surfaces. and surface areas. and sections using the Model Analysis option. and entities to reduce the amount of calculation time needed to perform a global interference check among all components. distances between vertices. length of curve edge.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

Objectives After completing this module.For University Use Only . Create customized Pro/ENGINEER work sessions. Automate processes with map keys. You learn how to configure Pro/ENGINEER either to create a company-wide standard or to suit your own individual needs. you will be able to: • • • • Locate network-based Pro/ENGINEER configuration files. Configure your toolbar and model tree Page 20-1 .Module 20 Configuring Pro/ENGINEER In this module you learn how to modify your Pro/ENGINEER working environment.Commercial Use Prohibited .

The default name for the Pro/ENGINEER configuration file is CONFIG.sup” extension stands for “Supervisor’s configuration file”) from the directory <LOADPOINT>/TEXT (the directory from which you install Pro/ENGINEER).SUP file locks out any duplicate entries in your local CONFIG. and so on. display formats. These files can include your preferences for tolerance. Pro/ENGINEER first reads a protected configuration file called CONFIG.PRO. Defining Configuration Files Pro/ENGINEER can read configuration files from several areas. For University Use Only . calculation accuracy. When starting. This file can be used to establish customized company standards for all of your Pro/ENGINEER users. including: • • • • Storing drawing formats.NOTES CUSTOMIZING PRO/ENGINEER You use configuration files to customize your Pro/ENGINEER work environment. Submitting project objects.PRO configuration files. Setting library file locations. if a particular option is present in more than one configuration file. However.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0. uses the last value read will be used. Every entry in the CONFIG. the number of digits used in Sketcher. Setting default measurement units for new parts (such as millimeters instead of inches).2 Configuring Pro/ENGINEER . These options override the same options that may be set in other configuration files. You can edit configuration files to set company standards in several areas.SUP (the “. as shown in the following figure.

The following figure shows the OPTIONS dialog box. Note For a complete listing of configuration file options and defaults. refer to the Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER User’s Guide.PRO file in the LOADPOINT directory.PRO file in your home directory.NOTES Figure 1: Possible Locations of Configuration Files on a Network Pro/ENGINEER reads in configuration files from the following directories in this order: • • • • The CONFIG.3 . The CONFIG.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. The CONFIG. For University Use Only . Default values built into the software.PRO file in your start-up directory. Editing Configuration Files You can edit configuration files during your working session. Do this by using the Options option in the UTILITIES menu.

The MAPKEYS dialog box lists each mapkey that is in session and provides a description of its function. modify. delete.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . For University Use Only . The RECORD MAPKEY dialog box allows you to create. It performs a series of selections when you type only one or two keystrokes.NOTES Figure 2: Preferences Dialog Box Note Configuration files are not automatically loaded after editing. and save mapkeys to a configuration file. run. Both are displayed in the following figures.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0. CreatingMapkeys A Mapkey is a keyboard macro that you can create using the Mapkeys option in the UTILITIES pull-down menu. They have to be loaded by clicking the Apply button.

To do this. As you go down the menu options on the left. This is illustrated in the following figure. you can create new icons and add them to existing toolbars The CUSTOMIZE dialog box includes a list of existing pull-down menu options on the left with corresponding icons on the right.NOTES Figure 3: Mapkeys and Record Mapkey Dialog Boxes CUSTOMIZING YOUR TOOLBAR Adding Icons to Existing Toolbars All pull-down menu options can be associated with easy-to-use toolbar icons.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. For University Use Only .5 . you can simply drag the associated icon of your choice onto the toolbar.

This option creates a file called CONFIG.NOTES Figure 4: Setting Toolbar Icons Saving the Settings You save your changes to toolbars by using the Automatically Save To option in the CUSTOMIZE dialog box. are also valid for the mapkey.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0. Quick keys. For University Use Only . such as F1 . This file automatically loads when Pro/ENGINEER is started the next time. Creating Pull-down Menus You can create a separate pull-down menu for newly defined Mapkeys.WIN in the same directory that the file resides in. This allows the use of the mouse to select your mapkey definitions.

Copy the icon image. THE MODEL TREE The MODEL TREE is a powerful tool to organize and manipulate active objects.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. you can modify the displayed icon. With the CUSTOMIZE dialog box open." Associating New Icons for Mapkeys Mapkeys have a default icon associated with them but you have the option to change the icon. complete with a configurable interface and search engine. Choose a button image from a predefined list. The modifying options include the ability to: • • • • • • Delete the icon.NOTES Tips & Techniques: Name keystrokes so that you can easily remember what they refer to. Edit the icon image with an icon editor. Paste a copied icon image. An example is sd for Cosmetic Shade. Most importantly.7 . For University Use Only . Show the text associated to the icon. the MODEL TREE is an information tool as well as an interactive operations tool.

unregenerated.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0. For University Use Only . you can also configure it to maintain predefined and customized columns that correspond to items in the tree. Feat Params – Displays new parameters affecting a feature. failed.) Feature type • • • Feature name Layers – Provides the status of layers. Model Params – Displays new model parameters affecting the entire model.8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Figure 5: MODEL TREE Display In addition to using the MODEL TREE tool to display features. frozen. or suppressed) Feature number Feature ID (as shown in the preceding figure. Some commonly used columns are: • Info – provides information regarding: Status (regenerated.

For University Use Only .NOTES Figure 6: MODEL TREE COLUMNS Dialog Box The MODEL TREE COLUMNS dialog box is available with the VIEW menu Model Tree Setup option.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0.9 .

NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal In this laboratory you learn to configure the default Pro/ENGINEER interface to suit your working environment.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you create a mapkey to help increase efficiency. you develop a configuration file and a toolbar to customize the Pro/ENGINEER working environment. Method In Exercise 1. In Exercise 2. Tools Table 1: Interface Icons Icons Description Save as Mapkey icon you create For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0.

NOTES EXERCISE 1: Setting Up a Configuration File Task 1.1 1 . Click Utilities > Options. Clear the Show only options loaded from file check box. 2. 2. Click File > Set Working Directory . Figure 7: Editing the Configuration File Task 2. Now. Create a new configuration file in the local directory and edit it. 1. In the SHOWING dropdown menu. 1. 4. 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. For University Use Only . Alter default values to tailor the working environment to suit your preferences. select Current Session . 3. set it back to Alphabetical . select By Category . 3. Scroll down the list and select spin_center_display.PRT. In the SORT drop-down box. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 20_config_proe. Open BUSHING.

In the OPTION box. 6. then press <ENTER>. which means the spin center will always be displayed when Pro/ENGINEER is launched. In the VALUE drop-down list. The default Value is YES . Figure 8: Selecting a Configuration File Option. 7.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . then click Add/Change . Only the options you have changed from the default settings will be listed. 9. For University Use Only . 8.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0. Check the Show only options loaded from file box. select No . select YES and click Add/Change . In the VALUE drop-down list.NOTES 5. type [spin_with_part_entities]. This option is added to the list of changed settings for this session of Pro/ENGINEER.

1 3 . One option is found. Set the default value to YES in the SET VALUE dialog box. Task 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. In the OPTIONS dialog box. type [message]. Add an option that includes more lines to the message area of Pro/ENGINEER. Look for an option that will prompt you to save any "unsaved" data when you exit Pro/ENGINEER. In the TYPE KEYWORD box. For University Use Only . type [exit].NOTES Figure 9: Second Option Added Task 3. Click Find Now . Click Add/Change . click Find . 1. 2. In the TYPE KEYWORD box. Read the description and select it. Add additional options using a Keyword Search. 2. Click Find Now . 1. 4. 3.

4. Click File > Exit to save the file and exit the editor.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Save the changes to the settings such that they are effective every time Pro/ENGINEER is launched.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0. Task 5. Click . 5. Type [5] in the SET VALUE box. Click Apply in the OPTIONS dialog box. Click Add/Change > Close . 1.pro] as the name. 6.NOTES 3. 4. Select visible_message_lines. Click OK > Close . 2. Leave the default [config. For University Use Only . Select visible_message_lines in the CHOOSE OPTIONS dialog box. 3.

PRT. Since you modified the bushing but did not save it.NOTES Task 6.12 dimension. For University Use Only . you are presented with the option to save the model. 5. 6. Start a new session of Pro/ENGINEER and open BUSHING. Press <ENTER> to save the part. Restart Pro/ENGINEER. 7. 3. Notice that the datum planes remain displayed during spinning. type [10. Click Modify . Click Regenerate to update the geometry. Notice that the message window has been expanded to list five lines. Select the 19.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. Modify a feature. 2.00].1 5 . 8. 4. Select the center hole of the bushing. Some settings will require a software restart to be active 1. Spin the part using the mouse. Click File > Exit. This is a result of the change to the spin_with_part_entities option. Verify that the changed settings are currently in effect. Click File > Exit > Yes.

Click OK .PRT. Type [fn] as the KEY SEQUENCE. Select Pause for keyboard input .PRO. Close the RECORD MAPKEY dialog box For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0. Click Record . Click Setup > Name .1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Click Save leaving the default name CURRENT_SESSION. Task 3. Click File > Set Working Directory . Task 2. Open CRANK. 7. Type [Shaft_bore] and press <ENTER> 4. Create a mapkey that will rename a feature. Select on the hole feature in the model. 3. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 20_config_proe. 4. 3. Click Utilities > Mapkeys. 3. Define a mapkey to develop . Type [Feature Name] as the NAME. 6. 5. 1. Type [Name a feature for easy identification] for DESCRIPTION . 8. 5. 1.NOTES EXERCISE 2: Creating a Mapkey Task 1. Click Stop in the RECORD MAPKEYS dialog box. Click N e w in the MAPKEYS dialog box. 1. 4. 5. 2. Click Done . 2. Record the mapkey. 2.

1. You will notice the new names you have given to the model features. click the smile face . Select on the boss and type [boss] as the new name. Drag the icon next to the OPEN icon on the SAVE toolbar. click 5. Note The system will automatically save the changes the CONFIG. 1. You can change the directory that the file is saved to. Task 5. 2. 4. 3. 3. 3. In the SELECT MAPKEY ICON dialog box. Select the third icon from the right. Click Utilities > Customize Screen. 2. Now drag it from the dialog box onto your toolbar. Customize your toolbar to include an icon for the [fn] mapkey you created. Read the description. 2. select Mapkeys in CATEGORIES to highlight it.NOTES Task 4.1 7 . 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. Test your new mapkey.WIN file to your working directory. In the CUSTOMIZE dialog box. as shown below: Figure 10 Inserting Erase Icon into the Standard Toolbar Task 6. Click Modify Selection > Choose Button Image . For University Use Only . then click <ENTER>. then click Description . Learn to include an icon onto your toolbar. Type [fn]. In the MAPKEYS area of the dialog box. Click Info > Feature List . 1.

Leave the option to automatically save the file and click OK . Erase the current testing model from memory. 2.NOTES Task 7. Notice the entry at the bottom of the dialog box. For University Use Only . A part of your customized toolbar could look like this: Feature name mapkey icon Figure 11:Customized Toolbar 3. Click the newly added Erase Current icon from the toolbar. 1. then click Yes. Finish the definition of the toolbars.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 0.

of frequently used series of steps in the design process.1 9 . you learned that: • • • • • • The Pro/ENGINEER environment is customizable. You should first load the CONFIG.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. The MODEL TREE can be used as an effective information tool with many customizable columns. or macros. New toolbars and toolbar icons can be created to associate with the mapkeys you create.Commercial Use Prohibited Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0. New pull-down menus can be created. For University Use Only . You can create mapkeys.PRO file in order to configure your environment.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

Describe the benefits of using parent/child relationships in your designs. Describe how to change design intent in your models.Commercial Use Prohibited - Module 21 Modeling Philosophy Design intent is the concept that connects the various techniques for creating parts. and drawings. Describe the importance of associativity in Pro/ENGINEER. you will be able to: • • • • • Describe how to incorporate your design intent into new models. Describe how to use relations.For University Use Only . Capturing design intent by various methods is the core of Pro/ENGINEER's modeling philosophy. Page 21-1 . assemblies. Objectives After completing this module.

and proposals.NOTES DESIGN INTENT Before you start designing parts and assemblies in Pro/ENGINEER. the high-level design intent is usually already understood. you should be able to answer following questions: • • • • • • • What is the purpose of the product? How will it satisfy this purpose? What are the major subsystems necessary to satisfy this function? How will these individual subsystems be incorporated into the overall product? What design changes are likely to occur as the product is being developed? Is this a new design or is it based on an existing product? What are the relevant design constraints? (size.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 1. and so on) How will this product interact with its environment? Answers to many of these questions may already exist in the form of product specifications. so that this information is available to the designer working on the detailed components. Also. For University Use Only . At this preliminary stage. assemblies and skeletons. product quotes. Before starting a new design in Pro/ENGINEER. In addition. Pro/NOTEBOOK (also known as Layout Mode) is an optional module within Pro/ENGINEER that provides tools to create twodimensional layouts. conceptual design results and ideas can be captured in Pro/NOTEBOOK. This information can be managed using Pro/INTRALINK and Pro/ENGINEER. Two-dimensional sketches and pictures of an assembly design can be documented with critical design dimensions. it is important that you first define the intention of your design. weight. Existing documents that are not Pro/ENGINEER files can be managed by Pro/INTRALINK. Dependencies between the nonPro/ENGINEER files and the assemblies and parts with which they are associated can be created. cost.2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . any conceptual design work that has already been completed should provide information on how the product will look and how each of its subsystems will interact with one another. notes and parameters. These parameters can be shared globally among all components of the assembly and can be used to drive design parts.

Edge references (Rounds/Chamfers) Component Assembly constraints.3 . Dimensioning and specifying Sketcher references and constraints.Commercial Use Prohibited Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1. Orienting the reference plane. Note You can document the modeling intent by commenting the relation and changing the symbolic name. Defining feature depth /depth references. For University Use Only . You can also use Pro/ENGINEER to interrelate feature dimensions by creating relations without creating parent/child relationships. you should record the design criteria for the model that would include: • • • Order of features Base feature Feature duplication • • • Feature form Feature type Depth Using Pro/ENGINEER as a Parametric Tool • • One of the major facets of the parametric nature of Pro/ENGINEER is the ability to generate parent/child relationships. Using Relations Relations allow you to create a relationship between features or components in an assembly without creating a parent/child relationship in which child features control their parents.NOTES Recording Your Design Criteria Before you start creating a model. Creating Parent/Child Relationships Methods The following are some of the ways in which you can create parent/child relationships among features: • • • • • • Specifying the sketching/placement plane.

For University Use Only .4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Creating Skeleton Parts You can also create parts at the assembly level. Optimizing Designs with Behavioral Modeler With Behavioral Modeler you have the ability to perform an iterative analysis of your design by developing a Design Study. Find a set of values of specified model parameters that satisfy a set of design specific criteria using a Feasibility study. Advantages of Pro/ENGINEER Associativity Creating Assemblies Associativity among drawings. A multitude of objectives can be met this way. relations can elevate as well as optimize certain design criteria. You can also use these parts to define motion in an assembly. You can: • • • Determine the dependency between a design specification and a model parameter or dimension using a Sensitivity Analysis. referred to as skeletons.NOTES Optimizing Designs with Relations If you have developed good parent/child relationships along with a welldefined parametric behavior of the model. features leads to easy regeneration while reducing the effort needed in designing complex machines. Find a set of values of specified parameters that optimize the design based on some criteria while satisfying a set of design specifications using an Optimization study. to capture the intent of the interrelationship between components in an assembly. parts.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 1.

and control the design intent of a product model. the design intent of an assembly by swapping one functionally equivalent model with another.NOTES Figure 1: Skeleton Example Using Engineering Notebooks Pro/ENGINEER allows you to generate a centralized location to capture. Interchange Mode – Changes For University Use Only . the order of the regeneration of existing features in a part or components in the assembly. Layouts and parametric relations can be stored and retrieved as necessary Changing Design Intent • • • • • – Changes any of the originally defined elements in features or defined constraints in an assembly.5 . Redefine Reroute – Changes the external references that features and components have in a model. document.Commercial Use Prohibited Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1. Insert Mode – Changes Reorder – Changes the regeneration cycle by allowing you to insert features or components into the regeneration cycle.

capturing Assembly Level Design Intent is discussed. while maintaining Design Intent. no less. The entire model must be built using only those dimensions shown: no more. Part I: Part Level Design Intent In the following part model the goal is to build the model as efficiently as possible. Since the only source of design intent available is the drawing on the following page.NOTES LABORATORY PRACTICAL Goal The goal of this lab is to review in a classroom question-answer format the main points about capturing design intent with Pro/ENGINEER.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . no other feature may use the same dimension. capturing Part Level Design Intent is discussed. In Part 2. it must be strictly followed.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 1. Methods In Part 1. For example if a particular feature uses a certain dimension. Figure 2: Building a Model with Specific Design Intent For University Use Only .

What type of feature(s) can create next feature? ANS: 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1.NOTES Decision Process Questionnaire 1. Which of the possible feature types will best fit out Design Intent? ANS: 4. What feature types are possible for the base feature? ANS: 3. ANS: What should the base feature be? 2. How should the small hole be created twice? ANS: For University Use Only . What order should the features be created in? ANS: 7.7 . Which of the possible feature types will best fit out Design Intent? ANS: 6.

8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES 8.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 1. When should the rounds be created? ANS: For University Use Only .

Commercial Use Prohibited Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1.9 .NOTES Figure 3: Drawing of Part Model For University Use Only .

The part models may or may not have already been created in Pro/ENGINEER.NOTES Part II: Assembly level Design Intent For the next discussion. determine courses of action to create the assembly.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 1. consider the following views and drawing of the VALVE assembly. Figure 4: Assembling Parts Decision Process Questionnaire 1. Overall. What technique could be used to help relate the components together for assembly and motion analysis purposes? ANS: For University Use Only .

Commercial Use Prohibited Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1. What types of features could exist in a skeleton? What might it look like? ANS: 3. How does this affect our decisions? ANS: 7. What implications could arise from deleting the center shaft? Suppressing? Blanking on a Layer? Replacing? How could some of these issues be handled? ANS: 5. What effect would changing the center shaft diameter have on the other components? ANS: For University Use Only . Which component should be assembled first? Second? How is this affected when using a skeleton? ANS: 4.1 1 . We wish to be able to change the angular constraint on the center shaft from 0° to 90°.NOTES 2. How should the assembly be structured with subassemblies? ANS: 6.

How would interactions with other components affect the process? ANS: Figure 5: Assembly Drawing For University Use Only .1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e 2 1.NOTES 8.

Information tool. parametric. engineering notebooks.Commercial Use Prohibited Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1. drawings. the Resolve Environment to solve regeneration problems—all in their own respective ways help in the overarching goal of capturing design intent and thus are essential components of Pro/ENGINEER's modeling philosophy. you learned that: • • • Pro/ENGINEER's modeling philosophy is driven by considerations of effectively capturing design intent.NOTES MODULE SUMMARY In this module. the behavioral modeler.1 3 . and associative nature has many advantages in achieving the desired intent. the ability to customize Pro/ENGINEER environment. The capacity to introduce parametric relations while creating models is a special feature of the software that furthers the cause of design intent capture. • • For University Use Only . Pro/ENGINEER's feature-based. Parent/Child Relationships in Assemblies and methods of specifying and altering them enables changes in intent.

Commercial Use Prohibited - .For University Use Only .

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - Appendix A Review Questions This module contains review questions intended for an interactive daily discussion in class. It is divided into five sections corresponding to the five days of instructor-led training. Participate in discussion of related topics. P a g e A-1 . Objectives After completing this module. you will be able to: • • Review the important concepts and principles that are covered during each training day.

List two types of sketched features. What are the advantages of a solid model? 5. What is design intent? 2. 4. List three types of holes. 3. What are the placement options for each? For University Use Only .2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES DAY 1: REVIEW QUESTIONS 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A. List three pick and place features.

Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. 8.3 . What is the difference between a hole and a cut? 9. Must the reference plane always be perpendicular to the sketching plane? 10. List two ways to create an edge chain round. What is the Pro/ENGINEER convention for orienting the view of the sketching plane when creating a feature that adds material? Removes material? For University Use Only . How does the sketching plane capture design intent? The Reference Plane? 7.NOTES 6.

14. What is the most important thing to ‘build’ into your sketch before exiting Sketcher? 15.4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . List the nine Sketcher constraint options. What does parametric mean? 13. What is the difference between the options for ONE SIDE compared to BOTH SIDES for a protrusion or cut? 16.NOTES 11. Which of these options are multi-purpose? For University Use Only . What does feature-based modeling mean? 12. List two functions that References provide in Sketcher.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A.

With what features can Dynamic Modify be used? How is it activated? 19.Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. Can you over-dimension or under-dimension a section in Intent Manager? 18.NOTES 17. Why does Intent Manager create “weak” dimensions? How can you remove them? 20.5 . What is the easiest procedure for deleting or redefining features? For University Use Only .

What is the importance of the first solid ‘base’ feature? 4.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . When should you use a start template? Can it be customized? 3. which side of Datum TOP will face the top of the computer screen? For University Use Only . When orienting the sketching plane using a horizontal reference. What is a model template? What does it contain? 2. Do the sketching plane and reference plane always become parents to a sketched feature? 5. if you click Top from the menu and select Datum TOP .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A.NOTES DAY 2: REVIEW QUESTIONS 1.

and why is it so important? 7. What is a parent/child relationship in Pro/ENGINEER. What are the two sections required for a swept feature? 11. Do Sketcher references establish parent/child relationships? List six ways a Sketcher reference can be established. Why would you want to set up a parameter in Pro/ENGINEER? 9.7 .NOTES 6. How would you create a 3-Dimensional (3-D) sweep? For University Use Only . 8.Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. What is required in the sketch of a revolved feature? What is the case with more that one of this entity type? 10.

NOTES 12. How do you know if your relation is working correctly? 17. What is the minimum number of sections required for a blended feature? 13. What are the requirements for each section of a blend? 14.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A. What are the three types of blends? What are the two options for each? For University Use Only .8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Is it possible to create a swept or blended cut? 15. 16. For what purpose do you use relations? Give an example.

NOTES For University Use Only .9 .Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A.

For University Use Only . Sensitivity and Optimization/ Feasibility studies are major components of Behavioral Modeler.NOTES DAY 3: REVIEW QUESTIONS 1.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . What is the difference between an Analysis and an Analysis Feature? An Optimization and an Optimization Feature? 5. What does BMX stand for? 3. Briefly define each. 2.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A. 4. What is a Datum Analysis feature and how is it used? List three types. What is a drawing template? List at least three functions that a template can be setup to perform.

How can you create a rotational dimension in a sketched feature that you are going to pattern? 11.NOTES 6.1 1 . How do you include a dimension and/or parameter in a drawing note? For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. What is unique about a general view? 9. What is the difference between a Projection view and an Auxiliary view? A Detail view and a Partial View? 10. How can you make multiple instances of a single feature? A single instance of multiple features? 7. Why is it important to use default datum planes when orienting a general view in a drawing? 8.

1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . True or False? What about the assembly using the bracket? What is this ability called? 16. Are parent/child relationships relevant in Assembly mode? 15. What is the importance of the base component in an assembly? 14. and modifications are then made to the bracket. How can you change a component’s placement references without having to delete the component and reassemble it? How can this be accomplished with no menu interaction? For University Use Only . How should you start every assembly? 13. The drawing views will then have to reprojected.prt.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A. A drawing is created from bracket.NOTES 12.

NOTES 17. and Mod Part? 21. Mod Assem. and how can you create them in Pro/ENGINEER? 20. What are the differences among Mod Dim. List the various options for Copying features. Mod Subasm. How many directions are available for each? For University Use Only . 19. List five of the constraint types for assembling a component.1 3 . What is the importance of subassemblies.Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. 22. List and compare the three Pattern types. What does <CTRL> <ALT> and the three mouse buttons do when assembling a component? 18.

5. True or False? 4.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . What are three reasons why you might want to suppress a Pro/ENGINEER feature? 3. List four types of additional datum features. Layers do not affect parent/child relationships. For what purpose can you use layers in Part mode? Assembly mode? Drawing mode? 2. What are some uses for datum curves? 6. while Suppression does.NOTES DAY 4: REVIEW QUESTIONS 1. Describe the major concepts of Top Down Design For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A.

NOTES 7. What does ISDX stand for? For University Use Only . What is a surface? What types of models benefit from surfacing? 11.Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. Can a skeleton be used for part design as well as assembly design? If so. How? 10. What are six steps or phases of Top Down Design? 8.1 5 . What is a skeleton and how can it be used? 9.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A.NOTES 12. Is ISDX the only way to create surfaces in Pro/ENGINEER? 13. What is required to generate a surface using ISDX? For University Use Only . What can be accomplished with the STYLE feature? 14.1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . How many features (curves. surfaces) can be contained in a style feature? 15.

What does associativity mean? 5. What is design intent? 4. 3. List seven ways to establish a parent/child relationship in Pro/ENGINEER.1 7 .NOTES DAY 5: REVIEW QUESTIONS 1. What is a configuration file in Pro/ENGINEER. When does Pro/ENGINEER activate the Resolve Environment? For University Use Only . and why should you use these files? 6.Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. What is a parent/child relationship in Pro/ENGINEER? 2. What is a mapkey? 7.

Why should you generally try to fix failed features instead of using the Undo Changes option in the Resolve Environment? 11. Will Pro/ENGINEER allow you to save a model that has a failed feature? 9.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e A.1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES 8. What is the difference between Redefine and Reorder? 12. What is the difference between the Quick Fix and Fix Model options in the RESOLVE menu? 10. What are some advantages of feature-based modeling? For University Use Only .

1 9 . Name four ways to capture design intent in a part model. 14.Commercial Use Prohibited Review Questions P a g e A. Name three ways to capture design intent in an assembly. What is the model player and how can it be used? 17. What is your next step in the process of attaining mastery with Pro/ENGINEER? For University Use Only . 15.NOTES 13. What options are avialable under Analysis> Measure ? In Analysis > Model Analysis? 16.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

The purpose of this project is to provide you with an opportunity to practice the skills you learned in the class without relying on step-by-step instructions.For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - Appendix B Project Laboratory This module contains an advanced self-paced project that you can work on after finishing the standard module exercises. you will be able to: • Apply the skills you learned in the course to real-world design projects. Page B-1 . Objectives After completing this module.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . lower housing part.NOTES INTRODUCTION Throughout the next few days you will design several assembly components. However. you will be working in the directory named project. These components will be used to build a blower and motor assembly. snap ring part. All measurement units are in metric. It is suggested that you use the project components that you create during this course as part of this project lab. you will create a motor part. and upper housing part. Throughout the project. Snap rings Motor housing Cover Motor shaft Upper housing Lower housing Blower Figure 1: Exploded View of Completed Project For University Use Only . As shown in the next figure. you may choose to skip portions of the project and instead use the supplied models to complete sections of the project laboratories.

Create the first solid feature.00. You create the part using extruded sketched features. along with holes. This foundation must be rectangular. you must build it using only those dimensions shown in the following figure. as shown in the following figure (with the height measuring 60. 2. measuring 82.00diameter circle to a blind depth of 90. Create a part named motor.prt. Figure 2: Dimensions for Motor Part 1.NOTES PART CREATION SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Part To follow the design intent of the motor part.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-3 . For University Use Only .5 X 60. Add a feature to represent the electronics support foundation.00 from the center of the motor). You may want to extrude a 70.0. you also use relations to constrain the electronics support foundation (rectangular shaped protrusion) a constant distance from the back surface of the base feature. 3. In addition.

0-diameter hole feature to the back of the motor to use for the motor shaft. Save the model and clear the window by erasing the part.0 wall thickness is the key to these selections. You will use that for a bolt flange. 7.0-diameter front protrusion feature to the model.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .0wall thickness at the back of the motor. Assign it a 60. place the electronics support foundation a distance of 7. To follow the design intent. For University Use Only . as shown in Section A-A. Add a 15. as well as what type of feature you create. Regenerate the part and test the relation by modifying the depth dimension of the base feature.NOTES Figure 3: Electronics Support Foundation 4. Add the 100. Tips & Techniques: You should pay careful attention to your selection or creation of a datum plane for the section. The 5. Remember to change the dimension back to the original depth value of 90. 6. Write a relation to cause the size of the electronics support (base feature) to change when the base feature depth changes.00-diameter and leave a 5. 8. Add a cut feature to the model so that you can remove material to receive an armature.5 away from the surface of the cylindrical base feature. 5.

Create a part named lower_housing.NOTES SECTION 2: Creating the Lower Housing Part According to the design intent of the lower housing part. the revolved cut must remain a specific distance from the side surfaces of the base feature so that the model maintains a specific wall thickness.prt. the support feature and flange feature should change as well. You may want to extrude a 120diameter semicircle to a blind depth of 80. 3. In addition. Create the first solid feature.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-5 . if the diameter dimensions of the base support changes. Create a flange to bolt this part to another component in an assembly. Figure 4: Lower Housing Part 1. give the flange feature dimensions of 15 x 4.) For University Use Only . As shown in the following figure. create the feature with an open section. 2.1 (Hint: Using the power of feature-based modeling.

Sketch the feature on the central datum plane and extrude the feature in both directions. Figure 6: Lower Housing Base Support For University Use Only . as shown in the two following figures.NOTES Figure 5: Lower Housing Flange 4.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Add the base support feature to the model.

NOTES Figure 7: Lower Housing Base Support Section Note: In this figure. Add a revolved cut feature to the model as shown in the following figure. the sketched centerline is aligned to the silhouette edge of the cylindrical surface of the base feature. Regardless of how the base feature changes in depth.5. Figure 8: Lower Housing Revolved Cut For University Use Only . 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-7 . the wall thickness should remain 2.

save the model and erase the part from memory. Figure 9: Lower Housing Cut 7. Add a 30-diameter hole feature at the rear of the housing as shown in the Lower Housing dimensions at the beginning of this section.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES 6. For University Use Only . After you have finished. as shown in the following figure. Cut away part of the front housing.

2. Create a solid feature by extruding the outline of the snap ring.NOTES SECTION 3: Creating the Snap Ring Part The snap ring part is purchased directly from a supplier.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-9 .5mm Figure 11: Snap Ring Section For University Use Only . so it does not need a flexible design. You can create it with only two features. Create a part named snap_ring. Figure 10: Snap Ring Dimensions 1. The part has a thickness of 1.prt. as shown in the following figure.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . save and erase the model. Figure 12: Snap Ring Rounds For University Use Only . After you have finished. Add a 2-radius simple edge round as indicated. Round these edges.NOTES 3.

You use a swept feature to create a portion of the model geometry that represents the housing. you create a blend feature to incorporate the widening characteristic of the discharge housing. Make the trajectory of the sweep a line and arc. the diameter of the base feature relates to all the other features. Extrude on both sides of the sketching plane so that you can use the same sketching plane for the trajectory of the discharge housing. Extrude a 120-diameter semicircle to a depth of 80.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-1 1 .NOTES SECTION 4: Creating the Upper Housing Part According to the design intent of the upper housing part. Use a swept protrusion with the Free Ends attribute to create a portion of the housing discharge as shown in the first following figure. Create a part named upper_housing. To complete the housing discharge geometry. 2. giving it a For University Use Only . you can avoid having to create an additional datum plane later. 3. By extruding the base feature on both sides of the sketching plane. Figure 13: Upper Housing Dimensions 1. centering the sweep about the base feature.prt. You place the discharge on the model symmetrically back-to-front.

Trajectory Section Figure 14: Completed Sweep Trajectory Start point Figure 15: Sweep Trajectory Section For University Use Only . regardless of the diameter of the base feature. and assigning a radius of 100 to the arc.NOTES distance of 81. Ensure that the sweep remains attached to the base feature at this location. Locate the start point of the trajectory at the end of the line (notice the centerlines in the third following figure). Create the cross-section as a rectangle. by aligning the endpoint of the arc to both the cylindrical and planar surfaces of the base feature (see the second following figure).5 from the end of the line to the center of the housing.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

Create Section 1 of the blend using the edge of the sweep. For University Use Only . Use only two sections with a depth of 57.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-1 3 .5 for Section 2. Create a straight parallel blend to complete the discharge of the housing. (Hint: Use a centerline to denote symmetry in Sketcher).NOTES Centerlines (provided by system) Figure 16: Sweep Section 4.

edge chain round with a radius of 15.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Create a simple.NOTES Figure 17: Blend Sections 5. Figure 18: Blend Complete 6. For University Use Only . Your part should look as shown in the following figure. Your part should look like the following figure.

Create another simple edge round with a radius of 5. Add a 04. as shown in the previous figure.1-thick bolting flange. To improve airflow. create a simple edge round with a radius value of 40. 10. Remove these two surfaces as references: the end surface of the discharge diffuser (planar surface of the blended feature). Specify a value of 2. and the bottom flat surface of the first solid feature.NOTES Pick this edge for the tangent chain of the 40 radius Pick this edge for the 5 radius Figure 19: Upper Housing Rounds 7. Make this feature similar to the flange on the motor part. As references. as shown in the following figure. Create a shell feature. Remove two hidden surfaces for the shell feature. pick the edges where the swept protrusion intersects the first solid feature. For University Use Only . Figure 20: Shell References 9. 8.5 for the shell thickness.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-1 5 .

create a datum axis. If an axis exists in the model. Make a 97.NOTES 11. If the model does not have an axis. create a coaxial hole. Note: To create a datum axis choose Insert . Datum . You will learn more about datum axis in a later chapter. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-1 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Thru Cylinder and select the cylindrical surface of the base protrusion.5-diameter cut in the front of the housing. Flange Hole Detail Figure 21: Upper Housing Flange and Cut 12. as shown in the following figure. A x i s. Make a 30-diameter hole in the back of the housing.

NOTES Figure 22: Upper Housing 13.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-1 7 . After you have finished. Add a straight hole. save the model and erase it from memory. For University Use Only . as shown in Detail A of the Upper Housing dimensions at the beginning of this section.

you modify the parts.NOTES CREATING ASSEMBLIES To complete the parts for these assemblies. Note: You should attempt to use the models that you completed from the previous project lab. you must fully constrain all part models into the assembly. The motor part must be placed as the first component.asm. you also start creating production drawings and assemblies. create new features. you can either use the models that you created previously or the models that are stored in a library which reflect the model at the end of the previous project.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-1 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . and drawing files. The stored models are indicated in parenthesis ( ). you only change the motor part in Part mode. Although the models are not complete. For University Use Only . Figure 23: Exploded View of Completed Motor Assembly 1. When creating these assemblies and production drawings. assembly. and add relations in both Part and Assembly modes. Create an assembly named motor. As you complete this project. In this portion of the project. SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Assembly In keeping with the design intent of the motor assembly. you can observe the associativity between the part.

Assemble the motor shaft part (beta_shaft. 5. After placing it in the assembly. turn off the datum planes to make it easier to place the remaining component. For University Use Only .prt) in a separate window. as shown in the following figure. 3. Create another snap ring groove in the shaft so that it does not slide into the motor.prt) to the default assembly datum planes. Assemble the motor part you created in the previous project lab (or beta_motor. Figure 24: Motor Shaft Assembled into Motor Align inside surface of revolved cut of motor shaft with back surface of motor.NOTES 2. Pattern the first snap ring groove to create a second one 141.prt) into the assembly (see the following two figures). Retrieve the motor shaft part (beta_shaft. Figure 25: Alignment References for Motor Shaft 4.8 from the leader.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-1 9 .

Open the motor assembly. Turn the datum planes back on. Note that the snap ring groove now appears in the shaft. Save and close the shaft part model. For University Use Only .prt) to the motor part.prt (beta_ring. Only create parent child references between the motor part and the cover.NOTES Figure 26: Patterning the Groove 6. 10. 8. Create an assembly pattern to assemble the second snap ring into the assembly using “ref pattern. Assemble the motor cover (beta_cover. Assemble snap_ring.prt) into the shaft groove (revolved cut) of motor shaft.” 11. 7.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-2 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 9.

NOTES Figure 27: Motor Assembly 12.5 and Regenerate.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-2 1 . Change the distance to 127. 13. For University Use Only . Modify the offset of the patterned grove in the motor shaft part (beta_shaft.prt). Save the assembly. Note that the patterned snap ring groove is positioned too far down on the shaft.

To prepare the motor for mounting holes. save the model and close the window. When you have finished. When prompted for the dimensioning scheme. create a set of holes in the motor to match the ones that you are going to create in the cover. Create this hole first Figure 28: Radial Pattern of Holes in the Motor For University Use Only . You can work concurrently between assemblies and parts in Pro/ENGINEER. Add a hole at an angle using radial placement. 2. use a radial dimension. 1. Create a radial pattern using three instances.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-2 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .prt). Open the motor part (beta_motor.NOTES SECTION 2: Concurrent Design of the Motor Housing At this point in the design process the motor housing and most other assembly components have not been completed.

create the hole in lower housing and pattern it in Assembly mode. 1. In the next task.asm.prt) to the three default assembly datum planes. Create these features using the Modify in Assembly mode. Modifying the part at assembly level. Create a straight hole on the flange with the dimensioning scheme shown in the following figure. Figure 29: Hole Dimension For University Use Only .prt (beta_lower. 3. Note: Do not exit the FEATURE menu after creating the hole. As you place components into the assembly. Create an assembly named blower.NOTES SECTION 3: Creating the Blower Assembly According to the design intent of this assembly. you use the lower housing as the base component and assemble everything to it.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-2 3 . 2. you will find that several features are missing. Assemble lower_housing. you use Pattern from the same menu. The lower housing was created without any holes in the mounting flange.

5 to 65. Mirror plane Mirror protrusion and holes Figure 30: Mirror References 6. Select the lower housing. In the next task. According to the design intent. Mod Part . Pattern the hole for a total of four (4) instances including the original. then choose Feature . 7. Change the dimension for the blower fins from 73. Note: Do not exit the FEATURE menu after creating the pattern. View the obvious interference between lower housing and blower by shading the model. For University Use Only . you use Copy from the same menu. If you exited the FEATURE menu. Fully constrain the component by mating the flange surfaces. Offset from this surface for the blower . Assemble the blower that part you completed in the “Patterns and Feature Copying” lesson. 5.) Use a mate offset command with an offset value of 1 to place it with respect to the back of the lower housing. (If you did not finish the model.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-2 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Exit the part modification menus. choose Modify . Assemble the upper housing part (beta_upper. use the part called beta_blower in the current directory.prt) to the lower housing.0 and regenerate the part. 8.NOTES 4. and aligning the front faces on both components. aligning the central axis. you should mirror the flange along with the pattern of holes to the other side of the model (as shown in the following figure).

Mirror to create the bolt flange and holes on the other side of the base feature. Note that the assembly now reflects the changes that you made in Part mode. 11. Create the four holes by patterning them with an increment of 20. Activate the assembly window. Save the part file and close the window.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-2 5 . For University Use Only . Mirror protrusion and holes. 10. Save the assembly and erase the window. Use Copy . Figure 31: Upper Housing Copy Command 12. The upper housing does not have a pattern of mounting holes on the flange.NOTES 9. Open the part so that you can make the changes in Part mode in its own window.

Orient it to a side view of the motor model using the default datum planes. Add the back projected view. Add the front projected view.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-2 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . In the drawing. 5. you set up the drawing views only. 4. you now begin creating the production drawings. 1.NOTES SECTION 4: Creating the Motor Part Drawing Although you have not completely finished the motor part. In this portion of the project. Add the first general view. For University Use Only . FOURTH VIEW FIFTH VIEW SIXTH VIEW SECOND VIEW FIRST VIEW THIRD VIEW Figure 32: Placement of Views for Motor Drawing 3.prt) with the drawing. 2. you do the detailing later. the views and dimensions update with changes to the part model regardless of whether you made the changes in Part. labeled as the second view in the previous figure. or Drawing mode.prt (beta_motor. labeled as the third view in the previous figure.drw. Create a drawing named motor. Assembly. Use No Scale to allow Pro/ENGINEER to determine the scale of the drawing. Use a C-size sheet and associate motor.

Change the display mode of the remaining views to No Hidden. it remains at that setting even if you change the Environment setting. change the display mode to Hidden line . Add sixth view as a general view with a scale of 0. 10. 8. 7. third. 9. Place the first general view. 12. Change the display mode of the views. For the first.ASM model to the drawing using the dialog box. 11. Choose No Scale . Add the cross-section view. FOURTH VIEW SECOND VIEW THIRD VIEW FIRST VIEW Figure 33: Placement of Views for the Motor Assembly Drawing 14. Note: Once you set a view using Display Mode .75. No Disp Tan. labeled as the fifth view in the previous figure.drw. 13.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-2 7 . labeled as the fourth view in the previous figure. For University Use Only . Use a C-size sheet and associate the MOTOR. and fifth views. Save the drawing. Tan Phantom .NOTES 6. Create a drawing named motor_asm. Add the top projected view.

NOTES 15. 17. 16. save the model and erase all. For University Use Only . When you have finished. Place the fourth projection view.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-2 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Place the third projection view. No Disp Tan. Change the display mode of all of the views to No Hidden. 18. Place the second projection view.

Figure 34: Cover Modifications For University Use Only . analyzing mass properties for individual parts and whole assemblies. and add cooling slots to the top of the cover.NOTES INTERROGATING YOUR MODELS For this project. you continue developing the models according to the original design intent. According to the design intent. you must create tabs to mount the cover to the motor part. The cover part is incomplete. and investigating interference between components. you place the blower subassembly into the motor assembly.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-2 9 . You also write relations to prevent interference between components. After completing these tasks. as shown in the following figure. You do this by adding features.

Pattern the slot for a total of seven (7) instances. The second protrusion was originally sketched on the inside of the base feature. Reorder the cut and pattern after the first protrusion. and round on top of the base feature. 5. For University Use Only . Note in the following figure. To make it easier to create the slotted cuts representing cooling slots.NOTES SECTION 1: Designing the Cover Part 1. 4. suppress the protrusion.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-3 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Add the first slot. Open the cover part. Resume the suppressed features. as shown in Detail C of the cover modifications. and note the difference on the model. 6. the system removed the underside of the small cylindrical boss when you added the cooling fins. Figure 35: Cover Part 2. including the original. 3. hole.

0. For University Use Only . Sketch the open section shown in the following figure. For the horizontal or vertical reference plane. Extrude to a depth of 5.NOTES Material is removed due to feature order. use an internal datum at an angle.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-3 1 . Figure 36: X-Section of Cover Before Reorder Reorder leaves material in place. Add a protrusion that you can pattern rotationally. Figure 37: X-Section of Cover after Reorder 7. You can then use the associated angle to pattern later.

Make a total of three instances. Pattern the leader tab.NOTES Open section Figure 38: Sketching open section Angle from Make Datum Cylindrical surface for axis Figure 39: Rotational Pattern 8. Create a co-axial straight hole on the leader tab. Make the diameter 7. Reference pattern the datum axis. For University Use Only . incrementing the angle by 120 degrees. 9.5. 10. Create a datum axis through the cylindrical surface of the leader tab. including the original.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-3 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 11.

When you have finished.NOTES Figure 40: Cover Before Reference Pattern of Holes 12. Reference pattern the straight hole. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-3 3 . save the model.

Suppress all features. In this section of the project. you create a support foundation on the cylindrical base feature.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-3 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 3.prt). For University Use Only .NOTES SECTION 2: Completing the Motor Part You have now determined the final design of the base support for the motor part. as shown in the following figure (Hint: Use a section that will not fill the central hole when it is resumed. except for the first solid protrusion and the default datum planes. Add a feature for the motor foundation. 2. Open the motor part (gamma_motor. Figure 41: Changes to the Motor Part 1. An open section will also work).

Figure 43: Side Cut 6. Mirror the patterned cut features that are on the side of the electronics foundation to the other side. 5. save the model and erase all. Resume all suppressed features.NOTES Figure 42: Motor Foundation 4. as shown in Detail A of the changes to be made to the motor part. After you have finished. For University Use Only . including the original.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-3 5 . Pattern the cut to include four (4) instances. Create a cut on the side of the electronics foundation.

you also create a Bill of Materials (BOM) and calculate the mass properties of the components in the assembly. Open blower.prt) blade from 65 depth to 73.5. Toggle the results of the models by clicking on the arrows in the dialog box.asm (gamma_blower. 2. Use the Model Analysis… option in the Analysis pulldown menu. Choose the defaults shown in the following figure. In addition. you measure interference and create an assembly relation to prevent the blower part from interfering with the other components. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-3 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Select Global Interference from the Type drop-down list in the dialog box. Regenerate the assembly. Change the height of the blower parts (gamma_blower.NOTES SECTION: 3: Completing the Blower Assembly To finish the assembly.asm). Measure the interference between the members of the blower assembly. Toggle between Figure 44: Modal Analysis Dialog Box For University Use Only . 3.

6. 7. Distance and selecting the surfaces shown in the previous figure. Explode the assembly model so that you can see inside the model. At the current values the distance is equal to 75 – (5 + 2. Click Modify . Modify the blade height again on the blower so it will fit within the lower housing of the model. Select these two surfaces Select this surface to define the normal direction Figure 45: Exploding the Assembly 5.NOTES 4.5 + 5) or 62.5. For University Use Only . Measure . Develop a relation that drives the blower to always be centered within the lower housing by driving the offset value. as shown in the following figure. Remember the distance value. Use the parameters shown in the next figure. Measure the distance from the back inside surface of the blower to the front inside surface of the blower using Analysis. Determine the distance that can be used for the blower. Mod Explode to change the position of the blower using a normal plane.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-3 7 . Change the blade length to be the distance you just measured minus the thickness of the top and base of the blower and a clearance.

This intent was captured by driving the revolved cut off the dimension of 2.5 (shown as d8:0. Create a number parameter in the lower housing part. 9. and d9:0 in the previous figure) from all the edges of the surface of the model.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-3 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . you must control the wall thickness. Open the lower housing (or the gamma_lower. Note that the lower housing part does not have any dimensions that control the inside dimension of the interior opening.prt) part in a sub-window. Write a relation that is equal to the length of the cut (cut_length = d1 – (d8+ d10)). d10:0. Choose Relations and pick the revolved cut and base protrusion to show their symbolic dimensions.NOTES BLOWER PART LOWER_HOUSING PART Figure 46: Symbolic Dimensions for Assembly Relations 8. Remember to use symbolic dimensions. Enter the parameter name in the relation to automatically create a number parameter in the model. According to the design intent. 10. For University Use Only .

to automatically create the parameter height.prt) and close the window.63e-9 tonne/mm3 for steel) 17. For University Use Only . depending on the order in which you added the relations. Activate the assembly window again. Drive the offset of the blower model within the lower housing so that they are equally offset.) 16. Open the blower part (or gamma_blower. you may have to regenerate twice. Regenerate the model. Save lower_housing.prt (or the gamma_lower. Use the Info menu to create a BOM. Add the following relation.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-3 9 . (example 7. 12. Click Analysis > Model Analysis to calculate the mass properties of the assembly. When you have finished. Save the blower and close the window. Create another parameter in the blower model that represents the overall height of the blower including the base.height:2)/2.prt) in another window. Check the message area to see if the system displayed a warning. Enter a relation similar to d0:1 = (cut_length:0 . 14.NOTES 11. (Hint: Use Sort R e l s. 13. blade and top. height = d1+d9+d18. Add the density values of your choice to the components. save the model. 15.

Add an alignment constraint. and the appropriate axis on the motor.” For University Use Only . the system places you into the Resolve Environment because component references are missing.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-4 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .asm (or gamma_motor.NOTES SECTION 4: Completing the Motor Assembly In this portion of the project. Pick the axis on the first hole of the tabs on the cover. Model Tree Setup .asm) into motor. Assemble blower. 4. Change the column display of the Model Tree to show Status and FeatID. While suppressing components. you complete the motor assembly by constraining the blower assembly into the motor assembly. You also examine the difference between blanking layers in an assembly and suppressing components using the Model Tree tool. Open motor. Redefine the component constraints of the cover so that the mount holes align with the motor holes. Use your own discretion when choosing the constraints. Create a layer at the top-level assembly called “base_comp. 2. List suppressed components by choosing View . 3.asm). and Item Display.asm (gamma_blower. Figure 47: Model Tree for Motor Assembly 5.asm (gamma_motor. 1.asm).

Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-4 1 . Unblank the BASE_COMP layer. Figure 48: Set Display Dialog Box Note: Note that the motor part is no longer visible in the working window. Set all of the components (not the sub-assemblies) of the motor part to the BASE_COMP layer. However. 7. For University Use Only . Blank the BASE_COMP layer.NOTES 6. Suppress the motor component. Note: Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to select an option for the child components. 8. you cannot reroute or redefine them because they all reference the base component of the assembly. as shown in the following figure. 9. 10. but it is still listed in the Model Tree with the status of Regenerated. Suspend all child components.

frozen. 12. select Quick Fix and Freeze for all of the components. Note that all frozen components automatically update in the Model Tree. To exit the Resolve Environment. Once you have exited the Resolve Environment. another component causes you to remain in the Resolve Environment because it is also missing references. The system places you into the Resolve Environment because the child components have missing references. This action causes the assembly to fail. 13. review the suppressed. For University Use Only . it only suspends components in place until the next regeneration. and regenerated components listed in the Status column of the Model Tree. which in this situation occurs as soon as you choose Done/Return.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-4 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Note: Suspend is a temporary action. 11. Save the model and erase all components. Resume the motor part. As soon as the system freezes one component.

prt (delta_motor. and drawings. assemblies. 4. 1. Change the thickness of the front flange to 15. Create three sketched holes using a radial placement. you increase the width of the front flange of the motor part and change the holes in the flange. 3. Open motor. you review the associativity between all three modes of Pro/ENGINEER. Delete the three holes on the front flange.NOTES COMPLETING THE PROJECT You are now ready to complete the project by finishing the parts.prt). Front flange Figure 49: Changes to Motor Part SECTION 1: Developing the Motor Part According to the design intent.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-4 3 . For University Use Only . After documenting the motor part and motor assembly in production drawings. 2. You make these changes in Part mode. The sketched section is detailed in the next figure.

NOTES Figure 50: Sketched Hole Section Figure 51: The Completed Holes 5. For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-4 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Save the model and close the window.

For University Use Only . 1. you strengthen the cylindrical wall of the base feature by creating some ribs with draft features attached to them. Use the neutral plane as the reference plane. Build a rib between the cylindrical base feature and the foundation base.NOTES SECTION 2: Finishing the Lower Housing According to the design intent.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-4 5 . and Constant . Open lower_housing. Accept the default attributes of Neutral Plane . See the figure below for dimensions. parallel to the base surfaces. Create a draft feature on the two parallel sides of the rib. Single sketched line Datum offset dimension Figure 52: Rib Dimensions 2. Enter [ -10] as the draft angle. No Split. Extract the body of the part from a mold. Create a neutral plane through the top edge of the rib.prt (delta_lower.prt). and use Make Datum to create an offset datum as the sketching plane taking care of the offset direction.

Use Move and select the attribute of Dependent .00 4. Mirror plane Copy these ribs with the draft.NOTES Draft surfaces Figure 53: References for Draft Feature (surfaces meshed for clarity) 3. After you have finished this task. Copy the rib and draft features to create two supports.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-4 6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Figure 54: References for Copy of Rib and Draft Features For University Use Only . redefine the draft angle to -10 degrees. Mirror the ribs and draft features to the other side of the part. Translate the features with reference to the front of the model by a distance of 3. If the mirroring operation fails because you cannot construct the geometry. save the model.

save the drawing and close the window. 4.drw (delta_motor_asm. Open motorasm. The system cannot place the cover because you deleted the holes from the motor part earlier. 3. you must detail them. most of the dimensions exist at the component level. Use the Quick Fix option to redefine the placement constraints. Detail the drawing as shown in the following figure. 5.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-4 7 . you modify the feature dimensions to show the full associativity of all of the models. 1.NOTES SECTION 3: Completing the Drawing To complete the motor assembly and part drawings. Notice how For University Use Only .drw (delta_motordrw. Read the prompt in the resolve window.drw if you did not complete the motor part or drawing from the previous project lab). Keep in mind that most of the dimensions were created in Drawing mode. The system automatically places you into the Resolve Environment. In the part drawing all of the dimensions are feature dimensions. and add the ISO view in the corner. 2. After detailing the motor drawing. In the assembly drawing. Change the missing reference for the assembly to the axis of the sketched hole that you created earlier. Figure 55: Assembly Drawing. Because the assembly dimensions assist in describing the part.drw). After you have finished the task. the only assembly dimensions are those that you use for offset constraints. they were created in Drawing mode. Open motor.

NOTES the features you added to the motor part have automatically been added to the drawing. Add additional views. Figure 56: The Original Motor Drawing 6. Detail the drawing according to the next two figures. change the default scale to 0. When you have finished.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-4 8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . save the model.7. Figure 57: Sheet 1 of the Motor Drawing For University Use Only . and move the additional views to an added sheet on the drawing.

NOTES Figure 58: Sheet 2 of the Motor Drawing 7. Figure 59: Pattern Axis Circle For University Use Only . Then show the axis of the patterned holes. Notice that the axis circle does not appear around the patterned holes on the flange.Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-4 9 . Change the setup file in the drawing so that radial_pattern_axis_circle is set to YES .

prt) foundation in the drawing so that its depth is 7. Figure 61: The Completed Base For University Use Only . Modify the dimensions of the motor part (delta_motor. Add another protrusion to cap of the base with the dimensions shown in the following figure.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e B-5 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .5.NOTES 8. as shown in the preceding figure. Copy this protrusion translated from this surface Figure 60: The Modified Base 9. Create a dependant copy of the base using the move option translated 60 units from the surface. Retrieve the motor part into session and examine the changes to the part. Regenerate the model.

Commercial Use Prohibited Appendix B P a g e B-5 1 . Erase the models from memory and close Pro/ENGINEER.asm) and examine the changes to the assembly. and parts by saving the assembly drawing. assembly. 11.NOTES 10. Finally. retrieve motor drawing and notice how the changes are reflected. Congratulations! For University Use Only . Save the drawing. Open the motor assembly (delta_motor. 12.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

(1&< (YDOXDWRU .(1&< (YDOXDWRU DVVHVVPHQW 2EMHFWLYHV $IWHU FRPSOHWLQJ WKLV PRGXOH \RX ZLOO EH DEOH WR • • • 6WDUW 3UR).Q WKLV PRGXOH \RX OHDUQ KRZ WR FRPSOHWH D 3UR).&.Commercial Use Prohibited - $SSHQGL[ 8VLQJ WKH 3UR).For University Use Only .&.(1&< (YDOXDWRU DQG ORJ LQ &RPSOHWH DVVLJQHG DVVHVVPHQWV 9LHZ \RXU DVVHVVPHQW UHVXOWV 3DJH & .&.

127(6 7(&+12/2*<%$6(' /($51.1* # 37& 37& 7HFKQRORJ\EDVHG /HDUQLQJ 6ROXWLRQV 7%/6.

&.&. DUH LQWHQGHG WR FRPSOHPHQW RXU LQVWUXFWRUOHG WUDLQLQJ 7%/6 DUH DQ LPSRUWDQW DGMXQFW WR WUDGLWLRQDO LQVWUXFWRUOHG WUDLQLQJ EHFDXVH • 7KH SUHYDOHQFH RI ³YLUWXDO WHDPV´ LQ PRVW FRPSDQLHV KDV OHG WR GLVWULEXWHG ZRUNJURXSV WKDW UHTXLUH ³MXVWLQWLPH´ WUDLQLQJ² XVXDOO\ LQ PRUH WKDQ RQH ORFDWLRQ VLPXOWDQHRXVO\ (PSOR\HHV H[SHFW KLJKTXDOLW\ ³HOHDUQLQJ´ WR EH DYDLODEOH DORQJ ZLWK PRVW DGYDQFHG SURGXFW GHVLJQ WRROV VXFK DV 3UR(1*.(1&< (YDOXDWRU LV GHVLJQHG WR DGGUHVV D JURZLQJ GHPDQG IURP RXU FXVWRPHUV IRU D WRRO WKDW FDQ DFFXUDWHO\ DVVHVV WKH VNLOOV RI WKH 37& SURGXFW XVHUV :H IRXQG WKDW ERWK XVHUV DQG WKHLU PDQDJHUV ZDQW WR PHDVXUH SURILFLHQF\ For University Use Only .(1&< (YDOXDWRU • • 3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ :HE/HVVRQV 3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ :HE&RXUVHV 3UR).(1&< (YDOXDWRU 7KH 3UR).&.&.Commercial Use Prohibited 3DJ H &  $SSHQG L[ & .Q WRGD\ V ZHEHQDEOHG HFRQRP\ PRVW SURGXFW GHYHORSPHQW FRPSDQLHV ZDQW WR WDNH DGYDQWDJH RI QHZ WHFKQRORJ\ WR LQFUHDVH SURGXFWLYLW\ DQG UHVSRQG WR G\QDPLF PDUNHW FRQGLWLRQV 6LPXOWDQHRXVO\ ZRUNIRUFH WUDLQLQJ PXVW UHPDLQ FXUUHQW ZLWK WKH QHZ WHFKQRORJ\ 37& 7HFKQRORJ\ EDVHG /HDUQLQJ 6ROXWLRQV DUH GHVLJQ WR KHOS \RX DFKLHYH WKLV JRDO 7KH 37& 7%/6 SURGXFW SRUWIROLR FRQVLVWV RI WKUHH NH\ FRPSRQHQWV • 3UR).1((5 (PSOR\HHV H[SHFW DQG QHHG RSSRUWXQLWLHV WR OHDUQ QHZ VNLOOV ERWK WR PDLQWDLQ H[LVWLQJ SURILFLHQFLHV DQG DOVR IRU SURIHVVLRQDO JURZWK 7LPH FRQVWUDLQWV ZKLFK DUH RIWHQ PRUH UHVWULFWLYH WKDQ EXGJHWDU\ OLPLWDWLRQV RIWHQ GLFWDWH ZKHWKHU RQH FDQ SDUWLFLSDWH LQ WUDLQLQJ RSSRUWXQLWLHV 7KH DELOLW\ WR SDUWLFLSDWH LQ WUDLQLQJ GXULQJ XQFRQYHQWLRQDO KRXUV DQG IURP WKH XVHU¶V GHVNWRS FDQ EH D PDMRU EHQHILW • • • .(1&< (9$/8$725 %\ XVLQJ 37&¶V 3UHFLVLRQ /HDUQLQJ PHWKRGRORJ\ GXULQJ WKH FODVV \RX FDQ DVVHVV \RXU FRPSUHKHQVLRQ RI WKH FRXUVH PDWHULDOV ZLWK WKH 3UR).

&.127(6 7KH 3UR).W KHOSV PDQDJHUV XQGHUVWDQG KRZ WKH\ FDQ RSWLPL]H WHDP GHYHORSPHQW DQG DOVR PD[LPL]H WKHLU WUDLQLQJ EXGJHW UHWXUQRQ LQYHVWPHQW 52.(1&< (YDOXDWRU HQDEOHV XVHUV WR XQGHUVWDQG ZKHUH WKH\ FDQ LPSURYH WKHLU RZQ DELOLWLHV .

$ 7KH 3UR).com/services/edserv/proficiency.(1&< (YDOXDWRU )RU PRUH LQIRUPDWLRQ SOHDVH YLVLW www. (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &  .& .Commercial Use Prohibited 3 UR ) .(1&< (YDOXDWRU GHYHORSPHQW SURFHVV LV EDVHG RQ WKH IROORZLQJ • • • 7KH TXHVWLRQV DQG SHUIRUPDQFH SUREOHP H[HUFLVHV DUH UHODWHG GLUHFWO\ WR WKH VRIWZDUH IHDWXUHV DQG IXQFWLRQV 7KH DVVHVVPHQW JUDGLQJ DOJRULWKP LV DXWRPDWHG WKHUH LV QR VXEMHFWLYH FRPSRQHQW WR WKH JUDGLQJ SURFHVV $Q REMHFWLYH WKLUGSDUW\ UHYLHZ DQG DSSURYDO SURFHVV IROORZLQJ VWULFW JXLGHOLQHV IRU HPSOR\HH HYDOXDWLRQ $ OHWWHU IURP D WKLUGSDUW\ ODZ ILUP GHOLYHULQJ WKHLU RSLQLRQ RQ WKH H[WHQW WR ZKLFK WKH 3UR).&.&. $66(660(17 &5.(1&< (YDOXDWRU FRPSOLHV ZLWK 8QLWHG 6WDWHV (TXDO 2SSRUWXQLW\ (PSOR\PHQW ODZV DQG UHJXODWLRQV LV DYDLODEOH RQ RXU ZHE VLWH 0RUH LQIRUPDWLRQ LV DYDLODEOH IURP WKH 7%/6 JDWHZD\ SDJH 7KH 7%/6 JDWHZD\ SDJH LV GLVSOD\HG ZKHQ \RX ORJLQ WR 3UR).&.7(5.(1&< (YDOXDWRU LV GHVLJQHG WR IDLUO\ DQG DFFXUDWHO\ DVVHVV WKH XVHUV¶ VNLOOV 2XU DVVHVVPHQW PHWKRGRORJ\ PHHWV RU H[FHHGV LQGXVWU\ VWDQGDUGV IRU REMHFWLYH DVVHVVPHQW WRROV 7KH 3UR).ptc.htm For University Use Only .&.

(1&< (YDOXDWRU FRPSOHWH DQ DVVHVVPHQW DQG YLHZ WKH UHVXOWV 0HWKRG .127(6 /$%25$725< 35$&7.ptc.Q WKH EURZVHU W\SH >http://www-ed.&.(5&.Q ([HUFLVH  \RX WDNH DQ (YDOXDWRU DVVHVVPHQW DQG YLHZ WKH UHVXOWV (.6(  &RPSOHWLQJ (YDOXDWRU $VVHVVPHQWV 7DVN  /RJRQ WR 7%/6  .com/Evaluator/@ DGGUHVV DUHD  7KH 7HFKQRORJ\ %DVHG /HDUQLQJ 6ROXWLRQV 7%/6.&$/ *RDO .Q WKLV ODERUDWRU\ \RX VWDUW 3UR).

Commercial Use Prohibited 3DJ H &  $SSHQG L[ & . JDWHZD\ SDJH GLVSOD\V )LJXUH  7%/6 *DWHZD\ 3DJH For University Use Only .

& . (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &  .(1&< (YDOXDWRU $VVHVVPHQWV )LJXUH  7DNLQJ DQ ([DP  6HOHFW 6$03/( (.127(6  6HOHFW WKH 7%/6 /RJRQ LFRQ  $W WKH QH[W VFUHHQ W\SH WKH 8VHU 1DPH DQG 3DVVZRUG SURYLGHG E\ \RXU LQVWUXFWRU LQ WKH DSSURSULDWH ILHOGV DQG WKHQ FOLFN WKH /RJRQ LFRQ 7DVN  7DNH WKH 3UR).(1&< (YDOXDWRU H[DP  <RXU XVHU LQIRUPDWLRQ LV GLVSOD\HG DW WKH WRS RI WKH VFUHHQ 6FUROO GRZQ WR WKH VHFWLRQ ODEHOHG 3UR).Commercial Use Prohibited 3 UR ) .&.&.$0 IURP WKH GURSGRZQ OLVW DQG FOLFN WKH 7DNH ([DP LFRQ  $W WKH ERWWRP RI WKH 86(5 $*5((0(17 VFUHHQ FOLFN $JUHH  7KH ILUVW PXOWLSOH FKRLFH TXHVWLRQ GLVSOD\V For University Use Only .

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ommercial Use Prohibited 3DJ H &  $SSHQG L[ & .&.127(6  7R DQVZHU D TXHVWLRQ VHOHFW WKH FLUFOH QH[W WR WKH GHVLUHG DQVZHU DQG WKHQ FOLFN WKH 6XEPLW IRU *UDGLQJ LFRQ  $QVZHU DOO WKH PXOWLSOH FKRLFH TXHVWLRQV LQ WKH VDPH IDVKLRQ 7DVN  'RZQORDG WKH SHUIRUPDQFHEDVHG WHVW  6HOHFW WKH *R WR 3HUIRUPDQFH%DVHG 4XL]]HV OLQN  5HYLHZ WKH GUDZLQJ RI WKH VKDIW 1RWH WKH OHQJWK RI WKH VKDIW LV UHTXLUHG WR EH 250 7DVN  /RDG WKH VKDIW SDUW LQWR (9$/8$725 IRU JUDGLQJ  . LQGLFDWHV DQ LQFRUUHFW DQVZHU  7R FORVH WKH 7%/6 FOLFN WKH LFRQ For University Use Only .

127(6 02'8/( 6800$5< .(1&< (YDOXDWRU DVVHVVPHQW +RZ WR YLHZ WKH UHVXOWV RI D FRPSOHWHG H[DP For University Use Only . (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &  .&.Commercial Use Prohibited 3 UR ) .& .Q WKLV PRGXOH \RX OHDUQHG WKDW • • +RZ WR WDNH D 3UR).

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

PTC Help includes quick references and detailed information on selected topics. Page D-1 .Commercial Use Prohibited - D Using PTC Help You can use PTC Help to quickly search for Pro/ENGINEER information. Obtain context-sensitive help while performing a task. you will be able to: • • • Start PTC Help. Objectives After completing this module.Appendix For University Use Only . Search for specific information about Pro/ENGINEER.

NOTES PTC HELP OVERVIEW PTC Help is a fully functional help system that is integrated into Pro/ENGINEER. Click Help > Contents and Index from the main menu as shown in the following figure.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e D-2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . Depending on your system speed. allowing access to PTC Help with a click of the mouse Online Tutorials focussed on teaching different aspects of the software Expanded help topics available as special dialog boxes Please visit the PTC Technical Support Online Knowledge Database . and search capabilities. it may take a few seconds to launch the entire help system. PTC Help Features PTC Help offers: • • • • A new help system with a table of contents. which features thousands of Suggested Techniques. and searching capability Context-sensitive help. see the Technical Support Appendix. 1. an index. USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP Launching Help: Four Methods There are four procedures for launching the help system. For more information. Main Menu This is the standard way of accessing the full-blown help system complete with contents. For University Use Only . index.

Figure 2: Contents and Index in PTC Help In the left frame of the window.NOTES Figure 1 Starting PTC Help The Pro/ENGINEER Online Help homepage appears in your web browser window.Commercial Use Prohibited Using PTC Help P a g e D-3 . and by clicking the sub-topics you can access detailed instructions. explanations. you see a list of topics arranged in a tree structure. and tips. For University Use Only . By clicking on each higher level topic. you can access subtopics.

A browser window opens that explains the topic. you will also notice at the lower left there is a “See Also” link which on clicking provides a list of related topics that may be of immediate interest. 2. clicking on the model tree icon in the toolbar launched a browser window that explained the icon functionality. Context-Sensitive Help 1. 3. In addition. For University Use Only . 4.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e D-4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . In the following example.NOTES 2. Click on the right end of the main toolbar. Click on any icon or any part of the Pro/ENGINEER main window about which you want an explanation. Figure 3: Context-Sensitive Help 5.

Click on the right end of the main Pro/ENGINEER toolbar. Click any menu command from the menu manager. 4.Commercial Use Prohibited Using PTC Help P a g e D-5 . You may click on any topic you want to read additionally. 2. Figure 4: The ‘See Also’ List of Topics 3. 5. A TOPIC ROUTER browser window opens with a list of topic links that explain the menu command. Pro/ENGINEER Menu Manager 1.NOTES 6. For University Use Only . Click the topic you want to read. In the following example. 3. clicking on X-Section in the menu manager launched the TOPIC ROUTER browser window with a list of two useful topics.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e D-6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .NOTES Figure 5: Launching Help through Menu Manager 4. Vertical Menu Commands 1. Right-click and hold on a menu command until the GETHELP window appears. Figure 6: Right-Clicking in Menu Manager For University Use Only .

and Using Additional Modules. Figure 7: Four Main Branches in Help System Refer to the following list to find a particular module in the table of contents: Figure 8: Foundation and Additional Modules in Help For University Use Only .NOTES PTC HELP MODULES There are four main branches in the PTC Help table of contents: Welcome. Using Foundation Modules. Pro/ENGINEER Foundation.Commercial Use Prohibited Using PTC Help P a g e D-7 .

Commercial Use Prohibited - .For University Use Only .

In addition to our Technical Support Hotline.Appendix For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - E PTC Global Services: Technical Support PTC Global Services is committed to providing top quality assistance to our customers. Through our Quality Monitoring Program we have demonstrated our commitment to service by achieving Global ISO 9000 Certification for our Technical Support offerings. Page E-1 . we also offer Web-based assistance to fit your individual needs by providing 24 hour / 7 day availability. Objectives After completing this module you will be able to: • • • • Open a Technical Support Call. Navigate the PTC Products Knowledge Base. Register for on-line Technical Support. Find telephone numbers for technical support and services. PTC Global Services is committed to continually improving customer service.

Please use the following format (or download the template from www.htm.com with copen as the e-mail subject.com/support/support.ptc..2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . France.K.. Singapore. Germany. U.S.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e E.NOTES FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE Choose Support from the PTC Home Page www. OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail Send email to cs_ptc@ptc.ptc. or CALLCENTER: Tokyo PHONE: CONFIG_ID: PRODUCT: MODULE: PRIORITY: DESC_BEGIN: description starts NNN NNN-NNNN x-NNNN NNNNNN X XX X description continues description ends DESC_END For University Use Only .htm): FNAME: LNAME: First Name Last Name U.ptc.com or go directly to www.com/cs/doc/copen.

For University Use Only .com/support to open Technical Support calls 24 hours a day. When the call is resolved your data will be deleted by the Technical Support Engineer.com/support/cs_guide/additional.htm. please follow the instructions at: www.ptc. 7 days a week. You may also request a Non-Disclosure Agreement from the Technical Support Engineer. by using the Pro/CALL LOGGER Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support To send data files to PTC Technical Support.Commercial Use Prohibited Customer Support Information P a g e E. The Technical Support Engineer will ask you for the following information when logging a call: • • • • Your PTC software Configuration ID Your name and telephone number The PTC product (module) name Priority of the issue Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web You can use the PTC Web site www.NOTES Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone Call us directly by telephone (refer to the Contact Information page for your Local Technical Support Center). Your data will not be divulged to any third party vendors under any circumstances.3 .ptc.

NOTES Routing Your Technical Support Calls Call Customer question Telephone Call Web Call Tech SupportEngineer creates a call in the database Call is automatically created in the database Investigation Call Back and Investigation Support Engineer solves issue or reports it to Development (SPR) SPR Software Performance Report SPR fixed from Development Software Performance Report (SPR) SPR Verification through Tech.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e E. Support Engineer Update CD to customer For University Use Only .4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .

– Critical software issue that affects immediate work and a practical alternative technique is not available. click Help > About Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited Customer Support Information P a g e E. High – Software issue that does not affect immediate work or a practical alternative technique is available. For University Use Only .5 . Medium REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT Go to www. To find your Pro/ENGINEER Configuration ID.ptc.NOTES Technical Support Call Priorities • • • • • Extremely Critical Critical Urgent – Work stopped – Work severely impacted – Work impacted Not Critical General Information Software Performance Report Priorities • • • Top Priority – Highly critical software issue that is causing a work stoppage. to open the registration form and enter your Configuration ID. Please write down your username and password for future reference.com/support and click Sign-up Online . Complete the information needed to identify yourself as a user with your personal data.

Technical Point of Interest (TPIs). For University Use Only . All FAQs and Suggested Techniques are available in English.6 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . The Software Update Tool allows you to request the latest software updates for any PTC product. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs). and German. Our Online Support Applications controls the status of calls (Call Tracker) and SPRs (SPR Tracker) and adds comments to these. French. contact information such as the customer feedback line and electronic order of software and manuals are available.NOTES ONLINE SERVICES After you have registered. FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE The Technical Support Knowledge Base contains over 18.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e E. You can search our Knowledge Base using a Search-Engine.000 documents. the Technical Support Engineer assigned to your call will be notified automatically. you will have full access to all Online Tools. Technical Application Notes (TANs). Additionally. and Suggested Techniques offer upto-date information about all relevant software areas. If you add a comment.

TPIs are created by Technical Support to document the resolution of common issues reported in actual customer calls.NOTES Terminology used by Technical Support – Technical Application Note provides information about SPRs that may affect more than just the customer originally reporting an issue. TPIs are similar to TANs. Suggested Techniques – Frequently Asked Questions provides answers to many of the most commonly asked questions compiled from the PTC Technical Support database. TPI – Provides step-by-step instructions including screen snapshots. TAN – Technical Point of Interest provides additional technical information about a software product. TANs also may provide alternative techniques to allow a user to continue working.Commercial Use Prohibited Customer Support Information P a g e E. but do not reference an SPR. FAQ For University Use Only .7 . on how to use PTC software to complete common tasks.

go to www.ptc. 1.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e E. You will receive daily e-mail with update information. Figure 1: Knowledge Base Monitor Sign Up For University Use Only . this can help you by upgrading to a new PTC product or to a new release.com/support. 2.NOTES GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION To subscribe to our Knowledge Base Monitor e-mail service. Select the PTC Product or Module for which you want to get information. Click Technical Support > Online Support Applications > Knowledge Base Monitor .8 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . 3.

htm (Support) www.com/support/index.htm (Education) • • cs_ptc@ptc.ptc.com (for opening calls and sending data) cs-webmaster@ptc. These services are available seven days a week.9 . E-mail: • cs-feedback@ptc. Web: • • E-mail: www. 24 hours a day.ptc.com/cs/doc/feedback_nums.NOTES CONTACT INFORMATION PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services.com (for comments or suggestions about the Customer Service Web site) FTP (for transferring files to PTC Technical Support): • ftp.com Technical Support Customer Feedback Line The Customer Feedback Line is intended for general customer service concerns that are not technical product issues.Commercial Use Prohibited Customer Support Information P a g e E.htm For University Use Only .ptc.com/company/contacts/edserv.ptc.com Telephone: • www.

contact the Electronic Services noted in the previous section. Our worldwide coverage ensures telephone access to Technical Support for customers in all time zones and in local languages. PTC has nine integrated Technical Support Call Centers in North America. License Management.NOTES Telephone For assistance with technical issues. and Asia.1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER . and Documentation Requests): Within the United States and Canada: • 800-477-6435 Outside the United States and Canada: • • 781-370-5332 781-370-5513 Maintenance: • 888-782-3774 Education: • 888-782-3773 For University Use Only . Europe. or the Technical Support line as listed in the Phone and Fax Information sections below. North America Phone Information Customer Services (including Technical Support.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e E.

NOTES Europe Phone Information Technical Support Phone Numbers: Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany 0800 29 7542 0800-15-241 (French) 0800-72567 (Dutch) 8001-5593 0800-117092 0800-14-19-52 0180-2245132 49-89-32106-111 (for Pro/MECHANICA® outside of Germany) Ireland Israel Italy Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Portugal South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland 1-800-409-1622 1-800-945-42-95 (All languages including Hebrew) 177-150-21-34 (English only) 800-79-05-33 0800-23-50 0800022-4519 8001-1872 05-05-33-73-69 0800-991068 900-95-33-39 020-791484 0800-55-38-33 (French) 0800-83-75-58 (Italian) 0800-552428 (German) United Kingdom 0800-318677 License Management Phone Numbers: Belgium Denmark Finland Eastern Europe 0800-75376 8001-5593 0800-117-092 44 1252 817 078 For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited Customer Support Information P a g e E.1 1 .

652 39-039-6565-1 34-91-452-01-00 46-8-590-956-00 (Malmo) 46-8-590-956-46 (Upplands Vasby) 41 (0) 1-820-00-80 44-0800-212-565 (toll free within UK) 44-1252-817-140 Asia and Pacific Rim Phone Information Technical Support Phone Numbers: Australia China* Hong Kong India* 1800-553-565 10800-650-8185 (international toll free) 108-657 (manual toll free) 800-933309 000-6517 For University Use Only .NOTES France Germany Ireland Italy Netherlands Norway Portugal Russia Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 0800-14-19-52 49 (0) 89-32106-0 1-800-409-1622 39 (0) 39-65651 0800-022-0543 8001-1872 05-05-33-73-69 44 1252 817 078 900-95-33-39 020-791484 41 (0) 1-8-24-34-44 0800-31-8677 Education Services Phone Numbers: Benelux France Germany Italy Spain/Portugal Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 31-73-644-2705 33-1-69-33-65-50 49 (0) 89-32106-325 39-039-65-65.1 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e E.

MTF8309729 MTF8309752 001-803-65-7250 7-2-48-55-00-35 120-20-9023 1-800-80-1026 0800-44-4376 1800-1-651-0176 65-830-9899 00798-65-1-7078 (international toll free) 080-3469-001 (domestic toll free) 0080-65-1256 (international toll free) 080-013069 (domestic toll free) 001-800-65-6213 *Note: Callers dialing from India or China must provide the operator with The operator will then connect you to the Singapore Technical Support License Management Phone Numbers Japan Hong Kong 81 (0) 3-3346-8280 (852) 2802-8982 Education Services Phone Numbers Australia China 61 2 9955 2833 (Sydney) 61 3 9561 4111 (Melbourne) 86-20-87554426 (GuangZhou) 86-21-62785080 (Shanghai) 86-10-65908699 (Beijing) Hong Kong India 852-28028982 91-80-2267272 Ext.NOTES Indonesia Japan Malaysia New Zealand Philippines Singapore South Korea Taiwan Thailand the respective string: China India Center.#306 (Bangalore) 91-11-6474701 (New Delhi) 91-226513152 (Mumbai) For University Use Only .1 3 .Commercial Use Prohibited Customer Support Information P a g e E.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e E.1 4 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER .8268 03-754 8198 65-8309866 82-2-3469-1080 886-2-758-8600 (Taipei) 886-4-3103311 (Taichung) 886-7-3323211 (Kaohsiung) ELECTRONIC SERVICES Up-to-Date + Information Worldwide ISO 9000 Certification Quality Control System = Maximum Productivity with PTC Products For University Use Only .NOTES Japan Malaysia Singapore South Korea Taiwan 81-3-3346.

For University Use Only .Commercial Use Prohibited - .

20-2 Configuration Files Config. 10-6 Components Analysis Features. 13-8 BOM. 4-9 Extruded Forms. 13-6 Surface Normal Vector. 11-6 Applications. 10-6 Analyzing Effects of Parameter Changes. 11-8 Manipulating. 10-4 Definition.PRO File. 11-8 Parametric Notes. 10-2 Features. 2-5 Models.PRO. 11-6 Customizing. 4-9 Copy Choosing Features. 5-6 Modifying in Sketcher. 11-3 Partial View. 11-5 Templates. 20-2 Editing. 13-7 Options. 21-5 Design Criteria. 21-3 Parent/Child Relationships. 10-6 Motion Analysis. 10-7 Interaction with Data Analysis Tools. 10-8 Optimization. 11-3 Broken View. 10-5 Graph Matching. 13-8 Associativity. 13-8 Modifying. 10-10 User-defined Analysis. 1-5 Behavioral Modeler Achieving Desired Results. 10-8 Feasibility Studies. 13-9 Overview. 10-5 Creating Feature Parameters.INDEX Assemblies Constraining Components. 11-3 Projection. 10-3 Config. 11-3 Full View. 13-2 Under-Constrained Components. 21-2 Assemblies. 20-2 Deleting Files. 2-5 General. 11-3 General. 10-8 Behavioral Modeling Applications. 11-7 Dimensions Drawing Notes. 11-9 Manipulating Views. 5-7 Linear. 10-4 Creating New Measurement Systems. 11-8 Features. 2-3 Drawings Adding New Views. 21-3 Pro/NOTEBOOK. 20-3 Mapkeys. 21-4 Changing. 12-10 Dependency Options. 5-8 Sections. 11-2 Detailed. 2-6 Option Buttons. 13-3 Design Intent. 4-8 Radial. 12-11 Methods. 1-3 Features For University Use Only . 12-8 Customizing Pro/ENGINEER. 11-3 Half View. 2-6 Dimensions Angular. 11-3 Views Auxiliary. 13-2 Placing Components. 11-4 Detailing. 11-2 Revolved. 11-2 Cross Sections. 5-2 Feature-Based Models. 11-7 View Type Menu. 10-2 Objective-Driven Design. 11-2 Creating. 5-5 Display Area. 13-8 Exploded Views. 10-11 Field Points. 5-9 Diameter. 10-4 Smart Models. 20-3 Constraints Sketcher Mode. 13-7 Associativity. 11-9 Driven. 2-10 Design Intent. 11-3 Edge. 20-4 Order of Precedence. 10-12 Sensitivity Analysis. 10-9 Creating Datum Geometry. 21-2 Dialog Boxes.Commercial Use Prohibited INDEX P a g e -1 .

18-2 For University Use Only . 17-3 Information About Features. 18-3 Resolving. 8-4 Parameters Symbols Used to Describe. 17-2 2-D Curves. 2-4 Model Tree. 19-2 Model Info. 20-7 General Usage.Copy To Locations. 2-4 Assemblies. 2-8 Offset Edge. 17-4 Creating Surfaces. 8-5 Tools. 2-10 Saving Your Work. 4-13 Pro/ENGINEER Customizing. 17-6 Layout Mode. 2-2 Adding Mapkeys. 5-3 Default. 7-3 Redefining. 18-2 Regeneration Problems Feature Reorder. 12-8 File Commands Closing Windows. 19-3 Menu Manager. 9-8 Design Intent. 2-10 Deleting Files. 7-6 Insert Mode. 18-2 Resolve Environment. 2-8 Retrieving (Opening). 12-3 Rotational. 9-4 Parametric Features. 20-6 Message Area. 17-8 Blends and Transitions. 19-2 Regeneration Failures. 17-8 Parametric Controls. 2-9 File Types. 2-4 Viewing Information. 1-4 Parametric Relations. 2-4 Sketches. 2-4 Freeform Surfaces Applying to Engineering Models. 19-3 Calculating. 17-7 Geometry Creating in Sketcher Mode. 9-4 Examples. 12-5 Types. 12-2 Options. 7-4 Rerouting. 12-2 Dimensions. 9-6 Part. 4-10 Parallel Blends Creating. 4-6 Help. 18-2 Specifying a Model. 7-5 Resolve Environment Diagnosing Problems. 9-3 Parent Features Modifying. 12-2 Creating. 19-3 ISDX. 17-4 Curves On Surface (COS). 21-2 Macros Mapkeys. 19-3 Measurement. 2-6 Sub-windows. 2-8 Hybrid Modeling. 20-4 Mass Properties. 7-3 Parent/Child Relationships Definitions. 9-2 Design Changes. 7-2 Patterns Benefits of Using. 8-3 Straight and Smooth Attributes. 12-8 Copying. 2-4 Parts. 20-7 Customizing. 7-2 Pick-and-Place Features. 17-4 3-D Curves. 20-4 Mapkeys. 19-2 Regeneration Info. 18-3 Reference Planes. 20-2 Pro/NOTEBOOK. 2-8 Menus. 18-3 Starting. 19-2 Intent Manager. 9-2 Pattern. 7-2 Sketched Features. 21-2 Problems Diagnosing Regeneration Problems. 5-3 Regeneration Model Info. 2-4 Drawings. 12-2 Preferences Sketcher. 12-2 Reference. 2-7. 9-2 Assembly. 4-3 Interference. 7-6 Parent/Child Features. 20-8 Models Multiple Models. 9-5 Feature. 7-5 Resolving. 9-3 Order of Operations.Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e -2 INDEX . 17-6 Style Models.

1-4 Style Creating Style Surfaces. 4-7 Intent Manager. 11-6 Toolbar Customizing. 4-11 Section Analysis. 4-6 Constraints. 5-2 Protrusions. 2-3 Top-Down Design. 14-3 Comparison with Traditional Approaches. 14-2 Use Edge. 4-3 References. 4-11 Points. 4-5 Replacing. 17-2 Introduction. 14-4 Stages. 4-13 Arcs. 14-2 Benefits. 4-4 Mirroring. 2-5 Display Area. 2-10 For University Use Only . 5-2 Defining. 2-2 Dialog Boxes. 2-2 Message Area. 5-3 Solid Modeling Associativity. 4-10 Creating Geometry. 14-4 Characteristics. 18-3 Resolve Environment:. 4-10 User Interface. 4-3 Sketcher Mode. 4-13 Dimensioning. 4-3 Interface Features. 5-2 Sketcher 3-D Sketching. 4-11 Sketching Planes. 2-2 Toolbars. 4-6 Menus. 4-11 Moving. 5-2 Saving Your Work. 4-12 Pop-Up Menus. 20-5 Toolbars. 4-9. 8-2 Templates Drawing Templates:. 4-11 Selecting Sketched Entities. 1-3 Parametric Features. 14-7 Process. 4-2 Lines. 17-9 Revolved Forms. 18-4 Reverse Styling. 1-5 Core Concepts.Commercial Use Prohibited INDEX P a g e -3 . 14-3 Pro/ENGINEER Tools. 2-4 Pro/ENGINEER. 5-5 Trimming. 14-2 Approach. 4-9 Copying. 4-4 Tools. 1-2 Feature-Based Models. 4-14 Circles. 17-9 Features. 2-3 Windows Closing.Undoing Changes. 4-6 Customizing. 4-6 Best Practices. 5-2 Extruded and Revolved Forms. 2-3 Menus. 17-2 Sweeps and Trajectories Creating. 2-9 Sketched Features Cuts.

Commercial Use Prohibited P a g e -2 INDEX .For University Use Only .